owner.ford.com
ford.ca
November 2015
First Printing
Owner’s Manual
Police Interceptor
Litho in U.S.A.
GG1J 19A321 FA
2016 POLICE INTERCEPTOR SEDAN Owner’s Manual
2016 POLICE INTERCEPTOR SEDAN Owner’s Manual
The information contained in this publication was correct at the time of going to print. In the interest of
continuous development, we reserve the right to change specifications, design or equipment at any time
without notice or obligation. No part of this publication may be reproduced, transmitted, stored in a
retrieval system or translated into any language in any form by any means without our written permission.
Errors and omissions excepted.
© Ford Motor Company 2015
All rights reserved.
Part Number: 10/2015 20151005232200
Introduction
About This Manual...........................................7
Symbols Glossary.............................................7
Data Recording..................................................9
California Proposition 65..............................11
Perchlorate.........................................................11
Ford Credit..........................................................11
Replacement Parts
Recommendation........................................11
Special Notices................................................12
Mobile Communications
Equipment.....................................................13
Export Unique Options..................................13
Environment
Protecting the Environment........................14
Child Safety
General Information.......................................15
Installing Child Restraints............................16
Booster Seats..................................................22
Child Restraint Positioning.........................24
Seatbelts
Principle of Operation..................................26
Fastening the Seatbelts...............................27
Seatbelt Warning Lamp and Indicator
Chime.............................................................29
Seatbelt Reminder........................................30
Child Restraint and Seatbelt
Maintenance................................................32
Personal Safety System™
Personal Safety System™..........................33
Supplementary Restraints
System
Principle of Operation..................................34
Driver and Passenger Airbags....................35
Front Passenger Sensing System............36
Side Airbags.....................................................38
Safety Canopy™............................................39
Crash Sensors and Airbag Indicator.........41
Airbag Disposal...............................................45
Keys and Remote Controls
General Information on Radio
Frequencies.................................................46
Remote Control..............................................46
Replacing a Lost Key or Remote
Control............................................................47
Locks
Locking and Unlocking................................48
Interior Luggage Compartment
Release..........................................................50
Security
Anti-Theft Alarm............................................52
Steering Wheel
Adjusting the Steering Wheel....................53
Audio Control...................................................53
Voice Control....................................................53
Cruise Control..................................................54
Information Display Control.......................54
Pedals
Adjusting the Pedals.....................................55
Wipers and Washers
Windshield Wipers........................................56
Windshield Washers.....................................56
Lighting
General Information......................................57
Lighting Control...............................................57
Instrument Lighting Dimmer.....................58
Daytime Running Lamps............................58
Direction Indicators.......................................59
1
Police Interceptor (CPH), enUSA, Edition date: 10/2015, First Printing
Table of Contents
Interior Lamps.................................................59
Windows and Mirrors
Power Windows...............................................61
Exterior Mirrors................................................62
Interior Mirror...................................................63
Sun Visors.........................................................64
Instrument Cluster
Gauges...............................................................65
Warning Lamps and Indicators................66
Audible Warnings and Indicators.............69
Information Displays
General Information......................................70
Information Messages..................................73
Climate Control
Manual Climate Control..............................79
Hints on Controlling the Interior
Climate..........................................................80
Heated Windows and Mirrors.....................81
Cabin Air Filter.................................................82
Seats
Sitting in the Correct Position...................83
Head Restraints..............................................83
Manual Seats..................................................85
Power Seats.....................................................86
Auxiliary Power Points
Auxiliary Power Points..................................87
Storage Compartments
Center Console...............................................88
Overhead Console.........................................88
Starting and Stopping the
Engine
General Information.....................................89
Ignition Switch................................................89
Starting a Gasoline Engine.........................89
Engine Block Heater.......................................91
Fuel and Refueling
Safety Precautions........................................93
Fuel Quality - Gasoline................................94
Fuel Quality - E85..........................................94
Fuel Filler Funnel Location.........................95
Running Out of Fuel......................................95
Refueling...........................................................96
Fuel Consumption.........................................98
Emission Control System...........................99
Transmission
Automatic Transmission...........................102
All-Wheel Drive
Using All-Wheel Drive................................105
Brakes
General Information.....................................112
Hints on Driving With Anti-Lock
Brakes............................................................112
Parking Brake..................................................113
Traction Control
Principle of Operation..................................114
Using Traction Control.................................114
Stability Control
Principle of Operation..................................115
Using Stability Control................................116
Parking Aids
Principle of Operation..................................117
Rear Parking Aid.............................................117
Rear View Camera........................................118
2
Police Interceptor (CPH), enUSA, Edition date: 10/2015, First Printing
Table of Contents
Cruise Control
Principle of Operation..................................121
Using Cruise Control.....................................121
Driving Aids
Blind Spot Information System...............123
Cross Traffic Alert.........................................125
Steering............................................................128
Load Carrying
Rear Loadspace Hatches..........................130
Rear Under Floor Storage..........................130
Load Limit.......................................................130
Towing
Towing a Trailer.............................................138
Recommended Towing Weights............139
Essential Towing Checks...........................140
Transporting the Vehicle............................142
Towing the Vehicle on Four Wheels......142
Driving Hints
Breaking-In......................................................144
Economical Driving......................................144
Driving Through Water................................145
Floor Mats.......................................................145
Roadside Emergencies
Roadside Assistance...................................147
Hazard Warning Flashers..........................148
Fuel Shutoff...................................................148
Jump Starting the Vehicle.........................149
Customer Assistance
Getting the Services You Need................152
In California (U.S. Only)..............................153
The Better Business Bureau (BBB) Auto
Line Program (U.S. Only)......................154
Utilizing the Mediation/Arbitration
Program (Canada Only)........................155
Getting Assistance Outside the U.S. and
Canada.........................................................155
Ordering Additional Owner's
Literature.....................................................156
Reporting Safety Defects (U.S.
Only)..............................................................157
Reporting Safety Defects (Canada
Only)..............................................................157
Fuses
Fuse Specification Chart...........................159
Changing a Fuse...........................................168
Maintenance
General Information....................................170
Opening and Closing the Hood...............170
Under Hood Overview - 2.0L
EcoBoost™.................................................172
Under Hood Overview - 3.5L
Ecoboost™.................................................173
Under Hood Overview - 3.5L Duratec/
3.7L.................................................................174
Engine Oil Dipstick - 2.0L
EcoBoost™.................................................175
Engine Oil Dipstick - 3.5L Duratec/3.5L
Ecoboost™/3.7L.......................................175
Engine Oil Check...........................................175
Oil Change Indicator Reset.......................176
Engine Coolant Check.................................176
Automatic Transmission Fluid Check -
2.0L EcoBoost™......................................180
Automatic Transmission Fluid Check -
3.5L Duratec/3.5L Ecoboost™/
3.7L................................................................180
Brake Fluid Check.........................................184
Power Steering Fluid Check.....................184
Washer Fluid Check.....................................184
Fuel Filter.........................................................185
Changing the 12V Battery..........................185
Checking the Wiper Blades.......................187
Changing the Wiper Blades......................187
Adjusting the Headlamps..........................187
3
Police Interceptor (CPH), enUSA, Edition date: 10/2015, First Printing
Table of Contents
Changing a Bulb...........................................189
Bulb Specification Chart...........................190
Changing the Engine Air Filter.................192
Vehicle Care
General Information....................................193
Cleaning Products........................................193
Cleaning the Exterior...................................193
Waxing..............................................................194
Cleaning the Engine.....................................195
Cleaning the Windows and Wiper
Blades...........................................................195
Cleaning the Interior....................................196
Cleaning the Instrument Panel and
Instrument Cluster Lens........................196
Cleaning Leather Seats..............................197
Repairing Minor Paint Damage................197
Cleaning the Alloy Wheels........................197
Vehicle Storage.............................................198
Wheels and Tires
General Information..................................200
Tire Sealant and Inflator Kit....................200
Tire Care.........................................................206
Using Summer Tires...................................220
Using Snow Chains.....................................220
Tire Pressure Monitoring System...........220
Changing a Road Wheel...........................224
Technical Specifications...........................228
Capacities and Specific-
ations
Engine Specifications - 2.0L
EcoBoost™................................................229
Engine Specifications - 3.5L
Duratec........................................................229
Engine Specifications - 3.5L
Ecoboost™................................................230
Engine Specifications - 3.7L......................231
Motorcraft Parts - 2.0L EcoBoost™......231
Motorcraft Parts - 3.5L Duratec.............233
Motorcraft Parts - 3.5L Ecoboost™......234
Motorcraft Parts - 3.7L...............................235
Vehicle Identification Number................236
Vehicle Certification Label........................237
Transmission Code Designation.............237
Capacities and Specifications - 2.0L
EcoBoost™................................................238
Capacities and Specifications - 3.5L
Duratec.........................................................241
Capacities and Specifications - 3.5L
Ecoboost™................................................245
Capacities and Specifications - 3.7L.....249
Audio System
General Information...................................254
Audio Unit - Vehicles With: AM/FM/CD/
SYNC/Satellite Radio............................255
Audio Input Jack...........................................259
USB Port.........................................................260
Media Hub......................................................260
SYNC™
General Information....................................261
Using Voice Recognition...........................263
Using SYNC™ With Your Phone............266
SYNC™ Applications and Services......279
SYNC™ AppLink™......................................287
Using SYNC™ With Your Media
Player...........................................................289
SYNC™ Troubleshooting.........................299
Extended Service Plan
(ESP)
Extended Service Plan (ESP).................308
Scheduled Maintenance
General Maintenance Information........310
Normal Scheduled Maintenance............313
Special Operating Conditions Scheduled
Maintenance..............................................316
Scheduled Maintenance Record...........320
4
Police Interceptor (CPH), enUSA, Edition date: 10/2015, First Printing
Table of Contents
6
Police Interceptor (CPH), enUSA, Edition date: 10/2015, First Printing
ABOUT THIS MANUAL
Thank you for choosing Ford. We
recommend that you take some time to
get to know your vehicle by reading this
manual. The more that you know about
your vehicle, the greater the safety and
pleasure you will get from driving it.
WARNING
Driving while distracted can result in
loss of vehicle control, crash and
injury. We strongly recommend that
you use extreme caution when using any
device that may take your focus off the
road. Your primary responsibility is the safe
operation of your vehicle. We recommend
against the use of any hand-held device
while driving and encourage the use of
voice-operated systems when possible.
Make sure you are aware of all applicable
local laws that may affect the use of
electronic devices while driving.
Note: This manual describes product
features and options available throughout
the range of available models, sometimes
even before they are generally available. It
may describe options not fitted to the
vehicle you have purchased.
Note: Some of the illustrations in this
manual may show features as used in
different models, so they may appear
different to you on your vehicle.
Note: Always use and operate your vehicle
in line with all applicable laws and
regulations.
Note: Pass on this manual when selling
your vehicle. It is an integral part of your
vehicle.
This manual may qualify the location of a
component as left-hand side or right-hand
side. The side is determined when facing
forward in the seat.
E154903
Right-hand side.A
Left-hand side.B
SYMBOLS GLOSSARY
These are some of the symbols you may
see on your vehicle.
Safety alert
See Owner's Manual
E162384
Air conditioning system
Anti-lock braking system
Avoid smoking, flames or sparks
Battery
Battery acid
Brake fluid - non petroleum
based
7
Police Interceptor (CPH), enUSA, Edition date: 10/2015, First Printing
Introduction
Brake system
Cabin air filter
Check fuel cap
Child safety door lock or unlock
Child seat lower anchor
Child seat tether anchor
E71340
Cruise control
Do not open when hot
Engine air filter
Engine coolant
Engine coolant temperature
Engine oil
Explosive gas
Fan warning
Fasten seatbelt
Front airbag
Front fog lamps
Fuel pump reset
Fuse compartment
Hazard warning flashers
Heated rear window
Heated windshield
Interior luggage compartment
release
Jack
E161353
Keep out of reach of children
Lighting control
Low tire pressure warning
Maintain correct fluid level
Note operating instructions
Panic alarm
8
Police Interceptor (CPH), enUSA, Edition date: 10/2015, First Printing
Introduction
E139213
Parking aid
Parking brake
Power steering fluid
Power windows front/rear
Power window lockout
Service engine soon
Side airbag
E167012
Shield the eyes
E138639
Stability control
Windshield wash and wipe
DATA RECORDING
Service Data Recording
Service data recorders in your vehicle are
capable of collecting and storing
diagnostic information about your vehicle.
This potentially includes information about
the performance or status of various
systems and modules in the vehicle, such
as engine, throttle, steering or brake
systems. In order to properly diagnose and
service your vehicle, Ford Motor Company,
Ford of Canada, and service and repair
facilities may access or share among them
vehicle diagnostic information received
through a direct connection to your vehicle
when diagnosing or servicing your vehicle.
Additionally, when your vehicle is in for
service or repair, Ford Motor Company,
Ford of Canada, and service and repair
facilities may access or share among them
data for vehicle improvement purposes.
For U.S. only (if equipped), if you choose
to use the SYNC Vehicle Health Report,
you consent that certain diagnostic
information may also be accessed
electronically by Ford Motor Company and
Ford authorized service facilities, and that
the diagnostic information may be used
for any purpose. See SYNC™ (page 261).
Event Data Recording
This vehicle is equipped with an event
data recorder. The main purpose of an
event data recorder is to record, in
certain crash or near crash-like
situations, such as an airbag
deployment or hitting a road obstacle;
this data will assist in understanding
how a vehicle’s systems performed.
The event data recorder is designed to
record data related to vehicle dynamics
and safety systems for a short period
of time, typically 30 seconds or less.
The event data recorder in this vehicle
is designed to record such data as:
• How various systems in your vehicle
were operating;
• Whether or not the driver and
passenger safety belts were
buckled/fastened;
• How far (if at all) the driver was
depressing the accelerator and/or
the brake pedal; and
• How fast the vehicle was traveling;
and
• Where the driver was positioning
the steering wheel.
9
Police Interceptor (CPH), enUSA, Edition date: 10/2015, First Printing
Introduction
This data can help provide a better
understanding of the circumstances in
which crashes and injuries occur.
Note: Event data recorder data is
recorded by your vehicle only if a
non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data
is recorded by the event data recorder
under normal driving conditions and no
personal data or information (e.g., name,
gender, age, and crash location) is
recorded (see limitations regarding 911
Assist and Traffic, directions and
Information privacy below). However,
parties, such as law enforcement, could
combine the event data recorder data
with the type of personally identifying
data routinely acquired during a crash
investigation.
To read data recorded by an event data
recorder, special equipment is required,
and access to the vehicle or the event
data recorder is needed. In addition to
the vehicle manufacturer, other
parties, such as law enforcement, that
have such special equipment, can read
the information if they have access to
the vehicle or the event data recorder.
Ford Motor Company and Ford of
Canada do not access event data
recorder information without obtaining
consent, unless pursuant to court order
or where required by law enforcement,
other government authorities or other
third parties acting with lawful
authority. Other parties may seek to
access the information independently
of Ford Motor Company and Ford of
Canada.
Note: Including to the extent that any
law pertaining to Event Data Recorders
applies to SYNC or its features, please
note the following: Once 911 Assist (if
equipped) is enabled (set ON), 911 Assist
may, through any paired and connected
cell phone, disclose to emergency
services that the vehicle has been in a
crash involving the deployment of an
airbag or, in certain vehicles, the
activation of the fuel pump shut-off.
Certain versions or updates to 911 Assist
may also be capable of being used to
electronically or verbally provide to 911
operators the vehicle location (such as
latitude and longitude), and/or other
details about the vehicle or crash or
personal information about the
occupants to assist 911 operators to
provide the most appropriate emergency
services. If you do not want to disclose
this information, do not activate the 911
Assist feature. See SYNC™ (page 261).
Additionally, when you connect to
Traffic, Directions and Information (if
equipped, U.S. only), the service uses
GPS technology and advanced vehicle
sensors to collect the vehicle’s current
location, travel direction, and speed
(“vehicle travel information”), only to
help provide you with the directions,
traffic reports, or business searches
that you request. If you do not want
Ford or its vendors to receive this
information, do not activate the
service. For more information, see
Traffic, Directions and Information,
Terms and Conditions. See SYNC™
(page 261).
10
Police Interceptor (CPH), enUSA, Edition date: 10/2015, First Printing
Introduction
CALIFORNIA PROPOSITION 65
WARNINGS
Some constituents of engine
exhaust, certain vehicle components,
certain fluids contained in vehicles
and certain products of component wear
contain or emit chemicals known to the
State of California to cause cancer and
birth defects or other reproductive harm.
Battery posts, terminals and related
accessories contain lead and lead
compounds, chemicals known to the
State of California to cause cancer and
reproductive harm. Batteries also contain
other chemicals known to the State of
California to cause cancer. Wash your
hands after handling.
PERCHLORATE
Certain components in your vehicle such
as airbag modules, safety belt
pretensioners and remote control batteries
may contain perchlorate material. Special
handling may apply for service or vehicle
end of life disposal.
For more information visit:
Web Address
www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/
perchlorate
FORD CREDIT
(U.S. Only)
Ford Credit offers a full range of financing
and lease plans to help you acquire your
vehicle. If you have financed or leased your
vehicle through Ford Credit, thank you for
your business.
For your convenience we offer a number
of ways to contact us, as well as to help
manage your account.
Phone: 1-800-727-7000
For more information regarding Ford Credit,
as well as to access Account Manager,
please go to www.fordcredit.com.
REPLACEMENT PARTS
RECOMMENDATION
Your vehicle has been built to the highest
standards using quality parts. We
recommend that you demand the use of
genuine Ford and Motorcraft parts
whenever your vehicle requires scheduled
maintenance or repair. You can clearly
identify genuine Ford and Motorcraft parts
by looking for the Ford, FoMoCo or
Motorcraft branding on the parts or their
packaging.
Scheduled Maintenance and
Mechanical Repairs
One of the best ways for you to make sure
that your vehicle provides years of service
is to have it maintained in line with our
recommendations using parts that
conform to the specifications detailed in
this Owner’s Manual. Genuine Ford and
Motorcraft parts meet or exceed these
specifications.
Collision Repairs
We hope that you never experience a
collision, but accidents do happen. Genuine
Ford replacement collision parts meet our
stringent requirements for fit, finish,
structural integrity, corrosion protection
and dent resistance. During vehicle
11
Police Interceptor (CPH), enUSA, Edition date: 10/2015, First Printing
Introduction
development we validate these parts
deliver the intended level of protection as
a whole system. A great way to know for
sure you are getting this level of protection
is to use genuine Ford replacement
collision parts.
Warranty on Replacement Parts
Genuine Ford and Motorcraft replacement
parts are the only replacement parts that
benefit from a Ford Warranty. Damage
caused to your vehicle as a result of the
failure of non-Ford parts may not be
covered by the Ford Warranty. For
additional information, refer to the terms
and conditions of the Ford Warranty.
SPECIAL NOTICES
New Vehicle Limited Warranty
For a detailed description of what is
covered and what is not covered by your
vehicle’s New Vehicle Limited Warranty,
refer to the Warranty Manual that is
provided to you along with your Owner’s
Manual.
Special Instructions
For your added safety, your vehicle is fitted
with sophisticated electronic controls.
WARNINGS
You risk death or serious injury to
yourself and others if you do not
follow the instruction highlighted by
the warning symbol. Failure to follow the
specific warnings and instructions could
result in personal injury.
Front seat mounted rear-facing child
or infant seats should NEVER be
placed in front of an active
passenger airbag.
On-board Diagnostics (OBD-II)
Your vehicle’s On-board Diagnostics
(OBD-II) system has a data port for
diagnostics, repair and reprogramming
services with diagnostic scan tools.
Installing a non-Ford-approved
aftermarket OBD plug-in device that uses
the port during normal driving, for example
remote insurance company monitoring,
remote vehicle diagnostics, telematics or
engine reprogramming, may cause
interference or damage to vehicle systems.
We do not recommend or endorse the use
of any non-Ford-approved aftermarket
OBD plug-in devices. The vehicle Warranty
may not cover damage caused by any
non-Ford-approved aftermarket OBD
plug-in device.
My Fleet Management
This feature allows a fleet administrator
to control specific vehicle settings using a
Ford authorized service tool. This helps the
fleet administrator set certain vehicle
settings to match administrative policy.
The configurable settings are:
• Vehicle Speed: Select an alternative
speed limit that is below your vehicle's
maximum capability. A message
displays and a tone sounds when
starting your vehicle to indicate the
customized speed limit.
• Audio Volume: Select a limit for the
maximum volume of the audio system
in the range of 0% (full mute) to 100%
(no limit) in 10% increments.
12
Police Interceptor (CPH), enUSA, Edition date: 10/2015, First Printing
Introduction
For more information regarding the My
Fleet Management feature
configuration process, reference the
procedure in the "Police Upfit &
Modifier’s Guide" found at:
Web Address
www.fordpoliceinterceptorupfit.com
MOBILE COMMUNICATIONS
EQUIPMENT
Using mobile communications equipment
is becoming increasingly important in the
conduct of business and personal affairs.
However, you must not compromise your
own or others’ safety when using such
equipment. Mobile communications can
enhance personal safety and security when
appropriately used, particularly in
emergency situations. Safety must be
paramount when using mobile
communications equipment to avoid
negating these benefits. Mobile
communication equipment includes, but
is not limited to, cellular phones, pagers,
portable email devices, text messaging
devices and portable two-way radios.
WARNING
Driving while distracted can result in
loss of vehicle control, crash and
injury. We strongly recommend that
you use extreme caution when using any
device that may take your focus off the
road. Your primary responsibility is the safe
operation of your vehicle. We recommend
against the use of any hand-held device
while driving and encourage the use of
voice-operated systems when possible.
Make sure you are aware of all applicable
local laws that may affect the use of
electronic devices while driving.
EXPORT UNIQUE OPTIONS
For your particular global region, your
vehicle may be equipped with features and
options that are different from the features
and options that are described in this
Owner’s Manual. A market unique
supplement may be supplied that
complements this book. By referring to the
market unique supplement, if provided,
you can properly identify those features,
recommendations and specifications that
are unique to your vehicle. This Owner’s
Manual is written primarily for the U.S. and
Canadian Markets. Features or equipment
listed as standard may be different on units
built for export. Refer to this Owner’s
Manual for all other required
information and warnings.
13
Police Interceptor (CPH), enUSA, Edition date: 10/2015, First Printing
Introduction
PROTECTING THE
ENVIRONMENT
You must play your part in protecting the
environment. Correct vehicle usage and
the authorized disposal of waste, cleaning
and lubrication materials are significant
steps toward this aim.
14
Police Interceptor (CPH), enUSA, Edition date: 10/2015, First Printing
Environment
GENERAL INFORMATION
See the following sections for directions
on how to properly use safety restraints
for children.
WARNINGS
Always make sure your child is
secured properly in a device that is
appropriate for their height, age and
weight. Child safety restraints must be
bought separately from your vehicle.
Failure to follow these instructions and
guidelines may result in an increased risk
of serious injury or death to your child.
All children are shaped differently.
The recommendations for safety
restraints are based on probable
child height, age and weight thresholds
from the National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration and other safety
organizations, or are the minimum
requirements of law. We recommend
checking with a NHTSA Certified Child
Passenger Safety Technician (CPST) and
WARNINGS
consult your pediatrician to make sure your
child seat is appropriate for your child, and
is compatible with and properly installed
in your vehicle. To locate a child seat fitting
station and CPST, contact NHTSA toll free
at 1-888-327-4236 or go to
http://www.nhtsa.dot.gov. In Canada,
contact Transport Canada toll free at
1-800-333-0371 or go to www.tc.gc.ca to
find a Child Car Seat Clinic in your area.
Failure to properly restrain children in
safety seats made especially for their
height, age, and weight may result in an
increased risk of serious injury or death to
your child.
Do not leave children or animals
unattended in the vehicle. On hot
days, the temperature in the trunk or
vehicle interior can rise very quickly.
Exposure of people or animals to these
high temperatures for even a short time
can cause death or serious heat-related
injuries, including brain damage. Small
children are particularly at risk.
15
Police Interceptor (CPH), enUSA, Edition date: 10/2015, First Printing
Child Safety
Recommendations for Safety Restraints for Children
Recommended restraint
type
Child size, height, weight, or ageChild
Use a child safety seat
(sometimes called an
infant carrier, convertible
seat, or toddler seat).
Children weighing 40 lb (18 kg) or less
(generally age four or younger).
Infants or
toddlers
Use a belt-positioning
booster seat.
Children who have outgrown or no longer
properly fit in a child safety seat (gener-
ally children who are less than 4 ft. 9 in.
(1.45 m) tall, are greater than age four
and less than age 12, and between 40 lb
(18 kg) and 80 lb (36 kg) and upward to
100 lb (45 kg) if recommended by your
child restraint manufacturer).
Small children
Use a vehicle safety belt
having the lap belt snug
and low across the hips,
shoulder belt centered
across the shoulder and
chest, and seat back
upright.
Children who have outgrown or no longer
properly fit in a belt-positioning booster
seat (generally children who are at least
4 ft. 9 in. (1.45 m) tall or greater than 80
lb (36 kg) or 100 lb (45 kg) if recom-
mended by child restraint manufacturer).
Larger children
• You are required by law to properly use
safety seats for infants and toddlers in
the United States and Canada.
• Many states and provinces require that
small children use approved booster
seats until they reach age eight, a
height of 4 feet 9 inches (1.45 meters)
tall, or 80 pounds (36 kilograms).
Check your local and state or provincial
laws for specific requirements about
the safety of children in your vehicle.
• When possible, always properly
restrain children 12 years of age and
under in a rear seating position of your
vehicle. Accident statistics suggest that
children are safer when properly
restrained in the rear seating positions
than in a front seating position. See
Front Passenger Sensing System
(page 36).
INSTALLING CHILD
RESTRAINTS
Child Seats
E142594
16
Police Interceptor (CPH), enUSA, Edition date: 10/2015, First Printing
Child Safety
Use a child safety seat (sometimes called
an infant carrier, convertible seat, or
toddler seat) for infants, toddlers or
children weighing 40 lb (18 kg) or less
(generally age four or younger).
Using Lap and Shoulder Belts
WARNINGS
Airbags can kill or injure a child in a
child seat. Never place a rear-facing
child seat in front of an active airbag.
If you must use a forward-facing child seat
in the front seat, move the seat upon which
the child seat is installed all the way back.
Airbags can kill or injure a child in a
child seat. Children 12 and under
should be properly restrained in the
rear seat whenever possible.
Depending on where you secure a
child restraint, and depending on the
child restraint design, you may block
access to certain seatbelt buckle
assemblies and LATCH lower anchors,
rendering those features potentially
unusable. To avoid risk of injury, occupants
should only use seating positions where
they are able to be properly restrained.
When installing a child safety seat with
combination lap and shoulder belts:
• Use the correct seatbelt buckle for that
seating position.
• Insert the belt tongue into the proper
buckle until you hear a snap and feel it
latch. Make sure the tongue is securely
fastened in the buckle.
• Keep the buckle release button
pointing up and away from the safety
seat, with the tongue between the child
seat and the release button, to prevent
accidental unbuckling.
• Place the vehicle seat upon which the
child seat will be installed in the upright
position.
• Put the seatbelt in the automatic
locking mode. See Step 5. This vehicle
does not require the use of a locking
clip.
Perform the following steps when
installing the child seat with combination
lap and shoulder belts:
Note: Although the child seat illustrated is
a forward facing child seat, the steps are
the same for installing a rear facing child
seat.
Note: Follow all instructions provided by
the manufacturer of the child restraint
regarding the necessary and proper use of
the Lock-off device. In some instances these
devices have been provided only for use in
vehicles with seatbelt systems that would
otherwise require a locking clip. This vehicle
does not require the use of a locking clip.
E142528
1. Position the child safety seat in a seat
with a combination lap and shoulder
belt.
17
Police Interceptor (CPH), enUSA, Edition date: 10/2015, First Printing
Child Safety
E142529
2. After positioning the child safety seat
in the proper seating position, pull
down on the shoulder belt and then
grasp the shoulder belt and lap belt
together behind the belt tongue.
E142530
3. While holding the shoulder and lap belt
portions together, route the tongue
through the child seat according to the
child seat manufacturer's instructions.
Be sure the belt webbing is not twisted.
E142531
4. Insert the belt tongue into the proper
buckle (the buckle closest to the
direction the tongue is coming from)
for that seating position until you hear
a snap and feel the latch engage. Make
sure the tongue is latched securely by
pulling on it.
E142875
5. To put the retractor in the automatic
locking mode, grasp the shoulder
portion of the belt and pull downward
until all of the belt is pulled out.
6. Allow the belt to retract to remove
slack. The belt will click as it retracts
to indicate it is in the automatic locking
mode.
18
Police Interceptor (CPH), enUSA, Edition date: 10/2015, First Printing
Child Safety
7. Try to pull the belt out of the retractor
to make sure the retractor is in the
automatic locking mode (you should
not be able to pull more belt out). If the
retractor is not locked, unbuckle the
belt and repeat Steps 5 and 6.
E142533
8. Remove remaining slack from the belt.
Force the seat down with extra weight,
for example, by pressing down or
kneeling on the child restraint while
pulling up on the shoulder belt in order
to force slack from the belt. This is
necessary to remove the remaining
slack that will exist once the extra
weight of the child is added to the child
restraint. It also helps to achieve the
proper snugness of the child seat to
your vehicle. Sometimes, a slight lean
toward the buckle will provide extra
help to remove remaining slack from
the belt.
9. Attach the tether strap (if the child seat
is equipped). See Using Tether
Straps later in this chapter.
E142534
10. Before placing the child in the seat,
forcibly move the seat forward and
back to make sure the seat is securely
held in place. To check this, grab the
seat at the belt path and attempt to
move it side to side and forward and
back. There should be no more than
1 inch (2.5 centimeters) of movement
for proper installation.
We recommend checking with a NHTSA
Certified Child Passenger Safety
Technician to make certain the child
restraint is properly installed. In Canada,
check with Transport Canada for referral
to a Child Car Seat Clinic.
Using Lower Anchors and Tethers
for CHildren (LATCH)
WARNINGS
Never attach two child safety seats
to the same anchor. In a crash, one
anchor may not be strong enough to
hold two child safety seat attachments
and may break, causing serious injury or
death.
19
Police Interceptor (CPH), enUSA, Edition date: 10/2015, First Printing
Child Safety
WARNINGS
Depending on where you secure a
child restraint, and depending on the
child restraint design, you may block
access to certain seatbelt buckle
assemblies or LATCH lower anchors,
rendering those features potentially
unusable. To avoid risk of injury, occupants
should only use seating positions where
they are able to be properly restrained.
The LATCH system is composed of three
vehicle anchor points: two lower anchors
located where the seatback and seat
cushion meet (called the seat bight) and
one top tether anchor located behind that
seating position.
LATCH compatible child safety seats have
two rigid or webbing mounted
attachments that connect to the two lower
anchors at the LATCH equipped seating
positions in your vehicle. This type of
attachment method eliminates the need
to use seatbelts to attach the child seat,
however the seatbelt can still be used to
attach the child seat. For forward-facing
child seats, the top tether strap must also
be attached to the proper top tether
anchor, if a top tether strap has been
provided with your child seat.
E173197
Your vehicle has LATCH lower anchors for
child seat installation at the seating
positions marked with the child seat
symbol.
E144054
The LATCH anchors are located at the rear
section of the rear seat between the
cushion and seatback below the symbols
as shown. Follow the child seat
manufacturer's instructions to properly
install a child seat with LATCH
attachments.
Follow the instructions on attaching child
safety seats with tether straps. See Using
Tether Straps later in this chapter.
Attach LATCH lower attachments of the
child seat only to the anchors shown.
Use of inboard lower anchors from the
outboard seating positions (center
seating use)
WARNING
The standardized spacing for LATCH
lower anchors is 11 inches (28
centimeters) center to center. Do not
use LATCH lower anchors for the center
seating position unless the child seat
manufacturer’s instructions permit and
specify using anchors spaced at least as
far apart as those in this vehicle.
20
Police Interceptor (CPH), enUSA, Edition date: 10/2015, First Printing
Child Safety
The lower anchors at the center of the
second row seats are spaced 24 inches (61
centimeters) apart. The standardized
spacing for LATCH lower anchors is 11
inches (28 centimeters) center to center.
A child seat with rigid LATCH attachments
cannot be installed at the center seating
position. LATCH compatible child seats
(with attachments on belt webbing) can
only be used at this seating position
provided that the child seat manufacturer’s
instructions permit use with the anchor
spacing stated. Do not attach a child seat
to any lower anchor if an adjacent child
seat is attached to that anchor.
Each time you use the safety seat, check
that the seat is properly attached to the
lower anchors and tether anchor, if
applicable. Tug the child seat from side to
side and forward and back where it is
secured to your vehicle. The seat should
move less than one inch when you do this
for a proper installation.
If the safety seat is not anchored properly,
the risk of a child being injured in a crash
greatly increases.
Combining Seatbelt and LATCH Lower
Anchors for Attaching Child Safety
Seats
When used in combination, either the
seatbelt or the LATCH lower anchors may
be attached first, provided a proper
installation is achieved. Attach the tether
strap afterward, if included with the child
seat.
Using Tether Straps
Many forward-facing child safety
seats include a tether strap
which extends from the back of
the child safety seat and hooks to an
anchoring point called the top tether
anchor. Tether straps are available as an
accessory for many older safety seats.
Contact the manufacturer of your child
seat for information about ordering a
tether strap, or to obtain a longer tether
strap if the tether strap on your safety seat
does not reach the appropriate top tether
anchor in your vehicle.
Once the child safety seat has been
installed using either the seatbelt, the
lower anchors of the LATCH system, or
both, you can attach the top tether strap.
The tether strap anchors in your vehicle
are in the following positions (shown from
top view):
Second row seats
E142537
Perform the following steps to install a
child safety seat with tether anchors:
Note: If you install a child seat with rigid
LATCH attachments, do not tighten the
tether strap enough to lift the child seat off
your vehicle seat cushion when the child is
seated in it. Keep the tether strap just snug
without lifting the front of the child seat.
Keeping the child seat just touching your
vehicle seat gives the best protection in a
severe crash.
Placement of the tether strap
1. Route the child safety seat tether strap
over the seatback.
21
Police Interceptor (CPH), enUSA, Edition date: 10/2015, First Printing
Child Safety
E201569
2. Locate the correct anchor for the
selected seating position.
E201570
3. Open the tether anchor cover.
E201571
4. Clip the tether strap to the anchor as
shown.
5. Tighten the child safety seat tether
strap according to the manufacturer’s
instructions.
If the safety seat is not anchored properly,
the risk of a child being injured in a crash
greatly increases.
If your child restraint system is equipped
with a tether strap, and the child restraint
manufacturer recommends its use, we also
recommend its use.
BOOSTER SEATS
WARNING
Never place, or allow a child to place,
the shoulder belt under a child's arm
or behind the back because it
reduces the protection for the upper part
of the body and may increase the risk of
injury or death in a crash.
Use a belt-positioning booster seat for
children who have outgrown or no longer
properly fit in a child safety seat (generally
children who are less than 4 feet 9 inches
(1.45 meters) tall, are greater than age four
(4) and less than age twelve (12), and
between 40 pounds (18 kilograms) and
80 pounds (36 kilograms) and upward to
100 pounds (45 kilograms) if
recommended by your child restraint
manufacturer). Many state and provincial
laws require that children use approved
booster seats until they reach age eight, a
height of 4 feet 9 inches (1.45 meters) tall,
or 80 pounds (36 kilograms).
Booster seats should be used until you can
answer YES to ALL of these questions
when seated without a booster seat:
22
Police Interceptor (CPH), enUSA, Edition date: 10/2015, First Printing
Child Safety
E142595
• Can the child sit all the way back
against their vehicle seat back with
knees bent comfortably at the edge of
the seat cushion?
• Can the child sit without slouching?
• Does the lap belt rest low across the
hips?
• Is the shoulder belt centered on the
shoulder and chest?
• Can the child stay seated like this for
the whole trip?
Always use booster seats in conjunction
with your vehicle lap and shoulder belt.
Types of Booster Seats
E68924
• Backless booster seats
If your backless booster seat has a
removable shield, remove the shield. If a
vehicle seating position has a low seat
back or no head restraint, a backless
booster seat may place your child's head
(as measured at the tops of the ears)
above the top of the seat. In this case,
move the backless booster to another
seating position with a higher seat back or
head restraint and lap and shoulder belts,
or consider using a high back booster seat.
E70710
• High back booster seats
If, with a backless booster seat, you cannot
find a seating position that adequately
supports your child's head, a high back
booster seat would be a better choice.
Children and booster seats vary in size and
shape. Choose a booster that keeps the
lap belt low and snug across the hips,
never up across the stomach, and lets you
adjust the shoulder belt to cross the chest
and rest snugly near the center of the
shoulder. The following drawings compare
the ideal fit (center) to a shoulder belt
uncomfortably close to the neck and a
shoulder belt that could slip off the
shoulder. The drawings also show how the
lap belt should be low and snug across the
child's hips.
23
Police Interceptor (CPH), enUSA, Edition date: 10/2015, First Printing
Child Safety
E142596
E142597
If the booster seat slides on the vehicle
seat upon which it is being used, placing a
rubberized mesh sold as shelf or carpet
liner under the booster seat may improve
this condition. Do not introduce any item
thicker than this under the booster seat.
Check with the booster seat
manufacturer's instructions.
CHILD RESTRAINT
POSITIONING
WARNINGS
Airbags can kill or injure a child in a
child seat. Never place a rear-facing
child seat in front of an active airbag.
If you must use a forward-facing child seat
in the front seat, move the vehicle seat
upon which the child seat is installed all
WARNINGS
the way back. When possible, all children
age 12 and under should be properly
restrained in a rear seating position. If all
children cannot be seated and restrained
properly in a rear seating position, properly
restrain the largest child in the front seat.
Always carefully follow the
instructions and warnings provided
by the manufacturer of any child
restraint to determine if the restraint device
is appropriate for your child's size, height,
weight, or age. Follow the child restraint
manufacturer's instructions and warnings
provided for installation and use in
conjunction with the instructions and
warnings provided by your vehicle
24
Police Interceptor (CPH), enUSA, Edition date: 10/2015, First Printing
Child Safety
WARNINGS
manufacturer. A safety seat that is
improperly installed or utilized, is
inappropriate for your child's height, age,
or weight or does not properly fit the child
may increase the risk of serious injury or
death.
Never let a passenger hold a child on
his or her lap while your vehicle is
moving. The passenger cannot
protect the child from injury in a crash,
which may result in serious injury or death.
Never use pillows, books, or towels
to boost a child. They can slide
around and increase the likelihood
of injury or death in a crash.
WARNINGS
Always restrain an unoccupied child
seat or booster seat. These objects
may become projectiles in a crash or
sudden stop, which may increase the risk
of serious injury.
Never place, or allow a child to place,
the shoulder belt under a child's arm
or behind the back because it
reduces the protection for the upper part
of the body and may increase the risk of
injury or death in a crash.
To avoid risk of injury, do not leave
children or pets unattended in your
vehicle.
Recommendations for attaching child safety restraints for children
Use any attachment method as indicated below by X
Combined
weight of
child and
child seat
Restraint
Type
Safety belt
only
Safety belt
and LATCH
(lower
anchors
and top
tether
anchor)
Safety belt
and top
tether
anchor
LATCH
(lower
anchors
only)
LATCH
(lower
anchors
and top
tether
anchor)
XX
Up to 65 lb
(29.5 kg)
Rear facing
child seat
X
Over 65 lb
(29.5 kg)
Rear facing
child seat
XXX
Up to 65 lb
(29.5 kg)
Forward
facing
child seat
XX
Over 65 lb
(29.5 kg)
Forward
facing
child seat
Note: The child seat must rest tightly
against the vehicle seat upon which it is
installed. It may be necessary to lift or
remove the head restraint. See Seats (page
83).
25
Police Interceptor (CPH), enUSA, Edition date: 10/2015, First Printing
Child Safety
PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION
WARNINGS
Always drive and ride with your
seatback upright and the lap belt
snug and low across the hips.
To reduce the risk of injury, make
sure children sit where they can be
properly restrained.
Never let a passenger hold a child on
his or her lap while the vehicle is
moving. The passenger cannot
protect the child from injury in a crash,
which may result in serious injury or death.
All occupants of the vehicle,
including the driver, should always
properly wear their seatbelts, even
when an airbag supplemental restraint
system is provided. Failure to properly wear
your seatbelt could seriously increase the
risk of injury or death.
It is extremely dangerous to ride in a
cargo area, inside or outside of a
vehicle. In a crash, people riding in
these areas are more likely to be seriously
injured or killed. Do not allow people to ride
in any area of your vehicle that is not
equipped with seats and seatbelts. Be sure
everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seatbelt properly.
In a rollover crash, an unbelted
person is significantly more likely to
die than a person wearing a seatbelt.
Each seating position in your vehicle
has a specific seatbelt assembly
which is made up of one buckle and
one tongue that are designed to be used
as a pair. 1) Use the shoulder belt on the
outside shoulder only. Never wear the
shoulder belt under the arm. 2) Never
swing the seatbelt around your neck over
the inside shoulder. 3) Never use a single
belt for more than one person.
WARNINGS
When possible, all children 12 years
old and under should be properly
restrained in a rear seating position.
Failure to follow this could seriously
increase the risk of injury or death.
Seatbelts and seats can become hot
in a vehicle that has been closed up
in sunny weather; they could burn a
small child. Check seat covers and buckles
before you place a child anywhere near
them.
Front and rear seat occupants,
including pregnant women, should
wear seatbelts for optimum
protection in an accident.
All seating positions in this vehicle have
lap and shoulder seatbelts. All occupants
of the vehicle should always properly wear
their seatbelts, even when an airbag
supplemental restraint system is provided.
The seatbelt system consists of:
• Lap and shoulder seatbelts.
• Shoulder seatbelt with automatic
locking mode (except driver seatbelt).
• Seatbelt pretensioner at the front
outboard seating positions.
• Belt tension sensor at the front
outboard passenger seating position.
· Seatbelt warning light and
chime.
· Crash sensors and monitoring
system with readiness indicator.
26
Police Interceptor (CPH), enUSA, Edition date: 10/2015, First Printing
Seatbelts
The seatbelt pretensioners at the front
seating positions are designed to tighten
the seatbelts when activated. In frontal
and near-frontal impacts, the seatbelt
pretensioners may be activated alone or,
if the crash is of sufficient severity, together
with the front airbags. The seatbelt
pretensioners may activate when the
Safety Canopy deploys.
FASTENING THE SEATBELTS
The front outboard and rear safety
restraints in the vehicle are combination
lap and shoulder belts.
E142587
1. Insert the belt tongue into the proper
buckle (the buckle closest to the
direction the tongue is coming from)
until you hear a snap and feel it latch.
Make sure the tongue is securely
fastened in the buckle.
E142588
2. To unfasten, press the release button
and remove the tongue from the
buckle.
Using Safety Belts During
Pregnancy
WARNING
Always ride and drive with your
seatback upright and the safety belt
properly fastened. The lap portion of
the safety belt should fit snug and be
positioned low across the hips. The
shoulder portion of the safety belt should
be positioned across the chest. Pregnant
women should also follow this practice.
See the following figure.
E142590
27
Police Interceptor (CPH), enUSA, Edition date: 10/2015, First Printing
Seatbelts
Pregnant women should always wear their
safety belt. The lap belt portion of a
combination lap and shoulder belt should
be positioned low across the hips below
the belly and worn as tight as comfort will
allow. The shoulder belt should be
positioned to cross the middle of the
shoulder and the center of the chest.
Safety Belt Locking Modes
WARNINGS
After any vehicle crash, the safety
belt system at all passenger seating
positions must be checked by an
authorized dealer to verify that the
automatic locking retractor feature for
child seats is still functioning properly. In
addition, all safety belts should be checked
for proper function.
The belt and retractor assembly
must be replaced if the safety belt
assembly automatic locking retractor
feature or any other safety belt function is
not operating properly when checked by
an authorized dealer. Failure to replace the
belt and retractor assembly could increase
the risk of injury in crashes.
All safety restraints in the vehicle are
combination lap and shoulder belts. The
driver safety belt has the first type of
locking mode. The front outboard
passenger and rear seat safety belts have
both types of locking modes described as
follows:
Vehicle Sensitive Mode
This is the normal retractor mode, which
allows free shoulder belt length
adjustment to your movements and
locking in response to vehicle movement.
For example, if the driver brakes suddenly
or turns a corner sharply, or the vehicle
receives an impact of about 5 mph
(8 km/h) or more, the combination safety
belts will lock to help reduce forward
movement of the driver and passengers.
In addition, the retractor is designed to lock
if the webbing is pulled out too quickly. If
this occurs, let the belt retract slightly and
pull webbing out again in a slow and
controlled manner.
Automatic Locking Mode
In this mode, the shoulder belt is
automatically pre-locked. The belt will still
retract to remove any slack in the shoulder
belt. The automatic locking mode is not
available on the driver safety belt.
When to Use the Automatic Locking
Mode
This mode should be used any time a child
safety seat, except a booster, is installed
in passenger front or rear seating positions.
Children 12 years old and under should be
properly restrained in a rear seating
position whenever possible. See Child
Safety (page 15).
28
Police Interceptor (CPH), enUSA, Edition date: 10/2015, First Printing
Seatbelts
How to Use the Automatic Locking
Mode
E142591
1. Buckle the combination lap and
shoulder belt.
2. Grasp the shoulder portion and pull
downward until the entire belt is pulled
out.
Allow the belt to retract. As the belt
retracts, you will hear a clicking sound. This
indicates the safety belt is now in the
automatic locking mode.
How to Disengage the Automatic
Locking Mode
Unbuckle the combination lap and
shoulder belt and allow it to retract
completely to disengage the automatic
locking mode and activate the vehicle
sensitive (emergency) locking mode.
Safety Belt Extension Assembly
WARNING
Do not use extensions to change the
fit of the shoulder belt across the
torso.
If the safety belt is too short when fully
extended, a safety belt extension assembly
can be obtained from an authorized dealer.
Use only extensions manufactured by the
same supplier as the safety belt.
Manufacturer identification is on a label
located either at the end of the webbing
or on the retractor behind the trim. Also,
use the safety belt extension only if the
safety belt is too short for you when fully
extended.
SEATBELT WARNING LAMP
AND INDICATOR CHIME
This lamp illuminates and an
audible warning will sound if the
driver's safety belt has not been
fastened when the vehicle's ignition is
turned on.
29
Police Interceptor (CPH), enUSA, Edition date: 10/2015, First Printing
Seatbelts
Conditions of operation
Then...If...
The safety belt warning light illuminates 1-
2 minutes and the warning chime sounds
4-8 seconds.
The driver's safety belt is not buckled
before the ignition switch is turned to the
on position...
The safety belt warning light and warning
chime turn off.
The driver's safety belt is buckled while the
indicator light is illuminated and the
warning chime is sounding...
The safety belt warning light and indicator
chime remain off.
The driver's safety belt is buckled before
the ignition switch is turned to the on posi-
tion...
SEATBELT REMINDER
Belt-Minder™
This feature supplements the safety belt
warning function by providing additional
reminders that intermittently sound a tone
and illuminate the safety belt warning light
when you are in the driver seat or you have
a front seat passenger and a safety belt is
unbuckled.
The system uses information from the
front passenger sensing system to
determine if a front seat passenger is
present and therefore potentially in need
of a warning. To avoid the system turning
on the Belt-Minder feature for objects you
place on the front passenger seat, only the
front seat passengers receive warnings as
determined by the front passenger sensing
system.
If the Belt-Minder warnings expire
(warnings for about five minutes) for one
passenger (driver or front passenger), the
other passenger can still cause the
Belt-Minder feature to turn on.
30
Police Interceptor (CPH), enUSA, Edition date: 10/2015, First Printing
Seatbelts
Then...If...
The Belt-Minder feature will not activate.You and the front seat passenger buckle
your safety belts before you switch the
ignition on or less than 1–2 minutes elapse
after you switch the ignition on...
The Belt-Minder feature activates, the
safety belt warning light illuminates and a
warning tone sounds for 6 seconds every
25 seconds, repeating for about 5 minutes
or until you and the front seat passenger
buckle your safety belts.
You or the front seat passenger do not
buckle your safety belts before your vehicle
reaches at least 6 mph (9.7 km/h) and 1–2
minutes elapse after you switch the ignition
on...
The Belt-Minder feature activates, the
safety belt warning light illuminates and a
warning tone sounds for 6 seconds every
25 seconds, repeating for about 5 minutes
or until you and the front seat passenger
buckle your safety belts.
The safety belt for the driver or front
passenger is unbuckled for about 1 minute
while the vehicle is traveling at least 6 mph
(9.7 km/h) and more than 1–2 minutes
elapse after you switch the ignition on...
Deactivating and Activating the
Belt-Minder Feature
WARNING
While the system allows you to
switch this feature off, the intent of
the system is to remind you to wear
your safety belt to improve your chance to
survive an accident. We recommend you
leave the system switched on for yourself
and others who may use the vehicle.
Note: The driver and front passenger
warnings switch on and off independently.
When you perform this procedure for one
seating position, do not buckle the other
position as this will terminate the process.
Read Steps 1–4 thoroughly before
proceeding with the programming
procedure.
Before following the procedure, make sure
that:
• The parking brake is set.
• The transmission is in park (P).
• The ignition is off.
• The driver and front passenger safety
belts are unbuckled.
1. Switch the ignition on. Do not start the
vehicle.
2. Wait until the safety belt warning light
turns off (about 1 minute). After Step
2, wait an additional 5 seconds before
proceeding with Step 3. Once you start
Step 3, you must complete the
procedure within 60 seconds.
3. For the seating position you are
switching off, buckle then unbuckle the
safety belt four times at a moderate
speed, ending in the unbuckled state.
After Step 3, the safety belt warning
light turns on.
31
Police Interceptor (CPH), enUSA, Edition date: 10/2015, First Printing
Seatbelts
4. While the safety belt warning light is
on, buckle and then unbuckle the
safety belt. After Step 4, the safety belt
warning light flashes for confirmation.
• This will switch the feature off for that
seating position if it is currently on.
• This will switch the feature on for that
seating position if it is currently off.
CHILD RESTRAINT AND
SEATBELT MAINTENANCE
Inspect the vehicle safety belts and child
safety seat systems periodically to make
sure they work properly and are not
damaged. Inspect the vehicle and child
seat safety belts to make sure there are no
nicks, tears or cuts. Replace if necessary.
All vehicle safety belt assemblies, including
retractors, buckles, front safety belt buckle
assemblies, buckle support assemblies
(slide bar-if equipped), shoulder belt
height adjusters (if equipped), shoulder
belt guide on seat back (if equipped), child
safety seat LATCH and tether anchors, and
attaching hardware, should be inspected
after a crash. Read the child restraint
manufacturer's instructions for additional
inspection and maintenance information
specific to the child restraint.
Ford Motor Company recommends that
all safety belt assemblies in use in vehicles
involved in a crash be replaced. However,
if the crash was minor and an authorized
dealer finds that the belts do not show
damage and continue to operate properly,
they do not need to be replaced. Safety
belt assemblies not in use during a crash
should also be inspected and replaced if
either damage or improper operation is
noted.
Properly care for safety belts. See Vehicle
Care (page 193).
32
Police Interceptor (CPH), enUSA, Edition date: 10/2015, First Printing
Seatbelts
The Personal Safety System provides an
improved overall level of frontal crash
protection to front seat occupants and is
designed to help further reduce the risk of
airbag-related injuries. The system is able
to analyze different occupant conditions
and crash severity before activating the
appropriate safety devices to help better
protect a range of occupants in a variety
of frontal crash situations.
Your vehicle's Personal Safety System
consists of:
• Driver and passenger dual-stage airbag
supplemental restraints.
• Front seat outboard safety belts with
pretensioners, energy management
retractors (first row only) and safety
belt usage sensors.
• Driver seat position sensor.
• Front passenger sensing system.
• Passenger airbag off and on indicator
lamp.
• Front crash severity sensors.
• Restraints control module with impact
and safing sensors.
• Restraint system warning light and
backup tone.
• The electrical wiring for the airbags,
crash sensors, safety belt
pretensioners, front safety belt usage
sensors, driver seat position sensor,
front passenger sensing system and
indicator lights.
How Does the Personal Safety
System Work?
The Personal Safety System can adapt the
deployment strategy of the safety devices
according to crash severity and occupant
conditions. A collection of crash and
occupant sensors provides information to
the restraints control module. During a
crash, the restraints control module may
deploy the safety belt pretensioners, one
or both stages of the dual-stage airbags
based on crash severity and occupant
conditions.
33
Police Interceptor (CPH), enUSA, Edition date: 10/2015, First Printing
Personal Safety System™
PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION
WARNINGS
Airbags do not inflate slowly or
gently, and the risk of injury from a
deploying airbag is the greatest close
to the trim covering the airbag module.
All occupants of your vehicle,
including the driver, should always
properly wear their safety belts, even
when an airbag supplemental restraint
system is provided. Failure to properly wear
your safety belt could seriously increase
the risk of injury or death.
Always transport children 12 years
old and under in the back seat and
always properly use appropriate
child restraints. Failure to follow this could
seriously increase the risk of injury or death.
Never place your arm over the airbag
module as a deploying airbag can
result in serious arm fractures or
other injuries.
Airbags can kill or injure a child in a
child seat. Never place a rear-facing
child seat in front of an active airbag.
If you must use a forward-facing child seat
in the front seat, move the seat upon which
the child seat is installed all the way back.
Do not attempt to service, repair, or
modify the airbag supplemental
restraint systems or its fuses as you
could be seriously injured or killed. Contact
your authorized dealer as soon as possible.
Several airbag system components
get hot after inflation. To reduce the
risk of injury, do not touch them after
inflation.
If the airbag has deployed, the airbag
will not function again and must be
replaced immediately. If the airbag
is not replaced, the unrepaired area will
increase the risk of injury in a crash.
The airbags are a supplemental restraint
system and are designed to work with the
safety belts to help protect the driver and
right front passenger from certain upper
body injuries. Airbags do not inflate slowly;
there is a risk of injury from a deploying
airbag.
Note: You will hear a loud bang and see a
cloud of harmless powdery residue if an
airbag deploys. This is normal.
The airbags inflate and deflate rapidly
upon activation. After airbag deployment,
it is normal to notice a smoke-like, powdery
residue or smell the burnt propellant. This
may consist of cornstarch, talcum powder
(to lubricate the bag) or sodium
compounds (for example, baking soda)
that result from the combustion process
that inflates the airbag. Small amounts of
sodium hydroxide may be present which
may irritate the skin and eyes, but none of
the residue is toxic.
While the system is designed to help
reduce serious injuries, contact with a
deploying airbag may also cause abrasions
or swelling. Temporary hearing loss is also
a possibility as a result of the noise
associated with a deploying airbag.
Because airbags must inflate rapidly and
with considerable force, there is the risk of
death or serious injuries such as fractures,
facial and eye injuries or internal injuries,
particularly to occupants who are not
properly restrained or are otherwise out of
position at the time of airbag deployment.
Thus, it is extremely important that
occupants be properly restrained as far
away from the airbag module as possible
while maintaining vehicle control.
Routine maintenance of the airbags is not
required.
34
Police Interceptor (CPH), enUSA, Edition date: 10/2015, First Printing
Supplementary Restraints System
DRIVER AND PASSENGER
AIRBAGS
WARNINGS
Never place your arm or any objects
over an airbag module. Placing your
arm over a deploying airbag can
result in serious arm fractures or other
injuries. Objects placed on or over the
airbag inflation area may cause those
objects to be propelled by the airbag into
your face and torso causing serious injury.
Airbags can kill or injure a child in a
child seat. Never place a rear-facing
child seat in front of an active airbag.
If you must use a forward-facing child seat
in the front seat, move the seat upon which
the child seat is installed all the way back.
E151127
The driver and front passenger airbags will
deploy during significant frontal and near
frontal crashes.
The driver and passenger front airbag
system consists of:
• Driver and passenger airbag modules.
• Front passenger sensing system.
· Crash sensors and monitoring
system with readiness indicator.
See Crash Sensors and Airbag
Indicator (page 41).
Proper Driver and Front Passenger
Seating Adjustment
WARNING
National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration (NHTSA)
recommends a minimum distance
of at least 10 inches (25 centimeters)
between an occupant’s chest and the
driver airbag module.
To properly position yourself away from
the airbag:
• Move your seat to the rear as far as you
can while still reaching the pedals
comfortably.
• Recline the seat slightly (one or two
degrees) from the upright position.
After all occupants have adjusted their
seats and put on safety belts, it is very
important that they continue to sit
properly. A properly seated occupant sits
upright, leaning against the seat back, and
centered on the seat cushion, with their
feet comfortably extended on the floor.
Sitting improperly can increase the chance
of injury in a crash event. For example, if
an occupant slouches, lies down, turns
sideways, sits forward, leans forward or
sideways, or puts one or both feet up, the
chance of injury during a crash is greatly
increased.
Children and Airbags
WARNING
Airbags can kill or injure a child in a
child seat. Never place a rear-facing
child seat in front of an active airbag.
If you must use a forward-facing child seat
in the front seat, move the seat upon which
the child seat is installed all the way back.
35
Police Interceptor (CPH), enUSA, Edition date: 10/2015, First Printing
Supplementary Restraints System
E142846
Children must always be properly
restrained. Accident statistics suggest that
children are safer when properly restrained
in the rear seating positions than in the
front seating position. Failure to follow
these instructions may increase the risk of
injury in a crash.
FRONT PASSENGER SENSING
SYSTEM
WARNINGS
Even with Advanced Restraints
Systems, children 12 and under
should be properly restrained in a
rear seating position. Failure to follow this
could seriously increase the risk of injury or
death.
Sitting improperly out of position or
with the seatback reclined too far
can take off weight from the seat
cushion and affect the decision of the front
passenger sensing system, resulting in
serious injury or death in a crash. Always
sit upright against your seatback, with your
feet on the floor.
Any alteration or modification to the
front passenger seat may affect the
performance of the front passenger
sensing system which could seriously
increase the risk of injury or death.
This system works with sensors that are
part of the front passenger seat and
seatbelt to detect the presence of a
properly-seated occupant and determine
if the front passenger frontal airbag should
be enabled (may inflate) or not.
E224573
The front passenger sensing system uses
a passenger airbag status indicator that
will illuminate indicating that the front
passenger frontal airbag is either ON
(enabled) or OFF (disabled).
The indicator lamp is located in the center
stack of the instrument panel.
Note: The passenger airbag status indicator
OFF and ON indicator lamps will illuminate
for a short period of time when the ignition
is first turned on to confirm it is functional.
The front passenger sensing system is
designed to disable (will not inflate) the
front passenger frontal airbag when the
front passenger seat is unoccupied, or a
rear facing infant seat, a forward-facing
child restraint, or a booster seat is
detected. Even with this technology,
parents are strongly encouraged to
always properly restrain children in the rear
seat. The sensor also turns off the
passenger front airbag and seat-mounted
side airbag when the passenger seat is
empty.
36
Police Interceptor (CPH), enUSA, Edition date: 10/2015, First Printing
Supplementary Restraints System
• When the front passenger sensing
system disables (will not inflate) the
front passenger frontal airbag, the
passenger airbag status indicator will
illuminate the OFF lamp and stay lit to
remind you that the front passenger
frontal airbag is disabled.
• If the child restraint has been installed
and the passenger airbag status
indicator illuminates the ON lamp, then
turn the vehicle off, remove the child
restraint from the vehicle and reinstall
the restraint following the child
restraint manufacturer's instructions.
The front passenger sensing system is
designed to enable (may inflate) the front
passenger frontal airbag anytime the
system senses that a person of adult size
is sitting properly in the front passenger
seat.
• When the front passenger sensing
system enables the front passenger
frontal airbag (may inflate), the
passenger airbag status indicator will
illuminate the ON lamp and remain
illuminated.
If a person of adult size is sitting in the front
passenger seat, but the airbag off indicator
lamp is lit, it is possible that the person is
not sitting properly in the seat. If this
happens:
• Turn the vehicle off and ask the person
to place the seatback in the full upright
position.
• Have the person sit upright in the seat,
centered on the seat cushion, with the
person’s legs comfortably extended.
• Restart the vehicle and have the person
remain in this position for about two
minutes. This will allow the system to
detect that person and enable the
passenger frontal airbag.
• If the indicator OFF lamp remains lit
even after this, the person should be
advised to ride in the rear seat.
Passenger airbagPassenger airbag status
indicator
Occupant
DisabledOFF: LitEmpty
ON: Unlit
DisabledOFF: LitChild
ON: Unlit
EnabledOFF: UnlitAdult
ON: Lit
Note: When the passenger airbag status
indicator OFF light is illuminated, the
passenger (seat mounted) side airbag may
be disabled to avoid the risk of airbag
deployment injuries.
After all occupants have adjusted their
seats and put on seatbelts, it is very
important that they continue to sit
properly. A properly seated occupant sits
upright, leaning against the seatback, and
centered on the seat cushion, with their
37
Police Interceptor (CPH), enUSA, Edition date: 10/2015, First Printing
Supplementary Restraints System
feet comfortably extended on the floor.
Sitting improperly can increase the chance
of injury in a crash event. For example, if
an occupant slouches, lies down, turns
sideways, sits forward, leans forward or
sideways, or puts one or both feet up, the
chance of injury during a crash is greatly
increased.
If you think that the status of the passenger
airbag off indicator lamp is incorrect, check
for the following:
• Objects lodged underneath the seat.
• Objects between the seat cushion and
the center console.
• Objects hanging off the seatback.
• Objects stowed in the seatback map
pocket.
• Objects placed on the occupant's lap.
• Cargo interference with the seat
• Other passengers pushing or pulling on
the seat.
• Rear passenger feet and knees resting
or pushing on the seat.
The conditions listed above may cause the
weight of a properly seated occupant to
be incorrectly interpreted by the front
passenger sensing system. The person in
the front passenger seat may appear
heavier or lighter due to the conditions
described in the list above.
Make sure the front passenger
sensing system is operating
properly. See Crash Sensors
and Airbag Indicator (page 41).
If the airbag readiness light is lit, do the
following:
The driver and adult passengers should
check for objects lodged underneath the
front passenger seat, or cargo interfering
with the seat.
If there are lodged objects, or cargo is
interfering with the seat, take the following
steps to remove the obstruction:
• Pull the vehicle over.
• Turn the vehicle off.
• Driver and adult passengers should
check for any objects lodged
underneath the front passenger seat
or cargo interfering with the seat.
• Remove the obstruction(s) (if found).
• Restart the vehicle.
• Wait at least two minutes and verify
that the airbag readiness light is no
longer illuminated.
• If the airbag readiness light remains
illuminated, this may or may not be a
problem due to the front passenger
sensing system.
Do not attempt to repair or service the
system. Take your vehicle immediately to
an authorized dealer.
If it is necessary to modify an advanced
front airbag system to accommodate a
person with disabilities, contact the Ford
Customer Relationship Center. See
Getting the Services You Need (page
152).
SIDE AIRBAGS
WARNINGS
Do not place objects or mount
equipment on or near the airbag
cover, on the side of the seatbacks
(of the front seats), or in front seat areas
that may come into contact with a
deploying airbag. Failure to follow these
instructions may increase the risk of
personal injury in the event of a crash.
38
Police Interceptor (CPH), enUSA, Edition date: 10/2015, First Printing
Supplementary Restraints System
WARNINGS
Do not use accessory seat covers.
The use of accessory seat covers
may prevent the deployment of the
side airbags and increase the risk of injury
in an accident.
Do not lean your head on the door.
The side airbag could injure you as it
deploys from the side of the
seatback.
Do not attempt to service, repair, or
modify the airbag, its fuses or the
seat cover on a seat containing an
airbag as you could be seriously injured or
killed. Contact your authorized dealer as
soon as possible.
If the side airbag has deployed, the
airbag will not function again. The
side airbag system (including the
seat) must be inspected and serviced by
an authorized dealer. If the airbag is not
replaced, the unrepaired area will increase
the risk of injury in a crash.
The side airbags are located on the
outboard side of the seatbacks of the front
seats. In certain sideways crashes, the
airbag on the side affected by the crash
will be inflated. The airbag was designed
to inflate between the door panel and
occupant to further enhance the protection
provided occupants in side impact crashes.
E152533
The system consists of the following:
• A label or embossed side panel
indicating that side airbags are fitted
to your vehicle.
• Side airbags located inside the driver
and front passenger seatbacks.
• Front passenger sensing system.
• Crash sensors and monitoring system
with readiness indicator. See Crash
Sensors and Airbag Indicator (page
41).
Note: The passenger sensing system will
deactivate the passenger seat-mounted
side airbag if it detects an empty passenger
seat.
The design and development of the side
airbag system included recommended
testing procedures that were developed
by a group of automotive safety experts
known as the Side Airbag Technical
Working Group. These recommended
testing procedures help reduce the risk of
injuries related to the deployment of side
airbags.
SAFETY CANOPY™
WARNINGS
Do not place objects or mount
equipment on or near the headliner
at the siderail that may come into
contact with a deploying curtain airbag.
Failure to follow these instructions may
increase the risk of personal injury in the
event of a crash.
Do not lean your head on the door.
The curtain airbag could injure you
as it deploys from the headliner.
39
Police Interceptor (CPH), enUSA, Edition date: 10/2015, First Printing
Supplementary Restraints System
WARNINGS
Do not attempt to service, repair, or
modify the curtain airbags, its fuses,
the A, B, or C pillar trim, or the
headliner on a vehicle containing curtain
airbags as you could be seriously injured
or killed. Contact your authorized dealer
as soon as possible.
All occupants of your vehicle
including the driver should always
wear their safety belts even when an
airbag supplemental restraint system and
curtain airbag is provided. Failure to
properly wear your safety belt could
seriously increase the risk of injury or death.
To reduce risk of injury, do not
obstruct or place objects in the
deployment path of the curtain
airbag.
If the curtain airbags have deployed,
the curtain airbags will not function
again. The curtain airbags (including
the A, B and C pillar trim and headliner)
must be inspected and serviced by an
authorized dealer. If the curtain airbag is
not replaced, the unrepaired area will
increase the risk of injury in a crash.
The Safety Canopy will deploy during
significant side crashes or when a certain
likelihood of a rollover event is detected
by the rollover sensor. The Safety Canopy
is mounted to the roof side-rail sheet
metal, behind the headliner, above each
row of seats. In certain sideways crashes
or rollover events, the Safety Canopy will
be activated, regardless of which seats are
occupied. The Safety Canopy is designed
to inflate between the side window area
and occupants to further enhance
protection provided in side impact crashes
and rollover events.
E75004
The system consists of the following:
• Safety canopy curtain airbags located
above the trim panels over the front
and rear side windows identified by a
label or wording on the headliner or
roof-pillar trim.
• A flexible headliner which opens above
the side doors to allow air curtain
deployment
· Crash sensors and monitoring
system with a readiness
indicator. See Crash Sensors
and Airbag Indicator (page 41).
Children 12 years old and under should
always be properly restrained in the rear
seats. The Safety Canopy will not interfere
with children restrained using a properly
installed child or booster seat because it
is designed to inflate downward from the
headliner above the doors along the side
window opening.
The design and development of the Safety
Canopy included recommended testing
procedures that were developed by a
group of automotive safety experts known
as the Side Airbag Technical Working
Group. These recommended testing
procedures help reduce the risk of injuries
related to the deployment of side airbags
(including the Safety Canopy).
40
Police Interceptor (CPH), enUSA, Edition date: 10/2015, First Printing
Supplementary Restraints System
CRASH SENSORS AND
AIRBAG INDICATOR
WARNING
Modifying or adding equipment to
the front end of the vehicle (including
frame, bumper, front end body
structure and tow hooks) may affect the
performance of the airbag system,
increasing the risk of injury. Do not modify
the front end of the vehicle.
Your vehicle has a collection of crash and
occupant sensors which provide
information to the restraints control
module. The restraints control module
deploys (activates) the front seatbelt
pretensioners, driver airbag, passenger
airbag, seat mounted side airbags and the
Safety Canopy. Based on the type of crash,
the restraints control module will deploy
the appropriate safety devices.
The restraints control module also
monitors the readiness of the above safety
devices plus the crash and occupant
sensors. The readiness of the safety
system is indicated by a warning indicator
light in the instrument cluster or by a
backup tone if the warning light is not
working. Routine maintenance of the
airbag is not required.
A difficulty with the system is indicated by
one or more of the following:
• The readiness light will either flash or
stay lit.
• A series of five beeps will be heard. The
tone pattern will repeat periodically
until the problem, the light or both are
repaired.
· The readiness light will not
illuminate immediately after the
ignition is turned on.
If any of these things happen, even
intermittently, have the supplemental
restraint system serviced at an authorized
dealer immediately. Unless serviced, the
system may not function properly in the
event of a crash.
The seatbelt pretensioners and the airbag
supplemental restraint system are
designed to activate when the vehicle
sustains frontal or sideways deceleration
sufficient to cause the restraints control
module to deploy a safety device or when
a certain likelihood of a rollover event is
detected by the rollover sensor.
The fact that the seatbelt pretensioners
or airbags did not activate for both front
seat occupants in a crash does not mean
that something is wrong with the system.
Rather, it means the restraints control
module determined the accident
conditions (crash severity, belt usage)
were not appropriate to activate these
safety devices.
• The design of the front airbags is to
activate only in frontal and near-frontal
crashes (not rollovers, side impacts or
rear impacts) unless the crash causes
sufficient frontal deceleration.
• The design of the seatbelt
pretensioners is to activate in frontal,
near-frontal and side crashes and in
rollovers.
• The design of the side airbags is to
inflate in certain side impact crashes.
Side airbags may activate in other
types of crashes if the vehicle
experiences sufficient sideways motion
or deformation.
• The design of the Safety Canopy is to
inflate in certain side impact crashes
or rollover events. The Safety Canopy
may activate in other types of crashes
if the vehicle experiences sufficient
sideways motion or deformation, or a
certain likelihood of rollover.
41
Police Interceptor (CPH), enUSA, Edition date: 10/2015, First Printing
Supplementary Restraints System
Airbags and Police Equipment
WARNINGS
Do not place objects or mount
equipment in front of the airbag
module cover or in front of the seat
areas that may come in contact with a
deploying airbag. Failure to follow this
instruction could result in personal injury.
Dash, tunnel or console-mounted
equipment should not be placed
outside of the specified zone. Failure
to follow this instruction could result in
personal injury.
Do not mount equipment between
the side of front seat to the door trim
to block deployment of the side
airbag. Failure to follow this instruction
could result in personal injury.
Dual driver and passenger airbags, and side
airbags affect the way police equipment
can be mounted in police vehicles.
Any surfaces that could come into contact
with an airbag, once it has deployed, must
not damage the airbag or alter its
deployment path.
Once the airbag has fully deployed, any
peripheral equipment surfaces that could
come into contact with the airbag (such
as when the airbag deflates with the
loading of an occupant) must not damage
the airbag or alter its deployment path.
Sharp edges, corners or protrusions could
damage the nylon airbag material and
reduce the effectiveness of the airbag.
Some approximate dimensions for airbags,
at full inflation, are provided in Figures 1
through 5. These dimensions are
somewhat flexible and represent free form
deployments without the loading of
occupants. The shaded areas in Figures 6
through 8 represent available police
equipment mounting zones. These zones
are shown for police vehicles equipped
with standard bucket seats. The zone
dimensions provided in Figures 6 through
8 are approximate and will vary with the
loading of occupants in the seats.
All airbag and equipment mounting zone
dimensions are approximate due to
different airbag deployment
characteristics.
No equipment will mount between the side
of the front seat and the door trim to block
deployment of the side airbag.
Figure 1
E201574
13 inches (330 millimeters) from
center of emblem.
1.
13.2 inches (335 millimeters)
from center of airbag door.
2.
29.5 inches (750 millimeters).3.
Note: No objects should be placed between
the airbags due to airbag variability.
42
Police Interceptor (CPH), enUSA, Edition date: 10/2015, First Printing
Supplementary Restraints System
Figure 2
E201576
29.9 inches (760 millimeters).1.
Figure 3
E201577
Front passenger airbag - 27.5
inches (700 millimeters).
1.
Front driver airbag – 17 inches
(430 millimeters).
2.
Note: No objects should be placed between
the driver side steering wheel airbag and the
passenger side dash airbag.
Figure 4 (If equipped)
E201578
From outboard side of seat - 6
inches (152 millimeters).
1.
Forward of seatback - 14 inches
(356 millimeters).
2.
WARNING
The partition and the installation
hardware of the partition must not
interfere with the operation and
deployment of the rollover curtain air bags
and seat side air bags. Failure to follow
these instructions may cause personal
injury.
Figure 5 (If equipped)
E201579
Up from side airbag module - 16
inches (406 millimeters).
3.
43
Police Interceptor (CPH), enUSA, Edition date: 10/2015, First Printing
Supplementary Restraints System
Figure 6
1
3
2
E201580
Area on top of the instrument
panel (Note: Equipment must
not interfere with driver
visibility).
1.
Airbag door must be kept clear
for deployment of the airbag.
2.
Area in front of the center
console from the bottom to the
top of the instrument panel.
3.
Figure 7
E201582
Area on top of instrument panel.1.
Area in front of center console from tunnel up to instrument panel.2.
Prisoner screen (reference only).3.
10 inches (254 millimeters).4.
Area on tunnel between seats.5.
Height: 8.5 inches (216 millimeters).6.
12 inches (305 millimeters).7.
Area on tunnel beneath center console.8.
44
Police Interceptor (CPH), enUSA, Edition date: 10/2015, First Printing
Supplementary Restraints System
Tunnel.9.
Depth: 1.5 inches (38 millimeters).10.
Figure 8
E201583
Area on top of the instrument
panel. Note: Equipment must
not interfere with driver visibility.
1.
Area on tunnel between seats.2.
9 inches (229 millimeters).3.
AIRBAG DISPOSAL
Contact your authorized dealer as soon as
possible. Airbags must be disposed of by
qualified personnel.
45
Police Interceptor (CPH), enUSA, Edition date: 10/2015, First Printing
Supplementary Restraints System
GENERAL INFORMATION ON
RADIO FREQUENCIES
This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC Rules and with Industry Canada
license-exempt RSS standard(s).
Operation is subject to the following two
conditions: (1) This device may not cause
harmful interference, and (2) This device
must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause
undesired operation.
Note: Changes or modifications not
expressively approved by the party
responsible for compliance could void the
user's authority to operate the equipment.
The term IC before the radio certification
number only signifies that Industry Canada
technical specifications were met.
The typical operating range for your
transmitter is approximately 33 feet (10
meters). Vehicles with the remote start
feature will have a greater range. One of
the following could cause a decrease in
operating range:
• weather conditions
• nearby radio towers
• structures around the vehicle
• other vehicles parked next to your
vehicle
The radio frequency used by your remote
control can also be used by other short
distance radio transmissions, for example
amateur radios, medical equipment,
wireless headphones, remote controls and
alarm systems. If the frequencies are
jammed, you will not be able to use your
remote control. You can lock and unlock
the doors with the key.
Note: Make sure to lock your vehicle before
leaving it unattended.
Note: If you are in range, the remote control
will operate if you press any button
unintentionally.
Note: The remote control contains sensitive
electrical components. Exposure to moisture
or impact may cause permanent damage.
REMOTE CONTROL
E215678
Note: If there are problems with the remote
entry system, make sure to take all remote
entry transmitters with you to an authorized
dealer to aid in troubleshooting the problem.
Changing the Remote Control
Battery
The remote control uses one coin-type
three-volt lithium battery CR2032 or
equivalent.
E107998
Make sure that you dispose of
old batteries in an
environmentally friendly way.
Seek advice from your local authority
about recycling old batteries.
46
Police Interceptor (CPH), enUSA, Edition date: 10/2015, First Printing
Keys and Remote Controls
1
E203601
2
1. Twist a thin coin in the slot of the
transmitter near the key ring to remove
the battery cover.
Note: Do not remove the rubber cover and
circuit board from the front housing of the
remote control.
Note: Do not wipe off any grease on the
battery terminals or on the back surface of
the circuit board.
2. Remove the old battery.
3. Insert the new battery. Refer to the
symbols inside the transmitter for the
correct orientation of the battery.
Press the battery down to make sure
it is fully in the housing.
4. Reinstall the battery housing cover
onto the transmitter.
Note: Replacing the battery does not erase
the programmed key from your vehicle. The
transmitter should operate normally.
Car Finder
E138623
Press the button twice within
three seconds. The horn sounds
and the direction indicators
flash. We recommend you use this method
to locate your vehicle, rather than using
the panic alarm.
Note: This feature does not work for
vehicles with the Dark Car feature.
Sounding the Panic Alarm
E138624
Press the button to sound the
panic alarm. Press the button
again or switch the ignition on to
turn it off.
Note: The panic alarm operates in any
ignition position.
REPLACING A LOST KEY OR
REMOTE CONTROL
Replacement keys or remote controls can
be purchased from an authorized dealer.
Authorized dealers can program remote
controls for your vehicle. See Anti-Theft
Alarm (page 52).
47
Police Interceptor (CPH), enUSA, Edition date: 10/2015, First Printing
Keys and Remote Controls
LOCKING AND UNLOCKING
You can use the power door lock control
or the remote control to lock and unlock
your vehicle.
Power Door Locks (If Equipped)
The power door lock control is on the driver
and front passenger door panels.
E184784
A
B
Unlock.A
Lock.B
Hidden Rear Door Locks (If Equipped)
You can manually lock or unlock the rear
doors using the hidden lock knob on the
inside front edge of the rear doors.
E203323
Open the front doors to access the lock
knob. Pull the knob to unlock and push the
knob to lock.
Remote Control
You can use the remote control at any
time.
Note: For vehicles with the Dark Car feature,
the direction indicators do not flash and the
horn does not sound when you lock or
unlock your vehicle.
Unlocking the Doors (Two-Stage
Unlock)
E138629
Press the button to unlock the
driver door. Press the button
again within three seconds to
unlock all doors. The direction indicators
will flash.
48
Police Interceptor (CPH), enUSA, Edition date: 10/2015, First Printing
Locks
Press and hold both the lock and unlock
buttons on the remote control for three
seconds to change between driver door or
all doors unlock mode. The direction
indicators will flash twice to indicate a
change to the unlocking mode. Driver door
mode only unlocks the driver door when
you press the unlock button once. All door
mode unlocks all doors when you press
the unlock button once. The unlocking
mode applies to the remote control.
Locking the Doors
E138623
Press the button to lock all
doors. The direction indicators
will flash. Press the button again
within three seconds to confirm that all
the doors are closed.
The doors will lock again, the horn will
sound and the direction indicators will
flash if all the doors and the luggage
compartment are closed.
Note: If any door or the luggage
compartment is open, or if the hood is open
on vehicles with an anti-theft alarm or
remote start, the horn will sound twice and
the direction indicators will not flash.
Locking and Unlocking the Doors
with the Key Blade
Locking the Doors
Turn the top of the key toward the front of
your vehicle.
Unlocking the Doors
Turn the top of the key toward the rear of
your vehicle.
Note: If the child safety locks are on and
you pull the interior handle, you only switch
off the emergency locking, not the child
safety lock. You can only open the doors
using the external door handle.
Opening a Rear Door From the
Inside
Pull the interior door handle twice to
unlock and open a rear door. The first pull
unlocks the door and the second pull
opens the door.
Illuminated Entry (If Equipped)
The interior lamps and some exterior
lamps illuminate when you unlock the
doors with the remote control.
The lamps turn off if:
• The ignition is on.
• You press the remote control lock
button.
• 25 seconds have elapsed.
The lamps do not turn off if:
• You switch them on with the lighting
control.
• Any door is open.
Illuminated Exit (If Equipped)
The interior lamps and some exterior
lamps illuminate when all doors are closed
and you switch the ignition off.
The lamps will turn off if all the doors
remain closed and:
• 25 seconds have elapsed.
• You lock your vehicle from the outside.
Battery Saver
If you leave the courtesy lamps, interior
lamps or headlamps on, the battery saver
shuts them off 10 minutes after you switch
the ignition off.
49
Police Interceptor (CPH), enUSA, Edition date: 10/2015, First Printing
Locks
Opening the Luggage
Compartment
With the Remote Control
E211694
Press the button twice within
three seconds.
From the Instrument Panel or Overhead
Console
E159323
Press the button on the
instrument panel or pull the
switch down on the overhead
console.
Note: The luggage compartment release
switch in standard configuration operates
when the ignition is in the run or start
position. An optional configuration is
available so that the switch operates when
the ignition is in any position. Contact an
authorized dealer to change these settings.
Note: The luggage compartment release
switch on both the instrument panel and
overhead console function the same.
INTERIOR LUGGAGE
COMPARTMENT RELEASE
WARNINGS
Keep vehicle doors and luggage
compartment locked and keep keys
and remote transmitters out of a
child’s reach. Unsupervised children could
lock themselves in the trunk and risk injury.
Children should be taught not to play in
vehicles.
WARNINGS
Do not leave children or animals
unattended in the vehicle. On hot
days, the temperature in the trunk or
vehicle interior can rise very quickly.
Exposure of people or animals to these
high temperatures for even a short time
can cause death or serious heat-related
injuries, including brain damage. Small
children are particularly at risk.
Your vehicle is equipped with a release
handle that provides a means of escape
for children and adults if they become
locked inside the luggage compartment.
Adults should familiarize themselves with
the operation and location of the release
handle.
E144403
50
Police Interceptor (CPH), enUSA, Edition date: 10/2015, First Printing
Locks
The handle is located inside the luggage
compartment either on the luggage
compartment door (lid) or near the tail
lamps. It is composed of a material that
will glow for hours in darkness following
brief exposure to ambient light.
Pull the handle and push up on the luggage
compartment door (lid) to open from
within the luggage compartment.
51
Police Interceptor (CPH), enUSA, Edition date: 10/2015, First Printing
Locks
ANTI-THEFT ALARM (If Equipped)
Alarm System
The perimeter alarm is a deterrent against
unauthorized access to your vehicle
through the doors, luggage compartment
and the hood.
Triggering the Alarm
Once armed, the alarm is triggered in any
of the following ways:
• If someone opens a door, cargo area
or the hood without a valid key or
remote control.
• If you switch the ignition on without a
valid key.
If the alarm is triggered, the horn will sound
for 30 seconds and the hazard warning
flasher will flash for five minutes.
Any further attempts to perform one of the
above will trigger the alarm again.
Arming the Alarm
To arm the alarm, lock your vehicle. See
Locks (page 48).
Disarming the Alarm
Disarm and silence the alarm by unlocking
the doors with the key and switching the
ignition on within 12 seconds, or by
unlocking the doors or the cargo area with
the remote control.
52
Police Interceptor (CPH), enUSA, Edition date: 10/2015, First Printing
Security
ADJUSTING THE STEERING
WHEEL
WARNING
Do not adjust the steering wheel
when your vehicle is moving.
Note: Make sure that you are sitting in the
correct position. See Sitting in the Correct
Position (page 83).
E191039
1. Unlock the steering column.
2. Adjust the steering wheel to the desired
position.
E191047
3. Lock the steering column.
AUDIO CONTROL
E224575
See your SYNC information.
VOICE CONTROL (If Equipped)
E224574
Phone mode.A
Voice recognition.B
See your SYNC information.
53
Police Interceptor (CPH), enUSA, Edition date: 10/2015, First Printing
Steering Wheel
ADJUSTING THE PEDALS
WARNING
Never use the controls while your
feet are on the accelerator and brake
pedals and the vehicle is moving.
You can find the control on the left side of
the steering column. Press and hold the
appropriate side of the control to move the
pedals.
A B
E162916
A. Farther.
B. Closer.
Note: Adjust the pedals only when your
vehicle is in park (P).
55
Police Interceptor (CPH), enUSA, Edition date: 10/2015, First Printing
Pedals (If Equipped)
WINDSHIELD WIPERS
Note: Fully defrost the windshield before
you switch the windshield wipers on.
Note: Make sure you switch the windshield
wipers off before entering a car wash.
Note: Clean the windshield and wiper
blades if they begin to leave streaks or
smears. If that does not resolve the issue,
install new wiper blades. See Changing
the Wiper Blades (page 187).
Note: Do not operate the wipers on a dry
windshield. This may scratch the glass,
damage the wiper blades or cause the wiper
motor to burn out. Always use the
windshield washers before wiping a dry
windshield.
E213986
Rotate the end of the control:
• Away from you to increase the wiper
speed.
• Toward you to decrease the wiper
speed.
Speed Dependent Wipers
When your vehicle speed increases, the
interval between wipes decreases.
WINDSHIELD WASHERS
Note: Do not operate the wipers on a dry
windshield. This may scratch the glass,
damage the wiper blades or cause the wiper
motor to burn out. Always use the
windshield washers before wiping a dry
windshield.
Note: Do not operate the washers when
the washer reservoir is empty. This may
cause the washer pump to overheat.
E213988
Press the end of the wiper lever to activate
the washer:
• A brief press causes a single wipe
without washer fluid.
• A quick press and hold causes the
wipers to swipe the windshield three
times with washer fluid.
• A long press and hold activates the
wipers and washer fluid for up to 10
seconds.
A wipe occurs a few seconds after washing
to clear any remaining washer fluid. You
can switch this feature on and off through
the information display. See General
Information (page 70).
56
Police Interceptor (CPH), enUSA, Edition date: 10/2015, First Printing
Wipers and Washers
GENERAL INFORMATION
Condensation in Lamp Assemblies
Exterior lamps have vents to
accommodate normal changes in air
pressure.
Condensation can be a natural by-product
of this design. When moist air enters the
lamp assembly through the vents, there is
a possibility that condensation can occur
when the temperature is cold. When
normal condensation occurs, a fine mist
can form on the interior of the lens. The
fine mist eventually clears and exits
through the vents during normal operation.
Clearing time may take as long as 48 hours
under dry weather conditions.
Examples of acceptable condensation are:
• The presence of a fine mist (no streaks,
drip marks or large droplets).
• A fine mist covers less than 50% of the
lens.
Examples of unacceptable condensation
are:
• A water puddle inside the lamp.
• Streaks, drip marks or large droplets
present on the interior of the lens.
If you see any unacceptable condensation,
have your vehicle checked by an authorized
dealer.
LIGHTING CONTROL
E213912
Off.A
Parking lamps, instrument panel
lamps, license plate lamps and
rear lamps.
B
Headlamps.C
High Beams
E167827
Push the lever away from you to switch
the high beam on.
Push the lever forward again or pull the
lever toward you to switch the high beams
off.
57
Police Interceptor (CPH), enUSA, Edition date: 10/2015, First Printing
Lighting
Headlamp Flasher
E163268
Slightly pull the lever toward you and
release it to flash the headlamps.
Spot Lamp Control (If Equipped)
E203952
Use the switch on the chrome handle to
turn the spot lamp on and off.
Rotate and twist the handle to adjust the
position of the spot lamp.
INSTRUMENT LIGHTING
DIMMER
Note: If you disconnect the battery or it runs
out of charge, the illuminated components
will switch to the maximum setting.
E173259
Repeatedly press or press and hold it to
adjust the level.
If the vehicle is not equipped with the Dark
Car feature, press and hold the top of the
control to the full on position to activate
the “dome on” feature. This will turn on the
interior courtesy lights. Press and hold the
bottom of the control to turn off the
interior courtesy lights.
If equipped with the Dark Car feature,
courtesy illumination is disabled. Press and
hold the bottom of the control to turn off
the instrument cluster lights and the
information display lights.
DAYTIME RUNNING LAMPS
WARNING
The daytime running lamps system
does not activate the rear lamps and
may not provide adequate lighting
during low visibility driving conditions. Also,
the autolamps switch position may not
activate the headlamps in all low visibility
conditions, such as daytime fog. Make sure
the headlamps are switched to auto or on,
as appropriate, during all low visibility
conditions. Failure to do so may result in a
crash.
58
Police Interceptor (CPH), enUSA, Edition date: 10/2015, First Printing
Lighting
The daytime running lamps turn on when:
1. The ignition is switched to the on
position.
2. The lighting control is in the off
position, parking lamps position or the
autolamps position, and the sensor
detects daylight.
DIRECTION INDICATORS
E163272
• To operate the left direction indicator,
push the lever down until it stops.
• To operate the right direction indicator,
push the lever up until it stops.
Note: Tap the lever up or down to make the
direction indicators flash three times.
INTERIOR LAMPS
Front Map Lamps (If Equipped)
E163273
The lamps will switch on when:
• You open any door.
• You press the instrument panel dimmer
button until the courtesy lamp turns
on.
• You press a remote control button and
the ignition is off.
To manually switch on the map lamps,
press the outer edge of the clear lens.
Note: If equipped with Dark Car feature, the
courtesy lamps will not turn on.
59
Police Interceptor (CPH), enUSA, Edition date: 10/2015, First Printing
Lighting
Dome Task Lamp (If Equipped)
E203953
Night vision red light on.A
Off position.B
White light on.C
Your vehicle is equipped with a red or white
dome task lamp located in the headliner.
This lamp may be located between the
driver and passenger seat, or at the rear of
your vehicle.
Note: Prolonged use of the dome task lamp
will cause the battery to run out of charge.
60
Police Interceptor (CPH), enUSA, Edition date: 10/2015, First Printing
Lighting
POWER WINDOWS
WARNINGS
Do not leave children unattended in
your vehicle and do not let them play
with the power windows. They may
seriously injure themselves.
When closing the power windows,
you should verify they are free of
obstructions and make sure that
children and pets are not in the proximity
of the window openings.
E146043
Note: You may hear a pulsing noise when
just one of the windows is open. Lower the
opposite window slightly to reduce this
noise.
Press the switch to open the window.
Lift the switch to close the window.
One-Touch Down
Press the switch fully and release it. Press
again or lift it to stop the window.
One-Touch Up
Lift the switch fully and release it. Press or
lift it again to stop the window.
Bounce-Back
The window will stop automatically while
closing. It reverses some distance if there
is an obstacle in the way.
Overriding the Bounce-Back Feature
WARNING
When you override the bounce-back
feature the window will not reverse
if it detects an obstacle. Take care
when closing the windows to avoid
personal injury or damage to your vehicle.
Pull up the window switch and hold within
a few seconds of the window reaching the
bounce-back position. The window travels
up with no bounce-back protection. The
window stops if you release the switch
before the window closes fully.
Window Lock
E144072
Press the control to lock or unlock the rear
window controls. It will illuminate when
you lock the rear window controls.
Accessory Delay
You can use the window switches for
several minutes after you switch the
ignition off or until you open either front
door.
61
Police Interceptor (CPH), enUSA, Edition date: 10/2015, First Printing
Windows and Mirrors
EXTERIOR MIRRORS
Power Exterior Mirrors
WARNING
Do not adjust the mirrors when your
vehicle is moving.
E144073
Left-hand mirror.A
Adjustment control.B
Right-hand mirror.C
To adjust your mirrors, switch your vehicle
on (with the ignition in accessory mode or
the engine running) and then:
1. Select the mirror you want to adjust.
The control lights.
2. Use the adjustment control to adjust
the position of the mirror.
3. Press the mirror control again. The
control light turns off.
Fold-Away Exterior Mirrors
Push the mirror toward the door window
glass. Make sure that you fully engage the
mirror in its support when returning it to its
original position.
Heated Exterior Mirrors (If Equipped)
See Heated Windows and Mirrors (page
81).
Integrated Blind Spot Mirror (If
Equipped)
WARNING
Objects in the blind spot mirror are
closer than they appear.
Blind spot mirrors have an integrated
convex mirror built into the upper outboard
corner of the exterior mirrors. They can
assist you by increasing visibility along the
side of your vehicle.
Check the main mirror first before a lane
change, then check the blind spot mirror.
If no vehicles are present in the blind spot
mirror and the traffic in the adjacent lane
is at a safe distance, signal that you are
going to change lanes. Glance over your
shoulder to verify traffic is clear, and
carefully change lanes.
62
Police Interceptor (CPH), enUSA, Edition date: 10/2015, First Printing
Windows and Mirrors
A
B
C
E138665
The image of the approaching vehicle is
small and near the inboard edge of the
main mirror when it is at a distance. The
image becomes larger and begins to move
outboard across the main mirror as the
vehicle approaches (A). The image
transitions from the main mirror and begins
to appear in the blind spot mirror as the
vehicle approaches (B). The vehicle
transitions to your peripheral field of view
as it leaves the blind spot mirror (C).
Blind Spot Information System (If
Equipped)
See Blind Spot Information System
(page 123).
INTERIOR MIRROR
WARNING
Do not adjust the mirror when your
vehicle is moving.
Note: Do not clean the housing or glass of
any mirror with harsh abrasives, fuel or other
petroleum or ammonia-based cleaning
products.
You can adjust the interior mirror to your
preference. Some mirrors also have a
second pivot point. This lets you move the
mirror head up or down and from side to
side.
Pull the tab below the mirror toward you
to reduce glare at night.
Auto-Dimming Mirror (If Equipped)
Note: Do not block the sensors on the front
and back of the mirror. Mirror performance
may be affected. A rear center passenger or
raised rear center head restraint may also
block light from reaching the sensor.
The mirror will dim automatically to reduce
glare when bright lights are detected from
behind your vehicle. It will automatically
return to normal reflection when you select
reverse gear to make sure you have a clear
view when backing up.
63
Police Interceptor (CPH), enUSA, Edition date: 10/2015, First Printing
Windows and Mirrors
SUN VISORS
Slide-on-rod (If Equipped)
E138666
Rotate the sun visor toward the side
window and extend it rearward for extra
shade.
64
Police Interceptor (CPH), enUSA, Edition date: 10/2015, First Printing
Windows and Mirrors
GAUGES
E213954
Tachometer.A
Information display. See General Information (page 70).B
Speedometer.C
Fuel gauge.D
Information Display
Vehicle Settings and Personalization
See General Information (page 70).
Speedometer
Your vehicle is shipped with a certified
digital speedometer and analog gauge. If
your local procedures require calibration,
utilize the distance per time on-road test
or a radar-based speed test. If a
dynamometer calibration is required,
reference the calibration procedure found
at www.Fleet.Ford.com or check OASIS
for updated information.
Fuel Gauge
Note: The fuel gauge may vary slightly
when your vehicle is moving or on a gradient.
65
Police Interceptor (CPH), enUSA, Edition date: 10/2015, First Printing
Instrument Cluster
Switch the ignition on. The fuel gauge will
indicate approximately how much fuel is
left in the fuel tank. The arrow adjacent to
the fuel pump symbol indicates on which
side of your vehicle the fuel filler door is
located.
The needle should move toward F when
you refuel your vehicle. If the needle points
to E after adding fuel, this indicates your
vehicle needs service soon.
After refueling some variability in needle
position is normal:
• It may take a short time for the needle
to reach full after leaving the gas
station. This is normal and depends
upon the slope of pavement at the gas
station.
• The fuel amount dispensed into the
tank is a little less or more than the
gauge indicated. This is normal and
depends upon the slope of pavement
at the gas station.
• If the gas station nozzle shuts off
before the tank is full, try a different
gas pump nozzle.
• There is a small reserve left in the tank
when the fuel gauge reaches empty.
Low Fuel Reminder
A low fuel reminder triggers when the
distance to empty reaches, 75 mi (120 km),
50 mi (80 km), 25 mi (40 km), 12 mi
(20 km), 0 mi (0 km).
Variations:
Note: The low fuel reminder can appear at
different fuel gauge positions depending on
fuel economy conditions. This variation is
normal.
WARNING LAMPS AND
INDICATORS
The following warning lamps and
indicators alert you to a vehicle condition
that may become serious. Some lamps
illuminate when you start your vehicle to
make sure they work. If any lamps remain
on after starting your vehicle, refer to the
respective system warning lamp for further
information.
Note: Some warning indicators appear in
the information display and function the
same as a warning lamp, but do not display
when you start your vehicle.
Airbag readiness
If this light fails to illuminate
when the ignition is turned on,
continues to flash or remains on,
contact your authorized dealer as soon as
possible. A chime will sound when there is
a malfunction in the indicator light.
Anti-Lock Braking System
If it illuminates when you are
driving, this indicates a
malfunction. You continue to
have the normal braking system (without
ABS) unless the brake system warning
lamp is also illuminated. Have the system
checked by an authorized dealer.
Brake System
E144522
It illuminates when you engage
the parking brake with the
ignition on.
If it illuminates when you are driving, check
that the parking brake is not engaged. If
the parking brake is not engaged, this
indicates low brake fluid level or a brake
system malfunction. Have the system
checked immediately by an authorized
dealer.
66
Police Interceptor (CPH), enUSA, Edition date: 10/2015, First Printing
Instrument Cluster
WARNING
Driving your vehicle with the warning
lamp on is dangerous. A significant
decrease in braking performance
may occur. It will take you longer to stop
your vehicle. Have your vehicle checked by
your authorized dealer immediately. Driving
extended distances with the parking brake
engaged can cause brake failure and the
risk of personal injury.
Charging System
Illuminates when the battery is
not charging properly. If it stays
on while the engine is running,
there may be a malfunction with the
charging system. Contact your authorized
dealer as soon as possible. This indicates
a problem with the electrical system or a
related component.
Cruise Control (If Equipped)
E71340
It illuminates when you switch
this feature on.
Direction Indicator
Illuminates when you switch on
the left or right direction
indicator or the hazard warning
flasher. If the indicators stay on or flash
faster, check for a burned out bulb. See
Changing a Bulb (page 189).
Door Ajar
E213957
Displays when the ignition is on
and any door is not completely
closed.
Engine Coolant Temperature
Illuminates when the engine
coolant temperature is high.
Stop the vehicle as soon as
possible, switch off the engine and let cool.
See Engine Coolant Check (page 176).
Engine Oil
If it illuminates with the engine
running or when you are driving,
this indicates a malfunction.
Stop your vehicle as soon as it is safe to
do so and switch the engine off. Check the
engine oil level. See Engine Oil Check
(page 175).
Note: Do not resume your journey if it
illuminates despite the level being correct.
Have the system checked by an authorized
dealer immediately.
Fasten Seatbelt
It illuminates and a chime
sounds to remind you to fasten
your seatbelt. See Seatbelt
Reminder (page 30).
High Beam
It illuminates when you switch
the high beam headlamps on. It
flashes when you use the
headlamp flasher.
Low Fuel Level
It illuminates when the fuel level
is low or the fuel tank is nearly
empty. Refuel as soon as
possible.
67
Police Interceptor (CPH), enUSA, Edition date: 10/2015, First Printing
Instrument Cluster
Low Tire Pressure Warning
It illuminates when your tire
pressure is low. If the lamp
remains on with the engine
running or when driving, check your tire
pressure as soon as possible.
It also illuminates momentarily when you
switch the ignition on to confirm the lamp
is functional. If it does not illuminate when
you switch the ignition on, or begins to
flash at any time, have the system checked
by an authorized dealer.
Low Washer Fluid
E132353
It illuminates when the
windshield washer fluid is low.
Parking Lamps
It illuminates when you switch
the parking lamps on.
Powertrain Fault
Illuminates when the system
detects a powertrain or an AWD
fault. Contact an authorized
dealer as soon as possible.
Service Engine Soon
If the service engine soon
indicator light stays illuminated
after you start the engine, it
indicates that the On Board Diagnostics
system (OBD) has detected a malfunction
of the vehicle emissions control system.
Refer to On board diagnostics (OBD) in
the Fuel and Refueling chapter for more
information about having your vehicle
serviced. See Emission Control System
(page 99).
If the light is blinking, engine misfire is
occurring which could damage your
catalytic converter. Drive in a moderate
fashion (avoid heavy acceleration and
deceleration) and have your vehicle
serviced immediately.
WARNING
Under engine misfire conditions,
excessive exhaust temperatures
could damage the catalytic
converter, the fuel system, interior floor
coverings or other vehicle components,
possibly causing a fire. Have an authorized
dealer service your vehicle immediately.
The service engine soon indicator light
illuminates when you first switch on the
ignition before engine start to check the
bulb and to indicate whether the vehicle
is ready for Inspection/Maintenance (I/M)
testing.
Normally, the service engine soon light
stays on until you crank the engine, then
turns itself off if no malfunctions are
present. However, if after 15 seconds the
service engine soon light blinks eight times,
it means that the vehicle is not ready for
I/M testing. See Emission Control
System (page 99).
Stability Control
E138639
It flashes when the system is
active. If it remains illuminated
or does not illuminate when you
switch the ignition on, this indicates a
malfunction. During a malfunction the
system switches off. Have the system
checked by an authorized dealer
immediately. See Using Stability
Control (page 116).
68
Police Interceptor (CPH), enUSA, Edition date: 10/2015, First Printing
Instrument Cluster
Stability Control Off
It illuminates when you switch
the system off. It goes out when
you switch the system back on
or when you switch the ignition off. See
Using Stability Control (page 116).
AUDIBLE WARNINGS AND
INDICATORS
Key in Ignition Warning Chime
Sounds when the key is left in the ignition
and the driver’s door is opened.
Headlamps On Warning Chime
Sounds when the headlamps or parking
lamps are on, the ignition is off (the key is
not in the ignition) and the driver’s door is
opened.
Parking Brake On Warning Chime
Sounds when you have left the parking
brake on and drive your vehicle. If the
warning chime remains on after you have
released the parking brake, have the
system checked by your authorized dealer
immediately.
69
Police Interceptor (CPH), enUSA, Edition date: 10/2015, First Printing
Instrument Cluster
GENERAL INFORMATION
WARNING
Driving while distracted can result in
loss of vehicle control, crash and
injury. We strongly recommend that
you use extreme caution when using any
device that may take your focus off the
road. Your primary responsibility is the safe
operation of your vehicle. We recommend
against the use of any hand-held device
while driving and encourage the use of
voice-operated systems when possible.
Make sure you are aware of all applicable
local laws that may affect the use of
electronic devices while driving.
You can control various systems on your
vehicle using the information display
controls on the steering wheel.
Corresponding information appears in the
information display.
Information Display Controls
E213997
• Press the up and down arrow buttons
to scroll through and highlight the
options within a menu.
• Press the right arrow button to enter a
submenu.
• Press the left arrow button to exit a
submenu.
• Press the OK button to choose and
confirm settings or messages.
E204495
This icon gives you the ability to
switch a feature on or off. A
check in the box indicates the
feature is enabled, and unchecked
indicates the feature is disabled.
70
Police Interceptor (CPH), enUSA, Edition date: 10/2015, First Printing
Information Displays
Trip 1 & 2
You can access the menu using the
information display control.
Note: Some options may appear slightly
different or not at all if the items are
optional.
Trip 1 & 2
Digital Speedometer
Trip Odometer
Trip Timer
Average Fuel
• Digital Speedometer - Shows a digital display of your vehicle speed.
• Trip Odometer — Registers the distance of individual journeys.
• Trip Timer — The timer stops when you turn your vehicle off and restarts when you
restart your vehicle.
• Average Fuel — Shows the average fuel economy for a given trip.
Note: Press and hold OK on the current screen to reset the respective trip, distance, time
and fuel information.
Fuel Economy
Fuel Economy
Dist to empty
Inst Fuel Econ
Average Fuel
• Distance to Empty - Shows the approximate distance your vehicle can travel before
running out of fuel.
• Inst Fuel Economy - Shows a visual graph of your instantaneous fuel economy along
with your Avg MPG since the function was last reset.
• Average Fuel — Shows the average fuel economy since last reset.
Note: You can reset your average fuel economy by pressing and holding the OK button on
the left hand steering wheel controls.
71
Police Interceptor (CPH), enUSA, Edition date: 10/2015, First Printing
Information Displays
Information
Information
Coolant Temp. — The engine coolant indicator changes colors indicating: blue for cool,
gray for normal and red for hot. If the engine coolant temperature exceeds the normal
range, stop the vehicle as soon as safely possible, switch off the engine and let the
engine cool.
Engine hours — Displays the hours of engine run time.
Engine Idle hours — Indicates how much time the vehicle idles in Park or Neutral.
Settings
In this mode, you can configure different
driver setting choices.
Note: Some items are optional and may
not appear.
Settings
Traction CtrlDriver Assist
Blindspot
Cross Traffic
Rear Park Aid
Select your applicable languageLanguageDisplay
Miles & Gal., km/L or L/100 kmDistanceUnits
Fahrenheit (°F) or Celsius (°C)Temperature
Normal or TowingDTE calcula-
tion
Convenience
All Doors or Driver FirstRemote UnlockLocks
Oil Life Reset XXX% — Hold OK to ResetOil Life
Reset
Courtesy WipeWipers
72
Police Interceptor (CPH), enUSA, Edition date: 10/2015, First Printing
Information Displays
INFORMATION MESSAGES
Note: Depending on the vehicle options
equipped with your vehicle, not all of the
messages will display or be available.
Certain messages may display abbreviated
or shortened depending upon which cluster
type you have.
E213998
Press the OK button to acknowledge and
remove some messages from the
information display. Other messages
delete automatically after a short time.
You need to confirm certain messages
before you can access the menus.
AdvanceTrac™
ActionMessage
Displayed when the AdvanceTrac® system has detected a
condition that requires service. Contact your authorized dealer
as soon as possible.
Service AdvanceTrac
The driver has disabled or enabled the traction control.AdvanceTrac Off On
Alarm
ActionMessage
Displayed when the perimeter alarm system is armed and the
vehicle is entered using the key on the driver’s side door. In
order to prevent the perimeter alarm system from triggering,
the ignition must be turned to start or on before the 12 second
chime expires.
Vehicle Alarm To Stop
Alarm, Start Vehicle.
73
Police Interceptor (CPH), enUSA, Edition date: 10/2015, First Printing
Information Displays
AWD
ActionMessage
Displayed when the system has been automatically disabled
to protect itself. This is caused by operating the vehicle with
the compact spare tire installed or if the system is overheating.
The system will resume normal function and clear this
message after cycling the ignition on and off and driving a
short distance with the road tire re-installed or after the
system is allowed to cool.
AWD OFF
The all wheel drive system resumes normal function and
clears this message after driving a short distance with the
road tire re-installed or after the system cools.
AWD Restored
Displayed in conjunction with the powertrain malfunction/
reduced power light when the system is not operating properly.
If the warning stays on or continues to come on, contact your
authorized dealer as soon as possible.
Check AWD
Displayed when the system needs its power transfer unit
lubrication changed. This message may be set if the vehicle
has experienced extended periods of extreme/severe duty
cycle driving.
Change AWD Power
Transfer Unit Lube
Battery and Charging System
ActionMessage
Displayed when the charging system needs servicing. If the
warning stays on or continues to come on, contact your
authorized dealer as soon as possible.
Check Charging System
The battery management system detects an extended low
voltage condition. Your vehicle will disable various features
to help preserve the battery. Turn off as many of the electrical
loads as soon as possible to improve the system voltage.
Once the system voltage recovers, the disabled features will
operate as normal.
Low Battery Features
Temporarily Turned Off
The battery management system determines that the battery
is at a low state of charge. Switch the ignition off as soon as
possible to protect the battery. This message clears once you
start the vehicle and the battery state of charge has recovered.
Turning off unnecessary electrical loads allows faster battery
state-of-charge recovery.
Turn Power Off To Save
Battery
74
Police Interceptor (CPH), enUSA, Edition date: 10/2015, First Printing
Information Displays
Blind Spot Information and Cross Traffic Alert System
ActionMessage
Displayed when a fault with the blind spot information system
has occurred. Contact your authorized dealer as soon as
possible.
Blindspot System Fault
Displayed when the blind spot information system/cross
traffic alert system sensors are blocked. Driver can typically
clean the sensor to resolve.
Blindspot Not Available
Sensor Blocked See
Manual
Displayed when the blind spot information system with cross
traffic alert (CTA) system is operating and senses a vehicle.
Vehicle Coming From X
Displayed when the blind spot information system/cross
traffic alert system sensors are blocked. Driver can typically
clean the sensor to resolve.
Cross Traffic Not Avail-
able Sensor Blocked See
Manual
Displayed when a fault with the cross traffic alert system has
occurred. Contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible.
Cross Traffic System
Fault
Brake System
ActionMessage
Indicates the brake fluid level is low and the brake system
should be inspected immediately.
Brake Fluid Level Low
Displayed when the brake system needs servicing. If the
warning stays on or continues to come on, contact your
authorized dealer as soon as possible.
Check Brake System
Displayed when the parking brake is set, the engine is running
and the vehicle is driven more than 3 mph (5 km/h). If the
warning stays on after the parking brake is released, contact
your authorized dealer as soon as possible.
Park Brake Engaged
Doors and Locks
ActionMessage
The liftgate is not completely closed.Trunk Ajar
Displayed when a door is not completely closed.X Door Ajar
75
Police Interceptor (CPH), enUSA, Edition date: 10/2015, First Printing
Information Displays
Fuel
ActionMessage
An early reminder of a low fuel condition.Fuel Level Low
The fuel fill inlet may not be properly closed.Check Fuel Fill Inlet
Maintenance
ActionMessage
Stop your vehicle as soon as safely possible. Switch off the
engine. Check the oil level. If the warning stays on or continues
to come on with your engine running, contact an authorized
dealer as soon as possible.
Low Engine Oil Pressure
Displayed when the engine oil life remaining is 10% or less.Change Engine Oil Soon
Displayed when the oil life left reaches 0%.Oil Change Required
Displayed when the engine coolant temperature is excessively
high.
Engine Coolant Over
Temperature
Indicates the washer fluid reservoir is less than one quarter
full. Check the washer fluid level.
Washer Fluid Level Low
Indicates that your vehicle is still in Transport mode. This may
not allow some features to operate properly. Contact an
authorized dealer.
Transport Mode Contact
Dealer
Indicates that your vehicle is still in Factory mode. This may
not allow some features to operate properly. Contact an
authorized dealer.
Factory Mode Contact
Dealer
Park Aid
ActionMessage
Displayed when the transmission is in R (Reverse) and the
park aid is disabled.
Check Park Aid
Displayed when the transmission is in R (Reverse) and the
park aid is disabled.
Check Rear Park Aid
Displays the park aid status.Rear Park Aid On Off
76
Police Interceptor (CPH), enUSA, Edition date: 10/2015, First Printing
Information Displays
Power Steering
ActionMessage
The power steering system has detected a condition that
requires service. Contact an authorized dealer.
Steering malfunction
Service now
The power steering system is not working. Stop your vehicle
at a safe place. Contact an authorized dealer.
Service Power Steering
Now
The power steering system has detected a condition within
the power steering system, or passive entry or passive start
system requires service. Contact an authorized dealer.
Power Steering Assist
Fault
Reminder Messages
ActionMessage
Displays as a reminder to shift into park.Shift to Park
Displayed when the engine is on, the vehicle is in park and the
driver’s door is opened.
Engine ON
Displayed at key on when the vehicle’s top speed is limited.Speed Limited to xx
MPH/km/h
Seats
ActionMessage
Objects are by the passenger seat. After you move the objects
away from the seat, if the warning stays on or continues to
come on, contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible.
Occupant Sensor
BLOCKED Remove
Objects Near Passenger
Seat
77
Police Interceptor (CPH), enUSA, Edition date: 10/2015, First Printing
Information Displays
Tire Pressure Monitoring System
ActionMessage
One or more tires on your vehicle have low tire pressure. See
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (page 220).
Tire Pressure Low
The tire pressure monitoring system is malfunctioning. If the
warning stays on or continues to come on, contact an
authorized dealer. See Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(page 220).
Tire Pressure Monitor
Fault
A tire pressure sensor is malfunctioning, or your spare tire is
in use. If the warning stays on or continues to come on, contact
an authorized dealer as soon as possible. See Tire Pressure
Monitoring System (page 220).
Tire Pressure Sensor
Fault
Traction Control
ActionMessage
Displays the status of the traction control system. See Using
Traction Control (page 114).
Traction Control Off
78
Police Interceptor (CPH), enUSA, Edition date: 10/2015, First Printing
Information Displays
MANUAL CLIMATE CONTROL
E212004
Fan speed control: Adjust the volume of air circulated in the vehicle.A
Defrost: Select to distribute air through the windshield air vents. Air distribution
to the instrument panel and footwell vents turns off. You can also use this
setting to defrost and clear the windshield of a thin covering of ice.
B
Power: Press to switch the system on and off. When the system is off, it
prevents outside air from entering the vehicle.
C
A/C: Press to switch the air conditioning on or off. Air conditioning cools your
vehicle using outside air. To improve the time to reach a comfortable
temperature in hot weather, drive with the windows open until you feel cold air
through the air vents.
D
Note: In certain conditions (for example, maximum defrost), the air conditioning
compressor may continue to operate even though the air conditioning is
switched off.
Recirculated air: Press to switch between outside air and recirculated air. The
air currently in the passenger compartment recirculates. This can reduce the
time needed to cool the interior and reduce unwanted odors from entering your
vehicle.
E
Note: Recirculated air may also turn on and off automatically in instrument
panel or instrument panel and floor airflow modes during hot weather to improve
cooling efficiency.
79
Police Interceptor (CPH), enUSA, Edition date: 10/2015, First Printing
Climate Control
Temperature control: Controls the temperature of the air circulated in your
vehicle.
F
MAX A/C: Adjust for maximum cooling. Recirculated air flows through the
instrument panel vents, air conditioning automatically turns on and the fan
automatically adjusts to the highest speed.
G
Air distribution control: Adjust to turn airflow from the windshield, instrument
panel, or footwell vents on or off. You can distribute air through the following
combinations: windshield, windshield/floor, panel, panel/floor, and floor.
H
Heated rear window: Press to switch the heated rear window on and off. See
Heated Windows and Mirrors (page 81).
I
HINTS ON CONTROLLING THE
INTERIOR CLIMATE
General Hints
Note: Prolonged use of recirculated air may
cause the windows to fog up.
Note: A small amount of air may be felt
from the footwell air vents regardless of the
air distribution setting.
Note: To reduce humidity build-up inside
your vehicle, do not drive with the system
switched off or with recirculated air always
switched on.
Note: Do not place objects under the front
seats as this may interfere with the airflow
to the rear seats.
Note: Keep the air intakes in front of the
windshield free from obstruction (such as
snow or leaves) to allow the climate control
system to function effectively.
Note: To reduce fogging of the windshield
during humid weather, adjust the air
distribution control to the windshield air
vents position. Increase the temperature
and fan speed and press the A/C button to
improve clearing, if required.
Heating the Interior Quickly
• Adjust the fan speed to the highest
speed setting.
• Adjust the temperature control to the
highest setting.
• Adjust the air distribution control to the
footwell air vents position.
Recommended Settings for
Heating
• Adjust the fan speed to the second
speed setting.
• Adjust the temperature control to the
midway point of the hot settings.
• Adjust the air distribution control to the
footwell and windshield air vents
position.
Cooling the Interior Quickly
• Adjust the fan speed to the highest
speed setting.
• Adjust the temperature control to the
MAX A/C position.
• Adjust the air distribution control to the
instrument panel air vents position.
80
Police Interceptor (CPH), enUSA, Edition date: 10/2015, First Printing
Climate Control
Recommended Settings for
Cooling
• Adjust the fan speed to the second
speed setting.
• Adjust the temperature control to the
midway point of the cold settings.
• Adjust the air distribution control to the
instrument panel air vents position.
Vehicle Stationary for Extended
Periods During Extreme High
Ambient Temperatures
• Apply the parking brake.
• Move the transmission selector lever
to position P or neutral.
• Adjust the temperature control to the
MAX A/C position.
• Adjust the fan speed to the lowest
speed setting.
Side Window Defogging in Cold
Weather
• Adjust the air distribution control to the
instrument panel and windshield air
vents positions.
• Press the A/C button.
• Adjust the temperature control to the
desired setting.
• Adjust the fan speed to the highest
setting.
• Direct the instrument panel side air
vents toward the side windows.
• Close the instrument panel vents.
Maximum Cooling Performance in
Instrument Panel or Instrument
Panel and Footwell Positions
• Adjust the temperature control to the
lowest setting.
• Press the A/C and recirculated air
buttons.
• Adjust the fan speed to the highest
setting initially and then adjust it to suit
the desired comfort level.
HEATED WINDOWS AND
MIRRORS (If Equipped)
Heated Rear Window
Note: Make sure the engine is running
before operating the heated windows.
E184884
Press the button to clear the
heated rear window of thin ice
and fog. The heated rear window
will automatically turn off after a short
period of time. Start the engine before you
switch the heated rear window on.
Note: Do not use razor blades or other
sharp objects to clean or remove decals
from the inside of the heated rear window.
The vehicle warranty does not cover
damage caused to the heated rear window
grid lines.
Heated Exterior Mirror (If Equipped)
When you switch the heated rear window
on, the heated exterior mirrors will
automatically turn on.
Note: Do not remove ice from the mirrors
with a scraper or adjust the mirror glass
when it is frozen in place.
Note: Do not clean the mirror housing or
glass with harsh abrasives, fuel or other
petroleum-based cleaning products.
81
Police Interceptor (CPH), enUSA, Edition date: 10/2015, First Printing
Climate Control
CABIN AIR FILTER
Your vehicle is equipped with a cabin air
filter, which gives you and your passengers
the following benefits:
• It improves your driving comfort by
reducing particle concentration.
• It improves the interior compartment
cleanliness.
• It protects the climate control
components from particle deposits.
You can locate the cabin air filter behind
the glove box.
Note: Make sure you have a cabin air filter
installed at all times. This prevents foreign
objects from entering the system. Running
the system without a filter in place could
result in degradation or damage to the
system.
Replace the filter at regular intervals. See
Scheduled Maintenance (page 310).
For additional cabin air filter information,
or to replace the filter, see an authorized
dealer.
82
Police Interceptor (CPH), enUSA, Edition date: 10/2015, First Printing
Climate Control
SITTING IN THE CORRECT
POSITION
WARNINGS
Sitting improperly, out of position or
with the seatback reclined too far
can take weight off the seat cushion
and affect the decision of the passenger
sensing system, resulting in serious injury
or death in the event of a crash. Always sit
upright against your seat back, with your
feet on the floor.
Do not recline the seatback as this
can cause the occupant to slide
under the safety belt, resulting in
serious injury in the event of a crash.
Do not place objects higher than the
seatback to reduce the risk of serious
injury in the event of a crash or during
heavy braking.
E68595
When you use them properly, the seat,
head restraint, safety belt and airbags will
provide optimum protection in the event
of a crash.
We recommend that you follow these
guidelines:
• Sit in an upright position with the base
of your spine as far back as possible.
• Do not recline the seatback more than
30 degrees.
• Adjust the head restraint so that the
top of it is level with the top of your
head and as far forward as possible.
Make sure that you remain
comfortable.
• Keep sufficient distance between
yourself and the steering wheel. We
recommend a minimum of 10 in
(25 cm) between your breastbone and
the airbag cover.
• Hold the steering wheel with your arms
slightly bent.
• Bend your legs slightly so that you can
press the pedals fully.
• Position the shoulder strap of the
safety belt over the center of your
shoulder and position the lap strap
tightly across your hips.
Make sure that your driving position is
comfortable and that you can maintain full
control of your vehicle.
HEAD RESTRAINTS
WARNINGS
To minimize the risk of neck injury in
the event of a crash, the driver and
passenger occupants should not sit
in or operate the vehicle, until the head
restraint is placed in its proper position.
The driver should never adjust the head
restraint while the vehicle is in motion.
83
Police Interceptor (CPH), enUSA, Edition date: 10/2015, First Printing
Seats
WARNINGS
The adjustable head restraint is a
safety device. Whenever possible it
should be installed and properly
adjusted when the seat is occupied. An
improperly adjusted head restraint may
provide reduced protection to an occupant
during certain rear impacts.
Install the head restraint properly to
help minimize the risk of neck injury
in the event of a crash.
Note: Adjust the seatback to an upright
driving position before adjusting the head
restraint. Adjust the head restraint so that
the top of it is level with the top of your head
and as far forward as possible. Make sure
that you remain comfortable. If you are
extremely tall, adjust the head restraint to
its highest position.
Front seat head restraints
E138642
The head restraints consist of:
An energy absorbing head
restraint.
A
Two steel stems.B
Guide sleeve adjust and release
button.
C
Guide sleeve unlock and remove
button.
D
Adjusting the Head Restraint
Raising the Head Restraint
Pull the head restraint up.
Lowering the Head Restraint
1. Press and hold button C.
2. Push the head restraint down.
Removing the Head Restraint
1. Pull the head restraint up until it
reaches its highest position.
2. Insert a tool, such as a large paper clip,
into the pin hole located on the side of
the guide sleeve adjust and release
button (D).
3. Press and hold buttons C and D.
4. Pull the head restraint up.
Installing the Head Restraint
Align the steel stems into the guide sleeves
and push the head restraint down until in
locks.
Tilting Head Restraints (If Equipped)
The front head restraints tilt for extra
comfort. To tilt the head restraint, do the
following:
84
Police Interceptor (CPH), enUSA, Edition date: 10/2015, First Printing
Seats
E144727
1. Adjust the seatback to an upright
driving or riding position.
2. Pivot the head restraint forward toward
your head to the desired position.
After the head restraint reaches the
forward-most tilt position, pivoting it
forward again will then release it to the
rearward, un-tilted position.
MANUAL SEATS (If Equipped)
Moving the Seat Backward and
Forward
WARNINGS
Do not adjust the driver seat or
seatback when your vehicle is
moving.
Rock the seat backward and forward
after releasing the lever to make sure
that it is fully engaged.
E190838
Recline Adjustment
WARNING
Before returning the seatback to its
original position, make sure that
cargo or any objects are not trapped
behind the seatback. After returning the
seatback to its original position, pull on the
seatback to make sure that it has fully
latched. An unlatched seat may become
dangerous in the event of a sudden stop
or crash.
E201584
85
Police Interceptor (CPH), enUSA, Edition date: 10/2015, First Printing
Seats
Lumbar Adjustment (If Equipped)
E201585
POWER SEATS (If Equipped)
WARNINGS
Do not adjust the driver seat or
seatback when your vehicle is
moving. Adjusting your seatback
while your vehicle is in motion may cause
loss of control of your vehicle.
Do not place cargo or any objects
behind the seatback before returning
it to the original position.
E201586
The control is located on the outboard side
of the seat. Move the switch in the direction
of the arrow to raise or lower the seat
cushion or to move the seat forward,
backward, up or down.
86
Police Interceptor (CPH), enUSA, Edition date: 10/2015, First Printing
Seats
12 Volt DC Power Point
WARNINGS
Do not plug optional electrical
accessories into the cigar lighter
socket. Incorrect use of the cigar
lighter can cause damage not covered by
the vehicle warranty, and can result in fire
or serious injury.
Do not use a power point for
operating a cigar lighter. Incorrect
use of the power points can cause
damage not covered by the vehicle
warranty, and can result in fire or serious
injury.
Note: When you switch the ignition on, you
can use the socket to power 12 volt
appliances with a maximum current rating
of 15 amps.
If the power supply does not work after you
switch the ignition off, switch the ignition
on.
Note: Do not hang any accessory from the
accessory plug.
Note: Do not use the power point over the
vehicle capacity of 12 volt DC 180 watts or
a fuse may blow.
Note: Always keep the power point caps
closed when not in use.
Do not insert objects other than an
accessory plug into the power point. This
will damage the power point and blow the
fuse.
Run the vehicle for full capacity use of the
power point.
To prevent the battery from running out of
charge:
• Do not use the power point longer than
necessary when the vehicle is not
running.
• Do not leave devices plugged in
overnight or when you park your vehicle
for extended periods.
Locations
Power points may be in the following
locations:
• On the instrument panel.
• Inside the center console.
87
Police Interceptor (CPH), enUSA, Edition date: 10/2015, First Printing
Auxiliary Power Points
CENTER CONSOLE (If Equipped)
Stow items in the cup holder carefully as
items may become loose during hard
braking, acceleration or crashes, including
hot drinks which may spill.
Available console features include:
E212130
Cup holder.A
Center storage compartment.B
Console Mounting Plates (If Equipped)
You should only remove and replace the
mounting plates during the upfitting
process. They should not be removed
permanently.
Universal Top Tray (If Equipped)
You can remove the trim on the top of the
instrument panel to aid in upfitting
aftermarket accessories or mounting
equipment.
OVERHEAD CONSOLE
E75193
Press near the rear edge of the door to
open it.
88
Police Interceptor (CPH), enUSA, Edition date: 10/2015, First Printing
Storage Compartments
GENERAL INFORMATION
WARNINGS
Extended idling at high engine
speeds can produce very high
temperatures in the engine and
exhaust system, creating the risk of fire or
other damage.
Do not park, idle or drive your vehicle
on dry grass or other dry ground
cover. The emission system heats up
the engine compartment and exhaust
system, creating the risk of fire.
Do not start the engine in a closed
garage or in other enclosed areas.
Exhaust fumes can be toxic. Always
open the garage door before you start the
engine.
If you smell exhaust fumes inside
your vehicle, have your vehicle
checked by an authorized dealer
immediately. Do not drive your vehicle if
you smell exhaust fumes.
If you disconnect the battery, your vehicle
may exhibit some unusual driving
characteristics for approximately 5 miles
(8 kilometers) after you reconnect it. This
is because the engine management system
must realign itself with the engine. You can
disregard any unusual driving
characteristics during this period.
The powertrain control system meets all
Canadian interference-causing equipment
standard requirements regulating the
impulse electrical field or radio noise.
When you start the engine, avoid pressing
the accelerator pedal before and during
operation. Only use the accelerator pedal
when you have difficulty starting the
engine.
IGNITION SWITCH
E72128
0 (off) - The ignition is off.
Note: When you switch the ignition off and
leave your vehicle, do not leave your key in
the ignition. This could cause your vehicle
battery to lose charge.
I (accessory) - Allows the electrical
accessories, such as the radio, to operate
while the engine is not running.
Note: Do not leave the ignition key in this
position for too long. This could cause your
vehicle battery to lose charge.
II (on) - All electrical circuits are
operational and the warning lamps and
indicators illuminate.
III (start) - cranks the engine.
STARTING A GASOLINE
ENGINE
When you start the engine, the idle speed
increases. This helps to warm up the
engine. If the engine idle speed does not
slow down automatically, have your
vehicle checked by an authorized dealer.
89
Police Interceptor (CPH), enUSA, Edition date: 10/2015, First Printing
Starting and Stopping the Engine
Note: You can crank the engine for a total
of 60 seconds without the engine starting
before the starting system temporarily
disables. The 60 seconds does not have to
be all at once. For example, if you crank the
engine three times for 20 seconds each
time, without the engine starting, you
reached the 60-second time limit. A
message appears in the information display
alerting you that you exceeded the cranking
time. You cannot attempt to start the
engine for at least 15 minutes. After 15
minutes, you are limited to a 15-second
engine cranking time. You need to wait 60
minutes before you can crank the engine for
60 seconds again.
Before starting your vehicle, check the
following:
• Make sure all occupants have fastened
their safety belts.
• Make sure the headlamps and
electrical accessories are off.
• Make sure the parking brake is on.
• Make sure the transmission is in park
(P).
To start the engine, do the following:
Note: Do not touch the accelerator pedal.
1. Fully depress the brake pedal.
2. Turn the key to the start position to
start the engine.
Note: The engine may continue cranking
for up to 15 seconds or until it starts.
Note: If you cannot start the engine on the
first try, wait for a short period and try again.
Failure to Start
If you cannot start the engine after three
attempts, wait 10 seconds and follow this
procedure:
1. Fully depress the brake pedal.
2. Shift into park (P).
3. Fully press the accelerator pedal and
hold it there.
4. Start the engine.
Cold Weather Starting - Flex Fuel
Vehicles
WARNING
Do not use starting fluid, for example
ether, in the air intake system. Such
fluid could cause immediate
explosive damage to the engine and
possible personal injury.
The starting characteristics of all grades
of E85 ethanol make it unsuitable for use
when ambient temperatures fall below
-0°F (-18°C). Consult your fuel distributor
for the availability of winter grade ethanol.
As the outside temperature approaches
freezing, ethanol fuel distributors should
supply winter grade ethanol, the same as
with unleaded gasoline. If summer grade
ethanol is used in cold weather conditions,
0°F to 32°F (-18°C to 0°C), you may
experience increased cranking times, rough
idle or hesitation until the engine has
warmed up.
You may experience a decrease in peak
performance when the engine is cold when
operating on E85 ethanol.
Do not crank the engine for more than 10
seconds at a time. This may cause
damage to the starter motor. If the engine
does not start, turn the key to the off
position and wait 30 seconds before trying
again.
If your vehicle does not start on E85
ethanol, and neither an alternative brand
of E85 ethanol nor an engine block heater
is available, the addition of unleaded
gasoline to the fuel tank improves cold
starting performance.
If the engine fails to start, do the following:
90
Police Interceptor (CPH), enUSA, Edition date: 10/2015, First Printing
Starting and Stopping the Engine
1. Press the accelerator pedal down
one-third to one-half of its travel, and
then crank the engine.
2. When the engine starts, release the
key, then gradually release the
accelerator pedal as the engine speed
increases. If the engine still does not
start, repeat Step 1.
Stopping the Engine When Your
Vehicle is Stationary
1. Shift into park (P).
2. Turn the key to the off position.
3. Apply the parking brake.
Stopping the Engine When Your
Vehicle is Moving
WARNING
Switching off the engine when the
vehicle is still moving will result in a
loss of brake and steering assistance.
The steering will not lock, but higher effort
will be required. When the ignition is
switched off, some electrical circuits,
including air bags, warning lamps and
indicators may also be off. If the ignition
was turned off accidentally, you can shift
into neutral (N) and re-start the engine.
1. Shift into neutral and use the brakes to
bring your vehicle to a safe stop.
2. When your vehicle has stopped, shift
into park (P) and switch the ignition
off.
3. Apply the parking brake.
Guarding Against Exhaust Fumes
WARNING
If you smell exhaust fumes inside
your vehicle, have your vehicle
checked by your authorized dealer
immediately. Do not drive your vehicle if
you smell exhaust fumes. Carbon
monoxide is present in exhaust fumes.
Take precautions to avoid its dangerous
effects.
Important Ventilating Information
If you stop your vehicle and then leave the
engine idling for long periods, we
recommend that you do one of the
following:
• Open the windows at least 1 in (3 cm).
• Set your climate control to outside air.
ENGINE BLOCK HEATER (If
Equipped)
WARNINGS
Failure to follow engine block heater
instructions could result in property
damage or serious personal injury.
Do not use your heater with
ungrounded electrical systems or
two-pronged adapters. There is a risk
of electrical shock.
Do not fully close the hood, or allow
it to drop under its own weight when
using the engine block heater. This
could damage the power cable and may
cause an electrical short resulting in fire,
injury and property damage.
Note: The heater is most effective when
outdoor temperatures are below 0°F
(-18°C).
91
Police Interceptor (CPH), enUSA, Edition date: 10/2015, First Printing
Starting and Stopping the Engine
The heater acts as a starting aid by
warming the engine coolant. This allows
the climate control system to respond
quickly. The equipment includes a heater
element (installed in the engine block) and
a wire harness. You can connect the
system to a grounded 120-volt AC
electrical source.
We recommend that you do the following
for a safe and correct operation:
• Use a 16-gauge outdoor extension cord
that is product certified by
Underwriter’s Laboratory (UL) or
Canadian Standards Association
(CSA). This extension cord must be
suitable for use outdoors, in cold
temperatures, and be clearly marked
Suitable for Use with Outdoor
Appliances. Do not use an indoor
extension cord outdoors. This could
result in an electric shock or become a
fire hazard.
• Use as short an extension cord as
possible.
• Do not use multiple extension cords.
• Make sure that when in operation, the
extension cord plug and heater cord
plug connections are free and clear of
water. This could cause an electric
shock or fire.
• Make sure your vehicle is parked in a
clean area, clear of combustibles.
• Make sure the heater, heater cord and
extension cord are firmly connected.
• Check for heat anywhere in the
electrical hookup once the system has
been operating for approximately 30
minutes.
• Make sure the system is unplugged and
properly stowed before starting and
driving your vehicle. Make sure the
protective cover seals the prongs of the
block heater cord plug when not in use.
• Make sure the heater system is
checked for proper operation before
winter.
Using the Engine Block Heater
Make sure the receptacle terminals are
clean and dry prior to use. Clean them with
a dry cloth if necessary.
The heater uses 0.4 to 1.0 kilowatt-hours
of energy per hour of use. The system does
not have a thermostat. It achieves
maximum temperature after
approximately three hours of operation.
Using the heater longer than three hours
does not improve system performance and
unnecessarily uses electricity.
92
Police Interceptor (CPH), enUSA, Edition date: 10/2015, First Printing
Starting and Stopping the Engine
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
WARNINGS
Do not overfill the fuel tank. The
pressure in an overfilled tank may
cause leakage and lead to fuel spray
and fire.
The fuel system may be under
pressure. If you hear a hissing sound
near the fuel filler inlet, do not refuel
until the sound stops. Otherwise, fuel may
spray out, which could cause serious
personal injury.
Automotive fuels can cause serious
injury or death if misused or
mishandled.
Flow of fuel through a fuel pump
nozzle can produce static electricity.
This can cause a fire if you are filling
an ungrounded fuel container.
Gasoline may contain benzene,
which is a cancer-causing agent.
When refueling always shut the
engine off and never allow sparks or
open flames near the fuel tank filler
valve. Never smoke or use a cell phone
while refueling. Fuel vapor is extremely
hazardous under certain conditions. Avoid
inhaling excess fumes.
Observe the following guidelines when
handling automotive fuel:
• Extinguish all smoking materials and
any open flames before refueling your
vehicle.
• Always turn off the vehicle before
refueling.
• Automotive fuels can be harmful or
fatal if swallowed. Fuel such as
gasoline is highly toxic and if
swallowed can cause death or
permanent injury. If fuel is swallowed,
call a physician immediately, even if no
symptoms are immediately apparent.
The toxic effects of fuel may not be
visible for hours.
• Avoid inhaling fuel vapors. Inhaling too
much fuel vapor of any kind can lead
to eye and respiratory tract irritation.
In severe cases, excessive or prolonged
breathing of fuel vapor can cause
serious illness and permanent injury.
• Avoid getting fuel liquid in your eyes. If
fuel is splashed in the eyes, remove
contact lenses (if worn), flush with
water for 15 minutes and seek medical
attention. Failure to seek proper
medical attention could lead to
permanent injury.
• Fuels can also be harmful if absorbed
through the skin. If fuel is splashed on
the skin, clothing or both, promptly
remove contaminated clothing and
wash skin thoroughly with soap and
water. Repeated or prolonged skin
contact with fuel liquid or vapor causes
skin irritation.
• Be particularly careful if you are taking
Antabuse or other forms of Disulfiram
for the treatment of alcoholism.
Breathing gasoline vapors could cause
an adverse reaction, serious personal
injury or sickness. If fuel is splashed on
the skin, wash the affected areas
immediately with plenty of soap and
water. Consult a physician immediately
if you experience any adverse reactions.
93
Police Interceptor (CPH), enUSA, Edition date: 10/2015, First Printing
Fuel and Refueling
FUEL QUALITY - GASOLINE
Choosing the Right Fuel
E161513
We recommend regular unleaded gasoline
with a pump (R+M)/2 octane rating of 87.
Some fuel stations offer fuels posted as
regular unleaded gasoline with an octane
rating below 87, particularly in high altitude
areas. We do not recommend fuels with
an octane rating below 87.
For vehicles with EcoBoost engines, to
provide improved performance, we
recommend premium fuel for severe duty
usage such as trailer tow.
Do not use any fuel other than those
recommended because they could lead to
engine damage that may not be covered
by the vehicle Warranty.
Note: Use of any fuel other than those
recommended can impair the emission
control system and cause a loss of vehicle
performance.
Do not use:
• Diesel fuel.
• Fuels containing kerosene or paraffin.
• Fuel containing more than 15% ethanol
or E85 fuel.
• Fuels containing methanol.
• Fuels containing metallic-based
additives, including manganese-based
compounds.
• Fuels containing the octane booster
additive, methylcyclopentadienyl
manganese tricarbonyl (MMT).
• Leaded fuel (using leaded fuel is
prohibited by law).
The use of fuels with metallic compounds
such as methylcyclopentadienyl
manganese tricarbonyl (commonly known
as MMT), which is a manganese-based
fuel additive, will impair engine
performance and affect the emission
control system.
Do not be concerned if the engine
sometimes knocks lightly. However, if the
engine knocks heavily while using fuel with
the recommended octane rating, contact
an authorized dealer to prevent any engine
damage.
FUEL QUALITY - E85
Choosing the Right Fuel - Flex Fuel
Vehicles
E161513
Use regular unleaded gasoline with a
minimum pump (R+M)/2 octane rating of
87, or regular unleaded gasoline blended
with a maximum of 85% ethanol (E85).
Flex fuel vehicles have a yellow fuel filler
cap or the fuel tank filler pipe will have a
yellow housing or bezel. Some fuel stations
offer fuels posted as regular unleaded
gasoline with an octane rating below 87,
particularly in high altitude areas. Fuels
with octane levels below 87 are not
recommended.
94
Police Interceptor (CPH), enUSA, Edition date: 10/2015, First Printing
Fuel and Refueling
Do not use any fuel other than those
recommended because they could lead to
engine damage that may not be covered
by the vehicle Warranty.
Note: Use of any fuel other than those
recommended can impair the emission
control system and cause a loss of vehicle
performance.
Do not use:
• Diesel fuel.
• Fuels containing kerosene or paraffin.
• Fuels containing more than 85%
ethanol or E100 fuel.
• Fuels containing methanol.
• Fuels containing metallic-based
additives, including manganese-based
compounds.
• Fuels containing the octane booster
additive, methylcyclopentadienyl
manganese tricarbonyl (MMT).
• Leaded fuel (using leaded fuel is
prohibited by law).
The use of fuels with metallic compounds
such as methylcyclopentadienyl
manganese tricarbonyl (commonly known
as MMT), which is a manganese-based
fuel additive, will impair engine
performance and affect the emission
control system.
Do not be concerned if the engine
sometimes knocks lightly. However, if the
engine knocks heavily while using fuel with
the recommended octane rating, contact
an authorized dealer to prevent any engine
damage.
FUEL FILLER FUNNEL
LOCATION
The fuel filler funnel is located in the spare
wheel storage tray.
RUNNING OUT OF FUEL
Running out of fuel can cause damage not
covered by the vehicle Warranty.
If your vehicle runs out of fuel:
• Add a minimum of 1.3 gal (5 L) of fuel
to restart the engine. If your vehicle is
out of fuel and on a steep slope, more
fuel may be required.
• You may need to switch the ignition
from off to on several times after
refueling to allow the fuel system to
pump the fuel from the tank to the
engine. When restarting, cranking time
takes a few seconds longer than
normal.
Filling a Portable Fuel Container
Use the following guidelines to avoid
electrostatic charge build-up, which can
produce a spark, when filling an
ungrounded fuel container:
• Only use an approved fuel container to
transfer fuel to your vehicle. Place the
container on the ground when filling it.
• Do not fill a fuel container when it is
inside your vehicle (including the cargo
area).
• Keep the fuel pump nozzle in contact
with the fuel container when filling it.
• Do not use a device that holds the fuel
pump nozzle lever in the fill position.
Adding Fuel From a Portable Fuel
Container
WARNINGS
Do not insert the nozzle of a fuel
container or an aftermarket funnel
into the fuel system filler neck. This
may damage the fuel system filler neck or
its seal and cause fuel to run onto the
ground.
95
Police Interceptor (CPH), enUSA, Edition date: 10/2015, First Printing
Fuel and Refueling
WARNINGS
Do not try to pry open or push open
the capless fuel system with foreign
objects. This could damage the fuel
system and its seal and cause injury to you
or others.
Do not dispose of fuel in the
household refuse or the public
sewage system. Use an authorized
waste disposal facility.
When refueling the vehicle fuel tank from
a fuel container, use the plastic funnel
included with your vehicle. See Fuel Filler
Funnel Location (page 95).
Note: Do not use aftermarket funnels as
they will not work with the capless fuel
system and can damage it.
When refueling the vehicle fuel tank from
a fuel container, do the following:
1. Fully open the fuel tank filler door until
it engages.
2. Fully insert the plastic funnel into the
fuel tank filler pipe opening.
E157452
3. Add fuel to your vehicle from the fuel
container.
4. Remove the plastic funnel from the
fuel tank filler pipe opening.
5. Fully close the fuel tank filler door.
6. Clean the plastic funnel and place it
back in your vehicle or properly dispose
of it.
Note: Extra funnels can be purchased from
an authorized dealer if you choose to
dispose of the funnel.
REFUELING
WARNINGS
Do not overfill the fuel tank. The
pressure in an overfilled tank may
cause leakage and lead to fuel spray
and fire.
Do not try to pry open or push open
the capless fuel system with foreign
objects. This could damage the fuel
system and its seal and cause injury to you
or others.
Do not remove the fuel pump nozzle
from its fully inserted position when
refueling.
When refueling always shut the
engine off and never allow sparks or
open flames near the fuel tank filler
valve. Never smoke or use a cell phone
while refueling. Fuel vapor is extremely
hazardous under certain conditions. Avoid
inhaling excess fumes.
Wait at least 10 seconds before
removing the fuel pump nozzle to
allow any residual fuel to drain into
the fuel tank.
Stop refueling when the fuel pump
nozzle automatically shuts off for the
first time. Failure to follow this will
fill the expansion space in the fuel tank and
could lead to fuel overflowing.
Note: Your vehicle does not have a fuel filler
cap.
96
Police Interceptor (CPH), enUSA, Edition date: 10/2015, First Printing
Fuel and Refueling
E206911
A B
C D
Type 1: Left hand side - press the
fuel tank filler door to open it.
A
Type 1: Right hand side - press
the fuel tank filler door to open
it.
B
Type 2: Left hand side - pull the
fuel tank filler door to open it.
C
Type 2: Right hand side - pull the
fuel tank filler door to open it.
D
1. Fully open the fuel tank filler door until
it engages.
E139202
A
Note: When you insert the correct size fuel
pump nozzle a spring loaded inhibitor will
open.
2. Insert the fuel pump nozzle up to the
first notch on the nozzle A. Keep it
resting on the cover of the fuel tank
filler pipe opening.
E139203
A
B
3. Hold the fuel pump nozzle in the lower
position B when refueling. Holding the
fuel pump nozzle in the higher position
A may affect the flow of fuel and shut
off the fuel pump nozzle before the fuel
tank is full.
97
Police Interceptor (CPH), enUSA, Edition date: 10/2015, First Printing
Fuel and Refueling
E206912
A B
4. Operate the fuel pump nozzle within
the area shown.
E119081
5. Slightly raise the fuel pump nozzle and
then slowly remove it.
6. Fully close the fuel tank filler door.
Note: Do not attempt to start the engine
if you have filled the fuel tank with incorrect
fuel. Incorrect fuel use can cause damage
not covered by the vehicle Warranty. Have
your vehicle checked immediately.
FUEL CONSUMPTION
Empty reserve is the amount of fuel
remaining in the tank after the fuel gauge
indicates empty. The amount of usable
fuel in the empty reserve varies and should
not be relied upon to increase driving range.
• The usable capacity of the fuel tank is
the amount of fuel that can be added
into the tank after the gauge indicates
empty.
• The advertised capacity is the total fuel
tank size. See Capacities and
Specifications (page 229). It is the
combined usable capacity plus the
empty reserve.
• Due to the empty reserve, you may not
be able to refuel the full amount of the
advertised capacity of the fuel tank
even when the fuel gauge reads empty.
Filling the Tank
For consistent results when refueling:
• Turn the ignition off before fueling; an
inaccurate reading results if the engine
is left running.
• Use the same fill rate
(low-medium-high) each time the tank
is filled.
• Allow no more than one automatic
shut-off when refueling.
Results are most accurate when the filling
method is consistent.
Calculating Fuel Economy
Do not measure fuel economy during the
first 1,000 mi (1,600 km) of driving (this is
your engine’s break-in period). A more
accurate measurement is obtained after
2,000 mi (3,200 km) to 3,000 mi
(4,800 km). Also, fuel expense, frequency
of fill ups or fuel gauge readings are not
accurate ways to measure fuel economy.
1. Fill the fuel tank completely and record
the initial odometer reading.
2. Each time you fill the fuel tank, record
the amount of fuel added.
3. After at least three fill ups, fill the fuel
tank and record the current odometer
reading.
98
Police Interceptor (CPH), enUSA, Edition date: 10/2015, First Printing
Fuel and Refueling
4. Subtract your initial odometer reading
from the current odometer reading.
To calculate L/100 km (liters per 100
kilometers) fuel consumption, multiply the
liters used by 100, then divide by kilometers
traveled. To calculate MPG (miles per
gallon) fuel consumption, divide miles
traveled by gallons used.
Keep a record for at least one month and
record the type of driving (city or highway).
This provides an accurate estimate of your
vehicle’s fuel economy under current
driving conditions. Keeping records during
summer and winter will show how
temperature impacts fuel economy.
Conditions
• Heavily loading your vehicle reduces
fuel economy.
• Carrying unnecessary weight in your
vehicle may reduce fuel economy.
• Adding certain accessories to your
vehicle such as bug deflectors, rollbars
or light bars, running boards and ski
racks may reduce fuel economy.
• Using fuel blended with alcohol may
lower fuel economy.
• Fuel economy may decrease with lower
temperatures.
• Fuel economy may decrease when
driving short distances.
• You will get better fuel economy when
driving on flat terrain than when driving
on hilly terrain.
EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM
WARNINGS
Do not park, idle, or drive your vehicle
in dry grass or other dry ground cover.
The emission system heats up the
engine compartment and exhaust system,
which can start a fire.
WARNINGS
Exhaust leaks may result in entry of
harmful and potentially lethal fumes
into the passenger compartment. If
you smell exhaust fumes inside your
vehicle, have your dealer inspect your
vehicle immediately. Do not drive if you
smell exhaust fumes.
Your vehicle is equipped with various
emission control components and a
catalytic converter that will enable your
vehicle to comply with applicable exhaust
emission standards.
To make sure that the catalytic converter
and other emission control components
continue to work properly:
• Use only the specified fuel listed.
• Avoid running out of fuel.
• Do not turn off the ignition while your
vehicle is moving, especially at high
speeds.
• Have the items listed in scheduled
maintenance information performed
according to the specified schedule.
The scheduled maintenance items listed
in scheduled maintenance information are
essential to the life and performance of
your vehicle and to its emissions system.
If you use anything other than Ford,
Motorcraft or Ford-authorized parts for
maintenance replacements or for service
of components affecting emission control,
such non-Ford parts should be equivalent
to genuine Ford Motor Company parts in
performance and durability.
Illumination of the service engine soon
indicator, charging system warning light or
the temperature warning light, fluid leaks,
strange odors, smoke or loss of engine
power could indicate that the emission
control system is not working properly.
99
Police Interceptor (CPH), enUSA, Edition date: 10/2015, First Printing
Fuel and Refueling
An improperly operating or damaged
exhaust system may allow exhaust to
enter the vehicle. Have a damaged or
improperly operating exhaust system
inspected and repaired immediately.
Do not make any unauthorized changes to
your vehicle or engine. By law, vehicle
owners and anyone who manufactures,
repairs, services, sells, leases, trades
vehicles, or supervises a fleet of vehicles
are not permitted to intentionally remove
an emission control device or prevent it
from working. Information about your
vehicle’ s emission system is on the Vehicle
Emission Control Information Decal
located on or near the engine. This decal
also lists engine displacement.
Please consult your warranty information
for complete details.
On-Board Diagnostics (OBD-II)
Your vehicle has a computer known as the
on-board diagnostics system (OBD-II) that
monitors the engine’s emission control
system. The system protects the
environment by making sure that your
vehicle continues to meet government
emission standards. The OBD-II system
also assists a service technician in properly
servicing your vehicle.
When the service engine soon
indicator illuminates, the OBD-II
system has detected a
malfunction. Temporary malfunctions may
cause the service engine soon indicator to
illuminate. Examples are:
1. Your vehicle has run out of fuel—the
engine may misfire or run poorly.
2. Poor fuel quality or water in the
fuel—the engine may misfire or run
poorly.
3. The fuel fill inlet may not have closed
properly. See Refueling (page 96).
4. Driving through deep water—the
electrical system may be wet.
You can correct these temporary
malfunctions by filling the fuel tank with
good quality fuel, properly closing the fuel
fill inlet or letting the electrical system dry
out. After three driving cycles without these
or any other temporary malfunctions
present, the service engine soon indicator
should stay off the next time you start the
engine. A driving cycle consists of a cold
engine startup followed by mixed city and
highway driving. No additional vehicle
service is required.
If the service engine soon indicator remains
on, have your vehicle serviced at the first
available opportunity. Although some
malfunctions detected by the OBD-II may
not have symptoms that are apparent,
continued driving with the service engine
soon indicator on can result in increased
emissions, lower fuel economy, reduced
engine and transmission smoothness and
lead to more costly repairs.
Readiness for Inspection and
Maintenance (I/M) Testing
Some state and provincial and local
governments may have
Inspection/Maintenance (I/M) programs
to inspect the emission control equipment
on your vehicle. Failure to pass this
inspection could prevent you from getting
a vehicle registration.
If the service engine soon
indicator is on or the bulb does
not work, your vehicle may need
service. See On-Board Diagnostics.
100
Police Interceptor (CPH), enUSA, Edition date: 10/2015, First Printing
Fuel and Refueling
Your vehicle may not pass the I/M test if
the service engine soon indicator is on or
not working properly (bulb is burned out),
or if the OBD-II system has determined
that some of the emission control systems
have not been properly checked. In this
case, the vehicle is not ready for I/M
testing.
If the vehicle’s engine or transmission has
just been serviced, or the battery has
recently run down or been replaced, the
OBD-II system may indicate that the
vehicle is not ready for I/M testing. To
determine if the vehicle is ready for I/M
testing, turn the ignition key to the on
position for 15 seconds without cranking
the engine. If the service engine soon
indicator blinks eight times, it means that
the vehicle is not ready for I/M testing; if
the service engine soon indicator stays on
solid, it means that your vehicle is ready
for I/M testing.
The OBD-II system checks the emission
control system during normal driving. A
complete check may take several days.
If the vehicle is not ready for I/M testing,
you can perform the following driving cycle
consisting of mixed city and highway
driving:
1. 15 minutes of steady driving on an
expressway or highway followed by 20
minutes of stop-and-go driving with at
least four 30-second idle periods.
2. Allow your vehicle to sit for at least
eight hours with the ignition off. Then,
start the vehicle and complete the
above driving cycle. The vehicle must
warm up to its normal operating
temperature. Once started, do not turn
off the vehicle until the above driving
cycle is complete.
If the vehicle is still not ready for I/M
testing, you need to repeat the above
driving cycle.
101
Police Interceptor (CPH), enUSA, Edition date: 10/2015, First Printing
Fuel and Refueling
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
WARNINGS
Always set the parking brake fully
and make sure the gearshift is
latched in park (P). Turn the ignition
to the off position and remove the key
whenever you leave your vehicle.
Do not apply the brake pedal and
accelerator pedal simultaneously.
Applying both pedals simultaneously
for more than three seconds will limit
engine rpm, which may result in difficulty
maintaining speed in traffic and could lead
to serious injury.
Understanding the Positions of
Your Automatic Transmission
Putting your vehicle in or out of gear:
1. Fully press down the brake pedal.
2. Move the gearshift lever into the
desired gear.
3. Come to a complete stop.
4. Move the gearshift lever and securely
latch it in park (P).
E206672
Park (P)
This position locks the transmission and
prevents the wheels from turning.
Reverse (R)
With the gearshift lever in reverse (R), your
vehicle will move backward. Always come
to a complete stop before shifting into and
out of reverse (R).
Neutral (N)
With the gearshift lever in neutral (N), your
vehicle can be started and is free to roll.
Hold the brake pedal down while in this
position.
Drive (D)
Drive (D) is the normal driving position for
the best fuel economy. The overdrive
function allows automatic upshifts and
downshifts through gears one through six.
Low (L)
The low (L) button is located at the end
of the column shifter. Activating low (L)
gear:
• Provides maximum engine braking.
• Will downshift to the lowest available
gear for the current vehicle speed;
allows for first gear when vehicle
reaches lower speeds.
• Is not intended for use under extended
or normal driving conditions and results
in lower fuel economy.
Brake-Shift Interlock
WARNINGS
Do not drive your vehicle until you
verify that the brake lamps are
working.
When doing this procedure, you will
be taking your vehicle out of park (P)
which means your vehicle can roll
freely. To avoid unwanted vehicle
movement, always fully set the parking
brake prior to doing this procedure. Use
wheel chocks if appropriate.
102
Police Interceptor (CPH), enUSA, Edition date: 10/2015, First Printing
Transmission
WARNINGS
If you fully release the parking brake
and the brake warning lamp remains
illuminated, the brakes may not be
working properly. See your authorized
dealer.
Your vehicle is equipped with a brake-shift
interlock feature that prevents moving the
gearshift lever from park (P) when the
ignition is in the on position and the brake
pedal is not pressed.
If you cannot move the gearshift lever out
of park (P) position with the ignition in the
on position and the brake pedal pressed,
a malfunction may have occurred. It is
possible that a fuse has blown or your
vehicle’s brake lamps are not operating
properly. See Fuse Specification Chart
(page 159).
If the fuse is not blown and the brake
lamps are working properly, the following
procedure will allow you to move the
gearshift lever from park (P):
1. Apply the parking brake. Turn the
ignition key to the off position, then
remove the key.
2. Move the steering column to the full
down and full rearward position
(toward the driver’s seat).
3. Remove the gearshift lever boot.
4. Place fingers into gearshift lever boot
hole and pull top half of shroud up and
forward to separate it from the lower
half of the shroud. There is a hinge at
the forward edge of the top shroud.
Roll the top half of the shroud upward
on the hinge point to clear the hazard
flasher button, then pull straight
rearward toward the driver’s seat to
remove.
5. Remove the top half of the shroud.
6. Remove the three fasteners under the
column that secure the lower shroud
half to the column.
E163185
7. Pull the lock lever into the full unlocked
position and remove the lower shroud
cover by pulling the lever handle
through the slot in the cover.
E163186
8. Apply the brake, pull the white disk
then move the shifter to neutral (N).
9. Start your vehicle.
Perform Steps 4 through 8 in reverse order,
making sure to engage the hinge pivots
between the upper and lower halves of the
shroud. Keep slight pressure in the forward
direction as the halves rotate together.
See your authorized dealer as soon as this
procedure is used.
103
Police Interceptor (CPH), enUSA, Edition date: 10/2015, First Printing
Transmission
Automatic Transmission Adaptive
Learning
This feature is designed to increase
durability and provide consistent shift feel
over the life of the vehicle. A new vehicle
or transmission may have firm shifts, soft
shifts or both. This operation is considered
normal and will not affect function or
durability of the transmission. Over time,
the adaptive learning process will fully
update transmission operation.
Additionally, whenever the battery is
disconnected or a new battery installed,
the strategy must be relearned.
If Your Vehicle Gets Stuck In Mud
or Snow
Note: Do not rock the vehicle if the engine
is not at normal operating temperature or
damage to the transmission may occur.
Note: Do not rock the vehicle for more than
a minute or damage to the transmission and
tires may occur, or the engine may overheat.
If your vehicle gets stuck in mud or snow,
it may be rocked out by shifting between
forward and reverse gears, stopping
between shifts in a steady pattern. Press
lightly on the accelerator in each gear.
104
Police Interceptor (CPH), enUSA, Edition date: 10/2015, First Printing
Transmission
USING ALL-WHEEL DRIVE
All-wheel drive uses all four wheels to
power the vehicle. This increases traction,
enabling you to drive over terrain and road
conditions that a conventional two-wheel
drive vehicle cannot. The AWD system is
active all the time and requires no input
from the operator.
Note: Your AWD vehicle is not intended for
off-road use. The AWD feature gives your
vehicle some limited off-road capabilities
in which driving surfaces are relatively level,
obstruction-free and otherwise similar to
normal on-road driving conditions.
Operating your vehicle under other than
those conditions could subject the vehicle
to excessive stress which might result in
damage which is not covered under your
warranty.
Note: The Power Transfer Unit (PTU) does
not require any normal scheduled
maintenance. The system is electronically
monitored and notifies the driver of required
service by displaying the message Change
AWD Power Transfer Unit Lube in the
information display. The PTU lubricant will
be more likely to require a fluid change if the
vehicle has experienced extended periods
of extreme or severe duty cycle driving. Do
not check or change the PTU lubricant
unless the unit shows signs of leakage or a
message indicating required service is
displayed. Contact an authorized dealer for
service if the PTU was submerged in water
and to reset the PTU lube life monitor.
Note: When an AWD system fault is
present, the warning Check AWD displays
in the information display. The AWD system
is not functioning correctly and defaulted
to front-wheel drive. When this warning
displays, have your vehicle serviced at an
authorized dealer.
Note: The AWD OFF message may also
appear in the information display if the AWD
system overheats and defaults to
front-wheel drive. This may occur if the
vehicle is operated in extreme conditions
with excessive wheel slip, such as deep
sand. To resume normal AWD function as
soon as possible, stop the vehicle in a safe
location and stop the engine for at least 10
minutes. After the engine has been
restarted and the AWD system has
adequately cooled, the AWD OFF message
will turn off and normal AWD function
returns. If the engine is not stopped, the
AWD OFF message turns off when the
system cools and normal AWD function
returns.
105
Police Interceptor (CPH), enUSA, Edition date: 10/2015, First Printing
All-Wheel Drive (If Equipped)
All-Wheel Drive Messages
Action / DescriptionAWD Messages
Displayed when the system has been
automatically disabled to protect itself.
This is caused by operating the vehicle with
the compact spare tire installed or if the
system is overheating. The system will
resume normal function and clear this
message after cycling the ignition on and
off and driving a short distance with the
road tire re-installed or after the system is
allowed to cool.
AWD OFF
Displayed in conjunction with the power-
train malfunction/reduced power light
when the system is not operating properly.
If the warning stays on or continues to
come on, contact your authorized dealer
as soon as possible.
Check AWD
Displayed when the system needs its power
transfer unit lubrication changed. This
message may be set if the vehicle has
experienced extended periods of extreme/
severe duty cycle driving.
Change AWD Power Transfer Unit Lube
Operating AWD Vehicles With
Spare Tires
A spare tire of a different size other than
the tire provided should never be used. The
AWD system may disable automatically
and enter front-wheel drive only mode to
protect driveline components if a non-full
sized tire is installed. This condition may
display an AWD OFF message in the
information display. If there is an AWD OFF
message in the information display from
using a non-full sized spare tire, this
indicator should turn off after reinstalling
the repaired or replaced normal road tire
and cycling the ignition off and on. It is
recommended to reinstall the repaired or
replaced road tire as soon as possible.
Major dissimilar tire sizes between the front
and rear axles (for example, 17 inch low
profile tires on the front axle and 22 inch
high profile tires on the rear axle) could
cause the AWD system to stop functioning
and default to front-wheel drive or damage
the AWD system.
106
Police Interceptor (CPH), enUSA, Edition date: 10/2015, First Printing
All-Wheel Drive (If Equipped)
Operating AWD Vehicles With
Mismatched Tires
WARNING
Only use replacement tires and
wheels that are the same size, load
index, speed rating and type (such
as P-metric versus LT-metric or all-season
versus all-terrain) as those originally
provided by Ford. The recommended tire
and wheel size may be found on either the
Safety Compliance Certification Label
(affixed to either the door hinge pillar,
door-latch post, or the door edge that
meets the door-latch post, next to the
driver’s seating position), or the Tire Label
which is located on the B-Pillar or edge of
the driver’s door. If this information is not
found on these labels, then you should
contact your authorized dealer as soon as
possible. Use of any tire or wheel not
recommended by Ford can affect the
safety and performance of your vehicle,
which could result in an increased risk of
loss of vehicle control, vehicle rollover,
personal injury and death. Additionally the
use of non-recommended tires and wheels
could cause steering, suspension, axle,
transfer case or power transfer unit failure.
If you have questions regarding tire
replacement, contact your authorized
dealer as soon as possible.
Major dissimilar tire sizes between the front
and rear axles (for example, 17 inch low
profile tires on the front axle and 22 inch
high profile tires on the rear axle) could
cause the AWD system to stop functioning
and default to front-wheel drive or damage
the AWD system. However, the AWD
system is capable of tolerating any
combination of new and worn tires of the
same original tire size. For example, using
3 worn tread tires and 1 new tread tire all
of the same original tire size, can be
tolerated by the AWD system.
Driving In Special Conditions With
All-Wheel Drive (AWD)
AWD vehicles are equipped for driving on
sand, snow, mud and rough roads and have
operating characteristics that are
somewhat different from conventional
vehicles, both on and off the highway.
When driving at slow speeds in deep sand
under high outside temperatures, use a low
gear when possible. Lower gear operation
will maximize the engine and transmission
cooling capability.
Under severe operating conditions, the A/C
may cycle on and off to protect
overheating of the engine.
Basic operating principles in special
conditions
• Drive slower in strong crosswinds which
can affect the normal steering
characteristics of your vehicle.
• Be extremely careful when driving on
pavement made slippery by loose sand,
water, gravel, snow or ice.
107
Police Interceptor (CPH), enUSA, Edition date: 10/2015, First Printing
All-Wheel Drive (If Equipped)
If Your Vehicle Goes Off the Edge of the
Pavement
• If your vehicle goes off the edge of the
pavement, slow down, but avoid severe
brake application, ease the vehicle
back onto the pavement only after
reducing your speed. Do not turn the
steering wheel too sharply while
returning to the road surface.
• It may be safer to stay on the apron or
shoulder of the road and slow down
gradually before returning to the
pavement. You may lose control if you
do not slow down or if you turn the
steering wheel too sharply or abruptly.
• It often may be less risky to strike small
objects, such as highway reflectors,
with minor damage to your vehicle
rather than attempt a sudden return to
the pavement which could cause the
vehicle to slide sideways out of control
or rollover. Remember, your safety and
the safety of others should be your
primary concern.
If Your Vehicle Gets Stuck
WARNINGS
Always set the parking brake fully
and make sure the transmission is in
P (Park). Turn the ignition to the lock
position or turn the vehicle off using the
start/stop button and remove the key
whenever you leave your vehicle.
If the parking brake is fully released,
but the brake warning lamp remains
illuminated, the brakes may not be
working properly. See your authorized
dealer.
Do not spin the wheels at over 35
mph (56 km/h). The tires may fail
and injure a passenger or bystander.
Note: Do not rock the vehicle if the engine
is not at normal operating temperature or
damage to the transmission may occur.
Note: Do not rock the vehicle for more than
a few minutes or damage to the
transmission and tires may occur or the
engine may overheat.
If your vehicle gets stuck in mud or snow it
may be rocked out by shifting between
forward and reverse gears, stopping
between shifts, in a steady pattern. Press
lightly on the accelerator in each gear.
If your vehicle is equipped with
AdvanceTrac® with Roll Stability
Control™, it may be beneficial to
disengage the AdvanceTrac® with Roll
Stability Control™ system while
attempting to rock the vehicle.
Emergency Maneuvers
• In an unavoidable emergency situation
where a sudden sharp turn must be
made, remember to avoid
"over-driving" your vehicle (that is, turn
the steering wheel only as rapidly and
as far as required to avoid the
emergency). Excessive steering will
result in less vehicle control, not more.
Additionally, smooth variations of the
accelerator and/or brake pedal
pressure should be utilized if changes
in vehicle speed are called for. Avoid
abrupt steering, acceleration or braking
which could result in an increased risk
of loss of vehicle control, vehicle
rollover and/or personal injury. Use all
available road surface to return the
vehicle to a safe direction of travel.
• In the event of an emergency stop,
avoid skidding the tires and do not
attempt any sharp steering wheel
movements.
• If the vehicle goes from one type of
surface to another (that is, from
concrete to gravel) there will be a
change in the way the vehicle responds
to a maneuver (steering, acceleration
or braking). Again, avoid these abrupt
inputs.
108
Police Interceptor (CPH), enUSA, Edition date: 10/2015, First Printing
All-Wheel Drive (If Equipped)
Sand
Most of the time traction control improves
tire traction by managing wheel slip
through Brake, Engine, and AWD
calibrations. However, during low speed
driving, disabling traction control in deep
sand can help keep the wheels moving to
maintain vehicle momentum.
When driving over sand, try to keep all four
wheels on the most solid area of the trail.
Avoid reducing the tire pressures but shift
to a lower gear and drive steadily through
the terrain. Apply the accelerator slowly
and avoid spinning the wheels.
Do not drive your vehicle in deep sand for
an extended period of time. This could
cause the AWD system to overheat and
default to front-wheel drive. If this occurs,
an AWD OFF message displays in the
information display. To resume normal
AWD function as soon as possible, stop
the vehicle in a safe location and stop the
engine for at least 10 minutes. After the
engine has been restarted and the AWD
system has adequately cooled, the AWD
OFF message turns off and normal AWD
function returns. In the event the engine is
not stopped, the AWD OFF message turns
off when the system cools and normal
AWD function returns.
When driving at slow speeds in deep sand
under high outside temperatures, use L
(Low) gear when possible. L (Low) gear
operation will maximize the engine and
transmission cooling capability.
Under severe operating conditions, the A/C
may cycle on and off to protect
overheating of the engine.
Avoid excessive speed because vehicle
momentum can work against you and
cause the vehicle to become stuck to the
point that assistance may be required from
another vehicle. Remember, you may be
able to back out the way you came if you
proceed with caution.
Mud and Water
If you must drive through high water, drive
slowly. Traction or brake capability may
be limited.
When driving through water, determine the
depth; avoid water higher than the bottom
of the wheel rims (for cars) or the bottom
of the hubs (for trucks) (if possible) and
proceed slowly. If the ignition system gets
wet, the vehicle may stall.
Once through water, always try the brakes.
Wet brakes do not stop the vehicle as
effectively as dry brakes. Drying can be
improved by moving your vehicle slowly
while applying light pressure on the brake
pedal.
Be cautious of sudden changes in vehicle
speed or direction when you are driving in
mud. Even AWD vehicles can lose traction
in slick mud. As when you are driving over
sand, apply the accelerator slowly and
avoid spinning your wheels. If the vehicle
does slide, steer in the direction of the slide
until you regain control of the vehicle.
After driving through mud, clean off residue
stuck to rotating driveshafts and tires.
Excess mud stuck on tires and rotating
driveshafts causes an imbalance that
could damage drive components.
Note: Driving through deep water may
damage the transmission.
If the front or rear axle is submerged in
water, have the power transfer unit (PTU)
or rear axle serviced by an authorized
dealer.
E143950
109
Police Interceptor (CPH), enUSA, Edition date: 10/2015, First Printing
All-Wheel Drive (If Equipped)
“Tread Lightly” is an educational program
designed to increase public awareness of
land-use regulations and responsibilities
in our nations wilderness areas. Ford Motor
Company joins the U.S. Forest Service and
the Bureau of Land Management in
encouraging you to help preserve our
national forest and other public and private
lands by “treading lightly.”
Driving on Hilly or Sloping Terrain
Note: Avoid driving crosswise or turning on
steep slopes or hills. A danger lies in losing
traction, slipping sideways and possibly
rolling over. Whenever driving on a hill,
determine beforehand the route you will
use. Do not drive over the crest of a hill
without seeing what conditions are on the
other side. Do not drive in reverse over a hill
without the aid of an observer.
Although natural obstacles may make it
necessary to travel diagonally up or down
a hill or steep incline, you should always
try to drive straight up or straight down.
When climbing a steep slope or hill, start
in a lower gear rather than downshifting to
a lower gear from a higher gear once the
ascent has started. This reduces strain on
the engine and the possibility of stalling.
If you do stall out, do not try to turnaround
because you might roll over. It is better to
back down to a safe location.
Apply just enough power to the wheels to
climb the hill. Too much power will cause
the tires to slip, spin or lose traction,
resulting in loss of vehicle control.
E143949
Descend a hill in the same gear you would
use to climb up the hill to avoid excessive
brake application and brake overheating.
Do not descend in neutral; instead,
disengage overdrive or manually shift to a
lower gear. When descending a steep hill,
avoid sudden hard braking as you could
lose control. The front wheels have to be
turning in order to steer the vehicle.
Your vehicle has anti-lock brakes, therefore
apply the brakes steadily. Do not “pump”
the brakes.
Driving on Snow and Ice
WARNING
If you are driving in slippery
conditions that require tire chains or
cables, then it is critical that you drive
cautiously. Keep speeds down, allow for
longer stopping distances and avoid
aggressive steering to reduce the chances
of a loss of vehicle control which can lead
to serious injury or death. If the rear end of
the vehicle slides while cornering, steer in
the direction of the slide until you regain
control of the vehicle.
Note: Excessive tire slippage can cause
driveline damage.
AWD vehicles have advantages over 2WD
vehicles in snow and ice but can skid like
any other vehicle.
110
Police Interceptor (CPH), enUSA, Edition date: 10/2015, First Printing
All-Wheel Drive (If Equipped)
Should you start to slide while driving on
snowy or icy roads, turn the steering wheel
in the direction of the slide until you regain
control.
Avoid sudden applications of power and
quick changes of direction on snow and
ice. Apply the accelerator slowly and
steadily when starting from a full stop.
Avoid sudden braking as well. Although an
AWD vehicle may accelerate better than
a two-wheel drive vehicle in snow and ice,
it won’t stop any faster, because as in other
vehicles, braking occurs at all four wheels.
Do not become overconfident as to road
conditions.
Make sure you allow sufficient distance
between you and other vehicles for
stopping. Drive slower than usual and
consider using one of the lower gears. In
emergency stopping situations, apply the
brake steadily. Since your vehicle is
equipped with a four wheel (ABS), do not
“pump” the brakes. See Hints on Driving
With Anti-Lock Brakes (page 112).
Maintenance and Modifications
The suspension and steering systems on
your vehicle have been designed and
tested to provide predictable performance
whether loaded or empty and durable load
carrying capability. For this reason, Ford
Motor Company strongly recommends that
you do not make modifications such as
adding or removing parts (such as lowering
kits or stabilizer bars) or by using
replacement parts not equivalent to the
original factory equipment.
Any modifications to a vehicle that raise
the center of gravity can make it more likely
the vehicle will rollover as a result of a loss
of control. Ford Motor Company
recommends that caution be used with
any vehicle equipped with a high load or
device (such as ladder or luggage racks).
Failure to maintain your vehicle properly
may void the warranty, increase your repair
cost, reduce vehicle performance and
operational capabilities and adversely
affect driver and passenger safety.
Frequent inspection of vehicle chassis
components is recommended if the vehicle
is subjected to off-highway usage.
111
Police Interceptor (CPH), enUSA, Edition date: 10/2015, First Printing
All-Wheel Drive (If Equipped)
GENERAL INFORMATION
Note: Occasional brake noise is normal. If
a metal-to-metal, continuous grinding or
continuous squeal sound is present, the
brake linings may be worn-out. Have the
system checked by an authorized dealer. If
your vehicle has continuous vibration or
shudder in the steering wheel while braking,
have it checked by an authorized dealer.
Note: Brake dust may accumulate on the
wheels, even under normal driving
conditions. Some dust is inevitable as the
brakes wear and does not contribute to
brake noise. See Cleaning the Alloy
Wheels (page 197).
Note: Depending on applicable laws and
regulations in the country for which your
vehicle was originally built, your brake lamps
may flash during heavy braking. Following
this, your hazard lights may also flash when
your vehicle comes to a stop.
E144522
See Warning Lamps and
Indicators (page 66).
Wet brakes result in reduced braking
efficiency. Gently press the brake pedal a
few times when driving from a car wash or
standing water to dry the brakes.
Brake Over Accelerator
In the event the accelerator pedal
becomes stuck or entrapped, apply steady
and firm pressure to the brake pedal to
slow the vehicle and reduce engine power.
If you experience this condition, apply the
brakes and bring your vehicle to a safe
stop. Move the transmission to park (P),
switch the engine off and apply the parking
brake. Inspect the accelerator pedal for
any interference. If none are found and the
condition persists, have your vehicle towed
to the nearest authorized dealer.
Brake Assist
Brake assist detects when you brake
rapidly by measuring the rate at which you
press the brake pedal. It provides
maximum braking efficiency as long as you
press the pedal, and can reduce stopping
distances in critical situations.
Anti-lock Brake System
This system helps you maintain steering
control during emergency stops by keeping
the brakes from locking.
This lamp momentarily
illuminates when you turn the
ignition on. If the light does not
illuminate during start up, remains on or
flashes, the system may be disabled. Have
the system checked by an authorized
dealer. If the anti-lock brake system is
disabled, normal braking is still effective.
E144522
If the brake warning lamp
illuminates when you release the
parking brake, have the system
checked by an authorized dealer.
HINTS ON DRIVING WITH
ANTI-LOCK BRAKES
Note: When the system is operating, the
brake pedal may pulse and may travel
further. Maintain pressure on the brake
pedal. You may also hear a noise from the
system. This is normal.
The anti-lock braking system will not
eliminate the risks when:
• You drive too closely to the vehicle in
front of you.
• Your vehicle is hydroplaning.
• You take corners too fast.
• The road surface is poor.
112
Police Interceptor (CPH), enUSA, Edition date: 10/2015, First Printing
Brakes
PARKING BRAKE
WARNING
Always set the parking brake fully
and make sure the transmission is
locked in park (P). Failure to set the
parking brake and engage park could result
in vehicle roll-away, property damage or
bodily injury.
To set the parking brake, press the parking
brake pedal down to its fullest extent. The
brake warning lamp in the instrument
cluster will illuminate and remains
illuminated until the parking brake is
released.
To release the parking brake, press the
parking brake pedal down again.
If you are parking your vehicle on a grade
or with a trailer, press and hold the brake
pedal down, then set the parking brake.
There may be a little vehicle movement as
the parking brake sets to hold the vehicle's
weight. This is normal and should be no
reason for concern. If needed, press and
hold the service brake pedal down, then
try reapplying the parking brake. Chock the
wheels if required. If the parking brake
cannot hold the weight of the vehicle, the
parking brake may need to be serviced or
the vehicle may be overloaded.
113
Police Interceptor (CPH), enUSA, Edition date: 10/2015, First Printing
Brakes
PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION
The traction control system helps avoid
drive wheel spin and loss of traction.
If your vehicle begins to slide, the system
applies the brakes to individual wheels
and, when needed, reduces engine power
at the same time. If the wheels spin when
accelerating on slippery or loose surfaces,
the system reduces engine power in order
to increase traction.
USING TRACTION CONTROL
WARNING
The stability and traction control
light illuminates steadily if the
system detects a failure. Make sure
you did not manually disable the traction
control system using the information
display controls or the switch. If the
stability control and traction control light
is still illuminating steadily, have the
system serviced by an authorized dealer
immediately. Operating your vehicle with
the traction control disabled could lead to
an increased risk of loss of vehicle control,
vehicle rollover, personal injury and death.
The system automatically turns on each
time you switch the ignition on.
If your vehicle is stuck in mud or snow,
switching traction control off may be
beneficial as this allows the wheels to spin.
Note: When you switch traction control off,
stability control remains fully active.
Switching the System Off
When you switch the system off or on, a
message appears in the information
display showing system status.
You can switch the system off by either
using the information display controls or
the switch.
Using the Information Display
Controls
You can switch this feature off or on in the
information display. See General
Information (page 70).
Using a Switch (If Equipped)
Use the traction control switch on the
instrument panel to switch the system off
or on.
The switch illuminates when traction
control is off.
System Indicator Lights and
Messages
E138639
The stability and traction control
light:
• Temporarily illuminates on engine
start-up.
• Flashes when a driving condition
activates either of the systems.
• Illuminates if a problem occurs in either
of the systems.
The stability and traction control
off light temporarily illuminates
on engine start-up and stays on
when you switch the traction control
system off.
114
Police Interceptor (CPH), enUSA, Edition date: 10/2015, First Printing
Traction Control
PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION
WARNINGS
Vehicle modifications involving
braking system, aftermarket roof
racks, suspension, steering system,
tire construction and wheel and tire size
may change the handling characteristics
of your vehicle and may adversely affect
the performance of the electronic stability
control system. In addition, installing any
stereo loudspeakers may interfere with
and adversely affect the electronic stability
control system. Install any aftermarket
stereo loudspeaker as far as possible from
the front center console, the tunnel, and
the front seats in order to minimize the risk
of interfering with the electronic stability
control sensors. Reducing the
effectiveness of the electronic stability
control system could lead to an increased
risk of loss of vehicle control, vehicle
rollover, personal injury and death.
Remember that even advanced
technology cannot defy the laws of
physics. It’s always possible to lose
control of a vehicle due to inappropriate
driver input for the conditions. Aggressive
driving on any road condition can cause
you to lose control of your vehicle
increasing the risk of personal injury or
property damage. Activation of the
electronic stability control system is an
indication that at least some of the tires
have exceeded their ability to grip the road;
this could reduce the operator’s ability to
control the vehicle potentially resulting in
a loss of vehicle control, vehicle rollover,
personal injury and death. If your electronic
stability control system activates, SLOW
DOWN.
The system automatically turns on each
time you switch the ignition on.
If a driving condition activates either the
stability control or the traction control
system you may experience the following
conditions:
• The stability and traction control light
flashes.
• Your vehicle slows down.
• Reduced engine power.
• A vibration in the brake pedal.
• The brake pedal is stiffer than usual.
• If the driving condition is severe and
your foot is not on the brake, the brake
pedal may move as the system applies
higher brake forces.
The stability control system has several
features built into it to help you maintain
control of your vehicle:
Electronic Stability Control
The system enhances your vehicle’ s ability
to prevent skids or lateral slides by
applying brakes to one or more of the
wheels individually and, if necessary,
reducing engine power.
115
Police Interceptor (CPH), enUSA, Edition date: 10/2015, First Printing
Stability Control
Traction Control
The system enhances your vehicle’ s ability
to maintain traction of the wheels by
detecting and controlling wheel spin. See
Using Traction Control (page 114).
E72903
A
A
A
B
B
B
B
Vehicle without stability control
skidding off its intended route.
A
Vehicle with stability control
maintaining control on a slippery
surface.
B
USING STABILITY CONTROL
The system automatically turns on each
time you switch the ignition on.
You cannot switch the stability control
system off, but when you shift into reverse
(R), the system deactivates.
You can switch the traction control system
off or on. See Using Traction Control
(page 114).
116
Police Interceptor (CPH), enUSA, Edition date: 10/2015, First Printing
Stability Control
PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION
WARNINGS
To help avoid personal injury, please
read and understand the limitations
of the system as contained in this
section. Sensing is only an aid for some
(generally large and fixed) objects when
moving on a flat surface at parking speeds.
Certain objects with surfaces that absorb
ultrasonic waves, surrounding vehicle's
parking aid systems, traffic control
systems, fluorescent lamps, inclement
weather, air brakes, and external motors
and fans may also affect the function of
the sensing system; this may include
reduced performance or a false activation.
To help avoid personal injury, always
use caution when in reverse (R) and
when using the sensing system.
This system is not designed to
prevent contact with small or moving
objects. The system is designed to
provide a warning to assist the driver in
detecting large stationary objects to avoid
damaging your vehicle. The system may
not detect smaller objects, particularly
those close to the ground.
Certain add-on devices such as large
trailer hitches, bike or surfboard racks
and any device that may block the
normal detection zone of the system, may
create false beeps.
Note: Keep the sensors, located on the
bumper or fascia, free from snow, ice and
large accumulations of dirt. If the sensors
are covered, the system’s accuracy can be
affected. Do not clean the sensors with
sharp objects.
Note: If your vehicle sustains damage to
the bumper or fascia, leaving it misaligned
or bent, the sensing zone may be altered
causing inaccurate measurement of
obstacles or false alarms.
Note: The sensing system cannot be turned
off when a MyKey is present.
Note: If you attach certain add-on devices
such as a trailer or bike rack, the rear sensing
system may detect that add-on device and
therefore provide warnings. It is suggested
that you disable the rear sensing system
when you attach an add-on device to your
vehicle to prevent these warnings.
The sensing system warns the driver of
obstacles within a certain range of your
vehicle. The system turns on automatically
whenever you switch the ignition on.
The system can be switched off through
the information display menu or from the
pop-up message that appears once you
shift the transmission into reverse (R). See
General Information (page 70).
If a fault is present in the system, a warning
message appears in the information
display. See Information Messages
(page 73).
REAR PARKING AID
The rear sensors are only active when the
transmission is in reverse (R). As your
vehicle moves closer to the obstacle, the
rate of the audible warning increases.
When the obstacle is less than 12 in
(30 cm) away, the warning sounds
continuously. If the system detects a
stationary or receding object farther than
12 in (30 cm) from the corners of the
bumper, the tone sounds for only three
seconds. Once the system detects an
object approaching, the warning sounds
again.
117
Police Interceptor (CPH), enUSA, Edition date: 10/2015, First Printing
Parking Aids
E130178
Coverage area of up to 6 ft (1.8 m) from
the rear bumper. There may be decreased
coverage area at the outer corners of the
bumper.
The system detects certain objects while
the transmission is in reverse (R) :
• Your vehicle is moving toward a
stationary object at a speed of 3 mph
(5 km/h) or less.
• Your vehicle is not moving, but a
moving object is approaching the rear
of your vehicle at a speed of 3 mph
(5 km/h) or less.
• Your vehicle is moving at a speed of
less than 3 mph (5 km/h) and a moving
object is approaching the rear of your
vehicle at a speed of less than 3 mph
(5 km/h).
The system provides audio warnings only
when your vehicle is moving or when your
vehicle is stationary and the detected
obstacle is less than 12 in (30 cm) away
from the bumper.
REAR VIEW CAMERA
WARNINGS
The rear view camera system is a
reverse aid supplement device that
still requires the driver to use it in
conjunction with the interior and exterior
mirrors for maximum coverage.
Objects that are close to either
corner of the bumper or under the
bumper, might not be seen on the
screen due to the limited coverage of the
camera system.
Back up as slow as possible since
higher speeds might limit your
reaction time to stop your vehicle.
Use caution when using the rear
video camera and the luggage
compartment door is ajar. If the
luggage compartment door is ajar, the
camera will be out of position and the
video image may be incorrect. All
guidelines disappear when the luggage
compartment door is ajar.
Use caution when turning camera
features on or off. Make sure your
vehicle is not moving.
The rear view camera system provides a
video image of the area behind your
vehicle.
During operation, lines appear in the
display which represent your vehicle’s path
and proximity to objects behind your
vehicle.
118
Police Interceptor (CPH), enUSA, Edition date: 10/2015, First Printing
Parking Aids
E142435
The camera is located on the luggage
compartment door.
Using the Rear View Camera
System
The rear view camera system displays
what is behind your vehicle when you place
the transmission in reverse (R).
The system uses two types of guides to
help you see what is behind your vehicle:
• Fixed guidelines: Show the actual path
your vehicle is moving in while reversing
in a straight line. This can be helpful
when backing into a parking space or
aligning your vehicle with another
object behind you.
• Centerline: Helps align the center of
your vehicle with an object (for
example, a trailer).
Note: The image may remain on
momentarily when you shift the
transmission out of reverse (R). If your
vehicle speed reaches 6 mph (10 km/h) or
10 seconds elapse and the image remains
on, have your system inspected by an
authorized dealer.
Note: When towing, the camera only sees
what you are towing behind your vehicle.
This might not provide adequate coverage
as it usually provides in normal operation
and you might not see some objects. In
some vehicles, the guidelines may disappear
once you engage the trailer tow connector.
The camera may not operate correctly
under the following conditions:
• Nighttime or dark areas if one or both
reverse lamps are not operating.
• Mud, water or debris obstructs the
camera's view. Clean the lens with a
soft, lint-free cloth and non-abrasive
cleaner.
• The camera is misaligned due to
damage to the rear of your vehicle.
Camera Guidelines
Note: Fixed guidelines are only available
when the transmission is in reverse (R).
Note: The centerline is only available if
fixed guidelines are on.
E163914
A
E
D
C
B
Rear bumperA
Fixed guideline: Red ZoneB
Fixed guideline: Yellow zoneC
Fixed guideline: Green zoneD
CenterlineE
119
Police Interceptor (CPH), enUSA, Edition date: 10/2015, First Printing
Parking Aids
Always use caution while reversing.
Objects in the red zone are closest to your
vehicle and objects in the green zone are
farther away. Objects are getting closer to
your vehicle as they move from the green
zone to the yellow or red zones. Use the
side view mirrors and rear view mirror to
get better coverage on both sides and rear
of the vehicle.
120
Police Interceptor (CPH), enUSA, Edition date: 10/2015, First Printing
Parking Aids
PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION
Cruise control lets you maintain a set
speed without keeping your foot on the
accelerator pedal. You can use cruise
control when your vehicle speed is greater
than 20 mph (30 km/h).
USING CRUISE CONTROL
WARNINGS
Do not use cruise control on winding
roads, in heavy traffic or when the
road surface is slippery. This could
result in loss of vehicle control, serious
injury or death.
When you are going downhill, your
vehicle speed may increase above
the set speed. The system will not
apply the brakes. Change down a gear to
assist the system in maintaining the set
speed. Failure to do so could result in loss
of vehicle control, serious injury or death.
Note: Cruise control will disengage if the
vehicle speed decreases more than 10 mph
(16 km/h) below the set speed while driving
uphill.
E173592
The cruise controls are on the steering
wheel.
Switching Cruise Control On
Press and release ON.
E71340
The indicator appears in the
instrument cluster.
Setting the Cruise Speed
1. Drive to desired speed.
2. Press and release SET+ or SET-.
3. Take your foot off the accelerator
pedal.
The indicator changes color in the
instrument cluster.
Changing the Set Speed
• Press and release Set+ or Set-. When
you select km/h as the display
measurement in the information
display the set speed changes in
approximately 2 km/h increments.
When you select mph as the display
measurement in the information
display the set speed changes in
approximately 1 mph increments.
• Press and hold Set+ or Set- to
increase or decrease the set speed.
Release the control when you reach
the desired speed.
• Press the accelerator or brake pedal
until you reach the desired speed. Press
and release Set+ or Set-.
Note: If you accelerate by pressing the
accelerator pedal, the set speed will not
change. When you release the accelerator
pedal, your vehicle returns to the speed that
you previously set.
Canceling the Set Speed
Press and release CNCL or tap the brake
pedal. The set speed does not erase.
Resuming the Set Speed
Press and release RES.
121
Police Interceptor (CPH), enUSA, Edition date: 10/2015, First Printing
Cruise Control
Switching Cruise Control Off
Press and release OFF when the system
is in stand by mode or switch the ignition
off.
Note: You erase the set speed when you
switch the system off.
122
Police Interceptor (CPH), enUSA, Edition date: 10/2015, First Printing
Cruise Control
BLIND SPOT INFORMATION
SYSTEM
WARNING
To help avoid injuries, NEVER use the
Blind Spot Information System as a
replacement for using the interior
and exterior mirrors or looking over your
shoulder before changing lanes. The Blind
Spot Information System is not a
replacement for careful driving.
A
A
E124788
The Blind Spot Information System is
designed to aid you in detecting vehicles
that may have entered the blind spot zone
(A). The detection area is on both sides of
your vehicle, extending rearward from the
exterior mirrors to approximately 13 ft
(4 m) beyond the bumper. The system is
designed to alert you if certain vehicles
enter the blind spot zone while driving.
Note: The Blind Spot Information System
does not prevent contact with other vehicles
or objects; nor detect parked vehicles,
people, animals or infrastructure (fences,
guardrails, trees). It’s only designed to alert
you to vehicles in the blind spot zones.
Note: When a vehicle passes quickly
through the blind spot zone, typically fewer
than two seconds, the system does not
trigger.
Using the System
The Blind Spot Information System turns
on when you start the engine and you drive
your vehicle forward above 5 mph
(8 km/h).
For automatic transmissions, the Blind
Spot Information System remains on while
the transmission is in drive (D). If shifted
into reverse (R) or park (P) the Blind Spot
Information System turns off. Once shifted
back into drive (D), the Blind Spot
Information System turns back on when
you drive your vehicle above 5 mph
(8 km/h).
For manual transmissions, the Blind Spot
Information System is on for all gears
except the reverse (R).
Note: The Blind Spot Information System
does not function in reverse (R) or park (P).
System Lights and Messages
E142442
The Blind Spot Information System
illuminates an amber alert indicator in the
outside mirror on the side of your vehicle
the approaching vehicle is coming from.
The alert indicator dims when the system
detects nighttime darkness.
123
Police Interceptor (CPH), enUSA, Edition date: 10/2015, First Printing
Driving Aids
System Sensor Blockage
WARNING
To help avoid injuries, NEVER use the
Blind Spot Information System as a
replacement for using the interior
and exterior mirrors or looking over your
shoulder before changing lanes. The Blind
Spot Information System is not a
replacement for careful driving.
E205199
The system uses radar sensors that are
located behind the bumper fascia on each
side of your vehicle. Any dirt, mud and
snow in front of the sensors and/or driving
in heavy rain can cause system
degradation. Also, other types of
obstructions in front of the sensor can
cause system degradation. This is referred
to as a ‘blocked’ condition.
Note: Do not apply bumper stickers and/or
repair compound to these areas, this can
cause degraded system performance.
If the system detects a degraded
performance condition, a message warning
of a blocked sensor will appear in the
information display. Also the system alert
indicators will remain ON and the system
will no longer provide any vehicle warnings.
You can clear the information display
warning but the alert indicators will remain
illuminated.
A "blocked" condition can be cleared in
two ways:
• After the blockage in front of the
sensors is removed or the
rainfall/snowfall rate decreases or
stops, drive for a few minutes in traffic
to allow the sensors to detect passing
vehicles.
• By cycling the ignition from ON to OFF
and then back ON.
Note: When towing a trailer, the sensors
may detect the trailer thus causing a false
alert. It may be desirable to turn the Blind
Spot Information System off if the false
alerts become annoying.
System Errors
If the system senses a problem with the
left or right sensor, the telltale will
illuminate and a message will appear in
the information display. See Information
Messages (page 73).
124
Police Interceptor (CPH), enUSA, Edition date: 10/2015, First Printing
Driving Aids
Switching the System Off and On
You can temporarily switch the Blind Spot
Information System off in the information
display. See General Information (page
70). When the Blind Spot Information
System switches off, you will not receive
alerts and the information display shows
a system off message. The telltale in the
cluster also illuminates. When you switch
the Blind Spot Information System on or
off, the alert indicators flash twice.
Note: The system switches back on every
time you start your vehicle.
You can also have the Blind Spot
Information System switched off
permanently at an authorized dealer. Once
switched off permanently, the system can
only be switched back on at an authorized
dealer.
CROSS TRAFFIC ALERT
WARNING
To help avoid personal injury, NEVER
use the Cross Traffic Alert system as
a replacement for using the interior
and exterior mirrors and looking over your
shoulder before backing out of a parking
space. Cross Traffic Alert is not a
replacement for careful driving.
Cross Traffic Alert is designed to warn you
of vehicles approaching from the sides
when the transmission is in reverse (R).
Using the System
Cross Traffic Alert turns on when you start
the engine and you shift into reverse (R).
Once shifted out of reverse (R), Cross
Traffic Alert turns off.
Note: Cross Traffic Alert only functions
while your transmission is in reverse (R).
Cross Traffic Alert is designed to alert the
driver of certain collision risks. Coverage
decreases when the sensors are partially,
mostly or fully obstructed. Reversing slowly
helps increase the coverage area and
effectiveness.
125
Police Interceptor (CPH), enUSA, Edition date: 10/2015, First Printing
Driving Aids
E142440
In this first example, the left sensor is only
partially obstructed; zone coverage to the
right is nearly maximized.
E142441
126
Police Interceptor (CPH), enUSA, Edition date: 10/2015, First Printing
Driving Aids
Zone coverage also decreases when
parking at shallow angles. Here, the left
sensor is mostly obstructed; zone coverage
on that side is severely limited.
System Lights, Messages and
Audible Alerts
E142442
The Cross Traffic Alert illuminates an
amber alert indicator in the outside mirror
on the side of your vehicle the approaching
vehicle is coming from. Cross Traffic Alert
also sounds an audible alert and a
message appears in the information
display indicating a vehicle is coming from
the right or left. Cross Traffic Alert works
with the reverse sensing system that
sounds its own series of tones. See Rear
Parking Aid (page 117).
E205199
The system uses radar sensors that are
located behind the bumper fascia on each
side of your vehicle. Do not allow mud,
snow or bumper stickers to obstruct these
areas, this can cause degraded system
performance. See Blind Spot
Information System (page 123). If the
Blind Spot Information System is blocked,
Cross Traffic Alert is also blocked. A
corresponding message appears in the
information display as soon as you shift
the transmission into reverse (R).
System Limitations
Cross Traffic Alert has its limitations;
situations such as severe weather
conditions or debris build-up on the sensor
area may limit vehicle detection.
127
Police Interceptor (CPH), enUSA, Edition date: 10/2015, First Printing
Driving Aids
The following are other situations that may
limit the Cross Traffic Alert performance:
• Stationary or slow moving vehicles.
• Pedestrians or objects in the roadway.
• Oncoming vehicles in the same lame.
• Severe weather conditions.
• Debris build-up near or around the
sensor(s).
• Small distance to the vehicle ahead.
Certain conditions may reduce the visibility
of the warning lamp; therefore, it is
recommended to keep the audible warning
on.
If the front end of the vehicle is hit or
damaged, the radar sensing zone may be
altered causing missed or false collision
warnings. See your authorized dealer to
have your collision warning radar checked
for proper coverage and operation.
False Alerts
Note: When towing a trailer, the sensors
may detect the trailer thus causing a false
alert. It may be desirable to turn the Blind
Spot Information System off if the false
alerts become annoying.
There may be certain instances when there
is a false alert by the Cross Traffic Alert
system that illuminates the alert indicator
with no vehicle in the coverage zone. Some
amount of false alerts are normal; they are
temporary and self-correct.
System Errors
If Cross Traffic Alert senses a problem with
the left or right sensor a message will
appear in the information display. See
Information Messages (page 73).
Switching the System Off and On
You can temporarily switch Cross Traffic
Alert off in the information display. See
General Information (page 70). When
you switch Cross Traffic Alert off, you will
not receive alerts and the information
display will display a system off message.
Note: The Cross Traffic Alert switches on
whenever the ignition is switched on and
ready to provide appropriate alerts when
the transmission is in reverse (R). Cross
Traffic Alert will not remember the last
selected on or off setting.
You can also have Cross Traffic Alert
switched off permanently at an authorized
dealer. Once switched off permanently,
the system can only be switched back on
at an authorized dealer.
STEERING
Electric Power Steering
WARNINGS
The electric power steering system
has diagnostic checks that
continuously monitor the system. If
a fault is detected, a message displays in
the information display. Stop your vehicle
as soon as it is safe to do so. Switch the
ignition off. After at least 10 seconds,
switch the ignition on and watch the
information display for a steering system
warning message. If a steering system
warning message returns, have the system
checked by an authorized dealer.
If the system detects an error, you
may not feel a difference in the
steering, however a serious condition
may exist. Obtain immediate service from
an authorized dealer, failure to do so may
result in loss of steering control.
128
Police Interceptor (CPH), enUSA, Edition date: 10/2015, First Printing
Driving Aids
Your vehicle has an electric power steering
system. There is no fluid reservoir. No
maintenance is required.
If your vehicle loses electrical power while
you are driving, electric power steering
assistance is lost. The steering system still
operates and you can steer your vehicle
manually. Manually steering your vehicle
requires more effort.
Extreme continuous steering may increase
the effort required for you to steer your
vehicle. This increased effort prevents
overheating and permanent damage to
the steering system. You do not lose the
ability to steer your vehicle manually.
Typical steering and driving maneuvers
allow the system to cool and return to
normal operation.
Steering Tips
If the steering wanders or pulls, check for:
• Correct tire pressures.
• Uneven tire wear.
• Loose or worn suspension
components.
• Loose or worn steering components.
• Improper vehicle alignment.
Note: A high crown in the road or high
crosswinds may also make the steering
seem to wander or pull.
Adaptive Learning
The electronic power steering system
adaptive learning helps correct road
irregularities and improves overall handling
and steering feel. It communicates with
the brake system to help operate
advanced stability control and accident
avoidance systems. Additionally, whenever
the battery is disconnected or a new
battery installed, you must drive your
vehicle a short distance before the system
relearns the strategy and reactivates all
systems.
129
Police Interceptor (CPH), enUSA, Edition date: 10/2015, First Printing
Driving Aids
REAR LOADSPACE HATCHES
Cargo Vault (If Equipped)
E203068
Use the key to lock and unlock the door.
Turn the handle to open the door.
Electronic Utility Tray (If Equipped)
Note: Make sure the key is not in the cargo
vault before moving the tray rearward.
Note: You must latch the tray in the
forward position before operating the
vehicle. This helps prevent damage to your
vehicle or equipment.
Note: The maximum recommended load,
evenly distributed and secured on the
electronic utility tray, is 100 lb (45 kg).
E210216
You can use the tray to mount electronic
equipment. It will latch in either the
full-forward or full-rearward position. Push
down on the levers on both sides of the
tray to release the latches and move the
tray.
REAR UNDER FLOOR
STORAGE
Load Safe Label
Refer to the label on the luggage
compartment lid or liftgate for additional
information about the spare wheel and
tire.
Load Floor
Do not permanently remove the foam
structure under the load floor that
surrounds the spare tire. It is necessary to
properly support the load floor.
The maximum load floor cargo weight,
evenly distributed and with a full size spare
tire installed, is 420 lb (190 kg).
LOAD LIMIT
Vehicle Loading - with and
without a Trailer
This section will guide you in the
proper loading of your vehicle,
trailer or both, to keep your loaded
vehicle weight within its design
rating capability, with or without
a trailer. Properly loading your
vehicle will provide maximum
return of vehicle design
performance. Before loading your
vehicle, familiarize yourself with
130
Police Interceptor (CPH), enUSA, Edition date: 10/2015, First Printing
Load Carrying
the following terms for
determining your vehicle’s weight
ratings, with or without a trailer,
from the vehicle’s Tire Label or
Safety Compliance Certification
Label:
Base Curb Weight - is the weight
of the vehicle including a full tank
of fuel and all standard
equipment. It does not include
passengers, cargo, or optional
equipment.
Vehicle Curb Weight - is the
weight of your new vehicle when
you picked it up from your
authorized dealer plus any
aftermarket equipment.
E143816
PAYLOAD
Payload - is the combined weight
of cargo and passengers that the
vehicle is carrying. The maximum
payload for your vehicle can be
found on the Tire Label on the
B-Pillar or the edge of the driver
door (vehicles exported outside
the US and Canada may not have
a Tire Label). Look for “THE
COMBINED WEIGHT OF
OCCUPANTS AND CARGO
SHOULD NEVER EXCEED XXX
kg OR XXX lb.” for maximum
payload. The payload listed on the
Tire Label is the maximum
payload for the vehicle as built by
the assembly plant. If you install
any aftermarket or
authorized-dealer installed
equipment on the vehicle, you
must subtract the weight of the
equipment from the payload listed
on the Tire Label in order to
determine the new payload.
131
Police Interceptor (CPH), enUSA, Edition date: 10/2015, First Printing
Load Carrying
WARNING
The appropriate loading
capacity of your vehicle can
be limited either by volume
capacity (how much space is
available) or by payload capacity
(how much weight the vehicle
should carry). Once you have
reached the maximum payload of
your vehicle, do not add more
cargo, even if there is space
available. Overloading or
improperly loading your vehicle
can contribute to loss of vehicle
control and vehicle rollover.
Example only:
E210944
E210945
E143817
CARGO
132
Police Interceptor (CPH), enUSA, Edition date: 10/2015, First Printing
Load Carrying
Cargo Weight - includes all
weight added to the Base Curb
Weight, including cargo and
optional equipment. When towing,
trailer tongue load or king pin
weight is also part of cargo weight.
GAW (Gross Axle Weight) - is
the total weight placed on each
axle (front and rear) including
vehicle curb weight and all
payload.
GAWR (Gross Axle Weight
Rating) - is the maximum
allowable weight that can be
carried by a single axle (front or
rear). These numbers are shown
on the Safety Compliance
Certification Label. The label shall
be affixed to either the door hinge
pillar, door-latch post, or the door
edge that meets the door-latch
post, next to the driver seating
position. The total load on each
axle must never exceed its
Gross Axle Weight Rating.
Note: For trailer towing
information refer to the RV and
Trailer Towing Guide available at
an authorized dealer.
E143818
GVW
GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight) -
is the Vehicle Curb Weight, plus
cargo, plus passengers.
GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight
Rating) - is the maximum
allowable weight of the fully
loaded vehicle (including all
options, equipment, passengers
and cargo). It is shown on the
Safety Compliance Certification
Label. The label shall be affixed
to either the door hinge pillar,
door-latch post, or the door edge
that meets the door-latch post,
next to the driver seating position.
The Gross Vehicle Weight must
never exceed the Gross Vehicle
Weight Rating.
133
Police Interceptor (CPH), enUSA, Edition date: 10/2015, First Printing
Load Carrying
Example only:
E198828
WARNING
Exceeding the Safety
Compliance Certification
Label vehicle weight rating limits
could result in substandard
vehicle handling or performance,
engine, transmission and/or
structural damage, serious
damage to the vehicle, loss of
control and personal injury.
E143819
GCW
GVW
134
Police Interceptor (CPH), enUSA, Edition date: 10/2015, First Printing
Load Carrying
GCW (Gross Combined Weight)
- is the Gross Vehicle Weight plus
the weight of the fully loaded
trailer.
GCWR (Gross Combined
Weight Rating) - is the maximum
allowable weight of the vehicle
and the loaded trailer, including
all cargo and passengers, that the
vehicle can handle without risking
damage. (Important: The towing
vehicle’s braking system is rated
for operation at Gross Vehicle
Weight Rating, not at Gross
Combined Weight Rating.)
Separate functional brakes should
be used for safe control of towed
vehicles and for trailers where the
Gross Combined Weight of the
towing vehicle plus the trailer
exceed the Gross Vehicle Weight
Rating of the towing vehicle. The
Gross Combined Weight must
never exceed the Gross
Combined Weight Rating.
Maximum Loaded Trailer
Weight - is the highest possible
weight of a fully loaded trailer the
vehicle can tow. It assumes a
vehicle with mandatory options,
driver and front passenger weight
(150 pounds [68 kilograms]
each), no cargo weight (internal
or external) and a tongue load of
10–15% (conventional trailer) or
king pin weight of 15–25% (fifth
wheel trailer). Consult an
authorized dealer (or the RV and
Trailer Towing Guide available at
an authorized dealer) for more
detailed information.
Tongue Load or Fifth Wheel
King Pin Weight - refers to the
amount of the weight that a trailer
pushes down on a trailer hitch.
Examples: For a 5000 pound
(2268 kilogram) conventional
trailer, multiply 5000 by 0.10 and
0.15 to obtain a proper tongue
load range of 500 to 750 pounds
(227 to 340 kilograms). For an
11500 pound (5216 kilogram) fifth
wheel trailer, multiply by 0.15 and
0.25 to obtain a proper king pin
load range of 1725 to 2875 pounds
(782 to 1304 kilograms).
WARNINGS
Do not exceed the GVWR or
the GAWR specified on the
Safety Compliance Certification
Label.
Do not use replacement tires
with lower load carrying
capacities than the original tires
because they may lower the
vehicle’s GVWR and GAWR
limitations. Replacement tires
with a higher limit than the original
tires do not increase the GVWR
and GAWR limitations.
Exceeding any vehicle weight
rating limitation could result
in serious damage to the vehicle
and/or personal injury.
Steps for determining the
correct load limit:
135
Police Interceptor (CPH), enUSA, Edition date: 10/2015, First Printing
Load Carrying
1. Locate the statement "The
combined weight of occupants
and cargo should never exceed
XXX kg or XXX lb." on your
vehicle’s placard.
2. Determine the combined
weight of the driver and
passengers that will be riding
in your vehicle.
3. Subtract the combined weight
of the driver and passengers
from XXX kg or XXX lb.
4. The resulting figure equals the
available amount of cargo and
luggage load capacity. For
example, if the “XXX” amount
equals 1,400 lb. and there will
be five 150 lb. passengers in
your vehicle, the amount of
available cargo and luggage
load capacity is 650 lb.
(1400-750 (5 x 150) = 650 lb.).
5. Determine the combined
weight of luggage and cargo
being loaded on the vehicle.
That weight may not safely
exceed the available cargo and
luggage load capacity
calculated in Step 4.
6. If your vehicle will be towing a
trailer, load from your trailer
will be transferred to your
vehicle. Consult this manual to
determine how this reduces the
available cargo and luggage
load capacity of your vehicle.
The following gives you a few
examples on how to calculate the
available amount of cargo and
luggage load capacity:
*Suppose your vehicle has a
1400-pound (635-kilogram) cargo
and luggage capacity. You decide
to go golfing. Is there enough load
capacity to carry you, four of your
friends and all the golf bags? You
and four friends average 220
pounds (99 kilograms) each and
the golf bags weigh approximately
30 pounds (13.5 kilograms) each.
The calculation would be: 1400 -
(5 x 220) - (5 x 30) = 1400 - 1100
- 150 = 150 pounds. Yes, you have
enough load capacity in your
vehicle to transport four friends
and your golf bags. In metric units,
the calculation would be: 635
kilograms - (5 x 99 kilograms) -
(5 x 13.5 kilograms) = 635 - 495 -
67.5 = 72.5 kilograms.
*Suppose your vehicle has a
1400-pound (635-kilogram) cargo
and luggage capacity. You and
one of your friends decide to pick
up cement from the local home
improvement store to finish that
patio you have been planning for
the past two years. Measuring the
inside of the vehicle with the rear
seat folded down, you have room
for twelve 100-pound
(45-kilogram) bags of cement. Do
you have enough load capacity to
transport the cement to your
home? If you and your friend each
weigh 220 pounds (99 kilograms),
the calculation would be: 1400 -
(2 x 220) - (12 x 100) = 1400 - 440
- 1200 = - 240 pounds. No, you do
not have enough cargo capacity
to carry that much weight. In
metric units, the calculation would
136
Police Interceptor (CPH), enUSA, Edition date: 10/2015, First Printing
Load Carrying
be: 635 kilograms - (2 x 99
kilograms) - (12 x 45 kilograms) =
635 - 198 - 540 = -103 kilograms.
You will need to reduce the load
weight by at least 240 pounds
(104 kilograms). If you remove
three 100-pound (45-kilogram)
cement bags, then the load
calculation would be: 1400 - (2 x
220) - (9 x 100) = 1400 - 440 -
900 = 60 pounds. Now you have
the load capacity to transport the
cement and your friend home. In
metric units, the calculation would
be: 635 kilograms - (2 x 99
kilograms) - (9 x 45 kilograms) =
635 - 198 - 405 = 32 kilograms.
The above calculations also
assume that the loads are
positioned in your vehicle in a
manner that does not overload
the Front or the Rear Gross Axle
Weight Rating specified for your
vehicle on the Safety Compliance
Certification Label. The label shall
be affixed to either the door hinge
pillar, door-latch post, or the door
edge that meets the door-latch
post, next to the driver seating
position.
Special Loading Instructions
for Owners of Pick-up Trucks
and Utility-type Vehicles
WARNING
Loaded vehicles may handle
differently than unloaded
vehicles. Extra precautions, such
as slower speeds and increased
stopping distance, should be
taken when driving a heavily
loaded vehicle.
Your vehicle can haul more cargo
and people than most passenger
cars. Depending upon the type
and placement of the load,
hauling cargo and people may
raise the center of gravity of the
vehicle.
137
Police Interceptor (CPH), enUSA, Edition date: 10/2015, First Printing
Load Carrying
TOWING A TRAILER
WARNINGS
Do not exceed the GVWR or
the GAWR specified on the
certification label.
Towing trailers beyond the
maximum recommended
gross trailer weight exceeds the
limit of the vehicle and could
result in engine damage,
transmission damage, structural
damage, loss of vehicle control,
vehicle rollover and personal
injury.
Your vehicle may have electrical
items, such as fuses or relays,
related to towing. See Fuses
(page 159).
Your vehicle's load capacity
designation is by weight, not by
volume, so you cannot necessarily
use all available space when
loading a vehicle or trailer.
Towing a trailer places an extra
load on your vehicle's engine,
transmission, axle, brakes, tires
and suspension. Inspect these
components periodically during,
and after, any towing operation.
Load Placement
To help minimize how trailer
movement affects your vehicle
when driving:
• Load the heaviest items closest
to the trailer floor.
• Load the heaviest items
centered between the left and
right side trailer tires.
• Load the heaviest items above
the trailer axles or just slightly
forward toward the trailer
tongue. Do not allow the final
trailer tongue weight to go
above or below 10-15% of the
loaded trailer weight.
• Select a ball mount with the
correct rise or drop. When both
the loaded vehicle and trailer
are connected, the trailer frame
should be level, or slightly
angled down toward your
vehicle, when viewed from the
side.
When driving with a trailer or
payload, a slight takeoff vibration
or shudder may be present due to
the increased payload weight.
Additional information regarding
proper trailer loading and setting
your vehicle up for towing is
located in another chapter of this
manual. See Load Limit (page
130).
You can also find information in
the RV & Trailer Towing Guide
available at your authorized
dealer, or online.
138
Police Interceptor (CPH), enUSA, Edition date: 10/2015, First Printing
Towing
RV & Trailer Towing Guide Online
http://www.fleet.ford.com/towing-guides/Website
RECOMMENDED TOWING
WEIGHTS
Note: Do not tow a trailer during
patrol or pursuit situations.
Note: Do not exceed the trailer
weight for your vehicle
configuration listed in the chart
below.
Note: Take into consideration
trailer frontal area. Do not exceed
12 feet² (1.11 meters²).
Note: For high altitude operation,
reduce the gross combined weight
by 2% per 1000 feet (300 meters)
starting at the 1000 foot (300
meter) elevation point.
Note: Certain states require
electric trailer brakes for trailers
over a specified weight. Check
state regulations for this specified
weight. The maximum trailer
weights listed may be limited to
this specified weight, as the
vehicle’s electrical system may not
include the wiring connector
needed to activate electric trailer
brakes.
Your vehicle may tow a trailer
provided the maximum trailer
weight is less than or equal to the
maximum trailer weight listed for
your vehicle configuration on the
following chart.
Maximum trailer weightEngine
1000 lb (454 kg)2.0L GTDI front-wheel drive
1000 lb (454 kg)3.5L TiVCT front-wheel drive
1000 lb (454 kg)3.5L TiVCT all-wheel drive
1000 lb (454 kg)3.5L GTDI all-wheel drive
1000 lb (454 kg)3.7L TiVCT all-wheel drive
139
Police Interceptor (CPH), enUSA, Edition date: 10/2015, First Printing
Towing
ESSENTIAL TOWING CHECKS
Follow these guidelines for safe towing:
• Do not tow a trailer until you drive your
vehicle at least 1,000 mi (1,600 km).
• Consult your local motor vehicle laws
for towing a trailer.
• See the instructions included with
towing accessories for the proper
installation and adjustment
specifications.
• Service your vehicle more frequently if
you tow a trailer. See your scheduled
maintenance information.
• If you use a rental trailer, follow the
instructions the rental agency gives
you.
You can find information on load
specification terms found on the tire label
and Safety Compliance label as well as
instructions on calculating your vehicle's
load in the Load Carrying chapter. See
Load Limit (page 130).
Remember to account for the trailer
tongue weight as part of your vehicle load
when calculating the total vehicle weight.
Hitches
Do not use a hitch that either clamps onto
the bumper or attaches to the axle.
Distribute the trailer load so 10-15% of the
total trailer weight is on the tongue.
Safety Chains
Note: Never attach safety chains to the
bumper.
Always connect the safety chains to the
hook retainers of your vehicle hitch.
To connect the trailer’ s safety chains, cross
them under the trailer tongue and allow
enough slack for turning tight corners. Do
not allow the chains to drag on the ground.
Trailer Brakes
WARNING
Do not connect a trailer's hydraulic
brake system directly to your
vehicle's brake system. Your vehicle
may not have enough braking power and
your chances of having a collision greatly
increase.
Electric brakes and manual, automatic or
surge-type trailer brakes are safe if you
install them properly and adjust them to
the manufacturer's specifications. The
trailer brakes must meet local and federal
regulations.
The rating for the tow vehicle's braking
system operation is at the gross vehicle
weight rating, not the gross combined
weight rating.
Separate functioning brake systems
are required for safe control of towed
vehicles and trailers weighing more
than 1500 pounds (680 kilograms)
when loaded.
Trailer Lamps
WARNING
Never connect any trailer lamp wiring
to the vehicle's tail lamp wiring; this
may damage the electrical system
resulting in fire. Contact your authorized
dealer as soon as possible for assistance
in proper trailer tow wiring installation.
Additional electrical equipment may be
required.
Trailer lamps are required on most towed
vehicles. Make sure all running lights, brake
lights, turn signals and hazard lights are
working.
140
Police Interceptor (CPH), enUSA, Edition date: 10/2015, First Printing
Towing
Before Towing a Trailer
Practice turning, stopping and backing up
to get the feel of your vehicle-trailer
combination before starting on a trip.
When turning, make wider turns so the
trailer wheels clear curbs and other
obstacles.
When Towing a Trailer
• Do not drive faster than 70 mph
(113 km/h) during the first 500 mi
(800 km).
• Do not make full-throttle starts.
• Check your hitch, electrical connections
and trailer wheel lug nuts thoroughly
after you have traveled 50 mi (80 km).
• When stopped in congested or heavy
traffic during hot weather, place the
gearshift in position P to aid engine and
transmission cooling and to help A/C
performance.
• Turn off the speed control with heavy
loads or in hilly terrain. The speed
control may turn off automatically
when you are towing on long, steep
grades.
• Shift to a lower gear when driving down
a long or steep hill. Do not apply the
brakes continuously, as they may
overheat and become less effective.
• If your transmission is equipped with a
Grade Assist or Tow/Haul feature, use
this feature when towing. This provides
engine braking and helps eliminate
excessive transmission shifting for
optimum fuel economy and
transmission cooling.
• Allow more distance for stopping with
a trailer attached. Anticipate stops and
brake gradually.
• Avoid parking on a grade. However, if
you must park on a grade:
1. Turn the steering wheel to point your
vehicle tires away from traffic flow.
2. Set your vehicle parking brake.
3. Place the automatic transmission in
position P.
4. Place wheel chocks in front and back
of the trailer wheels. (Chocks not
included with vehicle.)
Launching or Retrieving a Boat or
Personal Watercraft (PWC)
Note: Disconnect the wiring to the trailer
before backing the trailer into the water.
Note: Reconnect the wiring to the trailer
after removing the trailer from the water.
When backing down a ramp during boat
launching or retrieval:
• Do not allow the static water level to
rise above the bottom edge of the rear
bumper.
• Do not allow waves to break higher
than 6 in (15 cm) above the bottom
edge of the rear bumper.
Exceeding these limits may allow water to
enter vehicle components:
• Causing internal damage to the
components.
• Affecting driveability, emissions, and
reliability.
Replace the rear axle lubricant anytime
the rear axle has been submerged in water.
Water may have contaminated the rear
axle lubricant, which is not normally
checked or changed unless a leak is
suspected or other axle repair is required.
141
Police Interceptor (CPH), enUSA, Edition date: 10/2015, First Printing
Towing
TRANSPORTING THE VEHICLE
E143886
If you need to have your vehicle towed,
contact a professional towing service or,
if you are a member of a roadside
assistance program, your roadside
assistance service provider.
We recommend the use of a wheel lift and
dollies or flatbed equipment to tow your
vehicle. Do not tow with a slingbelt. Ford
Motor Company has not approved a
slingbelt towing procedure. Vehicle
damage may occur if towed incorrectly, or
by any other means.
Ford Motor Company produces a towing
manual for all authorized tow truck
operators. Have your tow truck operator
refer to this manual for proper hook-up
and towing procedures for your vehicle.
It is acceptable to have your front-wheel
drive vehicle towed from the front if using
proper wheel lift equipment to raise the
front wheels off the ground. When towing
in this manner, the rear wheels can remain
on the ground.
Front-wheel drive vehicles must have the
front wheels placed on a tow dolly when
towing your vehicle from the rear using
wheel lift equipment. This prevents
damage to the transmission.
Towing an all-wheel drive vehicle requires
that all wheels be off the ground, such as
using a wheel lift and dollies or flatbed
equipment. This prevents damage to the
transmission, all-wheel drive system and
vehicle.
TOWING THE VEHICLE ON
FOUR WHEELS
Emergency Towing
You can flat-tow (all wheels on the
ground, regardless of the
powertrain/transmission configuration)
your disabled vehicle (without access to
wheel dollies, car-hauling trailer, or flatbed
transport vehicle) under the following
conditions:
• Your vehicle is facing forward so you
tow it in a forward direction.
• You place the transmission in neutral
(N). If you cannot place the
transmission in neutral (N), you may
need to override it. See Transmission
(page 102).
• Maximum speed is 35 mph (56 km/h).
• Maximum distance is 50 mi (80 km).
142
Police Interceptor (CPH), enUSA, Edition date: 10/2015, First Printing
Towing
Recreational Towing
Note: Put your climate control system in
recirculated air mode to prevent exhaust
fumes from entering your vehicle. See
Climate Control (page 79).
Vehicles Equipped with a 2.0L Engine
Follow these guidelines if you have a need
for recreational towing, such as towing
your vehicle behind a motorhome. We
designed these guidelines to prevent
damage to your transmission.
Front-wheel drive vehicles CANNOT be
flat-towed (all wheels on the ground) as
vehicle or transmission damage may occur.
You must place the front wheels on a
two-wheel tow dolly. If you are using a tow
dolly, follow the instructions specified by
the equipment provider.
Vehicles Equipped with a 3.5L Engine
Follow these guidelines if you have a need
for recreational towing, such as towing
your vehicle behind a motorhome or truck.
We designed these guidelines to prevent
damage to your vehicle after it is
hooked-up to the recreational vehicle or
tow dolly.
You can tow your front-wheel drive vehicle
with all four wheels on the ground or with
the front wheels off the ground by using a
tow dolly. If you are using a tow dolly,
follow the instructions specified by the
equipment provider. If you are towing with
all four wheels on the ground, see the
following instructions.
You can tow your all-wheel drive vehicle
with all four wheels on the ground or with
all four wheels off the ground using a
vehicle transport trailer. Do not tow your
all-wheel drive vehicle with the front
wheels off the ground (by using a tow
dolly) and the rear wheels on the ground.
This causes damage to your all-wheel drive
system. If you are using a vehicle transport
trailer, follow the instructions specified by
the equipment provider. If you are towing
with all four wheels on the ground, see the
following instructions.
If you tow your vehicle with all four wheels
on the ground:
• Tow only in the forward direction.
• Release the parking brake.
• Shift into neutral (N).
• Do not exceed 65 mph (105 km/h).
• Start the engine and allow it to run for
five minutes at the beginning of each
day and every six hours thereafter. With
the engine running and your foot on the
brake, shift into drive (D) and then into
reverse (R) before shifting back into
neutral (N).
143
Police Interceptor (CPH), enUSA, Edition date: 10/2015, First Printing
Towing
BREAKING-IN
You need to break in new tires for
approximately 300 miles (480
kilometers). During this time, your vehicle
may exhibit some unusual driving
characteristics.
Avoid driving too fast during the first 1000
miles (1600 kilometers). Vary your speed
frequently and change up through the
gears early. Do not labor the engine.
Do not tow during the first 1000 miles
(1600 kilometers).
ECONOMICAL DRIVING
Your fuel economy is affected by several
things, such as how you drive, the
conditions you drive under, and how you
maintain your vehicle.
You may improve your fuel economy by
keeping these things in mind:
• Accelerate and slow down in a smooth,
moderate fashion.
• Drive at steady speeds without
stopping.
• Anticipate stops; slowing down may
eliminate the need to stop.
• Combine errands and minimize
stop-and-go driving.
• Close the windows for high-speed
driving.
• Drive at reasonable speeds (traveling
at 55 mph [88 km/h] uses 15% less
fuel than traveling at 65 mph [105
km/h]).
• Keep the tires properly inflated and use
only the recommended size.
• Use the recommended engine oil.
• Perform all regularly scheduled
maintenance.
Avoid these actions; they reduce your fuel
economy:
• Sudden accelerations or hard
accelerations.
• Revving the engine before turning it off.
• Idle for periods longer than one minute.
• Warm up your vehicle on cold
mornings.
• Use the air conditioner or front
defroster.
• Use the speed control in hilly terrain.
• Rest your foot on the brake pedal while
driving.
• Drive a heavily loaded vehicle or tow a
trailer.
• Carry unnecessary weight
(approximately 1 mpg [0.4 km/L] is
lost for every 400 lb [180 kilogram] of
weight carried).
• Driving with the wheels out of
alignment.
Conditions
• Heavily loading a vehicle or towing a
trailer may reduce fuel economy at any
speed.
• Adding certain accessories to your
vehicle (for example bug deflectors,
rollbars, light bars, running boards, ski
racks or luggage racks) may reduce
fuel economy.
• To maximize the fuel economy, drive
with the tonneau cover installed (if
equipped).
• Using fuel blended with alcohol may
lower fuel economy.
• Fuel economy may decrease with lower
temperatures during the first 8–10
miles (12–16 kilometers) of driving.
• Driving on flat terrain offers improved
fuel economy as compared to driving
on hilly terrain.
144
Police Interceptor (CPH), enUSA, Edition date: 10/2015, First Printing
Driving Hints
• Transmissions give their best fuel
economy when operated in the top
cruise gear and with steady pressure
on the gas pedal.
• Four-wheel-drive operation (if
equipped) is less fuel efficient than
two-wheel-drive operation.
• Close the windows for high-speed
driving.
DRIVING THROUGH WATER
WARNING
Do not drive through flowing or deep
water as you may lose control of your
vehicle.
Note: Driving through standing water can
cause vehicle damage.
Note: Engine damage can occur if water
enters the air filter.
Before driving through standing water,
check the depth. Never drive through water
that is higher than the bottom of the front
rocker area of your vehicle.
E176360
When driving through standing water, drive
very slowly and do not stop your vehicle.
Your brake performance and traction may
be limited. After driving through water and
as soon as it is safe to do so:
• Lightly press the brake pedal to dry the
brakes and to check that they work.
• Check that the horn works.
• Check that the exterior lights work.
• Turn the steering wheel to check that
the steering power assist works.
FLOOR MATS
WARNINGS
Always use floor mats that are
designed to fit the foot well of your
vehicle. Only use floor mats that
leave the pedal area unobstructed. Only
use floor mats that are firmly secured to
retention posts so that they cannot slip out
of position and interfere with the pedals
or impair safe operation of your vehicle in
other ways.
Pedals that cannot move freely can
cause loss of vehicle control and
increase the risk of serious personal
injury.
Always make sure that the floor
mats are properly attached to the
retention posts in the carpet that are
supplied with your vehicle. Floor mats must
be properly secured to both retention posts
to make sure mats do not shift out of
position.
Never place floor mats or any other
covering in the vehicle foot well that
cannot be properly secured to
prevent them from moving and interfering
with the pedals or the ability to control the
vehicle.
Never place floor mats or any other
covering on top of already installed
floor mats. Floor mats should always
rest on top of vehicle carpeting surface and
not another floor mat or other covering.
Additional floor mats or any other covering
will reduce the pedal clearance and
potentially interfere with pedal operation.
145
Police Interceptor (CPH), enUSA, Edition date: 10/2015, First Printing
Driving Hints
WARNINGS
Check attachment of floor mats on
a regular basis. Always properly
reinstall and secure floor mats that
have been removed for cleaning or
replacement.
Always make sure that objects
cannot fall into the driver foot well
while the vehicle is moving. Objects
that are loose can become trapped under
the pedals causing a loss of vehicle control.
Failure to properly follow floor mat
installation or attachment
instructions can potentially cause
interference with pedal operation causing
a loss of vehicle control.
E142666
To install floor mats, position the floor mat
so that the eyelet is over the retention post
and press down to lock in.
To remove the floor mat, reverse the
installation procedure.
146
Police Interceptor (CPH), enUSA, Edition date: 10/2015, First Printing
Driving Hints
ROADSIDE ASSISTANCE
Vehicles Sold in the United States:
Getting Roadside Assistance
To fully assist you should you have a
vehicle concern, Ford Motor Company
offers a complimentary roadside
assistance program. This program is
separate from the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty. The service is available:
• 24 hours a day, seven days a week.
• For the coverage period listed on the
Roadside Assistance Card included in
your Owner's Manual portfolio.
Roadside Assistance covers:
• A flat tire change with a good spare, if
provided with the vehicle (except
vehicles supplied with a tire inflation
kit).
• Battery jump start.
• Lock-out assistance (key replacement
cost is the customer's responsibility).
• Fuel delivery — independent service
contractors, if not prohibited by state,
local or municipal law, shall deliver up
to 2 gal (7.6 L) of gasoline or 5 gal
(18.9 L) of diesel fuel to a disabled
vehicle. Roadside Assistance limits fuel
delivery service to two no-charge
occurrences within a 12-month period.
• Winch out — available within 100 ft
(30.5 m) of a paved or county
maintained road, no recoveries.
• Towing — independent service
contractors, if not prohibited by state,
local or municipal law, shall tow Ford
eligible vehicles to an authorized dealer
within 35 mi (56 km) of the
disablement location or to the nearest
authorized dealer. If a member
requests a tow to an authorized dealer
that is more than 35 mi (56 km) from
the disablement location, the member
shall be responsible for any mileage
costs in excess of 35 mi (56 km).
Roadside Assistance includes up to $200
for a towed trailer if the disabled eligible
vehicle requires service at the nearest
authorized dealer. If the towing vehicle is
operational but the trailer is not, then the
trailer does not qualify for any roadside
services.
Vehicles Sold in the United States:
Using Roadside Assistance
Complete the roadside assistance
identification card and place it in your
wallet for quick reference. This card is in
the owner's information portfolio in the
glove compartment.
United States Ford vehicle customers who
require Roadside Assistance, call
1-800-241-3673.
If you need to arrange roadside assistance
for yourself, Ford Motor Company
reimburses a reasonable amount for
towing to the nearest dealership within
35 mi (56 km). To obtain reimbursement
information, United States Ford vehicle
customers call 1-800-241-3673.
Customers need to submit their original
receipts.
Vehicles Sold in Canada: Getting
Roadside Assistance
To fully assist you should you have a
vehicle concern, Ford Motor Company of
Canada, Limited offers a complimentary
roadside assistance program. This program
is eligible within Canada or the continental
United States.
147
Police Interceptor (CPH), enUSA, Edition date: 10/2015, First Printing
Roadside Emergencies
This program is separate from the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty, but the coverage
is concurrent with the powertrain coverage
period of your vehicle.
Canadian customers who require roadside
assistance, call 1-800-665-2006.
Vehicles Sold in Canada: Using
Roadside Assistance
Complete the roadside assistance
identification card and place it in your
wallet for quick reference.
In Canada, this card is found in the
Warranty Guide in the glove compartment
of your vehicle.
Vehicles Sold in Canada: Roadside
Assistance Program Coverage
The service is available 24 hours a day,
seven days a week.
Canadian roadside coverage and benefits
may differ from the U.S. coverage.
For complete program coverage details
you may contact your dealer, you can call
us in Canada at 1-800-665-2006, or visit
our website at www.ford.ca.
HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS
Note: If used when the vehicle is not
running, the battery will lose charge. There
may be insufficient power to restart your
vehicle.
The hazard warning button is
located on the instrument panel.
Use it when your vehicle is
creating a safety hazard for other
motorists.
• Press the button to turn on the hazard
warning function, and the front and
rear direction indicators will flash.
• Press the button again to turn them
off.
FUEL SHUTOFF
WARNING
Failure to inspect and, if necessary,
repair fuel leaks after a collision may
increase the risk of fire and serious
injury. Ford Motor Company recommends
that the fuel system be inspected by an
authorized dealer after any collision.
In the event of a moderate to severe
collision, this vehicle includes a fuel pump
shutoff feature that stops the flow of fuel
to the engine. Not every impact will cause
a shutoff.
Should your vehicle shut off after a
collision, you may restart your vehicle. For
vehicles equipped with a key system:
1. Switch off the ignition.
2. Switch on the ignition.
3. Repeat Steps 1 and 2 to re-enable the
fuel pump.
For vehicles equipped with a push button
start system:
1. Press the START/STOP button to
switch off the ignition.
2. Press the brake pedal and press the
START/STOP button to switch on the
ignition.
3. Remove your foot from the brake pedal
and press the START/STOP button
to switch off the ignition.
4. You can either attempt to start the
engine by pressing the brake pedal and
the START/STOP button, or switch
on the ignition only by pressing the
START/STOP button without
pressing the brake pedal. Both ways
re-enable the fuel system.
148
Police Interceptor (CPH), enUSA, Edition date: 10/2015, First Printing
Roadside Emergencies
Note: When you try to restart your vehicle
after a fuel shutoff, the vehicle makes sure
that various systems are safe to restart.
Once your vehicle determines that the
systems are safe, then the vehicle will allow
you to restart.
Note: In the event that your vehicle does
not restart after your third attempt, contact
an authorized dealer.
JUMP STARTING THE VEHICLE
WARNINGS
Batteries normally produce explosive
gases which can cause personal
injury. Therefore, do not allow
flames, sparks or lighted substances to
come near the battery. When working near
the battery, always shield your face and
protect your eyes. Always provide correct
ventilation.
Keep batteries out of reach of
children. Batteries contain sulfuric
acid. Avoid contact with skin, eyes or
clothing. Shield your eyes when working
near the battery to protect against possible
splashing of acid solution. In case of acid
contact with skin or eyes, flush
immediately with water for a minimum of
15 minutes and get prompt medical
attention. If acid is swallowed, call a
physician immediately.
Use only adequately sized cables
with insulated clamps.
Preparing Your Vehicle
Do not attempt to push-start your
automatic transmission vehicle.
Note: Attempting to push-start a vehicle
with an automatic transmission may cause
transmission damage.
Note: Use only a 12-volt supply to start your
vehicle.
Note: Do not disconnect the battery of the
disabled vehicle as this could damage the
vehicle electrical system.
Park the booster vehicle close to the hood
of the disabled vehicle, making sure the
two vehicles do not touch.
Connecting the Jumper Cables
WARNINGS
Do not attach the cables to fuel lines,
engine rocker covers, the intake
manifold or electrical components
as grounding points. Stay clear of moving
parts. To avoid reverse polarity
connections, make sure that you correctly
identify the positive (+) and negative (-)
terminals on both the disabled and booster
vehicles before connecting the cables.
Do not attach the end of the positive
cable to the studs or L-shaped eyelet
located above the positive (+)
terminal of your vehicle’s battery. High
current may flow through and cause
damage to the fuses.
Do not connect the end of the
second cable to the negative (-)
terminal of the battery to be jumped.
A spark may cause an explosion of the
gases that surround the battery.
Note: In the illustration, the bottom vehicle
represents the booster vehicle.
149
Police Interceptor (CPH), enUSA, Edition date: 10/2015, First Printing
Roadside Emergencies
4
2
1
3
E142664
1. Connect the positive (+) jumper cable
to the positive (+) terminal of the
discharged battery.
2. Connect the other end of the positive
(+) cable to the positive (+) terminal
of the booster vehicle battery.
3. Connect the negative (-) cable to the
negative (-) terminal of the booster
vehicle battery.
4. Make the final connection of the
negative (-) cable to an exposed metal
part of the stalled vehicle's engine,
away from the battery and the fuel
injection system, or connect the
negative (-) cable to a ground
connection point if available.
Jump Starting
1. Start the engine of the booster vehicle
and rev the engine moderately, or press
the accelerator gently to keep your
engine speed between 2000 and 3000
RPM, as shown in your tachometer.
2. Start the engine of the disabled vehicle.
3. Once the disabled vehicle has been
started, run both vehicle engines for an
additional three minutes before
disconnecting the jumper cables.
Removing the Jumper Cables
Remove the jumper cables in the reverse
order that they were connected.
4
1
3
2
E142665
1. Remove the negative (-) jumper cable
from the disabled vehicle.
150
Police Interceptor (CPH), enUSA, Edition date: 10/2015, First Printing
Roadside Emergencies
2. Remove the jumper cable on the
negative (-) terminal of the booster
vehicle battery.
3. Remove the jumper cable from the
positive (+) terminal of the booster
vehicle battery.
4. Remove the jumper cable from the
positive (+) terminal of the disabled
vehicle battery.
5. Allow the engine to idle for at least one
minute.
151
Police Interceptor (CPH), enUSA, Edition date: 10/2015, First Printing
Roadside Emergencies
GETTING THE SERVICES YOU
NEED
Warranty repairs to your vehicle must be
performed by an authorized dealer. While
any authorized dealer handling your vehicle
line will provide warranty service, we
recommend you return to your selling
authorized dealer who wants to ensure
your continued satisfaction.
Please note that certain warranty repairs
require special training and equipment, so
not all authorized dealers are authorized
to perform all warranty repairs. This means
that, depending on the warranty repair
needed, you may have to take your vehicle
to another authorized dealer.
A reasonable time must be allowed to
perform a repair after taking your vehicle
to the authorized dealer. Repairs will be
made using Ford or Motorcraft® parts, or
remanufactured or other parts that are
authorized by Ford.
Away From Home
If you are away from home when your
vehicle needs service, contact the Ford
Customer Relationship Center or use the
online resources listed below to find the
nearest authorized dealer.
In the United States:
Mailing address
Ford Motor Company
Customer Relationship Center
P.O. Box 6248
Dearborn, MI 48126
Telephone
1-800-392-3673 (FORD)
(TDD for the hearing impaired:
1-800-232-5952)
Additional information and resources are
available online:
Website
www.owner.ford.com
These are some of the items that can be
found online:
• U.S. dealer locator by Dealer Name,
City/State or Zip Code.
• Owner Manuals.
• Maintenance Schedules.
• Recalls.
• Ford Extended Service Plans.
• Ford Genuine Accessories.
• Service specials and promotions.
In Canada:
Mailing address
Customer Relationship Centre
Ford Motor Company of Canada, Limited
P.O. Box 2000
Oakville, Ontario L6K 0C8
Telephone
1-800-565-3673 (FORD)
Website
www.ford.ca
Twitter
@FordServiceCA (English Canada)
@FordServiceQC (Quebec)
Additional Assistance
If you have questions or concerns, or are
unsatisfied with the service you are
receiving, follow these steps:
1. Contact your Sales Representative or
Service Advisor at your selling or
servicing authorized dealer.
152
Police Interceptor (CPH), enUSA, Edition date: 10/2015, First Printing
Customer Assistance
2. If your inquiry or concern remains
unresolved, contact the Sales Manager,
Service Manager or Customer Relations
Manager.
3. If you require assistance or clarification
on Ford Motor Company policies,
please contact the Ford Customer
Relationship Center.
In order to help us serve you better, please
have the following information available
when contacting a Customer Relationship
Center:
• Vehicle Identification Number.
• Your telephone number (home and
business).
• The name of the authorized dealer and
city where located.
• The vehicle’ s current odometer reading.
In some states within the United States,
you must directly notify Ford in writing
before pursuing remedies under your
state's warranty laws, and Ford is also
allowed a final repair attempt.
Additionally, in some states within the
United States, a consumer has the option
of submitting a warranty dispute to the
BBB Auto Line before taking action under
the Magnuson-Moss Warranty Act, or to
the extent allowed by state law, before
pursuing replacement or repurchase
remedies provided by certain state laws.
This dispute handling procedure is not
required prior to enforcing state created
rights or other rights which are independent
of the Magnuson-Moss Warranty Act or
state replacement or repurchase laws.
IN CALIFORNIA (U.S. ONLY)
California Civil Code Section 1793.2(d)
requires that, if a manufacturer or its
representative is unable to repair a motor
vehicle to conform to the vehicle’s
applicable express warranty after a
reasonable number of attempts, the
manufacturer shall be required to either
replace the vehicle with one substantially
identical or repurchase the vehicle and
reimburse the buyer in an amount equal to
the actual price paid or payable by the
consumer (less a reasonable allowance
for consumer use). The consumer has the
right to choose whether to receive a refund
or replacement vehicle.
California Civil Code Section 1793.22(b)
presumes that the manufacturer has had
a reasonable number of attempts to
conform the vehicle to its applicable
express warranties if, within the first 18
months of ownership of a new vehicle or
the first 18000 miles (29 000 km),
whichever occurs first:
1. Two or more repair attempts are made
on the same non-conformity likely to
cause death or serious bodily injury OR
2. Four or more repair attempts are made
on the same nonconformity (a defect
or condition that substantially impairs
the use, value or safety of the vehicle)
OR
3. The vehicle is out of service for repair
of nonconformities for a total of more
than 30 calendar days (not necessarily
all at one time).
In the case of 1 or 2 above, the consumer
must also notify the manufacturer of the
need for the repair of the nonconformity
at the following address:
Ford Motor Company
16800 Executive Plaza Drive
Mail Drop 3NE-B
Dearborn, MI 48126
153
Police Interceptor (CPH), enUSA, Edition date: 10/2015, First Printing
Customer Assistance
You are required to submit your warranty
dispute to BBB AUTO LINE before asserting
in court any rights or remedies conferred
by California Civil Code Section 1793.22(b).
You are also required to use BBB AUTO
LINE before exercising rights or seeking
remedies created by the Federal
Magnuson-Moss Warranty Act, 15 U.S.C.
sec. 2301 et seq. If you choose to seek
redress by pursuing rights and remedies
not created by California Civil Code Section
1793.22(b) or the Magnuson-Moss
Warranty Act, resort to BBB AUTO LINE is
not required by those statutes.
THE BETTER BUSINESS
BUREAU (BBB) AUTO LINE
PROGRAM (U.S. ONLY)
Your satisfaction is important to Ford
Motor Company and to your dealer. If a
warranty concern has not been resolved
using the three-step procedure outlined
earlier in this chapter in the Getting the
Services you need section, you may be
eligible to participate in the BBB AUTO
LINE program.
The BBB AUTO LINE program consists of
two parts – mediation and arbitration.
During mediation, a representative of the
BBB will contact both you and Ford Motor
Company to explore options for settlement
of the claim. If an agreement is not reached
during mediation or you do not want to
participate in mediation, and if your claim
is eligible, you may participate in the
arbitration process. An arbitration hearing
will be scheduled so that you can present
your case in an informal setting before an
impartial person. The arbitrator will
consider the testimony provided and make
a decision after the hearing.
Disputes submitted to the BBB AUTO LINE
program are usually decided within forty
days after you file your claim with the BBB.
You are not bound by the decision, and
may reject the decision and proceed to
court where all findings of the BBB Auto
Line dispute, and decision, are admissible
in the court action. Should you choose to
accept the BBB AUTO LINE decision, Ford
is then bound by the decision, and must
comply with the decision within 30 days
of receipt of your acceptance letter.
BBB AUTO LINE Application: Using the
information provided below, please call or
write to request a program application.
You will be asked for your name and
address, general information about your
new vehicle, information about your
warranty concerns, and any steps you have
already taken to try to resolve them. A
Customer Claim Form will be mailed that
will need to be completed, signed and
returned to the BBB along with proof of
ownership. Upon receipt, the BBB will
review the claim for eligibility under the
Program Summary Guidelines.
You can get more information by
calling BBB AUTO LINE at
1-800-955-5100, or writing to:
BBB AUTO LINE
3033 Wilson Boulevard, Suite 600
Arlington, Virginia 22201
BBB AUTO LINE applications can also be
requested by calling the Ford Motor
Company Customer Relationship Center
at 1-800-392-3673.
Note: Ford Motor Company reserves the
right to change eligibility limitations, modify
procedures, or to discontinue this process
at any time without notice and without
obligation.
154
Police Interceptor (CPH), enUSA, Edition date: 10/2015, First Printing
Customer Assistance
UTILIZING THE
MEDIATION/ARBITRATION
PROGRAM (CANADA ONLY)
For vehicles delivered to authorized
Canadian dealers. In those cases where
you continue to feel that the efforts by Ford
of Canada and the authorized dealer to
resolve a factory-related vehicle service
concern have been unsatisfactory, Ford of
Canada participates in an impartial third
party mediation/arbitration program
administered by the Canadian Motor
Vehicle Arbitration Plan (CAMVAP).
The CAMVAP program is a straight forward
and relatively speedy alternative to resolve
a disagreement when all other efforts to
produce a settlement have failed. This
procedure is without cost to you and is
designed to eliminate the need for lengthy
and expensive legal proceedings.
In the CAMVAP program, impartial
third-party arbitrators conduct hearings at
mutually convenient times and places in
an informal environment. These impartial
arbitrators review the positions of the
parties, make decisions and, when
appropriate, render awards to resolve
disputes. CAMVAP decisions are fast, fair,
and final as the arbitrator’s award is
binding on both you and Ford of Canada.
CAMVAP services are available in all
Canadian territories and provinces. For
more information, without charge or
obligation, call your CAMVAP Provincial
Administrator directly at 1-800-207-0685
or visit www.camvap.ca.
GETTING ASSISTANCE
OUTSIDE THE U.S. AND
CANADA
Before exporting your vehicle to a foreign
country, contact the appropriate foreign
embassy or consulate. These officials can
inform you of local vehicle registration
regulations and where to find unleaded
fuel.
If you cannot find unleaded fuel or can only
get fuel with an anti-knock index lower
than is recommended for your vehicle,
contact our Customer Relationship Center.
The use of leaded fuel in your vehicle
without proper conversion may damage
the effectiveness of your emission control
system and may cause engine knocking or
serious engine damage. Ford Motor
Company or Ford of Canada is not
responsible for any damage caused by use
of improper fuel. Using leaded fuel may
also result in difficulty importing your
vehicle back into the United States.
If your vehicle must be serviced while you
are traveling or living in Asia-Pacific Region,
Sub-Saharan Africa, U.S. Virgin Islands,
Central America, the Caribbean, and Israel,
contact the nearest authorized dealer. If
the authorized dealer cannot help you,
contact:
FORD MOTOR COMPANY
Customer Relationship Center
1555 Fairlane Drive
Fairlane Business Park #3
Allen Park, Michigan 48101
U.S.A.
Telephone: (313) 594-4857
Fax: (313) 390-0804
Email: expcac@ford.com
155
Police Interceptor (CPH), enUSA, Edition date: 10/2015, First Printing
Customer Assistance
For customers in Guam, the
Commonwealth of the Northern Mariana
Islands (CNMI), America Samoa, and the
U.S. Virgin Islands, please feel free to call
our Toll-Free Number: (800) 841-FORD
(3673).
If your vehicle must be serviced while you
are traveling or living in Puerto Rico,
contact the nearest authorized dealer. If
the authorized dealer cannot help you,
contact:
FORD MOTOR COMPANY
Customer Relationship Center
1555 Fairlane Drive
Fairlane Business Park #3
Allen Park, Michigan 48101
U.S.A.
Telephone: (800) 841-FORD (3673)
FAX: (313) 390-0804
Email: prcac@ford.com
www.ford.com.pr
If your vehicle must be serviced while you
are traveling or living in the Middle East,
contact the nearest authorized dealer. If
the authorized dealer cannot help you,
contact:
FORD MOTOR COMPANY
Customer Relationship Center
1555 Fairlane Drive
Fairlane Business Park #3
Allen Park, Michigan 48101
U.S.A.
Ford: 80004443673
Lincoln: 80004441067
If calling from the UAE: 80004441066
If calling from the Kingdom of Saudi
Arabia: 8008443673
If calling from Kuwait: 22280384
FAX: +971 4 3327266
Email: menacac@ford.com
www.me.ford.com
If you buy your vehicle in North America
and then relocate to any of the above
locations, register your vehicle
identification number (VIN) and new
address with Ford Motor Company Export
Operations & Global Growth Initiatives by
emailing expcac@ford.com.
If you are in another foreign country,
contact the nearest authorized dealer. In
the event your inquiry is unresolved,
communicate your concern with the
dealership’s Sales Manager, Service
Manager or Customer Relations Manager.
If you require additional assistance or
clarification, please contact the respective
Customer Relationship Center as
previously listed.
Customers in the U.S. should call
1-800-392-3673.
ORDERING ADDITIONAL
OWNER'S LITERATURE
To order the publications in this portfolio,
contact Helm, Incorporated at:
HELM, INCORPORATED
47911 Halyard Drive
Plymouth, Michigan 48170
Attention: Customer Service
Or to order a free publication catalog, call
toll free: 1-800-782-4356
Monday-Friday 8:00 a.m. - 6:00 p.m. EST
Helm, Incorporated can also be reached
by their website:
www.helminc.com
(Items in this catalog may be purchased
by credit card, check or money order.)
156
Police Interceptor (CPH), enUSA, Edition date: 10/2015, First Printing
Customer Assistance
Obtaining a French Owner’s
Manual
French Owner’s Manual can be obtained
from your authorized dealer or by
contacting Helm, Incorporated using the
contact information listed previously in this
section.
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
(U.S. ONLY)
E142557
If you believe that your vehicle has
a defect which could cause a
crash or could cause injury or
death, you should immediately
inform the National Highway
Traffic Safety Administration
(NHTSA) in addition to notifying
Ford Motor Company.
If NHTSA receives similar
complaints, it may open an
investigation, and if it finds that a
safety defect exists in a group of
vehicles, it may order a recall and
remedy campaign. However,
NHTSA cannot become involved
in individual problems between
you, your dealer, or Ford Motor
Company.
To contact NHTSA, you may call
the Vehicle Safety Hotline
toll-free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY:
1-800-424-9153); go to
http://www.safercar.gov; or write
to:
Administrator
1200 New Jersey Avenue,
Southeast
Washington, D.C. 20590
You can also obtain other
information about motor vehicle
safety from
http://www.safercar.gov.
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
(CANADA ONLY)
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect
which could cause a crash or could cause
injury or death, you should immediately
inform Transport Canada and Ford of
Canada.
157
Police Interceptor (CPH), enUSA, Edition date: 10/2015, First Printing
Customer Assistance
Transport Canada Contact Information
www.tc.gc.ca/eng/motorvehiclesafety/safevehicles-defectinvestigations-
index-76.htm (English)
Website
www.tc.gc.ca/fra/securiteautomobile/VehiculesSecuritaires-Enquetes-
index-76.htm (French)
Website
1–800–333–0510Phone
Ford of Canada Contact Information
www.ford.caWebsite
1–800–565-3673Phone
158
Police Interceptor (CPH), enUSA, Edition date: 10/2015, First Printing
Customer Assistance
FUSE SPECIFICATION CHART
Power Distribution Box
WARNINGS
Always disconnect the battery before
servicing high-current fuses.
To reduce risk of electrical shock,
always replace the cover to the
power distribution box before
reconnecting the battery or refilling fluid
reservoirs.
The power distribution box is in the engine
compartment. It has high-current fuses
that protect the vehicle's main electrical
systems from overloads.
If you disconnect and reconnect the
battery, you will need to reset some
features. See Changing the 12V Battery
(page 185).
E173618
97
98
77
96
95
94
93 92 91 90 89
88
66
44
78
56
39
26
18 1617
3 12456789
192021222324
2728293031
40414243
55
575859606162636465
798081828384858687
67
45
32
10111213
333435
464748495051
6869707172
74
73
76
75
53
37 36
54
38
25
15
14
52
Protected componentsFuse amp ratingFuse or relay number
Rear power point tap feed 1.
50A
**
1
Rear power point tap feed 2.
50A
**
2
Not used.-3
Wiper motor relay.
30A
**
4
Anti-lock brake system pump.
50A
**
5
Center console 6-way B+ feed 2.
40A
**
6
159
Police Interceptor (CPH), enUSA, Edition date: 10/2015, First Printing
Fuses
Protected componentsFuse amp ratingFuse or relay number
Not used.-7
Not used.-8
Not used.-9
Not used.-10
Heated rear window relay.Relay11
Heated mirror relay.
Run/start relay.Relay12
Starter motor relay.Relay13
Left-hand cooling fan number 2 relay.Relay14
Fuel pump relay.Relay15
Center console 6 way B+ feed 1.
40A
**
16
Not used.-17
Front blower motor relay.
40A
**
18
Starter relay.
30A
**
19
Center console power point 2.
20A
**
20
Not used.-21
Not used.-22
Driver power seat.
30A
**
23
Police run/start relay.
40A
**
24
Not used.-25
Heated rear window relay.
40A
**
26
Center console power point 1.
20A
**
27
Not used.-28
Engine cooling fan 1 high speed power.
40A
**
29
Engine cooling fan 1 and 2 low speed
primary fuse.
160
Police Interceptor (CPH), enUSA, Edition date: 10/2015, First Printing
Fuses
Protected componentsFuse amp ratingFuse or relay number
Engine cooling fan 2 high speed fuse.
40A
**
30
Engine cooling fan 1 and 2 low speed
secondary fuse.
25A
**
31
Not used.-32
Engine cooling fan 1 and 2 low speed relay
2.
Relay33
Blower motor relay.Relay34
Engine cooling fan 1 high speed relay.Relay35
Engine cooling fan 1 and 2 low speed relay
1.
Not used.-36
Not used.-37
Not used.-38
Not used.-39
Center console 6-way B+ feed 1.
40A
**
40
Not used.-41
Passenger power seat.
30A
**
42
Anti-lock brake system valves.
20A
**
43
Not used.-44
Not used.-45
Not used.-46
Not used.-47
Not used.-48
Not used.-49
Heated mirrors.
15A
*
50
Not used.-51
Not used.-52
161
Police Interceptor (CPH), enUSA, Edition date: 10/2015, First Printing
Fuses
Protected componentsFuse amp ratingFuse or relay number
Not used.-53
Not used.-54
Wiper relay.Relay55
Not used.-56
Not used.-57
Alternator A-line.
10A
*
58
Brake on/off switch.
10A
*
59
Not used.-60
Not used.-61
A/C clutch relay.
10A
*
62
Not used.-63
Not used.-64
Fuel pump relay.
30A
*
65
Powertrain control module relay.Relay66
Oxygen sensor heater.
20A
*
67
Mass airflow sensor.
Variable camshaft timing solenoid valve.
Canister vent solenoid.
Canister purge solenoid.
Ignition coils.
20A
*
68
Vehicle power 1 (powertrain control
module).
20A
*
69
A/C clutch.
15A
*
70
Fan control relay coils 1-3).
Variable air conditioning compressor.
Auxiliary transmission warmup.
Turbo charge waste-gate control.
Electronic compressor bypass valve.
All-wheel drive module.
Positive crankcase ventilation heater.
Not used.-71
162
Police Interceptor (CPH), enUSA, Edition date: 10/2015, First Printing
Fuses
Protected componentsFuse amp ratingFuse or relay number
Not used.-72
Center console run/start feed 1.
20A
*
73
Center console run/start feed 2.
20A
*
74
Diode.Diode.75
Not used.-76
Not used.-77
Not used.-78
Not used.-79
Police rear flasher.
25A
*
80
Package tray lighting access circuit.
Spot lights.
20A
*
81
Not used.-82
Not used.-83
Not used.-84
Not used.-85
Powertrain control module.
7.5A
*
86
Keep alive power and relay.
Canister vent solenoid.
Run/start relay.
5A
*
87
Run/start relay.Relay88
Front blower relay coil.
5A
*
89
Electrical power assist steering module.
Powertrain control module run/start.
10A
*
90
Not used.-91
Anti-lock brake system module.
10A
*
92
Rear window defroster relay.
5A
*
93
Trunk release relay.
163
Police Interceptor (CPH), enUSA, Edition date: 10/2015, First Printing
Fuses
Protected componentsFuse amp ratingFuse or relay number
Passenger compartment fuse panel run/
start.
30A
**
94
Center console start feed.
2A
*
95
Not used.-96
Not used.-97
A/C clutch relay.Relay98
*
Mini Fuses
**
Cartridge Fuses
Passenger Compartment Fuse
Panel
The fuse panel is under the instrument
panel to the left of the steering wheel. You
may need to remove a trim panel to access
it.
164
Police Interceptor (CPH), enUSA, Edition date: 10/2015, First Printing
Fuses
E163102
Protected componentsFuse amp ratingFuse or relay number
Left front and right rear smart window
motors.
30A1
Driver seat switch.15A2
14-way B+ feed 3.
Not used (spare).30A3
Demand lamps battery saver relay.10A4
Glove box lamp.
Task lamp.
14-way B+ feed 1.20A5
Not used (spare).5A6
Not used (spare).7.5A7
Not used (spare).10A8
165
Police Interceptor (CPH), enUSA, Edition date: 10/2015, First Printing
Fuses
Protected componentsFuse amp ratingFuse or relay number
SYNC module.10A9
Multi-function displays.
Electronic finish panel.
Radio frequency transceiver module.
Run accessory relay.10A10
Not used (spare).10A11
Backlighting LED.15A12
Interior lighting.
Backlighting feed.
Right-hand direction indicators.15A13
Right rear police fuse/relay box.
Left-hand direction indicators.15A14
Left rear police fuse/relay box.
Stop lamp.15A15
Backup lamp.
Right front low beam.10A16
Left front low beam.10A17
Brake-shift interlock.10A18
Powertrain control module wake-up.
Police B+ 8 access circuit center console.20A19
14-way B+ feed 2.
All lock motor relay and coil.20A20
Driver lock motor relay and coil.
Not used (spare).10A21
Horn relay.20A22
Steering wheel control module logic15A23
Instrument cluster.
Steering wheel control module.15A24
Not used (spare).15A25
Ignition switch.5A26
Not used (spare).20A27
Not used (spare).15A28
166
Police Interceptor (CPH), enUSA, Edition date: 10/2015, First Printing
Fuses
Protected componentsFuse amp ratingFuse or relay number
Radio.20A29
Global positioning system module.
Front park lamps.15A30
Brake signal for police equipment.5A31
Master window and mirror switch.15A32
Lock switch illumination.
Police console inline delayed accessory
feed.
Delayed accessory feed.
Not used (spare).10A33
Reverse park aid module.10A34
Blind spot monitor module.
Rear video camera.
Motorized humidity sensor.5A35
Overdrive cancel switch (Low gear switch
feed).
Column shift – low gear.
Not used (spare).10A36
Not used (spare).10A37
Auto–dimming mirror.10A38
Rear camera display mirror.
High beam headlamp shutters.15A39
Rear park lamps.10A40
Restraints run/start.7.5A41
Police 4-button steering wheel control
module.
5A42
Not used (spare).10A43
Not used (spare).10A44
Not used (spare).5A45
Climate control module.10A46
167
Police Interceptor (CPH), enUSA, Edition date: 10/2015, First Printing
Fuses
Protected componentsFuse amp ratingFuse or relay number
Not used (spare).15A47
Window switches.30A Circuit breaker48
Delayed accessory.Relay49
CHANGING A FUSE
Fuses
WARNING
Always replace a fuse with one that
has the specified amperage rating.
Using a fuse with a higher amperage
rating can cause severe wire damage and
could start a fire.
E217331
If electrical components in the vehicle are
not working, a fuse may have blown. Blown
fuses are identified by a broken wire within
the fuse. Check the appropriate fuses
before replacing any electrical
components.
Fuse Types
E207206
168
Police Interceptor (CPH), enUSA, Edition date: 10/2015, First Printing
Fuses
Fuse TypeCallout
Micro 2A
Micro 3B
MaxiC
MiniD
M CaseE
J CaseF
J Case Low ProfileG
169
Police Interceptor (CPH), enUSA, Edition date: 10/2015, First Printing
Fuses
GENERAL INFORMATION
Have your vehicle serviced regularly to help
maintain its roadworthiness and resale
value. There is a large network of
authorized dealers that are there to help
you with their professional servicing
expertise. We believe that their specially
trained technicians are best qualified to
service your vehicle properly and expertly.
They are supported by a wide range of
highly specialized tools developed
specifically for servicing your vehicle.
If your vehicle requires professional service,
an authorized dealer can provide the
necessary parts and service. Check your
warranty information to find out which
parts and services are covered.
Use only recommended fuels, lubricants,
fluids and service parts conforming to
specifications. Motorcraft® parts are
designed and built to provide the best
performance in your vehicle.
Precautions
• Do not work on a hot engine.
• Make sure that nothing gets caught in
moving parts.
• Do not work on a vehicle with the
engine running in an enclosed space,
unless you are sure you have enough
ventilation.
• Keep all open flames and other burning
material (such as cigarettes) away
from the battery and all fuel related
parts.
Working with the Engine Off
1. Set the parking brake and shift to park
(P).
2. Switch off the engine.
3. Block the wheels.
Working with the Engine On
WARNING
To reduce the risk of vehicle damage
and/or personal burn injuries, do not
start your engine with the air cleaner
removed and do not remove it while the
engine is running.
1. Set the parking brake and shift to park
(P).
2. Block the wheels.
OPENING AND CLOSING THE
HOOD
Opening the Hood
E203008
1
170
Police Interceptor (CPH), enUSA, Edition date: 10/2015, First Printing
Maintenance
1. Inside the vehicle, pull the hood release
handle located under the left-hand
side of the instrument panel.
2. Slightly lift the hood.
2
E203009
3
3. Release the hood latch by pushing the
secondary release lever to your
left-hand side.
E202009
4
4. Open the hood. The hood struts
automatically support the hood.
Closing the Hood
1. Lower the hood and allow it to drop
under its own weight for the last
8–12 in (20–30 cm).
Note: Make sure that the hood is correctly
closed.
171
Police Interceptor (CPH), enUSA, Edition date: 10/2015, First Printing
Maintenance
UNDER HOOD OVERVIEW - 2.0L ECOBOOST™
A
I H
EB
C
D
F
G
E188729
Engine coolant reservoir. See Engine Coolant Check (page 176).A
Brake fluid reservoir (right-hand drive). See Brake Fluid Check (page 184).B
Engine oil dipstick. See Engine Oil Dipstick (page 175).C
Engine oil filler cap. See Engine Oil Check (page 175).D
Brake fluid reservoir (left-hand drive). See Brake Fluid Check (page 184).E
Battery. See Changing the 12V Battery (page 185).F
Power distribution box. See Fuses (page 159).G
Air filter assembly. See Changing the Engine Air Filter (page 192).H
Windshield washer fluid reservoir. See Washer Fluid Check (page 184).I
172
Police Interceptor (CPH), enUSA, Edition date: 10/2015, First Printing
Maintenance
UNDER HOOD OVERVIEW - 3.5L ECOBOOST™
E173375
Engine coolant reservoir. See Engine Coolant Check (page 176).A.
Engine oil filler cap. See Engine Oil Check (page 175).B.
Engine oil dipstick. See Engine Oil Dipstick (page 175).C.
Brake fluid reservoir. See Brake Fluid Check (page 184).D.
Battery. See Changing the 12V Battery (page 185).E.
Power distribution box. See Fuses (page 159).F.
Air filter assembly. See Changing the Engine Air Filter (page 192).G.
Automatic transmission dipstick (under air filter assembly). See Automatic
Transmission Fluid Check (page 180).
H.
Windshield washer fluid reservoir. See Washer Fluid Check (page 184).I.
173
Police Interceptor (CPH), enUSA, Edition date: 10/2015, First Printing
Maintenance
UNDER HOOD OVERVIEW - 3.5L DURATEC/3.7L
A
I EFGH
B C D
E224921
Windshield washer fluid reservoir. See Washer Fluid Check (page 184).A.
Brake fluid reservoir. See Brake Fluid Check (page 184).B.
Battery. See Changing the 12V Battery (page 185).C.
Power distribution box. See Fuses (page 159).D.
Air filter assembly. See Changing the Engine Air Filter (page 192).E.
Automatic transmission dipstick. See Automatic Transmission Fluid Check
(page 180).
F.
Engine oil dipstick. See Engine Oil Dipstick (page 175).G.
Engine oil filler cap. See Engine Oil Check (page 175).H.
Engine coolant reservoir. See Engine Coolant Check (page 176).I.
174
Police Interceptor (CPH), enUSA, Edition date: 10/2015, First Printing
Maintenance
Engine Shield
E173374
Some vehicles may be equipped with an
aero-shield under the engine. This shield
needs to be removed for service, including
oil and filter changes. The shield has four
quick-release fasteners to secure it in
place.
ENGINE OIL DIPSTICK - 2.0L
ECOBOOST™
E161560
A B
Minimum.A
Maximum.B
ENGINE OIL DIPSTICK - 3.5L
DURATEC/3.5L ECOBOOST™/
3.7L
E146429
MINA
MAXB
ENGINE OIL CHECK
Note: Check the level before starting the
engine.
Note: Make sure that the oil level is
between the minimum and the maximum
marks.
1. Make sure that your vehicle is on level
ground.
2. Turn the engine off and wait 10 minutes
for the oil to drain into the oil pan.
3. Remove the dipstick and wipe it with
a clean, lint-free cloth. Replace the
dipstick and remove it again to check
the oil level.
If the oil level is at the minimum mark, add
oil immediately.
Adding Engine Oil
Note: Do not remove the filler cap when
the engine is running.
175
Police Interceptor (CPH), enUSA, Edition date: 10/2015, First Printing
Maintenance
Note: Do not add oil further than the MAX
mark. Oil levels above the MAX mark may
cause engine damage.
E142732
Only use oils certified for gasoline engines
by the American Petroleum Institute (API).
An oil with this trademark symbol
conforms to the current engine and
emission system protection standards and
fuel economy requirements of the
International Lubricants Specification
Advisory Committee (ILSAC).
1. Remove the filler cap.
2. If the engine oil level is not within the
normal range, add engine oil that
meets Ford specifications. See
Capacities and Specifications (page
229).
3. Remove the engine oil filler cap and
use a funnel to pour the engine oil into
the opening.
4. Wipe off any spilled oil.
5. Replace the filler cap. Turn it until you
feel a strong resistance.
OIL CHANGE INDICATOR
RESET
Use the information display controls on
the steering wheel to reset the oil change
indicator.
From the main menu scroll to:
Action and descriptionMessage
Press the right arrow button,
then from this menu scroll
to the following message.
Settings
Press the right arrow button,
then from this menu scroll
to the following message.
Conveni-
ence
Press the right arrow button,
then from this menu scroll
to the following message.
Oil Life
Reset
Press and hold the OK
button until the instrument
cluster displays the
following message.
Hold OK to
Reset
Reset Successful
When the oil change indic-
ator resets the instrument
cluster displays 100%.
Remaining Life
{00}%
If the instrument cluster
displays one of the following
messages, repeat the
process.
Not Reset
Reset Cancelled
ENGINE COOLANT CHECK
WARNINGS
Do not add engine coolant when the
engine is hot. Steam and scalding
liquids released from a hot cooling
system can burn you badly. Also, spilling
coolant on hot engine parts can burn you.
176
Police Interceptor (CPH), enUSA, Edition date: 10/2015, First Printing
Maintenance
WARNINGS
Do not put engine coolant in the
windshield washer fluid container. If
sprayed on the windshield, engine
coolant could make it difficult to see
through the windshield.
To reduce the risk of personal injury,
make sure the engine is cool before
unscrewing the coolant pressure
relief cap. The cooling system is under
pressure. Steam and hot liquid can come
out forcefully when you loosen the cap
slightly.
Do not add coolant further than the
MAX mark.
Checking the Engine Coolant
When the engine is cold, check the
concentration and level of the engine
coolant at the intervals listed in the
scheduled maintenance information. See
Scheduled Maintenance (page 310).
Note: Make sure that the coolant level is
between the MIN and MAX marks on the
coolant reservoir.
Note: Coolant expands when it is hot. The
level may extend beyond the MAX mark.
Note: If the level is at the MIN mark, below
the MIN mark, or empty, add coolant
immediately.
Maintain coolant concentration within
48% to 50%, which equates to a freeze
point between -30°F (-34°C) and -34°F
(-37°C).
Note: For best results, coolant
concentration should be tested with a
refractometer such as Robinair® Coolant
and Battery Refractometer 75240. We do
not recommend the use of hydrometers or
coolant test strips for measuring coolant
concentrations.
Note: Automotive fluids are not
interchangeable. Do not use engine coolant,
antifreeze or windshield washer fluid outside
of its specified function and vehicle location.
Adding Engine Coolant
Note: Do not use stop leak pellets, cooling
system sealants or additives as they can
cause damage to the engine cooling or
heating systems. Your warranty may not
cover these damages.
Note: During normal vehicle operation, the
coolant may change color from orange to
pink or light red. As long as the coolant is
clear and uncontaminated, this color change
does not indicate the coolant has degraded
nor does it require the coolant to be drained,
the system to be flushed, or the coolant to
be replaced.
Do not mix different colors or types of
coolant in your vehicle. Mixing of engine
coolants may harm your engine’s cooling
system. Use prediluted engine coolant
meeting the correct specification. See
Capacities and Specifications (page
229). The use of an incorrect coolant may
harm the engine or cooling system
components and may not be covered by
the vehicle Warranty.
In case of emergency, you can add a large
amount of water without engine coolant
in order to reach a vehicle service location.
In this instance, qualified personnel:
1. Must drain the cooling system.
2. Chemically clean the cooling system
with Motorcraft Premium Cooling
System Flush.
3. Refill with engine coolant as soon as
possible.
Water alone, without engine coolant, can
cause engine damage from corrosion,
overheating or freezing.
177
Police Interceptor (CPH), enUSA, Edition date: 10/2015, First Printing
Maintenance
Do not use the following as a coolant
substitute:
• Alcohol.
• Methanol.
• Brine.
• Any engine coolant mixed with alcohol
or methanol antifreeze or coolant.
Alcohol and other liquids can cause engine
damage from overheating or freezing.
Do not add extra inhibitors or additives to
the coolant. These can be harmful and
compromise the corrosion protection of
the engine coolant.
When adding coolant:
1. Unscrew the cap slowly. Any pressure
will escape as you unscrew the cap.
2. Add prediluted engine coolant meeting
the correct specification. See
Capacities and Specifications (page
229).
3. Check the coolant level in the coolant
reservoir the next few times you drive
your vehicle.
4. If necessary, add enough prediluted
engine coolant to bring the coolant
level to the proper level.
Recycled Engine Coolant
We do not recommend the use of recycled
engine coolant as an approved recycling
process is not yet available.
Used engine coolant should be disposed
of in an appropriate manner. Follow your
community’s regulations and standards
for recycling and disposing of automotive
fluids.
Severe Climates
If you drive in extremely cold climates:
• It may be necessary to have an
authorized dealer increase the coolant
concentration above 50%.
• A coolant concentration of 60%
provides improved freeze point
protection. Engine coolant
concentrations above 60% decrease
the overheat protection characteristics
of the engine coolant and may cause
engine damage.
If you drive in extremely hot climates:
• It may be necessary to have an
authorized dealer decrease the coolant
concentration to 40%.
• A coolant concentration of 40%
provides improved overheat protection.
Engine coolant concentrations below
40% decrease the freeze and corrosion
protection characteristics of the engine
coolant and may cause engine
damage.
Vehicles driven year-round in non-extreme
climates should use prediluted engine
coolant for optimum cooling system and
engine protection.
What You Should Know About Fail-
Safe Cooling
If you deplete the engine coolant supply,
fail-safe cooling allows you to temporarily
drive your vehicle before you incur
incremental component damage. The
fail-safe distance depends on ambient
temperatures, vehicle load and terrain.
How Fail-Safe Cooling Works
If the engine begins to overheat, the engine
coolant temperature gauge will move to
the red (hot) area and:
the coolant temperature warning
light will illuminate
178
Police Interceptor (CPH), enUSA, Edition date: 10/2015, First Printing
Maintenance
the service engine soon indicator
will illuminate.
If the engine reaches a preset
over-temperature condition, the engine
automatically switches to alternating
cylinder operation. Each disabled cylinder
acts as an air pump and cools the engine.
When this occurs, your vehicle will still
operate. However:
• The engine power will be limited.
• This will disable the air conditioning
system.
Continued operation increases the engine
temperature, causing the engine to
completely shut down. Your steering and
braking effort increases in this situation.
When the engine temperature cools, you
can re-start your engine. Take your vehicle
to an authorized dealer as soon as possible
to minimize engine damage.
When Fail-Safe Mode Is Activated
WARNINGS
Fail-safe mode is for use during
emergencies only. Operate your
vehicle in fail-safe mode only as long
as necessary to bring your vehicle to rest
in a safe location and seek immediate
repairs. When in fail-safe mode, your
vehicle will have limited power, will not be
able to maintain high-speed operation, and
may completely shut down without
warning, potentially losing engine power,
power steering assist, and power brake
assist, which may increase the possibility
of a crash resulting in serious injury.
Never remove the coolant reservoir
cap while the engine is running or hot.
You have limited engine power when in the
fail-safe mode, so drive your vehicle with
caution. Your vehicle will not maintain
high-speed operation and the engine will
operate poorly.
Remember that the engine is capable of
automatically shutting down to prevent
engine damage. In this situation:
1. Pull off the road as soon as safely
possible and switch off the engine.
2. Tow your vehicle to an authorized
dealer.
3. If this is not possible, wait a short
period for the engine to cool.
4. Check the coolant level and add if low.
5. Re-start the engine and drive your
vehicle to an authorized dealer.
Note: Driving your vehicle without repair
increases the chance of engine damage.
Contact an authorized dealer as soon as
possible.
Engine Fluid Temperature
Management (If Equipped)
WARNINGS
To reduce the risk of crash and injury,
be prepared that the vehicle speed
may reduce and the vehicle may not
be able to accelerate with full power until
the fluid temperatures reduce.
Never remove the coolant reservoir
cap while the engine is running or hot.
Your vehicle can pull a trailer, but because
of the added load, your vehicle’s engine
may temporarily reach higher
temperatures during severe operating
conditions such as ascending a long or
steep grade while pulling a trailer in high
temperatures.
179
Police Interceptor (CPH), enUSA, Edition date: 10/2015, First Printing
Maintenance
At this time, you may notice your engine
coolant temperature gauge needle move
toward the H and the POWER REDUCED
TO LOWER TEMP message may appear
in the information display.
You may notice a reduction in vehicle
speed caused by reduced engine power.
In order to manage the engine fluid
temperatures, your vehicle may enter this
mode if certain high-temperature and
high-load conditions take place. The
amount of speed reduction depends on
many factors such as vehicle loading,
towing, grade and ambient temperature.
If this occurs, there is no need to pull off
the road. You can continue to drive your
vehicle while this message is active.
The air conditioning may also cycle on and
off during severe operating conditions to
protect overheating of the engine. When
the engine coolant temperature decreases
to a normal operating temperature, the air
conditioning will turn on once again.
If the engine coolant temperature gauge
moves fully into the red (hot) area, or if the
coolant temperature warning or service
engine soon messages appear in your
information display:
1. Pull off the road as soon as safely
possible and shift the transmission into
P.
2. Leave the engine running until the
coolant temperature gauge needle
moves away from the red (hot) area.
After several minutes, if the
temperature does not drop, follow the
remaining steps.
3. Switch the engine off and wait for it to
cool before checking the coolant level.
4. If the coolant level is normal, restart
your engine and continue.
5. If the coolant is low, add coolant, and
restart the engine. See Adding Engine
Coolant or How Fail-Safe Cooling
Works in this chapter for more
information.
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
FLUID CHECK - 2.0L
ECOBOOST™
6F35 Transmission
The automatic transmission does not have
a transmission fluid dipstick.
The automatic transmission does not
consume fluid. If the transmission is not
working correctly, for example, the
transmission slips, shifts slowly or there
are signs of fluid leakage, have the system
checked by an authorized dealer.
Change the automatic transmission fluid
and filter at the correct service interval.
Do not use supplemental automatic
transmission fluid additives because they
are unnecessary and could lead to
transmission damage that may not be
covered by the vehicle Warranty.
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
FLUID CHECK - 3.5L DURATEC/
3.5L ECOBOOST™/3.7L
6F50/6F55 Transmission (If Equipped)
WARNINGS
The dipstick cap and surrounding
components may be hot, use gloves.
Use gloves when moving the air filter
assembly. Components will be hot.
180
Police Interceptor (CPH), enUSA, Edition date: 10/2015, First Printing
Maintenance
Note: Automatic transmission fluid
expands when warmed. To obtain an
accurate fluid check, drive your vehicle until
you warm it up, approximately 20 mi
(30 km). If you operate your vehicle for an
extended period at high speeds, in city traffic
during hot weather or pulling a trailer, switch
your vehicle off until it reaches normal
operating temperatures to allow the fluid
to cool before checking. Depending on
vehicle use, cooling times could take up to
30 minutes or longer.
Refer to your scheduled maintenance
information for scheduled intervals for fluid
checks and changes. Your transmission
does not consume fluid. However, you
should check the fluid level if the
transmission is not working properly. For
example, if the transmission slips or shifts
slowly or if you notice some sign of a fluid
leak.
1. Drive your vehicle 20 mi (30 km) or
until it reaches normal operating
temperature.
2. Park your vehicle on a level surface and
engage the parking brake.
3. With the parking brake engaged and
your foot on the brake pedal, start the
engine and move the gearshift lever
through all of the gear ranges. Allow a
minimum of 10 seconds for each gear
to engage.
4. Put the gearshift lever in park (P) and
leave the engine running.
Note: For vehicles with the EcoBoost
engine, move the air filter assembly aside
to access the transmission dipstick. See
Moving the Air Filter Assembly for more
information.
5. Remove the dipstick and wipe it clean
with a dry, lint free clean rag. If
necessary, refer to the Under hood
overview in this chapter for the location
of the dipstick.
6. Install the dipstick making sure you
fully seat it in the filler tube by turning
it to the locked position.
7. Remove the dipstick and inspect the
fluid level. The fluid should be in the
designated areas for normal operating
temperature.
Moving the Air Filter Assembly
(Accessing the Dipstick)
WARNING
Do not run engine with the air filter
disconnected.
1. Switch the engine off.
E173335
2
3
2. Clean the area around the clamp that
connects the air filter assembly to the
rubber hose and then loosen it.
3. Remove the bolt cover.
181
Police Interceptor (CPH), enUSA, Edition date: 10/2015, First Printing
Maintenance
E173334
6
5
4
4. Remove two bolts that attach the air
filter assembly to the front of the
vehicle.
5. Remove the harness retaining clip by
pulling up.
6. Do not disconnect the sensor.
E173400
7. Pull the air filter assembly up to
disconnect it from the seated
grommets located under the air filter
assembly.
8. Rotate the air filter assembly 90
degrees counterclockwise. Make sure
the rubber hose is still connected to the
air filter assembly.
9. Tighten the clamp.
You can now access the transmission fluid
level indicator.
Checking the fluid level
Low fluid level
E158842
If the fluid level is below the MIN range of
the dipstick, add fluid to reach the hash
mark level.
Note: If the fluid level is below the MIN
level, do not drive the vehicle. An underfill
condition may cause shift or engagement
concerns or possible damage.
Correct fluid level
E158843
182
Police Interceptor (CPH), enUSA, Edition date: 10/2015, First Printing
Maintenance
Check the transmission fluid at the normal
operating temperatures between 180°F
(82°C) and 200°F (93°C) on a level
surface. Drive your vehicle until you warm
it up to the normal operating temperature
after approximately 20 mi (30 km).
Target the transmission fluid level within
the cross-hatch area if at the normal
operating temperature between 180°F
(82°C) and 200°F (93°C).
High fluid level
E158844
If the fluid level is above the MAX range of
the dipstick, remove fluid to reach the
hashmark level.
Note: Fluid level above the MAX level may
cause shift or engagement concerns or
possible damage. An overheating condition
can cause high fluid levels. If you operate
your vehicle for an extended period at high
speeds, in city traffic during hot weather or
pulling a trailer, you should switch your
vehicle off until your vehicle reaches normal
operating temperatures. Depending on
vehicle use, cooling times could take up to
30 minutes or longer.
Adjusting Automatic Transmission Fluid
Levels
E158845
E158846
Before adding any fluid, make sure the
correct type is used. The type of fluid used
is normally indicated on the dipstick and
in the Technical Specifications section in
this chapter.
Note: An overfill condition of transmission
fluid may cause shift or engagement
concerns or possible damage.
Do not use supplemental transmission
fluid additives, treatments or cleaning
agents. The use of these materials may
affect transmission operation and result
in damage to internal transmission
components. Reinstall the air filter
assembly. After you check the fluid level
and adjust as necessary, do the following:
1. Switch the engine off.
2. Loosen the clamp holding the air filter
assembly to the rubber hose.
3. Seat the air filter assembly back into
the grommets by pushing down on the
air filter assembly.
4. Tighten the clamp.
183
Police Interceptor (CPH), enUSA, Edition date: 10/2015, First Printing
Maintenance
5. Install and tighten the two bolts that
attach the air filter assembly to the
front of the vehicle.
6. Install the bolt cover.
7. Reinstall the harness retaining clip into
the front of the air filter assembly.
BRAKE FLUID CHECK
WARNINGS
Do not use any fluid other than the
recommended brake fluid as this will
reduce brake efficiency. Use of
incorrect fluid could result in the loss of
vehicle control, serious personal injury or
death.
Only use brake fluid from a sealed
container. Contamination with dirt,
water, petroleum products or other
materials may result in brake system
damage or failure. Failure to adhere to this
warning could result in the loss of vehicle
control, serious personal injury or death.
Do not allow the fluid to touch your
skin or eyes. If this happens, rinse the
affected areas immediately with
plenty of water and contact your physician.
A fluid level between the MAX and
MIN lines is within the normal
operating range and there is no need
to add fluid. A fluid level not in the normal
operating range could compromise the
performance of the system. Have your
vehicle checked immediately.
E170684
To avoid fluid contamination, the reservoir
cap must remain in place and fully tight,
unless you are adding fluid.
Only use fluid that meets Ford
specifications. See Capacities and
Specifications (page 229).
POWER STEERING FLUID
CHECK
Your vehicle is equipped with an electric
power steering (EPS) system. There is no
fluid reservoir to check or fill.
WASHER FLUID CHECK
WARNING
If you operate your vehicle in
temperatures below 40°F (5°C), use
washer fluid with antifreeze
protection. Failure to use washer fluid with
antifreeze protection in cold weather could
result in impaired windshield vision and
increase the risk of injury or accident.
184
Police Interceptor (CPH), enUSA, Edition date: 10/2015, First Printing
Maintenance
Add fluid to fill the reservoir if the level is
low. Only use a washer fluid that meets
Ford specifications. See Capacities and
Specifications (page 229).
State or local regulations on volatile
organic compounds may restrict the use
of methanol, a common windshield washer
antifreeze additive. Washer fluids
containing non-methanol antifreeze
agents should be used only if they provide
cold weather protection without damaging
the vehicle’s paint finish, wiper blades or
washer system.
FUEL FILTER
Your vehicle is equipped with a lifetime
fuel filter that is integrated with the fuel
tank. Regular maintenance or replacement
is not needed.
CHANGING THE 12V BATTERY
WARNINGS
Batteries normally produce explosive
gases which can cause personal
injury. Therefore, do not allow
flames, sparks or lighted substances to
come near the battery. When working near
the battery, always shield your face and
protect your eyes. Always provide correct
ventilation.
When lifting a plastic-cased battery,
excessive pressure on the end walls
could cause acid to flow through the
vent caps, resulting in personal injury and
damage to the vehicle or battery. Lift the
battery with a battery carrier or with your
hands on opposite corners.
WARNINGS
Keep batteries out of reach of
children. Batteries contain sulfuric
acid. Avoid contact with skin, eyes or
clothing. Shield your eyes when working
near the battery to protect against possible
splashing of acid solution. In case of acid
contact with skin or eyes, flush
immediately with water for a minimum of
15 minutes and get prompt medical
attention. If acid is swallowed, call a
physician immediately.
Battery posts, terminals and related
accessories contain lead and lead
compounds. Wash hands after
handling.
This vehicle may be fitted with more
than one battery. Removing the
battery cables from only one battery
does not disconnect your vehicle electrical
system. Make sure you disconnect the
battery cables from all batteries when
disconnecting power. Failure to do so may
cause serious personal injury or property
damage.
Your vehicle is fitted with a Motorcraft
maintenance-free battery which normally
does not require additional water.
When a battery replacement is required,
you must use a recommended
replacement battery that matches the
electrical requirements of the vehicle.
Note: After cleaning or replacing the
battery, make sure you reinstall the battery
cover or shield.
Note: If you add electrical accessories or
components to the vehicle, it may adversely
affect the low voltage battery performance
and durability. This may also affect the
performance of other electrical systems in
the vehicle.
For longer, trouble-free operation, keep the
top of the battery clean and dry.
185
Police Interceptor (CPH), enUSA, Edition date: 10/2015, First Printing
Maintenance
If you see any corrosion on the battery or
terminals, remove the cables from the
terminals and clean with a wire brush. You
can neutralize the acid with a solution of
baking soda and water.
Because your vehicle’s engine is
electronically controlled by a computer,
some control conditions are maintained
by power from the battery. When the
battery is disconnected or a new battery
is installed, the engine must relearn its idle
and fuel trim strategy for optimum
driveability and performance. Flexible fuel
vehicles (FFV) must also relearn the
ethanol content of the fuel for optimum
driveability and performance.
To restore the settings, do the following:
1. Apply the parking brake.
2. Shift into park (P) or neutral (N).
3. Switch off all accessories.
4. Press the brake pedal and start your
vehicle.
5. Run the engine until it reaches normal
operating temperature. While the
engine is warming up, complete the
following: Reset the clock. See Audio
System (page 254). Reset the power
windows bounce-back feature. See
Windows and Mirrors (page 61).
Reset the radio station presets. See
Audio System (page 254).
6. Allow the engine to idle for at least one
minute.
7. Drive the vehicle at least 10 mi (16 km)
to completely relearn the idle trim and
fuel trim strategy.
Note: If you do not allow the engine to
relearn the idle and fuel trim strategy, the
idle quality of your vehicle may be adversely
affected until the engine computer
eventually relearns the idle trim and fuel
trim strategy.
Note: For flexible fuel vehicles, if you are
operating on E85, you may experience poor
starts or an inability to start the engine and
driveability problems until the fuel trim and
ethanol content have been relearned.
Make sure that you dispose of old batteries
in an environmentally friendly way. Seek
advice from your local authority about
recycling old batteries.
If storing your vehicle for more than 30
days without recharging the battery, we
recommend that you disconnect the
battery cables to maintain battery charge
for quick starting.
Battery Management System (If
Equipped)
The battery management system monitors
battery conditions and takes actions to
extend battery life. If excessive battery
drain is detected, the system temporarily
disables some electrical systems to
protect the battery.
Systems included are:
• Heated rear window.
• Heated seats.
• Climate control.
• Heated steering wheel.
• Audio unit.
• Navigation system.
A message may appear in the information
displays to alert you that battery
protection actions are active. These
messages are only for notification that an
action is taking place, and not intended to
indicate an electrical problem or that the
battery requires replacement.
186
Police Interceptor (CPH), enUSA, Edition date: 10/2015, First Printing
Maintenance
After battery replacement, or in some
cases after charging the battery with an
external charger, the battery management
system requires eight hours of vehicle sleep
time to relearn the battery state of charge.
During this time your vehicle must remain
fully locked with the ignition switched off.
Note: Prior to relearning the battery state
of charge, the battery management system
may temporarily disable some electrical
systems.
Electrical Accessory Installation
To make sure the battery management
system works correctly, do not connect an
electrical device ground connection
directly to the battery negative post. This
can cause inaccurate measurements of
the battery condition and potential
incorrect system operation.
Note: If you add electrical accessories or
components to the vehicle, it may adversely
affect battery performance and durability.
This may also affect the performance of
other electrical systems in the vehicle.
CHECKING THE WIPER
BLADES
E142463
Run the tip of your fingers over the edge of
the blade to check for roughness.
Clean the wiper blades with washer fluid
or water applied with a soft sponge or
cloth.
CHANGING THE WIPER
BLADES
1. Pull the wiper blade and arm away
from the glass and press the locking
buttons together.
E129990
1
1
2
2. Rotate and remove the wiper blade.
3. Attach the new blade to the arm and
snap it into place.
Replace wiper blades at least once per
year for optimum performance.
Poor wiper quality can be improved by
cleaning the wiper blades and the
windshield. See Cleaning the Windows
and Wiper Blades (page 195).
ADJUSTING THE HEADLAMPS
Vertical Aim Adjustment
The headlamps on your vehicle are
properly aimed at the assembly plant. If
your vehicle has been in an accident, have
the alignment of your headlamps checked
by your authorized dealer.
187
Police Interceptor (CPH), enUSA, Edition date: 10/2015, First Printing
Maintenance
Headlamp Aiming Target
E142592
8 feet (2.4 meters)A
Center height of lamp to groundB
25 feet (7.6 meters)C
Horizontal reference lineD
Vertical Aim Adjustment
1. Park the vehicle directly in front of a
wall or screen on a level surface,
approximately 25 feet (7.6 meters)
away.
2. Measure the height from the center of
your headlamp (indicated by a 3.0
millimeter circle on the lens) to the
ground and mark an 8 foot (2.4 meter)
horizontal reference line on the vertical
wall or screen at this height (a piece of
masking tape works well).
Note: To see a clearer light pattern for
adjusting, you may want to block the light
from one headlamp while adjusting the
other.
3. Turn on the low beam headlamps to
illuminate the wall or screen and open
the hood. Cover one of the headlamps
so no light hits the wall.
E142465
4. There is a distinct cut-off (change from
light to dark) in the left portion of the
beam pattern. Position the top edge of
this cut-off 2 inches (5 centimeters)
below the horizontal reference line.
E167359
5. Locate the vertical adjuster on each
headlamp. Use a Phillips #2
screwdriver to turn the adjuster either
clockwise or counterclockwise to
adjust the vertical aim of the
headlamp. The horizontal edge of the
brighter light should touch the
horizontal reference line.
6. Repeat Steps 3 through 7 to adjust the
other headlamp.
7. Close the hood and turn off the lamps.
Horizontal Aim Adjustment
Horizontal aim is not required for this
vehicle and is not adjustable.
188
Police Interceptor (CPH), enUSA, Edition date: 10/2015, First Printing
Maintenance
CHANGING A BULB
WARNINGS
Bulbs can become hot. Let the bulb
cool down before removing it. Failure
to do so could result in personal
injury.
Switch the lamps and the ignition off.
Failure to follow this warning could
result in serious personal injury.
Use the correct specification bulb. See
Bulb Specification Chart (page 190).
Install in the reverse order unless otherwise
stated.
High-Intensity Discharge
Headlamps
These lamps operate at a high voltage. See
an authorized dealer if they fail.
Front Fog Lamp (If Equipped)
E163826
1. Switch all of the lamps and the ignition
off.
2. Disconnect the electrical connector.
3. Turn the bulb holder counterclockwise
and remove it.
Note: Do not touch the bulb glass.
Note: You cannot separate the bulb from
the bulb holder.
LED Lamps
LED lamps are not serviceable items. See
an authorized dealer if they fail.
The following lamps are LED:
• Front parking lamps.
• Front side marker lamps.
• Front direction indicators.
• Front side marker lamps.
• Side direction indicators.
• Brake and rear lamps.
• Central high mounted brake lamp.
• Rear direction indicators.
• Reversing lamps.
License Plate Lamp
1. Switch all of the lamps and the ignition
off.
E178598
2. Remove the screws that secure the
lamp assembly.
189
Police Interceptor (CPH), enUSA, Edition date: 10/2015, First Printing
Maintenance
E178599
3. Remove the bulb.
BULB SPECIFICATION CHART
Headlamp bulbs must be marked with an
authorized D.O.T. marking for North
America to make sure they have the proper
lamp performance, light brightness, light
pattern and safe visibility.
Replacement bulbs are specified in the
chart below. The correct bulbs will not
damage the lamp assembly or void the
lamp assembly warranty and will provide
quality bulb illumination time.
Exterior Lamps
Power (Watt)SpecificationLamp
LEDLEDFront side marker lamps.
LEDLEDFront parking lamps.
LEDLEDFront warning lamp.
LEDLEDDaytime running lamps. If equipped.
LEDLEDFront auxiliary warning lamp.
LEDLEDExterior mirror warning lamp.
LEDLEDFront direction indicator.
55D3SHigh-intensity discharge headlamps.
55H11Front fog lamps.
LEDLEDSide direction indicator.
LEDLEDRear quarter window warning lamp.
LEDLEDRear side marker lamp.
LEDLEDFront auxiliary warning lamp.
LEDLEDBrake and rear lamp.
LEDLEDCentral high mounted brake lamp.
LEDLEDRear direction indicator.
190
Police Interceptor (CPH), enUSA, Edition date: 10/2015, First Printing
Maintenance
Power (Watt)SpecificationLamp
LEDLEDReversing lamps.
5W5WLicense plate lamp.
Note: LED lamps are not serviceable. See an authorized dealer if they fail.
Interior Lamps
Power (Watt)SpecificationLamp
4194Glove compartment lamp.
5168Map lamp.
LEDLEDInterior lamp.
A6224PFVanity mirror lamp.
5W5WOverhead console lamp.
LEDLEDLuggage compartment lamp.
Note: LED lamps are not serviceable. See an authorized dealer if they fail.
191
Police Interceptor (CPH), enUSA, Edition date: 10/2015, First Printing
Maintenance
CHANGING THE ENGINE AIR
FILTER
WARNING
Do not start the engine with the air
cleaner removed. This can cause
damage not covered by the vehicle
Warranty and can result in serious injury.
When changing the air filter element, use
only the air filter element listed. See
Capacities and Specifications (page
229).
For vehicles with EcoBoost engines, when
servicing the air cleaner, it is important that
no foreign material enters the air induction
system. The engine and turbocharger are
susceptible to damage from even small
particles.
Change the air filter element at the correct
interval. See Scheduled Maintenance
(page 310).
Note: Failure to use the correct air filter
element may result in severe engine
damage. Resulting component damage
may not be covered by the vehicle Warranty.
To replace the air filter element do the
following:
1. Switch the ignition off.
E173520
2. Remove the clips that secure the air
filter housing cover.
3. Carefully lift the air filter housing cover.
4. Remove the air filter element from the
air filter housing.
5. Wipe any dirt or debris from the air filter
housing and cover to make sure no dirt
gets in the engine and that you have a
good seal.
6. Install a new air filter element.
7. Install the air filter housing cover. Be
careful not to crimp the filter element
edges between the air filter housing
and cover. This could cause filter
damage and allow unfiltered air to
enter the engine if it is not properly
seated.
8. Engage the clips to secure the air filter
housing cover to the air filter housing.
192
Police Interceptor (CPH), enUSA, Edition date: 10/2015, First Printing
Maintenance
GENERAL INFORMATION
Your Ford or Lincoln authorized dealer has
many quality products available to clean
your vehicle and protect its finishes.
CLEANING PRODUCTS
For best results, use the following products
or products of equivalent quality:
Materials
SpecificationName
-Motorcraft Bug and Tar Remover
ZC-42
-Motorcraft Custom Bright Metal Cleaner
ZC-15
ESR-M14P4-AMotorcraft® Detail Wash
ZC-3-A
-Motorcraft Engine Shampoo and Degreaser (U.S.)
ZC-20 (U.S.)
-Engine Shampoo
-Motorcraft Leather and Vinyl Cleaner
ZC-56
-Multi-Purpose Cleaner
WSS-M14P19-AMotorcraft® Premium Windshield Wash Concentrate with
Bitterant (U.S.)
ZC-32-B2 (U.S.)
-Professional Strength Carpet and Upholstery Cleaner
ZC-54
-Motorcraft Spot and Stain Remover (U.S.)
ZC-14 (U.S.)
ESR-M14P5-AMotorcraft® Ultra-Clear Spray Glass Cleaner (U.S.)
ZC-23 (U.S.)
-Motorcraft® Wheel and Tire Cleaner
ZC-37-A
CLEANING THE EXTERIOR
Wash your vehicle regularly with cool or
lukewarm water and a neutral pH
shampoo, we recommend Motorcraft
Detail Wash.
• Never use strong household detergents
or soap, for example dish washing or
laundry liquid. These products can
discolor and spot painted surfaces.
• Never wash your vehicle when it is hot
to the touch, or during strong or direct
sunlight.
• Dry your vehicle with a chamois or soft
terry cloth towel to eliminate water
spotting.
193
Police Interceptor (CPH), enUSA, Edition date: 10/2015, First Printing
Vehicle Care
• Immediately remove fuel spillages, bird
droppings, insect deposits and road tar.
These may cause damage to your
vehicle’s paintwork or trim over time.
We recommend Motorcraft Bug and
Tar Remover.
• Remove any exterior accessories, for
example antennas, before entering a
car wash.
Note: Suntan lotions and insect repellents
can damage painted surfaces. If these
substances come in contact with your
vehicle, wash the affected area as soon as
possible.
Exterior Chrome Parts
• Apply a high quality-cleaning product
to bumpers and other chrome parts.
Follow the manufacturer’s instructions.
We recommend Motorcraft Custom
Bright Metal Cleaner.
• Do not apply the cleaning product to
hot surfaces. Do not leave the cleaning
product on chrome surfaces longer
than the time recommended.
• Using other non-recommended
cleaners can result in severe and
permanent cosmetic damage.
Note: Never use abrasive materials, for
example steel wool or plastic pads as they
can scratch the chrome surface.
Note: Do not use chrome cleaner, metal
cleaner or polish on wheels or wheel covers.
Exterior Plastic Parts
For routine cleaning we recommend
Motorcraft Detail Wash. If tar or grease
spots are present, we recommend
Motorcraft Bug and Tar Remover.
Stripes or Graphics (If Equipped)
Hand washing your vehicle is preferred
however, pressure washing may be used
under the following conditions:
• Do not use water pressure higher than
2,000 psi (14,000 kPa).
• Do not use water hotter than 179°F
(82°C).
• Use a spray with a 40° wide spray
angle pattern.
• Keep the nozzle at a 12 in (305 mm)
distance and 90° angle to your
vehicle's surface.
Note: Holding the pressure washer nozzle
at an angle to the vehicle's surface may
damage graphics and cause the edges to
peel away from the vehicle's surface.
Underbody
Flush the complete underside of your
vehicle frequently. Keep body and door
drain holes free of debris or foreign
material.
WAXING
Regular waxing is necessary to protect your
car's paint from the elements. We
recommend that you wash and wax the
painted surface once or twice a year.
When washing and waxing, park your
vehicle in a shaded area out of direct
sunlight. Always wash your vehicle before
applying wax.
• Use a quality wax that does not contain
abrasives.
• Follow the manufacturer’s instructions
to apply and remove the wax.
• Apply a small amount of wax in a
back-and-forth motion, not in circles.
194
Police Interceptor (CPH), enUSA, Edition date: 10/2015, First Printing
Vehicle Care
• Do not allow wax to come in contact
with any non-body (low-gloss black)
colored trim. The wax will discolor or
stain the parts over time.
• Roof racks.
• Bumpers.
• Grained door handles.
• Side moldings.
• Mirror housings.
• Windshield cowl area.
• Do not apply wax to glass areas.
• After waxing, your car's paint should
feel smooth, and be free of streaks and
smudges.
CLEANING THE ENGINE
Engines are more efficient when they are
clean because grease and dirt buildup keep
the engine warmer than normal.
When washing:
• Take care when using a power washer
to clean the engine. The high-pressure
fluid could penetrate the sealed parts
and cause damage.
• Do not spray a hot engine with cold
water to avoid cracking the engine
block or other engine components.
• Spray Motorcraft Engine Shampoo and
Degreaser on all parts that require
cleaning and pressure rinse clean. In
Canada, use Motorcraft Engine
Shampoo.
• Never wash or rinse the engine while it
is hot or running; water in the running
engine may cause internal damage.
• Never wash or rinse any ignition coil,
spark plug wire or spark plug well, or
the area in and around these locations.
• Cover the battery, power distribution
box, and air filter assembly to prevent
water damage when cleaning the
engine.
CLEANING THE WINDOWS AND
WIPER BLADES
Car wash chemicals and environmental
fallout can result in windshield and wiper
blade contamination. Dirty windshield and
wipers will result in poor windshield wiper
operation. Keep the windshield and wiper
blades clean to maintain windshield wiper
performance.
To clean the windshield and wiper blades:
• Clean the windshield with a
non-abrasive glass cleaner. When
cleaning the interior of the windshield,
avoid getting any glass cleaner on the
instrument panel or door panels. Wipe
any glass cleaner off these surfaces
immediately.
• For windshields contaminated with
tree sap, chemicals, wax or bugs, clean
the entire windshield using steel wool
(no greater than 0000 grade) in a
circular motion and rinse with water.
• Clean the wiper blades with isopropyl
rubbing alcohol or windshield washer
concentrate.
Note: Do not use razor blades or other
sharp objects to clean or remove decals
from the inside of the heated rear window.
The vehicle warranty does not cover
damage caused to the heated rear window
grid lines.
195
Police Interceptor (CPH), enUSA, Edition date: 10/2015, First Printing
Vehicle Care
CLEANING THE INTERIOR
WARNINGS
Do not use cleaning solvents, bleach
or dye on the vehicle’s safety belts,
as these actions may weaken the
belt webbing.
On vehicles equipped with
seat-mounted airbags, do not use
chemical solvents or strong
detergents. Such products could
contaminate the side airbag system and
affect performance of the side airbag in a
collision.
For fabric, carpets, cloth seats, safety belts
and seats equipped with side airbags:
• Remove dust and loose dirt with a
vacuum cleaner.
• Remove light stains and soil with
Motorcraft Professional Strength
Carpet & Upholstery Cleaner.
• If grease or tar is present on the
material, spot-clean the area first with
Motorcraft Spot and Stain Remover. In
Canada, use Motorcraft Multi-Purpose
Cleaner.
• If a ring forms on the fabric after spot
cleaning, clean the entire area
immediately (but do not oversaturate)
or the ring will set.
• Do not use household cleaning
products or glass cleaners, which can
stain and discolor the fabric and affect
the flame retardant abilities of the seat
materials.
CLEANING THE INSTRUMENT
PANEL AND INSTRUMENT
CLUSTER LENS
WARNING
Do not use chemical solvents or
strong detergents when cleaning the
steering wheel or instrument panel
to avoid contamination of the airbag
system.
Note: Follow the same procedure as
cleaning leather seats for cleaning leather
instrument panels and leather interior trim
surfaces. See Cleaning Leather Seats
(page 197).
Clean the instrument panel and cluster
lens with a clean, damp and soft cloth,
then use a clean, dry and soft cloth to dry
these areas.
• Avoid cleaners or polishes that increase
the gloss of the upper portion of the
instrument panel. The dull finish in this
area helps protect you from
undesirable windshield reflection.
• Do not use any household cleaning
products or glass cleaners as these
may damage the finish of the
instrument panel, interior trim and
cluster lens.
• Wash or wipe your hands clean if you
have been in contact with certain
products such as insect repellent and
suntan lotion to avoid possible damage
to the interior painted surfaces.
• Do not allow air fresheners and hand
sanitizers to spill onto interior surfaces.
If a spill occurs, wipe off immediately.
Your warranty may not cover these
damages.
If a staining liquid like coffee or juice has
been spilled on the instrument panel or on
interior trim surfaces:
196
Police Interceptor (CPH), enUSA, Edition date: 10/2015, First Printing
Vehicle Care
1. Wipe up spilled liquid using a clean,
soft cloth as quickly as possible.
2. Use Motorcraft Premium Leather and
Vinyl Cleaner or a commercially
available leather cleaning product for
automotive interiors. Test any cleaner
or stain remover on an inconspicuous
area.
3. Alternatively, wipe the surface with a
clean, soft cloth and a mild soap and
water solution. Dry the area with a
clean, soft cloth.
4. If necessary, apply more soap and
water solution or cleaning product to
a clean, soft cloth and press it onto the
soiled area. Allow this to set at room
temperature for 30 minutes.
5. Remove the soaked cloth, then with a
clean, damp cloth, use a rubbing
motion for 60 seconds on the soiled
area.
6. Dry the area with a clean, soft cloth.
CLEANING LEATHER SEATS (If
Equipped)
Note: Follow the same procedure as
cleaning leather seats for cleaning leather
instrument panels and leather interior trim
surfaces.
For routine cleaning, wipe the surface with
a soft, damp cloth and a mild soap and
water solution. Dry the area with a clean,
soft cloth.
For cleaning and removing stains such as
dye transfer, use Motorcraft Premium
Leather and Vinyl Cleaner or a
commercially available leather cleaning
product for automotive interiors.
Note: Test any cleaner or stain remover on
an inconspicuous area.
You should:
• Remove dust and loose dirt with a
vacuum cleaner.
• Clean and treat spills and stains as
soon as possible.
Do not use the following products as these
may damage the leather:
• Oil and petroleum or silicone-based
leather conditioners.
• Household cleaners.
• Alcohol solutions.
• Solvents or cleaners intended
specifically for rubber, vinyl and
plastics.
REPAIRING MINOR PAINT
DAMAGE
Authorized dealers have touch-up paint to
match your vehicle’s color. Your vehicle
color code is printed on a sticker on the
front, left-hand side door jamb. Take your
color code to your authorized dealer to
make sure you get the correct color.
Before repairing minor paint damage, use
a cleaner such as Motorcraft Bug and Tar
Remover to remove particles such as bird
droppings, tree sap, insect deposits, tar
spots, road salt and industrial fallout.
Always read the instructions before using
cleaning products.
CLEANING THE ALLOY
WHEELS
Note: Do not apply a cleaning chemical to
warm or hot wheel rims and covers.
Note: Some automatic car washes may
cause damage to the finish on your wheel
rims and covers.
197
Police Interceptor (CPH), enUSA, Edition date: 10/2015, First Printing
Vehicle Care
Note: Industrial-strength or heavy-duty
cleaners in combination with brush agitation
to remove brake dust and dirt, could wear
away the clear coat finish over a period time.
Note: Do not use hydrofluoric acid-based
or high caustic-based wheel cleaners, steel
wool, fuels or strong household detergents.
Note: If you intend parking your vehicle for
an extended period after cleaning the
wheels with a wheel cleaner, drive your
vehicle for a few minutes before doing so.
This will reduce the risk of increased
corrosion of the brake discs.
Alloy wheels and wheel covers are coated
with a clear coat paint finish. To maintain
their condition we recommend that you:
• Clean the wheels weekly using
Motorcraft Wheel and Tire Cleaner.
Apply using manufacturer's
instructions.
• Use a sponge to remove heavy
deposits of dirt and brake dust
accumulation.
• Rinse thoroughly with a strong stream
of water when you have completed the
cleaning process.
• To remove tar and grease, use
Motorcraft Bug and Tar Remover.
VEHICLE STORAGE
If you plan on storing your vehicle for 30
days or more, read the following
maintenance recommendations to make
sure your vehicle stays in good operating
condition.
We engineer and test all motor vehicles
and their components for reliable, regular
driving. Under various conditions,
long-term storage may lead to degraded
engine performance or failure unless you
use specific precautions to preserve engine
components.
General
• Store all vehicles in a dry, ventilated
place.
• Protect from sunlight, if possible.
• If vehicles are stored outside, they
require regular maintenance to protect
against rust and damage.
Body
• Wash your vehicle thoroughly to
remove dirt, grease, oil, tar or mud from
exterior surfaces, rear-wheel housing
and the underside of front fenders.
• Periodically wash your vehicle if it is
stored in exposed locations.
• Touch-up exposed or primed metal to
prevent rust.
• Cover chrome and stainless steel parts
with a thick coat of auto wax to prevent
discoloration. Re-wax as necessary
when you wash your vehicle.
• Lubricate all hood, door and luggage
compartment hinges and latches with
a light grade oil.
• Cover interior trim to prevent fading.
• Keep all rubber parts free from oil and
solvents.
Engine
• Change the engine oil and filter prior to
storage because used engine oil
contains contaminates which may
cause engine damage.
• Start the engine every 15 days for a
minimum of 15 minutes. Run at fast idle
with the climate controls set to defrost
until the engine reaches normal
operating temperature.
198
Police Interceptor (CPH), enUSA, Edition date: 10/2015, First Printing
Vehicle Care
• With your foot on the brake, shift
through all the gears while the engine
is running.
• We recommend that you change the
engine oil before you use your vehicle
again.
Fuel system
• Fill the fuel tank with high-quality fuel
until the first automatic shutoff of the
fuel pump nozzle.
Cooling system
• Protect against freezing temperatures.
• When removing your vehicle from
storage, check coolant fluid level.
Confirm that there are no cooling
system leaks and that fluid is at the
recommended level.
Battery
• Check and recharge as necessary. Keep
connections clean.
• If storing your vehicle for more than 30
days without recharging the battery,
we recommend that you disconnect
the battery cables to maintain battery
charge for quick starting.
Note: It is necessary to reset memory
features if battery cables are disconnected.
Brakes
• Make sure the brakes and parking brake
release fully.
Tires
• Maintain recommended air pressure.
Miscellaneous
• Make sure all linkages, cables, levers
and pins under your vehicle are covered
with grease to prevent rust.
• Move vehicles at least 25 ft (7.5 m)
every 15 days to lubricate working parts
and prevent corrosion.
Removing Vehicle From Storage
When your vehicle is ready to come out of
storage, do the following:
• Wash your vehicle to remove any dirt
or grease film build-up on window
surfaces.
• Check windshield wipers for any
deterioration.
• Check under the hood for any foreign
material that may have collected
during storage such as mice or squirrel
nests.
• Check the exhaust for any foreign
material that may have collected
during storage.
• Check tire pressures and set tire
inflation per the Tire Label.
• Check brake pedal operation. Drive
your vehicle 15 ft (4.5 m) back and
forth to remove rust build-up.
• Check fluid levels (including coolant,
oil and gas) to make sure there are no
leaks, and fluids are at recommended
levels.
• If you remove the battery, clean the
battery cable ends and check for
damage.
Contact an authorized dealer if you have
any concerns or issues.
199
Police Interceptor (CPH), enUSA, Edition date: 10/2015, First Printing
Vehicle Care
GENERAL INFORMATION
A decal with tire pressure data is located
in the driver’s door opening.
Check and set the tire pressure at the
ambient temperature in which you are
intending to drive your vehicle and when
the tires are cold.
Note: Check your tire pressures regularly to
optimize fuel economy.
Note: Use only approved wheel and tire
sizes. Using other sizes could damage your
vehicle and will make the National Type
Approval invalid.
Note: If you change the diameter of the tires
from that fitted at the factory, the
speedometer may not display the correct
speed. Take your vehicle to an authorized
dealer to have the engine management
system reprogrammed.
TIRE SEALANT AND INFLATOR
KIT (If Equipped)
Note: The temporary mobility kit canister
contains enough sealant compound for one
tire repair only. See your authorized Ford
dealer for additional replacement sealant
canisters.
The kit is located under the load floor of
the trunk. The kit consists of an air
compressor to inflate the tire and a sealing
compound in a canister that will effectively
seal most punctures caused by nails or
similar objects. This kit will provide a
temporary tire repair allowing you to drive
your vehicle up to 120 mi (200 km) at a
maximum speed of 50 mph (80 km/h) to
reach a tire service location.
E144618
Air compressor (inside)A
Diverter knobB
On and off buttonC
Air pressure gaugeD
Sealant bottle and canisterE
Sealant filling clear tubeF
Sealant tube - tire valve
connector
G
Yellow cap toolH
Air compressor hoseI
Air hose -tire valve connectorJ
Accessory power plugK
Casing/housingL
200
Police Interceptor (CPH), enUSA, Edition date: 10/2015, First Printing
Wheels and Tires
General Information
WARNING
Failure to follow these guidelines
could result in an increased risk of
loss of vehicle control, injury or death.
Note: Do not use the kit if a tire has become
severely damaged by driving the vehicle with
a tire that has insufficient air pressure. Only
punctured areas located within the tire tread
can be sealed with the kit.
Do not attempt to repair punctures larger
than ¼ inch (6 millimeters) or damage to
the tire's sidewall. The tire may not
completely seal.
Loss of air pressure may adversely affect
tire performance. For this reason:
Note: Do not drive the vehicle above
50 mph (80 km/h).
Note: Do not drive further than 120 mi
(200 km). Drive only to the closest
authorized Ford dealer or tire repair shop to
have your tire inspected.
• Drive carefully and avoid abrupt
steering maneuvers.
• Periodically monitor tire inflation
pressure in the affected tire. If the tire
is losing pressure, have the vehicle
towed.
• Read the information in the Tips for
Use of the Kit section to make sure safe
operation of the kit and your vehicle.
Tips for Use of the Kit
Read the following list of tips to ensure
safe operation of the kit:
• Before operating the kit, make sure
your vehicle is safely off the road and
away from moving traffic. Turn on the
hazard lights.
• Always set the parking brake to ensure
the vehicle does not move
unexpectedly.
• Do not remove any foreign objects,
such as nails or screws, from the tire.
• When using the kit, leave the engine
running (only if the vehicle is outdoors
or in a well-ventilated area) so the
compressor does not drain the vehicle
battery.
• Do not allow the compressor to
operate continuously for more than 15
minutes. This will help prevent the
compressor from overheating.
• Never leave the kit unattended when
it is operating.
• Sealant compound contains latex.
Make sure that you use the non-latex
gloves provided to avoid an allergic
reaction.
• Keep the kit away from children.
• Only use the kit when the ambient
temperature is between -22°F (-30°C)
and 158°F (70°C).
• Only use the sealing compound before
the use by date. The use by date is on
the lower right hand corner of the label
located on the sealant canister
(bottle). Check the use by date
regularly and replace the canister after
four years.
• Do not store the kit unsecured inside
the passenger compartment of the
vehicle as it may cause injury during a
sudden stop or crash. Always store the
kit in its original location.
• After sealant use, the tire pressure
monitoring system sensor and valve
stem on the wheel must be replaced
by an authorized Ford dealer.
201
Police Interceptor (CPH), enUSA, Edition date: 10/2015, First Printing
Wheels and Tires
• When inflating a tire or other objects,
use the black air hose only. Do not use
the transparent hose which is designed
for sealant application only.
• Operating the kit could cause an
electrical disturbance in radio, CD, and
DVD player operation.
What to do when a Tire Is
Punctured
A tire puncture within the tire tread area
can be repaired in two stages with the kit.
• In the first stage, the tire will be
reinflated with a sealing compound
and air. After the tire has been
reinflated, you will need to drive the
vehicle a short distance 4 mi (6 km) to
distribute the sealant in the tire.
• In the second stage, you will need to
check the tire pressure and adjust, if
necessary, to the vehicle tire inflation
pressure.
First Stage: Reinflating the Tire
with Sealing Compound and Air
WARNINGS
Do not stand directly over the kit
while inflating the tire. If you notice
any unusual bulges or deformations
in the tire sidewall during inflation, stop
and call roadside assistance.
If the tire does not inflate to the
recommended tire pressure within
15 minutes, stop and call roadside
assistance.
Preparation: Park the vehicle in a safe, level
and secure area, away from moving traffic.
Turn the hazard lights on. Apply the parking
brake and turn the engine off. Inspect the
flat tire for visible damage.
Sealant compound contains latex. To
avoid any allergic reactions, use the
non-latex gloves located in the accessory
box on the underside of the kit housing.
Do not remove any foreign object that has
pierced the tire. If a puncture is located in
the tire sidewall, stop and call roadside
assistance.
1. Remove the valve cap from the tire
valve.
2. Unwrap the clear tube from the
compressor housing.
3. Remove the tube cap and fasten the
metal connector of the tube to the tire
valve, turning clockwise. Make sure the
connection is tightly fastened.
E144619
4. Plug the power cable into the 12-volt
power point in the vehicle.
5. Remove the warning sticker found on
the canister and place it on the top of
the instrument panel or the center of
the dash.
6. Start the vehicle only if the vehicle is
outdoors or in a well-ventilated area.
202
Police Interceptor (CPH), enUSA, Edition date: 10/2015, First Printing
Wheels and Tires
E144924
7. Push and turn dial (A)
counterclockwise to the sealant
position. Turn on the kit by pressing the
on/off button (B).
E144621
8. Inflate the tire to the pressure specified
by the tire label located on the driver's
door or the door jamb area. When the
sealant compound is being pumped
into the tire, the air pressure gauge will
indicate a pressure above the actual
tire pressure. This is normal and should
be no reason for concern. The pressure
gauge will provide a correct tire
pressure reading after about 30
seconds of operation. The tire pressure
has to be checked with the compressor
in the OFF position to get an accurate
tire pressure reading.
9. When the recommended tire pressure
is reached, turn off the kit by pressing
the on button. Disconnect the kit from
the tire valve and the power point.
Re-install the valve cap on the tire
valve, place the tube cap on the metal
connector, and return the kit to the
stowage area
10. Immediately and cautiously, drive the
vehicle 4 miles (6 kilometers) to
distribute the sealant evenly inside
the tire. Do not exceed 50 mph (80
km/h).
11. After 4 miles (6 kilometers), stop and
check the tire pressure. See Second
stage: Checking tire pressure.
Note: If you experience any unusual
vibration, ride disturbance or noise while
driving, reduce your speed until you can
safely pull off to the side of the road to call
for roadside assistance. Note: Do not
proceed to the second stage of this
operation.
Second Stage: Checking Tire
Pressure
WARNINGS
If you are proceeding from the First
stage: Re–inflating the tire with
sealing compound and air section
and have injected sealant in the tire and
the pressure is below 20 psi (1.4 bar), stop
and call roadside assistance. If tire
pressure is above 20 psi (1.4 bar), continue
to the next step.
The power plug may get hot after use
and should be handled carefully
while unplugging.
Check the air pressure of your tires as
follows:
1. Remove the valve cap from the tire
valve.
203
Police Interceptor (CPH), enUSA, Edition date: 10/2015, First Printing
Wheels and Tires
2. Unhook the black hose from the side
of the compressor and fasten firmly on
the valve stem by turning clockwise.
3. Push and turn the dial clockwise to the
air position. Turn on the kit by pressing
the on button.
E144622
4. Adjust the tire to the recommended
inflation pressure from the tire label
located on the driver's door or door
jamb area. The tire pressure has to be
checked with the compressor in the
OFF position to get the correct tire
pressure reading.
5. Turn the compressor off by pressing
the on/off button.
6. When the tire pressure reading with the
compressor in the off position is
correct, disconnect the hose, re-install
the valve cap on the tire valve, unplug
the compressor, and return the kit to
the stowage area.
What to do after the Tire has been
Sealed
After using the kit to seal your tire, you will
need to replace the sealant canister and
clear tube (hose). You can obtain and
replace sealing compound and spare parts
at an authorized Ford dealer or tire dealer.
Empty sealant bottles may be disposed of
at home. However, liquid residue from the
sealing compound should be disposed by
your local authorized Ford dealer or tire
dealer, or in accordance with local waste
disposal regulations.
Note: After the sealing compound has been
used, the maximum vehicle speed is 50 mph
(80 km/h) and the maximum driving
distance is 120 mi (200 km). The sealed tire
should be inspected immediately.
Note: After sealant use, the tire pressure
monitoring system sensor and valve stem
on the wheel must be replaced by an
authorized Ford dealer.
You can check the tire pressure any time
within the 120 mi (200 km) by performing
the procedure from Second stage:
Checking tire pressure listed previously.
Removal of the sealant canister from
the kit
E144623
1. Unwrap the clear tube from the
compressor housing.
204
Police Interceptor (CPH), enUSA, Edition date: 10/2015, First Printing
Wheels and Tires
E144624
2. Locate the yellow cap at the end of the
clear tube.
E144625
3. Using the yellow cap tool, press the tab
located on the kit compressor housing
while pulling up on the sealant canister.
Installation of the sealant canister to
the kit
E144626
1. Align the sealant canister with the kit
housing.
E161567
2. Once aligned, seat the sealant canister
by lightly pushing down until you hear
an audible click.
E144628
3. Wrap the clear tube around the
compressor housing.
Note: If you experience any difficulties with
the removal or installation of the sealant
canister, consult your authorized Ford dealer
for assistance.
E144629
205
Police Interceptor (CPH), enUSA, Edition date: 10/2015, First Printing
Wheels and Tires
Be sure to check the sealant compound's
use by date regularly. The use by date is
on the lower right hand corner of the label
located on the sealant canister (bottle).
The sealant canister should be replaced
after four years of non-use.
TIRE CARE
Information About Uniform
Tire Quality Grading
E142542
Tire Quality Grades apply to new
pneumatic passenger car tires.
The Quality grades can be found
where applicable on the tire
sidewall between tread shoulder
and maximum section width. For
example: Treadwear 200
Traction AA Temperature A.
These Tire Quality Grades are
determined by standards that the
United States Department of
Transportation has set.
Tire Quality Grades apply to new
pneumatic passenger car tires.
They do not apply to deep tread,
winter-type snow tires,
space-saver or temporary use
spare tires, light truck or LT type
tires, tires with nominal rim
diameters of 10 to 12 inches or
limited production tires as defined
in Title 49 Code of Federal
Regulations Part 575.104 (c)(2).
U.S. Department of
Transportation Tire quality
grades: The U.S. Department of
Transportation requires Ford
Motor Company to give you the
following information about tire
grades exactly as the government
has written it.
Treadwear
The treadwear grade is a
comparative rating based on the
wear rate of the tire when tested
under controlled conditions on a
specified government test course.
For example, a tire graded 150
would wear 1½ times as well on
the government course as a tire
graded 100. The relative
performance of tires depends
upon the actual conditions of their
use, however, and may depart
significantly from the norm due to
variations in driving habits, service
practices, and differences in road
characteristics and climate.
206
Police Interceptor (CPH), enUSA, Edition date: 10/2015, First Printing
Wheels and Tires
Traction AA A B C
WARNING
The traction grade assigned
to this tire is based on
straight-ahead braking traction
tests, and does not include
acceleration, cornering,
hydroplaning or peak traction
characteristics.
The traction grades, from highest
to lowest are AA, A, B, and C. The
grades represent the tire’s ability
to stop on wet pavement as
measured under controlled
conditions on specified
government test surfaces of
asphalt and concrete. A tire
marked C may have poor traction
performance.
Temperature A B C
WARNING
The temperature grade for
this tire is established for a
tire that is properly inflated and
not overloaded. Excessive speed,
underinflation, or excessive
loading, either separately or in
combination, can cause heat
buildup and possible tire failure.
The temperature grades are A
(the highest), B and C,
representing the tire’s resistance
to the generation of heat and its
ability to dissipate heat when
tested under controlled conditions
on a specified indoor laboratory
test wheel. Sustained high
temperature can cause the
material of the tire to degenerate
and reduce tire life, and excessive
temperature can lead to sudden
tire failure. The grade C
corresponds to a level of
performance which all passenger
car tires must meet under the
Federal Motor Vehicle Safety
Standard No. 139. Grades B and A
represent higher levels of
performance on the laboratory
test wheel than the minimum
required by law.
Glossary of Tire Terminology
*Tire label: A label showing the
original equipment tire sizes,
recommended inflation pressure
and the maximum weight the
vehicle can carry.
*Tire Identification Number
(TIN): A number on the sidewall
of each tire providing information
about the tire brand and
manufacturing plant, tire size and
date of manufacture. Also referred
to as DOT code.
*Inflation pressure: A measure
of the amount of air in a tire.
207
Police Interceptor (CPH), enUSA, Edition date: 10/2015, First Printing
Wheels and Tires
*Standard load: A class of
P-metric or Metric tires designed
to carry a maximum load at set
pressure. For example: For
P-metric tires 35 psi (2.4 bar) or
36 psi (2.5 bar) depending on tires
size and for Metric tires 36 psi
(2.5 bar). Increasing the inflation
pressure beyond this pressure will
not increase the tire’s load
carrying capability.
*Extra load: A class of P-metric
or Metric tires designed to carry a
heavier maximum load at 42 psi
(2.9 bar). Increasing the inflation
pressure beyond this pressure will
not increase the tire’s load
carrying capability.
*kPa: Kilopascal, a metric unit of
air pressure.
*PSI: Pounds per square inch, a
standard unit of air pressure.
*Cold tire pressure: The tire
pressure when the vehicle has
been stationary and out of direct
sunlight for an hour or more and
prior to the vehicle being driven for
1 mi (1.6 km).
*Recommended inflation
pressure: The cold inflation
pressure found on the Safety
Compliance Certification Label
(affixed to either the door hinge
pillar, door-latch post, or the door
edge that meets the door-latch
post, next to the driver's seating
position), or Tire Label located on
the B-Pillar or the edge of the
driver door.
* B-pillar: The structural member
at the side of the vehicle behind
the front door.
*Bead area of the tire: Area of
the tire next to the rim.
* Sidewall of the tire: Area
between the bead area and the
tread.
*Tread area of the tire: Area of
the perimeter of the tire that
contacts the road when mounted
on the vehicle.
*Rim: The metal support (wheel)
for a tire or a tire and tube
assembly upon which the tire
beads are seated.
Information Contained on the
Tire Sidewall
Both United States and Canada
Federal regulations require tire
manufacturers to place
standardized information on the
sidewall of all tires. This
information identifies and
describes the fundamental
characteristics of the tire and also
provides a U.S. DOT Tire
Identification Number for safety
standard certification and in case
of a recall.
208
Police Interceptor (CPH), enUSA, Edition date: 10/2015, First Printing
Wheels and Tires
Information on P Type Tires
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
E142543
P215/65R15 95H is an example of
a tire size, load index and speed
rating. The definitions of these
items are listed below. (Note that
the tire size, load index and speed
rating for your vehicle may be
different from this example.)
A. P: Indicates a tire, designated
by the Tire and Rim Association,
that may be used for service on
cars, sport utility vehicles,
minivans and light trucks. Note: If
your tire size does not begin with
a letter this may mean it is
designated by either the European
Tire and Rim Technical
Organization or the Japan Tire
Manufacturing Association.
B. 215: Indicates the nominal
width of the tire in millimeters
from sidewall edge to sidewall
edge. In general, the larger the
number, the wider the tire.
C. 65: Indicates the aspect ratio
which gives the tire's ratio of
height to width.
D. R: Indicates a radial type tire.
E. 15: Indicates the wheel or rim
diameter in inches. If you change
your wheel size, you will have to
purchase new tires to match the
new wheel diameter.
F. 95: Indicates the tire's load
index. It is an index that relates to
how much weight a tire can carry.
You may find this information in
your owner’s manual. If not,
contact a local tire dealer.
Note: You may not find this
information on all tires because it
is not required by federal law.
G. H: Indicates the tire's speed
rating. The speed rating denotes
the speed at which a tire is
designed to be driven for extended
periods of time under a standard
condition of load and inflation
pressure. The tires on your vehicle
may operate at different
conditions for load and inflation
pressure. These speed ratings may
need to be adjusted for the
difference in conditions. The
ratings range from 81 mph
(130 km/h) to 186 mph
(299 km/h). These ratings are
listed in the following chart.
209
Police Interceptor (CPH), enUSA, Edition date: 10/2015, First Printing
Wheels and Tires
Note: You may not find this
information on all tires because it
is not required by federal law.
Speed ratingLetter
rating
81 mph (130 km/h)M
87 mph (140 km/h)N
99 mph (159 km/h)Q
106 mph (171 km/h)R
112 mph (180 km/h)S
118 mph (190 km/h)T
124 mph (200 km/h)U
130 mph (210 km/h)H
149 mph (240 km/h)V
168 mph (270 km/h)W
186 mph (299 km/h)Y
Note: For tires with a maximum
speed capability over 149 mph
(240 km/h), tire manufacturers
sometimes use the letters ZR. For
those with a maximum speed
capability over 186 mph
(299 km/h), tire manufacturers
always use the letters ZR.
H. U.S. DOT Tire Identification
Number (TIN): This begins with
the letters DOT and indicates that
the tire meets all federal
standards. The next two numbers
or letters are the plant code
designating where it was
manufactured, the next two are
the tire size code and the last four
numbers represent the week and
year the tire was built. For
example, the numbers 317 mean
the 31st week of 1997. After 2000,
the numbers go to four digits. For
example, 2501 means the 25th
week of 2001. The numbers in
between are identification codes
used for traceability. This
information is used to contact
customers if a tire defect requires
a recall.
I. M+S or M/S: Mud and Snow, or
AT: All Terrain, or
AS: All Season.
J. Tire Ply Composition and
Material Used: Indicates the
number of plies or the number of
layers of rubber-coated fabric in
the tire tread and sidewall. Tire
manufacturers also must indicate
the ply materials in the tire and the
sidewall, which include steel,
nylon, polyester, and others.
K. Maximum Load: Indicates the
maximum load in kilograms and
pounds that can be carried by the
tire. See the Safety Compliance
Certification Label (affixed to
either the door hinge pillar,
door-latch post, or the door edge
that meets the door-latch post,
next to the driver's seating
position), for the correct tire
pressure for your vehicle.
L. Treadwear, Traction and
Temperature Grades:
210
Police Interceptor (CPH), enUSA, Edition date: 10/2015, First Printing
Wheels and Tires
*Treadwear The treadwear grade
is a comparative rating based on
the wear rate of the tire when
tested under controlled conditions
on a specified government test
course. For example, a tire graded
150 would wear one and one-half
times as well on the government
course as a tire graded 100.
*Traction: The traction grades,
from highest to lowest are AA, A,
B, and C. The grades represent the
tire's ability to stop on wet
pavement as measured under
controlled conditions on specified
government test surfaces of
asphalt and concrete. A tire
marked C may have poor traction
performance.
*Temperature: The temperature
grades are A (the highest), B and
C, representing the tire's
resistance to the generation of
heat and its ability to dissipate
heat when tested under controlled
conditions on a specified indoor
laboratory test wheel.
M. Maximum Inflation
Pressure: Indicates the tire
manufacturers' maximum
permissible pressure or the
pressure at which the maximum
load can be carried by the tire. This
pressure is normally higher than
the vehicle manufacturer's
recommended cold inflation
pressure which can be found on
the Safety Compliance
Certification Label (affixed to
either the door hinge pillar,
door-latch post, or the door edge
that meets the door-latch post,
next to the driver's seating
position), or Tire Label which is
located on the B-Pillar or the edge
of the driver’s door. The cold
inflation pressure should never be
set lower than the recommended
pressure on the vehicle label.
The tire suppliers may have
additional markings, notes or
warnings such as standard load
or radial tubeless.
Additional Information
Contained on the Tire Sidewall
for LT Type Tires
Note: Tire Quality Grades do not
apply to this type of tire.
A
B
C
B
D
E142544
LT type tires have some additional
information beyond those of P
type tires; these differences are
described below.
211
Police Interceptor (CPH), enUSA, Edition date: 10/2015, First Printing
Wheels and Tires
A. LT: Indicates a tire, designated
by the Tire and Rim Association,
that is intended for service on light
trucks.
B. Load Range and Load
Inflation Limits: Indicates the
tire's load-carrying capabilities
and its inflation limits.
C. Maximum Load Dual lb (kg)
at psi (kPa) cold: Indicates the
maximum load and tire pressure
when the tire is used as a dual,
defined as four tires on the rear
axle (a total of six or more tires on
the vehicle).
D. Maximum Load Single lb
(kg) at psi (kPa) cold: Indicates
the maximum load and tire
pressure when the tire is used as
a single, defined as two tires
(total) on the rear axle.
Information on T Type Tires
T145/80D16 is an example of a
tire size.
Note: The temporary tire size for
your vehicle may be different from
this example. Tire Quality Grades
do not apply to this type of tire.
A
B
C
D
E
E142545
T type tires have some additional
information beyond those of P
type tires; these differences are
described below:
A. T: Indicates a type of tire,
designated by the Tire and Rim
Association, that is intended for
temporary service on cars, sport
utility vehicles, minivans and light
trucks.
B. 145: Indicates the nominal
width of the tire in millimeters
from sidewall edge to sidewall
edge. In general, the larger the
number, the wider the tire.
212
Police Interceptor (CPH), enUSA, Edition date: 10/2015, First Printing
Wheels and Tires
C. 80: Indicates the aspect ratio
which gives the tire's ratio of
height to width. Numbers of 70 or
lower indicate a short sidewall.
D. D: Indicates a diagonal type tire.
R: Indicates a radial type tire.
E. 16: Indicates the wheel or rim
diameter in inches. If you change
your wheel size, you will have to
purchase new tires to match the
new wheel diameter.
Recommended Tire Pressures
and Inflating Your Tires
Safe operation of your vehicle
requires that your tires are
properly inflated. Remember that
a tire can lose up to half of its air
pressure without appearing flat.
Every day before you drive, check
your tires. If one looks lower than
the others, use a tire gauge to
check the pressure of all tires and
adjust if required.
At least once a month and before
long trips, inspect each tire and
check the tire pressure with a tire
gauge (including spare, if
equipped). Inflate all tires to the
inflation pressure recommended
by Ford Motor Company.
WARNING
Under-inflation is the most
common cause of tire failures
and may result in severe tire
cracking, tread separation, or
blowout, with unexpected loss of
vehicle control and increased risk
of injury. Under-inflation increase
sidewall flexing and rolling
resistance, resulting in heat
build-up and internal damage to
the tire. It also may result in
unnecessary tire stress, irregular
wear, loss of vehicle control, and
accidents. A tire can lose up to
half of its air pressure and not
appear flat.
You are strongly urged to buy a
reliable tire pressure gauge, as
automatic service station gauges
may be inaccurate. Ford
recommends the use of a digital
or dial-type tire pressure gauge
rather than a stick-type tire
pressure gauge. Use the
recommended cold inflation
pressure for optimum tire
performance and wear.
Under-inflation or over-inflation
may cause uneven treadwear
patterns.
213
Police Interceptor (CPH), enUSA, Edition date: 10/2015, First Printing
Wheels and Tires
Always inflate your tires to the
Ford recommended inflation
pressure even if it is less than the
maximum inflation pressure
information found on the tire. You
will find a Tire Label containing
the Ford recommended tire
inflation pressure by the tire size
and other important information
located on the B-Pillar or the edge
of the driver’s door.
The Ford recommended tire
inflation pressure is also found on
the Safety Compliance
Certification Label (affixed to
either the door hinge pillar,
door-latch post, or the door edge
that meets the door-latch on the
B-pillar, or on the edge of the
driver’s door.
Failure to follow the tire pressure
recommendations can cause
uneven treadwear patterns and
adversely affect the way your
vehicle handles.
Inspecting Your Tires and
Wheel Valve Stems
Periodically inspect the tire treads
for uneven or excessive wear and
remove objects such as stones,
nails or glass that may be wedged
in the tread grooves. Check the tire
and valve stems for holes, cracks,
or cuts that may permit air
leakage and repair or replace the
tire and replace the valve stem.
Inspect the tire sidewalls for
cracking, cuts, bruises and other
signs of damage or excessive
wear. If internal damage to the tire
is suspected, have the tire
demounted and inspected in case
it needs to be repaired or replaced.
For your safety, tires that are
damaged or show signs of
excessive wear should not be used
because they are more likely to
blow out or fail.
Improper or inadequate vehicle
maintenance can cause tires to
wear abnormally. Inspect all your
tires, including the spare,
frequently, and replace them if
one or more of the following
conditions exist:
Tire Wear
E142546
When the tread is worn down to
one sixteenth of an inch (2 mm),
tires must be replaced to help
prevent your vehicle from skidding
and hydroplaning. Built-in
treadwear indicators, or wear bars,
which look like narrow strips of
smooth rubber across the tread
will appear on the tire when the
tread is worn down to one
sixteenth of an inch (2 mm).
214
Police Interceptor (CPH), enUSA, Edition date: 10/2015, First Printing
Wheels and Tires
When the tire tread wears down
to the same height as these wear
bars, the tire is worn out and must
be replaced.
Damage
Periodically inspect the tire treads
and sidewalls for damage (such
as bulges in the tread or sidewalls,
cracks in the tread groove and
separation in the tread or
sidewall). If damage is observed
or suspected, have the tire
inspected by a tire professional.
Tires can be damaged during
off-road use, so inspection after
off-road use is also
recommended.
Age
WARNING
Tires degrade over time
depending on many factors
such as weather, storage
conditions, and conditions of use
(load, speed, inflation pressure)
the tires experience throughout
their lives.
In general, tires should be
replaced after six years regardless
of tread wear. However, heat
caused by hot climates or
frequent high loading conditions
can accelerate the aging process
and may require tires to be
replaced more frequently.
You should replace your spare tire
when you replace the road tires or
after six years due to aging even if
it has not been used.
U.S. DOT Tire Identification
Number
Both United States and Canada
Federal regulations require tire
manufacturers to place
standardized information on the
sidewall of all tires. This
information identifies and
describes the fundamental
characteristics of the tire and also
provides a U.S. DOT Tire
Identification Number for safety
standard certification and in case
of a recall.
215
Police Interceptor (CPH), enUSA, Edition date: 10/2015, First Printing
Wheels and Tires
This begins with the letters DOT
and indicates that the tire meets
all federal standards. The next
two numbers or letters are the
plant code designating where it
was manufactured, the next two
are the tire size code and the last
four numbers represent the week
and year the tire was built. For
example, the numbers 317 mean
the 31st week of 1997. After 2000,
the numbers go to four digits. For
example, 2501 means the 25th
week of 2001. The numbers in
between are identification codes
used for traceability. This
information is used to contact
customers if a tire defect requires
a recall.
Tire Replacement
Requirements
Your vehicle is equipped with tires
designed to provide a safe ride
and handling capability.
WARNINGS
Only use replacement tires
and wheels that are the same
size, load index, speed rating and
type (such as P-metric versus
LT-metric or all-season versus
all-terrain) as those originally
provided by Ford. The
recommended tire and wheel size
may be found on either the Safety
Compliance Certification Label
(affixed to either the door hinge
pillar, door-latch post, or the door
edge that meets the door-latch
post, next to the driver's seating
position), or the Tire Label which
WARNINGS
is located on the B-Pillar or edge
of the driver’s door. If this
information is not found on these
labels then you should contact
your authorized dealer as soon as
possible. Use of any tire or wheel
not recommended by Ford can
affect the safety and performance
of your vehicle, which could result
in an increased risk of loss of
vehicle control, vehicle rollover,
personal injury and death.
Additionally the use of
non-recommended tires and
wheels could cause steering,
suspension, axle, transfer case or
power transfer unit failure. If you
have questions regarding tire
replacement, contact your
authorized dealer as soon as
possible.
To reduce the risk of serious
injury, when mounting
replacement tires and wheels, you
should not exceed the maximum
pressure indicated on the sidewall
of the tire to set the beads without
additional precautions listed
below. If the beads do not seat at
the maximum pressure indicated,
re-lubricate and try again.
When inflating the tire for
mounting pressures up to 20 psi
(1.38 bar) greater than the
maximum pressure on the tire
sidewall, the following
precautions must be taken to
protect the person mounting the
tire:
216
Police Interceptor (CPH), enUSA, Edition date: 10/2015, First Printing
Wheels and Tires
WARNINGS
1. Make sure that you have the
correct tire and wheel size.
2. Lubricate the tire bead and
wheel bead seat area again.
3. Stand at a minimum of 12 ft
(3.66 m) away from the wheel
and tire assembly.
4. Use both eye and ear
protection.
For a mounting pressure more
than 20 psi (1.38 bar) greater than
the maximum pressure, a Ford
dealer or other tire service
professional should do the
mounting.
Always inflate steel carcass tires
with a remote air fill with the
person inflating standing at a
minimum of 12 feet (3.66 meters)
away from the wheel and tire
assembly.
Important: Remember to replace
the wheel valve stems when the
road tires are replaced on your
vehicle.
It is recommended that the two
front tires or two rear tires
generally be replaced as a pair.
The tire pressure sensors mounted
in the wheels (originally installed
on your vehicle) are not designed
to be used in aftermarket wheels.
The use of wheels or tires not
recommended by Ford Motor
Company may affect the
operation of your tire pressure
monitoring system.
If the tire pressure monitoring
system indicator is flashing, your
system is malfunctioning. Your
replacement tire might be
incompatible with your tire
pressure monitoring system, or
some component of the system
may be damaged.
Safety Practices
WARNINGS
If your vehicle is stuck in
snow, mud, or sand, do not
rapidly spin the tires. Spinning the
tires can tear the tire and cause
an explosion. A tire can explode in
as little as three to five seconds.
Do not spin the wheels at
over 35 mph (56 km/h). The
tires may fail and injure a
passenger or bystander.
Driving habits have a great deal
to do with your tire mileage and
safety.
*Observe posted speed limits
*Avoid fast starts, stops and turns
*Avoid potholes and objects on
the road
*Do not run over curbs or hit the
tire against a curb when parking
217
Police Interceptor (CPH), enUSA, Edition date: 10/2015, First Printing
Wheels and Tires
Highway Hazards
No matter how carefully you drive,
there is always the possibility that
you may eventually have a flat tire
on the highway. Drive slowly to the
closest safe area out of traffic.
This may further damage the flat
tire, but your safety is more
important.
If you feel a sudden vibration or
ride disturbance while driving, or
you suspect your tire or vehicle
has been damaged, immediately
reduce your speed. Drive with
caution until you can safely pull
off the road. Stop and inspect the
tires for damage. If a tire is
under-inflated or damaged,
deflate it, remove wheel and
replace it with your spare tire and
wheel. If you cannot detect a
cause, have the vehicle towed to
the nearest repair facility or tire
dealer to have the vehicle
inspected.
Tire and Wheel Alignment
A bad jolt from hitting a curb or
pothole can cause the front end
of your vehicle to become
misaligned or cause damage to
your tires. If your vehicle seems to
pull to one side when you are
driving, the wheels may be out of
alignment. Have an authorized
dealer check the wheel alignment
periodically.
Wheel misalignment in the front
or the rear can cause uneven and
rapid treadwear of your tires and
should be corrected by an
authorized dealer. Front-wheel
drive vehicles and those with an
independent rear suspension (if
equipped) may require alignment
of all four wheels.
The tires should also be balanced
periodically. An unbalanced tire
and wheel assembly may result in
irregular tire wear.
Tire Rotation
Note: If your tires show uneven
wear, ask an authorized dealer to
check for and correct any wheel
misalignment, tire imbalance or
mechanical problem involved
before tire rotation.
Note: Your vehicle may be
equipped with a dissimilar spare
wheel and tire assembly. A
dissimilar spare wheel and tire
assembly is defined as a spare
wheel and tire assembly that is
different in brand, size or
appearance from the road tires and
wheels. If you have a dissimilar
spare wheel and tire assembly, it is
intended for temporary use only
and should not be used in a tire
rotation.
Note: After having your tires
rotated, inflation pressure must be
checked and adjusted to the
vehicle requirements.
218
Police Interceptor (CPH), enUSA, Edition date: 10/2015, First Printing
Wheels and Tires
Rotating your tires at the
recommended interval (as
indicated in the Scheduled
Maintenance chapter) will help
your tires wear more evenly,
providing better tire performance
and longer tire life. Sometimes
irregular tire wear can be
corrected by rotating the tires.
E142547
Police Wheels and Tires
Wheel rims
To withstand the demands placed
on vehicles driven under heavy
duty service conditions, Ford
Motor Company installs heavy
duty wheels.
Tires
Tires (including the spare) are
speed-rated radials for police use.
Use only the recommended tire
size and speed ratings.
In regions with snow and ice
during the winter months,
installation of snow tires may be
desirable. Snow tires will usually
exhibit a drop in dry pavement
handling, but may show an
increase in snow and ice traction.
When snow tires are used, they
should be installed on all four
wheels, never on the drive wheels
only.
Tire storage
Most high performance tires are
made with a nylon overlay. As
such, the following steps should
be taken to avoid flatspotting
when the vehicles are not used for
a period of time.
• Fleets should store the vehicles
with 44 psi (303 kPa) in the
tires.
• If the vehicle is stored for
periods longer than 30 days,
you should move it several feet
at least once during each
30-day period, so that a
different portion of the tread
contacts the ground.
• Tire pressure should be
reduced to the recommended
pressure shown on the vehicle
certification label before the
vehicle is placed back into
service.
219
Police Interceptor (CPH), enUSA, Edition date: 10/2015, First Printing
Wheels and Tires
USING SUMMER TIRES
Summer tires provide superior
performance on wet and dry roads.
Summer tires do not have the Mud and
Snow (M+S or M/S) tire traction rating on
the tire side wall. Since summer tires do
not have the same traction performance
as All-season or Snow tires, we do not
recommend using summer tires when
temperatures drop to approximately 45°F
(7°C) or below (depending on tire wear
and environmental conditions) or in snow
and ice conditions. Like any tire, summer
tire performance is affected by tire wear
and environmental conditions. If you must
drive in those conditions, we recommend
using Mud and Snow (M+S, M/S),
All-season or Snow tires.
Always store your summer tires indoors at
temperatures above 20ºF (-7ºC). The
rubber compounds used in these tires lose
flexibility and may develop surface cracks
in the tread area at temperatures below
20ºF (-7ºC). If the tires have been
subjected to 20ºF (-7ºC) or less, warm
them in a heated space to at least 40ºF
(5ºC) for at least 24 hours before installing
them on a vehicle, or moving the vehicle
with the tires installed, or checking tire
inflation. Do not place tires near heaters
or heating devices used to warm the room
where the tires are stored. Do not apply
heat or blow heated air directly on the tires.
Always inspect the tires after storage
periods and before use.
USING SNOW CHAINS
WARNINGS
If you choose to install snow tires on
your vehicle, they must be the same
size, construction, and load range as
the original tires listed on the tire placard,
and they must be installed on all four
wheels. Mixing tires of different size or
construction on your vehicle can adversely
affect your vehicle's handling and braking,
and may lead to loss of vehicle control.
Do not use snow chains or cables on
this vehicle as they may cause
damage to your vehicle which may
lead to loss of vehicle control.
Snow chains have not been approved for
use on your vehicle.
The original equipment tires on your vehicle
may have an all-weather tread design to
provide traction, handling, and braking
performance in year-round driving. You
may install snow tires for improved traction
when driving in areas with sustained
periods of snow or icy driving conditions.
TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING
SYSTEM
WARNING
The tire pressure monitoring system
is not a substitute for manually
checking tire pressure. The tire
pressure should be checked periodically
(at least monthly) using a tire gauge, see
Inflating your tires in this chapter. Failure
to properly maintain your tire pressure
could increase the risk of tire failure, loss
of control, vehicle rollover and personal
injury.
220
Police Interceptor (CPH), enUSA, Edition date: 10/2015, First Printing
Wheels and Tires
Each tire, including the spare (if
provided), should be checked
monthly when cold and inflated
to the inflation pressure recommended by
the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle
placard or tire inflation pressure label. (If
your vehicle has tires of a different size
than the size indicated on the vehicle
placard or tire inflation pressure label, you
should determine the proper tire inflation
pressure for those tires.)
As an added safety feature, your vehicle
has been equipped with a Tire Pressure
Monitoring System (TPMS) that
illuminates a low tire pressure telltale
when one or more of your tires is
significantly under-inflated. Accordingly,
when the low tire pressure telltale
illuminates, you should stop and check
your tires as soon as possible, and inflate
them to the proper pressure. Driving on a
significantly under-inflated tire causes the
tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure.
Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency
and tire tread life, and may affect the
vehicle’s handling and stopping ability.
Please note that the TPMS is not a
substitute for proper tire maintenance, and
it is the driver’s responsibility to maintain
correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation
has not reached the level to trigger
illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure
telltale.
Your vehicle has also been equipped with
a TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate
when the system is not operating properly.
The TPMS malfunction indicator is
combined with the low tire pressure
telltale. When the system detects a
malfunction, the telltale will flash for
approximately one minute and then remain
continuously illuminated. This sequence
will continue upon subsequent vehicle
start-ups as long as the malfunction exists.
When the malfunction indicator is
illuminated, the system may not be able
to detect or signal low tire pressure as
intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur
for a variety of reasons, including the
installation of replacement or alternate
tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent
the TPMS from functioning properly.
Always check the TPMS malfunction
telltale after replacing one or more tires or
wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the
replacement or alternate tires and wheels
allow the TPMS to continue to function
properly.
The tire pressure monitoring system
complies with part 15 of the FCC rules and
with RSS-210 of Industry Canada.
Operation is subject to the following two
conditions: (1) This device may not cause
harmful interference, and (2) This device
must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause
undesired operation.
Changing Tires With a Tire
Pressure Monitoring System
E142549
Note: Each road tire is equipped with a tire
pressure sensor located inside the wheel
and tire assembly cavity. The pressure
sensor is attached to the valve stem. The
pressure sensor is covered by the tire and is
not visible unless the tire is removed. Take
care when changing the tire to avoid
damaging the sensor
221
Police Interceptor (CPH), enUSA, Edition date: 10/2015, First Printing
Wheels and Tires
You should always have your tires serviced
by an authorized dealer.
Check the tire pressure periodically (at
least monthly) using an accurate tire
gauge. See Inflating Your Tires in this
chapter.
Understanding Your Tire Pressure
Monitoring System
The tire pressure monitoring system
measures pressure in your four road tires
and sends the tire pressure readings to
your vehicle. The low tire pressure warning
light will turn on if the tire pressure is
significantly low. Once the light is
illuminated, your tires are under-inflated
and need to be inflated to the
manufacturer’s recommended tire
pressure. Even if the light turns on and a
short time later turns off, your tire pressure
still needs to be checked.
When Your Temporary Spare Tire is
Installed
When one of your road tires needs to be
replaced with the temporary spare, the
system will continue to identify an issue to
remind you that the damaged road wheel
and tire assembly needs to be repaired and
put back on your vehicle.
To restore the full function of the tire
pressure monitoring system, have the
damaged road wheel and tire assembly
repaired and remounted on your vehicle.
When You Believe Your System is Not
Operating Properly
The main function of the tire pressure
monitoring system is to warn you when
your tires need air. It can also warn you in
the event the system is no longer capable
of functioning as intended. See the
following chart for information concerning
your tire pressure monitoring system:
222
Police Interceptor (CPH), enUSA, Edition date: 10/2015, First Printing
Wheels and Tires
Customer action requiredPossible causeLow tire pressure
warning light
Make sure tires are at the proper pres-
sure. See Inflating your tires in this
chapter. After inflating your tires to the
manufacturer’s recommended pressure
as shown on the Tire Label (located on
the edge of driver’s door or the B-Pillar),
the vehicle must be driven for at least
two minutes over 20 mph (32 km/h)
before the light turns off.
Tire(s) under-inflatedSolid warning light
Repair the damaged road wheel and tire
assembly and reinstall it on the vehicle
to restore system function. For a
description on how the system functions,
see When your temporary spare tire
is installed in this section.
Spare tire in use
If the tires are properly inflated and the
spare tire is not in use but the light
remains on, contact your authorized
dealer as soon as possible.
TPMS malfunction
Repair the damaged road wheel and tire
assembly and reinstall it on the vehicle
to restore system function. For a
description on how the system functions,
see When your temporary spare tire
is installed in this section.
Spare tire in useFlashing warning
light
If the tires are properly inflated and the
spare tire is not in use but the light
remains on, contact your authorized
dealer as soon as possible.
TPMS malfunction
When Inflating Your Tires
When putting air into your tires (such as at
a gas station or in your garage), the tire
pressure monitoring system may not
respond immediately to the air added to
your tires.
It may take up to two minutes of driving
over 20 mph (32 km/h) for the light to turn
off after you have filled your tires to the
recommended inflation pressure
223
Police Interceptor (CPH), enUSA, Edition date: 10/2015, First Printing
Wheels and Tires
How Temperature Affects Your Tire
Pressure
The tire pressure monitoring system
monitors tire pressure in each pneumatic
tire. While driving in a normal manner, a
typical passenger tire inflation pressure
may increase about 2 to 4 psi (14 to 28
kPa) from a cold start situation. If the
vehicle is stationary overnight with the
outside temperature significantly lower
than the daytime temperature, the tire
pressure may decrease about 3 psi (21
kPa) for a drop of 30°F (17°C) in ambient
temperature. This lower pressure value
may be detected by the tire pressure
monitoring system as being significantly
lower than the recommended inflation
pressure and activate the system warning
light for low tire pressure. If the low tire
pressure warning light is on, visually check
each tire to verify that no tire is flat. If one
or more tires are flat, repair as necessary.
Check the air pressure in the road tires. If
any tire is under-inflated, carefully drive
the vehicle to the nearest location where
air can be added to the tires. Inflate all the
tires to the recommended inflation
pressure.
CHANGING A ROAD WHEEL
WARNINGS
The use of tire sealant may damage
your tire pressure monitoring system
and should only be used in roadside
emergencies. If you must use a sealant, the
Ford Tire Mobility Kit sealant should be
used. The tire pressure monitoring system
sensor and valve stem on the wheel must
be replaced by an authorized dealer after
use of the sealant.
If the tire pressure monitor sensor
becomes damaged, it will no longer
function. See Tire Pressure
Monitoring System (page 220).
Note: The tire pressure monitoring system
indicator light will illuminate when the spare
tire is in use. To restore the full function of
the monitoring system, all road wheels
equipped with tire pressure monitoring
sensors must be mounted on the vehicle.
If you get a flat tire while driving, do not
apply the brake heavily. Instead, gradually
decrease your speed. Hold the steering
wheel firmly and slowly move to a safe
place on the side of the road.
Have a flat serviced by an authorized
dealer in order to prevent damage to the
tire pressure monitoring system sensors.
See Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(page 220). Replace the spare tire with a
road tire as soon as possible. During
repairing or replacing of the flat tire, have
the authorized dealer inspect the tire
pressure monitoring system sensor for
damage.
Dissimilar Spare Wheel and Tire
Assembly Information
WARNING
Failure to follow these guidelines
could result in an increased risk of
loss of vehicle control, injury or death.
If you have a dissimilar spare wheel and
tire, then it is intended for temporary use
only. This means that if you need to use it,
you should replace it as soon as possible
with a road wheel and tire assembly that
is the same size and type as the road tires
and wheels that were originally provided
by Ford. If the dissimilar spare tire or wheel
is damaged, it should be replaced rather
than repaired.
A dissimilar spare wheel and tire assembly
is defined as a spare wheel and tire
assembly that is different in brand, size or
appearance from the road tires and wheels
and can be one of three types:
224
Police Interceptor (CPH), enUSA, Edition date: 10/2015, First Printing
Wheels and Tires
1. T-type mini-spare: This spare tire
begins with the letter T for tire size and
may have Temporary Use Only molded in
the sidewall.
2. Full-size dissimilar spare with label
on wheel: This spare tire has a label on
the wheel that states: THIS WHEEL AND
TIRE ASSEMBLY FOR TEMPORARY USE
ONLY.
When driving with one of the dissimilar
spare tires listed above, do not:
• Exceed 50 mph (80 km/h).
• Load the vehicle beyond maximum
vehicle load rating listed on the Safety
Compliance Label.
• Tow a trailer.
• Use snow chains on the end of the
vehicle with the dissimilar spare tire.
• Use more than one dissimilar spare tire
at a time.
• Use commercial car washing
equipment.
• Try to repair the dissimilar spare tire.
Use of one of the dissimilar spare tires
listed above at any one wheel location can
lead to impairment of the following:
• Handling, stability and braking
performance.
• Comfort and noise.
• Ground clearance and parking at curbs.
• Winter weather driving capability.
• Wet weather driving capability.
• All-wheel driving capability.
3. Full-size dissimilar spare without
label on wheel
When driving with the full-size dissimilar
spare wheel and tire assembly, do not:
• Exceed 70 mph (113 km/h).
• Use more than one dissimilar spare
wheel and tire assembly at a time.
• Use commercial car washing
equipment.
• Use snow chains on the end of the
vehicle with the dissimilar spare wheel
and tire assembly.
The usage of a full-size dissimilar spare
wheel and tire assembly can lead to
impairment of the following:
• Handling, stability and braking
performance.
• Comfort and noise.
• Ground clearance and parking at curbs.
• Winter weather driving capability.
• Wet weather driving capability.
• All-wheel driving capability.
When driving with the full-size dissimilar
spare wheel and tire assembly additional
caution should be given to:
• Towing a trailer.
• Driving vehicles equipped with a
camper body.
• Driving vehicles with a load on the
cargo rack.
Drive cautiously when using a full-size
dissimilar spare wheel and tire assembly
and seek service as soon as possible.
Tire Change Procedure
WARNINGS
When one of the front wheels is off
the ground, the transmission alone
will not prevent your vehicle from
moving or slipping off the jack, even if the
transmission is in park (P) or neutral (N).
To help prevent your vehicle from
moving when you change a tire, be
sure to place the transmission in park
(P) or neutral (N), set the parking brake,
and block (in both directions) the wheel
that is diagonally opposite (other side and
end of your vehicle) to the tire being
changed.
225
Police Interceptor (CPH), enUSA, Edition date: 10/2015, First Printing
Wheels and Tires
WARNINGS
Never get underneath a vehicle that
is supported only by a jack. If the
vehicle slips off the jack, you or
someone else could be seriously injured.
Do not attempt to change a tire on
the side of the vehicle close to
moving traffic. Pull far enough off the
road to avoid the danger of being hit when
operating the jack or changing the wheel.
Always use the jack provided as
original equipment with your vehicle.
If using a jack other than the one
provided as original equipment with your
vehicle, make sure the jack capacity is
adequate for the vehicle weight, including
any vehicle cargo or modifications.
To reduce the risk of possible serious
injury or death, do not remove the full
size spare tire from the factory
secured location. This location is necessary
to achieve police-rated 75 mph rear impact
crash-test performance. Removal
increases the risk of fuel leak in high-speed
rear impacts.
Note: Passengers should not remain in your
vehicle when the vehicle is being jacked.
Note: Jack at the specified locations to
avoid damage to the vehicle.
1. Park on a level surface, set the parking
brake and activate the hazard flashers.
2. Place the transmission in park (P) and
turn the engine off.
E142551
3. Block the diagonally opposite wheel.
4. Lift truck cargo cover, then remove the
wingnut that secures the spare tire by
turning counterclockwise.
5. Remove the spare tire from the spare
tire well.
6. Remove the wing nut bolt that secures
the jack kit by turning it
counterclockwise.
7. Remove the jack and the wrench from
the bag. Fold down the wrench socket
to use to loosen the lug nuts and to
operate the jack.
8. Loosen each wheel lug nut one-half
turn counterclockwise, but do not
remove them until the wheel is raised
off the ground.
E145908
9. The vehicle jacking points are shown
here, and are depicted on the warning
label on the jack. Small arrow-shaped
marks on the sills show the location of
the jacking points.
226
Police Interceptor (CPH), enUSA, Edition date: 10/2015, First Printing
Wheels and Tires
E201156
10. Raise the wheel by turning the jack
handle clockwise.
11. Remove the lug nuts with the lug
wrench.
12. Replace the flat tire with the spare
tire, marking sure the valve stem is
facing outward. Reinstall the lug nuts
until the wheel is snug against the
hub. Do not fully tighten the lug nuts
until the wheel has been lowered.
13. Lower the wheel by turning the jack
handle counterclockwise.
1
2
3
4
5
E75442
14. Remove the jack and fully tighten the
lug nuts in the order shown. See
Technical Specifications (page
228).
Stowing the jack and flat tire
E211101
1. Insert the straight end of the jack
retention bracket through the eyelet of
the angled bracket and swing the
retention bracket over the jack. With
the jack in place, place the end of the
retention bracket over the threaded
stud in the trunk floor and secure it with
the plastic wing nut.
2. Screw the extension bolt onto the
threaded stud of the jack retention
bracket.
3. Place the flat tire in the spare tire well
with the wheel facing up.
4. Safely secure the wheel by screwing
the large wing nut onto the extension
bolt.
227
Police Interceptor (CPH), enUSA, Edition date: 10/2015, First Printing
Wheels and Tires
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Wheel Lug Nut Torque Specifications
WARNING
When a wheel is installed, always remove any corrosion, dirt or foreign materials
present on the mounting surfaces of the wheel or the surface of the wheel hub,
brake drum or brake disc that contacts the wheel. Make sure that any fasteners
that attach the rotor to the hub are secured so they do not interfere with the mounting
surfaces of the wheel. Installing wheels without correct metal-to-metal contact at the
wheel mounting surfaces can cause the wheel nuts to loosen and the wheel to come off
while your vehicle is in motion, resulting in loss of control.
lb.ft (Nm)Bolt size
110 lb.ft (150 Nm)1/2-20 x 1.5
*
Torque specifications are for nut and bolt threads free of dirt and rust. Use only Ford
recommended replacement fasteners.
Retighten the lug nuts to the specified torque within 100 miles (160 kilometers) after any
wheel disturbance (such as tire rotation, changing a flat tire, wheel removal).
E145950
Wheel pilot boreA
Inspect the wheel pilot bore and
mounting surface prior to installation.
Remove any visible corrosion or loose
particles.
228
Police Interceptor (CPH), enUSA, Edition date: 10/2015, First Printing
Wheels and Tires
ENGINE SPECIFICATIONS - 2.0L ECOBOOST™
2.0L EcoBoost engineEngine
122Cubic inches
9.3:1Compression ratio
Coil on plugIgnition system
0.027-0.031 in. (0.70-0.80 mm)Spark plug gap
1-3-4-2Firing order
Drivebelt Routing
2.0L engine
E161383
A
B
A. The long drivebelt is on the first pulley
groove closest to the engine.
B. The short drivebelt is on the second
pulley groove farthest from the engine.
ENGINE SPECIFICATIONS - 3.5L DURATEC
3.5L V6Engine
214Cubic inches
1-4-2-5-3-6Firing order
Coil on plugIgnition system
0.049 - 0.053 in (1.25 mm - 1.35 mm)Spark plug gap
10.8:1Compression ratio
229
Police Interceptor (CPH), enUSA, Edition date: 10/2015, First Printing
Capacities and Specifications
Drivebelt Routing
3.5L Engine
E191904
ENGINE SPECIFICATIONS - 3.5L ECOBOOST™
3.5L EcoBoostEngine
214Cubic inches
1-4-2-5-3-6Firing order
Coil on plugIgnition system
0.030–0.033 in (0.75–0.85 mm)Spark plug gap
10.0:1Compression ratio
Drivebelt Routing
3.5L EcoBoost Engine
E191904
230
Police Interceptor (CPH), enUSA, Edition date: 10/2015, First Printing
Capacities and Specifications
ENGINE SPECIFICATIONS - 3.7L
3.7L V6Engine
227Cubic inches
1-4-2-5-3-6Firing order
Coil on plugIgnition system
0.049 - 0.053 in (1.25 - 1.35 mm)Spark plug gap
10.5:1Compression ratio
Drivebelt Routing
3.7L Engine
E191904
MOTORCRAFT PARTS - 2.0L ECOBOOST™
Motorcraft part numberComponent
FA-1884Air filter element
FL-910-SOil filter
BXT-65-750Battery
SP-537Spark plugs
FP68Cabin air filter
WW-2601 (driver side)Windshield wiper blade
231
Police Interceptor (CPH), enUSA, Edition date: 10/2015, First Printing
Capacities and Specifications
Motorcraft part numberComponent
WW-2043 (passenger side)
We recommend Motorcraft replacement parts available at your Ford dealer or at
fordparts.com for scheduled maintenance. These parts meet or exceed Ford Motor
Company’s specifications and are engineered for your vehicle. Use of other parts may
impact vehicle performance, emissions and durability. Your warranty may be void for any
damage related to use of other parts.
If a Motorcraft oil filter is not available, use an oil filter that meets industry performance
specification SAE/USCAR-36.
For spark plug replacement, contact an authorized dealer. Replace the spark plugs at the
appropriate intervals. See Normal Scheduled Maintenance (page 313).
232
Police Interceptor (CPH), enUSA, Edition date: 10/2015, First Printing
Capacities and Specifications
MOTORCRAFT PARTS - 3.5L DURATEC
Part NumberComponent
FA-1884Air filter element
FL-500-SOil filter
BXT-65-750Battery
SP-534Spark plugs
FP-68Cabin air filter
WW-2601 (driver side)Windshield wiper blade
WW-2043 (passenger side)
We recommend Motorcraft replacement parts available at your Ford dealer or at
fordparts.com for scheduled maintenance. These parts meet or exceed Ford Motor
Company’s specifications and are engineered for your vehicle. Use of other parts may
impact vehicle performance, emissions and durability. Your warranty may be void for any
damage related to use of other parts.
If a Motorcraft oil filter is not available, use an oil filter that meets industry performance
specification SAE/USCAR-36.
For spark plug replacement, contact an authorized dealer. Replace the spark plugs at the
appropriate intervals. See Normal Scheduled Maintenance (page 313).
233
Police Interceptor (CPH), enUSA, Edition date: 10/2015, First Printing
Capacities and Specifications
MOTORCRAFT PARTS - 3.5L ECOBOOST™
Part NumberComponent
FA-1884Air filter element
FL-500-SOil filter
BXT-65-750Battery
SP-534Spark plugs
FP-68Cabin air filter
WW-2601 (driver side)Windshield wiper blade
WW-2043 (passenger side)
We recommend Motorcraft replacement parts available at your Ford dealer or at
fordparts.com for scheduled maintenance. These parts meet or exceed Ford Motor
Company’s specifications and are engineered for your vehicle. Use of other parts may
impact vehicle performance, emissions and durability. Your warranty may be void for any
damage related to use of other parts.
If a Motorcraft oil filter is not available, use an oil filter that meets industry performance
specification SAE/USCAR-36.
For spark plug replacement, contact an authorized dealer. Replace the spark plugs at the
appropriate intervals. See Scheduled Maintenance (page 310).
234
Police Interceptor (CPH), enUSA, Edition date: 10/2015, First Printing
Capacities and Specifications
MOTORCRAFT PARTS - 3.7L
Part NumberComponent
FA-1884Air filter element
FL-500-SOil filter
BXT-65-750Battery
SP-520Spark plugs
FP-68Cabin air filter
WW-2601 (driver side)Windshield wiper blade
WW-2043 (passenger side)
We recommend Motorcraft replacement parts available at your Ford dealer or at
fordparts.com for scheduled maintenance. These parts meet or exceed Ford Motor
Company’s specifications and are engineered for your vehicle. Use of other parts may
impact vehicle performance, emissions and durability. Your warranty may be void for any
damage related to use of other parts.
If a Motorcraft oil filter is not available, use an oil filter that meets industry performance
specification SAE/USCAR-36.
For spark plug replacement, contact an authorized dealer. Replace the spark plugs at the
appropriate intervals. See Scheduled Maintenance (page 310).
235
Police Interceptor (CPH), enUSA, Edition date: 10/2015, First Printing
Capacities and Specifications
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION
NUMBER
The vehicle identification number is
located on the left-hand side of the
instrument panel.
E142476
Please note that in the graphic, XXXX is
representative of your vehicle identification
number.
The Vehicle Identification Number contains
the following information:
E142477
World manufacturer identifierA
Brake system, Gross Vehicle
Weight Rating, Restraint Devices
and their locations
B
Make, vehicle line, series, body
type
C
Engine typeD
Check digitE
Model yearF
Assembly plantG
Production sequence numberH
236
Police Interceptor (CPH), enUSA, Edition date: 10/2015, First Printing
Capacities and Specifications
VEHICLE CERTIFICATION
LABEL
E167469
The National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration Regulations require that a
Safety Compliance Certification Label be
affixed to a vehicle and prescribe where
the Safety Compliance Certification Label
may be located. The Safety Compliance
Certification Label shall be affixed to either
the door hinge pillar, the door latch post,
or the edge of the door near the door latch,
next to the driver's seating position.
TRANSMISSION CODE
DESIGNATION
E167814
The transmission code is on the Safety
Compliance Certification Label. The
following table shows the transmission
code along with the transmission
description.
CodeDescription
6Six-speed automatic transmission 6F35
JSix-speed automatic transmission 6F50
CSix-speed automatic transmission 6F55
237
Police Interceptor (CPH), enUSA, Edition date: 10/2015, First Printing
Capacities and Specifications
CAPACITIES AND SPECIFICATIONS - 2.0L ECOBOOST™
Capacities
WARNING
The air conditioning refrigerant system contains refrigerant under high pressure.
Only qualified personnel should service the air conditioning refrigerant system.
Opening the air conditioning refrigerant system can cause personal injury.
CapacityItem
5.7 qt (5.4 L)Engine oil (with oil filter)
11.6 qt (11 L)Engine coolant
Between MIN/MAX on brake fluid reservoirBrake fluid
9.0 qt (8.5 L)*Automatic transmission fluid
Fill as requiredWindshield washer fluid
19.0 gal (72 L)Fuel tank
26 oz (0.74 kg)A/C refrigerant
5.24 fl oz (155 ml)A/C refrigerant compressor oil
*
Approximate dry fill capacity. Actual amount may vary during fluid changes.
Specifications
Materials
SpecificationName
WSS-M2C946-ARecommended motor oil (U.S.):
Motorcraft SAE 5W-30 Premium Synthetic Blend Motor
Oil
XO-5W30-QSP
WSS-M2C946-ARecommended motor oil (Canada):
Motorcraft SAE 5W-30 Super Premium Motor Oil
CXO-5W30-LSP12
WSS-M2C946-ARecommended motor oil (Mexico):
Motorcraft SAE 5W-30 Synthetic Motor Oil
MXO-5W30-QSP
WSS-M2C946-AOptional motor oil (U.S. and Mexico):
Motorcraft SAE 5W-30 Full Synthetic Motor Oil
238
Police Interceptor (CPH), enUSA, Edition date: 10/2015, First Printing
Capacities and Specifications
SpecificationName
XO-5W30-QFS
WSS-M2C946-AOptional motor oil (Canada):
Motorcraft SAE 5W-30 Synthetic Motor Oil
CXO-5W30-LFS12
WSS-M97B44-D2Engine coolant (U.S. and Mexico):
Motorcraft Orange Antifreeze/Coolant Prediluted
VC-3DIL-B
WSS-M97B44-D2Engine coolant (Canada):
Motorcraft Orange Antifreeze/Coolant Prediluted
CVC-3DIL-B
WSS-M6C65-A2Brake fluid:
Motorcraft DOT 4 Low Viscosity (LV) High Performance
Motor Vehicle Brake Fluid
PM-20
WSP-M2C197-ARear differential (All Wheel Drive) fluid:
Motorcraft SAE 80W-90 Premium Rear Axle Lubricant
XY-80W90-QL
WSL-M2C192-APower Transfer Unit (PTU) fluid (All Wheel Drive):
Motorcraft SAE 75W-140 Synthetic Rear Axle Lubricant
XY-75W140-QL
WSS-M2C938-AAutomatic transmission fluid (U.S. and Mexico):
MERCON LVMotorcraft MERCON LV Automatic Transmission Fluid
XT-10-QLVC
WSS-M2C938-AAutomatic transmission fluid (Canada):
MERCON LVMotorcraft MERCON LV Automatic Transmission Fluid
CXT-10-LV12
WSS-M14P19-AWindshield washer fluid (U.S. and Mexico):
Motorcraft Premium Windshield Wash Concentrate with
Bitterant
ZC-32-B2
WSS-M14P19-AWindshield washer fluid (Canada):
Motorcraft Premium Quality Windshield Washer Fluid
CXC-37-(A, B, D, F)
WSH-M17B19-AA/C refrigerant (U.S.):
Motorcraft R-134a Refrigerant
YN-19
WSH-M17B19-AA/C refrigerant (Canada):
239
Police Interceptor (CPH), enUSA, Edition date: 10/2015, First Printing
Capacities and Specifications
SpecificationName
Motorcraft R-134a Refrigerant
CYN-16-R
WSH-M17B19-AA/C refrigerant (Mexico):
Motorcraft R-134a Refrigerant
MYN-19
WSH-M1C231-BA/C refrigerant compressor oil:
Motorcraft PAG Refrigerant Compressor Oil
YN-12-D
ESB-M1C93-BMulti-purpose grease:
Motorcraft Multi-Purpose Grease Spray
XL-5
--Lock cylinders (U.S.):
Penetrating and Lock Lubricant
XL-1
--Lock cylinders (Canada):
Penetrating Fluid
CXC-51-A
--Lock cylinders (Mexico):
Penetrating and Lock Lubricant
MXL-1
If you use oil and fluids that do not meet
the defined specification and viscosity
grade, this may lead to:
• Component damage which is not
covered by the vehicle warranty.
• Longer engine cranking periods.
• Increased emission levels.
• Reduced engine performance.
• Reduced fuel economy.
• Degraded brake performance.
We recommend Motorcraft motor oil for
your vehicle. If Motorcraft oil is not
available, use motor oils of the
recommended viscosity grade that meet
API SN requirements and display the API
Certification Mark for gasoline engines. Do
not use oil labeled with API SN service
category unless the label also displays the
API certification mark.
240
Police Interceptor (CPH), enUSA, Edition date: 10/2015, First Printing
Capacities and Specifications
E142732
An oil that displays this symbol conforms
to current engine, emission system and
fuel economy performance standards of
the International Lubricants Specification
Advisory Council (ILSAC).
Do not use supplemental engine oil
additives because they are unnecessary
and could lead to engine damage that may
not be covered by your vehicle warranty.
Note: We recommend using DOT 4 Low
Viscosity (LV) High Performance Brake Fluid
or equivalent meeting WSS-M6C65-A2. Use
of any fluid other than the recommended
fluid may cause degraded brake
performance and not meet the Ford
performance standards. Keep brake fluid
clean and dry. Contamination with dirt,
water, petroleum products or other
materials may result in brake system
damage and possible failure.
Note: Automatic transmissions that require
MERCON LV transmission fluid should only
use MERCON LV transmission fluid. The
use of any other fluid may cause
transmission damage.
CAPACITIES AND SPECIFICATIONS - 3.5L DURATEC
Capacities
WARNING
The air conditioning refrigerant system contains refrigerant under high pressure.
Only qualified personnel should service the air conditioning refrigerant system.
Opening the air conditioning refrigerant system can cause personal injury.
CapacityItem
6.0 qt (5.7 L)Engine oil (with oil filter)
11.5 qt (10.9 L)Engine coolant
Between MIN/MAX on brake fluid reservoirBrake fluid
10.9 qt (10.3 L)*Automatic transmission fluid
Fill as requiredWindshield washer fluid
19.0 gal (72 L)Fuel tank
241
Police Interceptor (CPH), enUSA, Edition date: 10/2015, First Printing
Capacities and Specifications
CapacityItem
1.63 lb (0.74 kg)A/C refrigerant
5.24 fl oz (155 ml)A/C refrigerant compressor oil
*Approximate dry fill capacity. Actual amount may vary during fluid changes.
Specifications
Materials
SpecificationName
WSS-M2C945-ARecommended motor oil (U.S.):
Motorcraft® SAE 5W-20 Premium Synthetic Blend Motor
Oil
XO-5W20-QSP
WSS-M2C945-ARecommended Motor oil (Canada):
Motorcraft® SAE 5W-20 Super Premium Motor Oil
CXO-5W20-LSP12
WSS-M2C945-ARecommended motor oil (Mexico):
Motorcraft® SAE 5W-20 Synthetic Motor Oil
MXO-5W20-QSP
WSS-M2C945-AOptional motor oil (U.S. and Mexico):
Motorcraft® SAE 5W-20 Full Synthetic Motor Oil
XO-5W20-QFS
WSS-M2C945-AOptional Motor oil (Canada):
Motorcraft® SAE 5W-20 Synthetic Motor Oil
CXO-5W20-LFS12
WSS-M97B44-D2Engine coolant (U.S.):
Motorcraft® Orange Antifreeze/Coolant Prediluted
VC-3DIL-B
WSS-M97B44-D2Engine coolant (Canada):
Motorcraft® Orange Antifreeze/Coolant Prediluted
CVC-3DIL-B
WSS-M97B44-D2Engine coolant (Mexico):
Motorcraft® Antifreeze/Coolant Prediluted
VC-3DIL-B
WSS-M6C65-A2Brake fluid:
Motorcraft® DOT 4 Low Viscosity (LV) High Performance
Motor Vehicle Brake Fluid
242
Police Interceptor (CPH), enUSA, Edition date: 10/2015, First Printing
Capacities and Specifications
SpecificationName
PM-20
WSS-M2C938-AAutomatic transmission fluid (U.S. and Mexico):
MERCON LVMotorcraft® MERCON LV Automatic Transmission Fluid
XT-10-QLVC
WSS-M2C938-AAutomatic transmission fluid (Canada):
MERCON LVMotorcraft® MERCON LV Automatic Transmission Fluid
CXT-10-LV12
WSS-M14P19-AWindshield washer fluid (U.S. and Mexico):
Motorcraft® Premium Windshield Wash Concentrate
with Bitterant
ZC-32-B2
WSS-M14P19-AWindshield washer fluid (Canada):
Motorcraft® Premium Quality Windshield Washer Fluid
CXC-37-(A, B, D, F)
WSH-M17B19-AA/C refrigerant (U.S.):
Motorcraft® R-134a Refrigerant
YN-19
WSH-M17B19-AA/C refrigerant (Canada):
Motorcraft® R-134a Refrigerant
CYN-16-R
WSH-M17B19-AA/C refrigerant (Mexico):
Motorcraft® R-134a Refrigerant
MYN-19
WSH-M1C231-BA/C refrigerant compressor oil:
Motorcraft® PAG Refrigerant Compressor Oil
YN-12-D
ESA-M1C75-BTransmission, parking brake linkage and pivots and brake
pedal shift grease:
Premium Long-Life Grease
XG-1-E1
ESB-M1C93-BMulti-purpose grease:
Motorcraft® Multi-Purpose Grease Spray
XL-5
243
Police Interceptor (CPH), enUSA, Edition date: 10/2015, First Printing
Capacities and Specifications
SpecificationName
--Lock cylinders (U.S.):
Penetrating and Lock Lubricant
XL-1
--Lock cylinders (Canada):
Penetrating Fluid
CXC-51-A
--Lock cylinders (Mexico):
Penetrating and Lock Lubricant
MXL-1
If you use oil and fluids that do not meet
the defined specification and viscosity
grade, this may lead to:
• Component damage which is not
covered by the vehicle warranty.
• Longer engine cranking periods.
• Increased emission levels.
• Reduced engine performance.
• Reduced fuel economy.
• Degraded brake performance.
We recommend Motorcraft® motor oil for
your vehicle. If Motorcraft® oil is not
available, use motor oils of the
recommended viscosity grade that meet
API SN requirements and display the API
Certification Mark for gasoline engines. Do
not use oil labeled with API SN service
category unless the label also displays the
API certification mark.
E142732
An oil that displays this symbol conforms
to current engine, emission system and
fuel economy performance standards of
the International Lubricants Specification
Advisory Council (ILSAC).
Do not use supplemental engine oil
additives because they are unnecessary
and could lead to engine damage that may
not be covered by your vehicle warranty.
Note: We recommend using DOT 4 Low
Viscosity (LV) High Performance Brake Fluid
or equivalent meeting WSS-M6C65-A2. Use
of any fluid other than the recommended
fluid may cause degraded brake
performance and not meet the Ford
performance standards. Keep brake fluid
clean and dry. Contamination with dirt,
water, petroleum products or other
materials may result in brake system
damage and possible failure.
244
Police Interceptor (CPH), enUSA, Edition date: 10/2015, First Printing
Capacities and Specifications
Note: Automatic transmissions that require
MERCON LV transmission fluid should only
use MERCON LV transmission fluid. The use
of any other fluid may cause transmission
damage.
CAPACITIES AND SPECIFICATIONS - 3.5L ECOBOOST™
Capacities
WARNING
The air conditioning refrigerant system contains refrigerant under high pressure.
Only qualified personnel should service the air conditioning refrigerant system.
Opening the air conditioning refrigerant system can cause personal injury.
CapacityItem
6.0 qt (5.7 L)Engine oil (with oil filter)
11.8 qt (11.2 L)Engine coolant
Between MIN/MAX on brake fluid reservoirBrake fluid
2.4 pt (1.15 L)Rear axle fluid (All Wheel Drive)
11.6 qt (11 L)
*
Automatic transmission fluid
17.9 fl oz (0.53 L)Power Transfer Unit (PTU) fluid (All Wheel
Drive)
Fill as requiredWindshield washer fluid
19.0 gal (72 L)Fuel tank
1.6 lb (0.74 kg)A/C refrigerant
5.24 fl oz (155 ml)A/C refrigerant compressor oil
*
Approximate dry fill capacity. Actual amount may vary during fluid changes.
245
Police Interceptor (CPH), enUSA, Edition date: 10/2015, First Printing
Capacities and Specifications
Specifications
Materials
SpecificationName
WSS-M2C946-ARecommended motor oil (U.S.):
Motorcraft SAE 5W-30 Premium Synthetic Blend Motor
Oil
XO-5W30-QSP
WSS-M2C946-ARecommended Motor oil (Canada):
Motorcraft SAE 5W-30 Super Premium Motor Oil
CXO-5W30-LSP12
WSS-M2C946-ARecommended motor oil (Mexico):
Motorcraft SAE 5W-30 Synthetic Motor Oil
MXO-5W30-QSP
WSS-M2C946-AOptional motor oil (U.S. and Mexico):
Motorcraft SAE 5W-30 Full Synthetic Motor Oil
XO-5W30-QFS
WSS-M2C946-AOptional Motor oil (Canada):
Motorcraft SAE 5W-30 Synthetic Motor Oil
CXO-5W30-LFS12
WSS-M97B44-D2Engine coolant (U.S.):
Motorcraft Orange Antifreeze/Coolant Prediluted
VC-3DIL-B
WSS-M97B44-D2Engine coolant (Canada):
Motorcraft Orange Antifreeze/Coolant Prediluted
CVC-3DIL-B
WSS-M97B44-D2Engine coolant (Mexico):
Motorcraft Antifreeze/Coolant Prediluted
VC-3DIL-B
WSS-M6C65-A2Brake fluid:
Motorcraft DOT 4 Low Viscosity (LV) High Performance
Motor Vehicle Brake Fluid
PM-20
WSP-M2C197-ARear axle fluid (U.S. and Mexico)
Motorcraft SAE 80W-90 Premium Rear Axle Lubricant
XY-80W90-QL
WSP-M2C197-ARear axle fluid (Canada)
Motorcraft SAE 80W-90 Premium Rear Axle Lubricant
CXY-80W90-1L
246
Police Interceptor (CPH), enUSA, Edition date: 10/2015, First Printing
Capacities and Specifications
SpecificationName
WSS-M2C938-AAutomatic transmission fluid (U.S. and Mexico):
MERCON LVMotorcraft MERCON LV Automatic Transmission Fluid
XT-10-QLVC
WSS-M2C938-AAutomatic transmission fluid (Canada):
MERCON LVMotorcraft MERCON LV Automatic Transmission Fluid
CXT-10-LV12
WSL-M2C192-APower Transfer Unit (PTU) fluid (All Wheel Drive) (U.S.
and Mexico)
Motorcraft SAE 75W-140 Synthetic Rear Axle Lubricant
XY-75W140-QL
WSL-M2C192-APower Transfer Unit (PTU) fluid (All Wheel Drive)
(Canada)
Motorcraft SAE 75W-140 Synthetic Rear Axle Lubricant
CXY-75W140-1L
WSS-M14P19-AWindshield washer fluid (U.S. and Mexico):
Motorcraft Premium Windshield Wash Concentrate with
Bitterant
ZC-32-B2
WSS-M14P19-AWindshield washer fluid (Canada):
Motorcraft Premium Quality Windshield Washer Fluid
CXC-37-(A, B, D, F)
WSH-M17B19-AA/C refrigerant (U.S.):
Motorcraft R-134a Refrigerant
YN-19
WSH-M17B19-AA/C refrigerant (Canada):
Motorcraft R-134a Refrigerant
CYN-16-R
WSH-M17B19-AA/C refrigerant (Mexico):
Motorcraft R-134a Refrigerant
MYN-19
WSH-M1C231-BA/C refrigerant compressor oil:
Motorcraft PAG Refrigerant Compressor Oil
YN-12-D
ESA-M1C75-BTransmission, parking brake linkage and pivots and brake
pedal shift grease:
Premium Long-Life Grease
XG-1-E1
ESB-M1C93-BMulti-purpose grease:
247
Police Interceptor (CPH), enUSA, Edition date: 10/2015, First Printing
Capacities and Specifications
SpecificationName
Motorcraft Multi-Purpose Grease Spray
XL-5
--Lock cylinders (U.S.):
Penetrating and Lock Lubricant
XL-1
--Lock cylinders (Canada):
Penetrating Fluid
CXC-51-A
--Lock cylinders (Mexico):
Penetrating and Lock Lubricant
MXL-1
If you use oil and fluids that do not meet
the defined specification and viscosity
grade, this may lead to:
• Component damage which is not
covered by the vehicle warranty.
• Longer engine cranking periods.
• Increased emission levels.
• Reduced engine performance.
• Reduced fuel economy.
• Degraded brake performance.
We recommend Motorcraft motor oil for
your vehicle. If Motorcraft oil is not
available, use motor oils of the
recommended viscosity grade that meet
API SN requirements and display the API
Certification Mark for gasoline engines. Do
not use oil labeled with API SN service
category unless the label also displays the
API certification mark.
E142732
An oil that displays this symbol conforms
to current engine, emission system and
fuel economy performance standards of
the International Lubricants Specification
Advisory Council (ILSAC).
Do not use supplemental engine oil
additives because they are unnecessary
and could lead to engine damage that may
not be covered by your vehicle warranty.
248
Police Interceptor (CPH), enUSA, Edition date: 10/2015, First Printing
Capacities and Specifications
Note: We recommends using DOT 4 Low
Viscosity (LV) High Performance Brake Fluid
or equivalent meeting WSS-M6C65-A2. Use
of any fluid other than the recommended
fluid may cause degraded brake
performance and not meet the Ford
performance standards. Keep brake fluid
clean and dry. Contamination with dirt,
water, petroleum products or other
materials may result in brake system
damage and possible failure.
Note: Automatic transmissions that require
MERCON LV transmission fluid should only
use MERCON LV transmission fluid. The use
of any other fluid may cause transmission
damage.
CAPACITIES AND SPECIFICATIONS - 3.7L
Capacities
WARNING
The air conditioning refrigerant system contains refrigerant R-134a under high
pressure. Opening the air conditioning refrigerant system can cause personal injury.
Have the air conditioning refrigerant system serviced only by qualified personnel.
CapacityItem
6.0 qt (5.7 L)Engine oil
11.5 qt (10.9 L)Engine coolant
Between MIN/MAX on brake fluid reservoirBrake fluid
2.4 pt (1.15 L)Rear axle fluid
10.9 qt (10.3 L)
*
Automatic transmission fluid (6F50)
17.9 fl oz (0.53 L)Power Transfer Unit (PTU) fluid (All Wheel
Drive)
Fill as requiredWindshield washer fluid
19.0 gal (72 L)Fuel tank
1.8 lb (0.82 kg)A/C refrigerant
5.24 fl oz (155 ml)A/C refrigerant oil
*
Approximate dry fill capacity. Actual amount may vary during fluid changes.
249
Police Interceptor (CPH), enUSA, Edition date: 10/2015, First Printing
Capacities and Specifications
Specifications
Materials
SpecificationName
WSS-M2C945-ARecommended motor oil (U.S.):
Motorcraft® SAE 5W-20 Premium Synthetic Blend Motor
Oil
XO-5W20-QSP
WSS-M2C945-ARecommended Motor oil (Canada):
Motorcraft® SAE 5W-20 Super Premium Motor Oil
CXO-5W20-LSP12
WSS-M2C945-ARecommended motor oil (Mexico):
Motorcraft® SAE 5W-20 Synthetic Motor Oil
MXO-5W20-QSP
WSS-M2C945-AOptional motor oil (U.S. and Mexico):
Motorcraft® SAE 5W-20 Full Synthetic Motor Oil
XO-5W20-QFS
WSS-M2C945-AOptional Motor oil (Canada):
Motorcraft® SAE 5W-20 Synthetic Motor Oil
CXO-5W20-LFS12
WSS-M97B44-D2Engine coolant (U.S. and Mexico):
Motorcraft® Orange Antifreeze/Coolant Prediluted
VC-3DIL-B
WSS-M97B44-D2Engine coolant (Canada):
Motorcraft® Orange Antifreeze/Coolant Prediluted
CVC-3DIL-B
WSS-M6C65-A2Brake fluid:
Motorcraft® DOT 4 Low Viscosity (LV) High Performance
Motor Vehicle Brake Fluid
PM-20
WSP-M2C197-ARear axle fluid (U.S. and Mexico)
Motorcraft® SAE 80W-90 Premium Rear Axle Lubricant
XY-80W90-QL
WSP-M2C197-ARear axle fluid (Canada)
Motorcraft® SAE 80W-90 Premium Rear Axle Lubricant
CXY-80W90-1L
WSS-M2C938-AAutomatic transmission fluid (U.S. and Mexico):
MERCON LVMotorcraft® MERCON LV Automatic Transmission Fluid
XT-10-QLVC
250
Police Interceptor (CPH), enUSA, Edition date: 10/2015, First Printing
Capacities and Specifications
SpecificationName
WSS-M2C938-AAutomatic transmission fluid (Canada):
MERCON LVMotorcraft® MERCON LV Automatic Transmission Fluid
CXT-10-LV12
WSL-M2C192-APower Transfer Unit (PTU) fluid (All Wheel Drive) (U.S.
and Mexico)
Motorcraft® SAE 75W-140 Synthetic Rear Axle Lubricant
XY-75W140-QL
WSL-M2C192-APower Transfer Unit (PTU) fluid (All Wheel Drive)
(Canada)
Motorcraft® SAE 75W-140 Synthetic Rear Axle Lubricant
CXY-75W140-1L
WSS-M14P19-AWindshield washer fluid (U.S. and Mexico):
Motorcraft® Premium Windshield Wash Concentrate
with Bitterant
ZC-32-B2
WSS-M14P19-AWindshield washer fluid (Canada):
Motorcraft® Premium Quality Windshield Washer Fluid
CXC-37-(A, B, D, F)
WSH-M17B19-AA/C refrigerant (U.S.):
Motorcraft® R-134a Refrigerant
YN-19
WSH-M17B19-AA/C refrigerant (Canada):
Motorcraft® R-134a Refrigerant
CYN-16-R
WSH-M17B19-AA/C refrigerant (Mexico):
Motorcraft® R-134a Refrigerant
MYN-19
WSH-M1C231-BA/C refrigerant compressor oil:
Motorcraft® PAG Refrigerant Compressor Oil
YN-12-D
ESA-M1C75-BTransmission, parking brake linkage and pivots and brake
pedal shift grease:
Premium Long-Life Grease
XG-1-E1
ESB-M1C93-BMulti-purpose grease:
Motorcraft® Multi-Purpose Grease Spray
XL-5
251
Police Interceptor (CPH), enUSA, Edition date: 10/2015, First Printing
Capacities and Specifications
SpecificationName
--Lock cylinders (U.S.):
Penetrating and Lock Lubricant
XL-1
--Lock cylinders (Canada):
Penetrating Fluid
CXC-51-A
--Lock cylinders (Mexico):
Penetrating and Lock Lubricant
MXL-1
If you use oil and fluids that do not meet
the defined specification and viscosity
grade, this may lead to:
• Component damage which is not
covered by the vehicle warranty.
• Longer engine cranking periods.
• Increased emission levels.
• Reduced engine performance.
• Reduced fuel economy.
• Degraded brake performance.
We recommend Motorcraft motor oil for
your vehicle. If Motorcraft oil is not
available, use motor oils of the
recommended viscosity grade that meet
API SN requirements and display the API
Certification Mark for gasoline engines. Do
not use oil labeled with API SN service
category unless the label also displays the
API certification mark.
E142732
An oil that displays this symbol conforms
to current engine, emission system and
fuel economy performance standards of
the International Lubricants Specification
Advisory Council (ILSAC).
Do not use supplemental engine oil
additives because they are unnecessary
and could lead to engine damage that may
not be covered by your vehicle warranty.
Note: We recommend using DOT 4 Low
Viscosity (LV) High Performance Brake Fluid
or equivalent meeting WSS-M6C65-A2. Use
of any fluid other than the recommended
fluid may cause degraded brake
performance and not meet the Ford
performance standards. Keep brake fluid
clean and dry. Contamination with dirt,
water, petroleum products or other
materials may result in brake system
damage and possible failure.
252
Police Interceptor (CPH), enUSA, Edition date: 10/2015, First Printing
Capacities and Specifications
Note: Automatic transmissions that require
MERCON LV transmission fluid should only
use MERCON LV transmission fluid. The use
of any other fluid may cause transmission
damage.
253
Police Interceptor (CPH), enUSA, Edition date: 10/2015, First Printing
Capacities and Specifications
GENERAL INFORMATION
Radio Frequencies and Reception
Factors
AM and FM frequencies are established by
the Federal Communications Commission
(FCC) and the Canadian Radio and
Telecommunications Commission (CRTC).
Those frequencies are:
• AM: 530, 540-1700, 1710 kHz
• FM: 87.9-107.7, 107.9 MHz
Radio Reception Factors
The further you travel from an AM or FM station, the
weaker the signal and the weaker the reception.
Distance and strength
Hills, mountains, tall buildings, bridges, tunnels, freeway
overpasses, parking garages, dense tree foliage and
thunderstorms can interfere with the reception.
Terrain
When you pass a ground-based broadcast repeating
tower, a stronger signal may overtake a weaker one and
result in the audio system muting.
Station overload
CD and CD Player Information
Note: CD units play commercially pressed
4.75-inch (12 centimeter) audio compact
discs only. Due to technical incompatibility,
certain recordable and re-recordable
compact discs may not function correctly
when used in Ford CD players.
Note: Do not insert CDs with homemade
paper (adhesive) labels into the CD player
as the label may peel and cause the CD to
become jammed. You should use a
permanent felt tip marker rather than
adhesive labels on your homemade CDs.
Ballpoint pens may damage CDs. Please
contact an authorized dealer for further
information.
Note: Do not use any irregularly shaped
discs or discs with a scratch protection film
attached.
Always handle discs by their edges only.
Clean the disc with an approved CD
cleaner only. Wipe it from the center of the
disc toward the edge. Do not clean in a
circular motion.
Do not expose discs to direct sunlight or
heat sources for extended periods.
MP3 and WMA Track and Folder
Structure
Audio systems capable of recognizing and
playing MP3 and WMA individual tracks
and folder structures work as follows:
• There are two different modes for MP3
and WMA disc playback: MP3 and
WMA track mode (system default) and
MP3 and WMA folder mode.
• MP3 and WMA track mode ignores any
folder structure on the MP3 and WMA
disc. The player numbers each MP3
and WMA track on the disc (noted by
the MP3 or WMA file extension) from
T001 to a maximum of T255. The
maximum number of playable MP3 and
WMA files may be less depending on
the structure of the CD and exact
model of radio present.
254
Police Interceptor (CPH), enUSA, Edition date: 10/2015, First Printing
Audio System
• MP3 and WMA folder mode represents
a folder structure consisting of one
level of folders. The CD player numbers
all MP3 and WMA tracks on the disc
(noted by the MP3 or WMA file
extension) and all folders containing
MP3 and WMA files, from F001 (folder)
T001 (track) to F253 T255.
• Creating discs with only one level of
folders helps with navigation through
the disc files.
If you are burning your own MP3 and WMA
discs, it is important to understand how
the system reads the structures you create.
While various files may be present (files
with extensions other than MP3 and
WMA), only files with the MP3 and WMA
extension are played; other files are
ignored by the system. This enables you to
use the same MP3 and WMA disc for a
variety of tasks on your work computer,
home computer and your in-vehicle
system.
In track mode, the system displays and
plays the structure as if it were only one
level deep (all MP3 and WMA files play,
regardless of being in a specific folder). In
folder mode, the system only plays the
MP3 and WMA files in the current folder.
AUDIO UNIT - VEHICLES WITH:
AM/FM/CD/SYNC/SATELLITE
RADIO
WARNING
Driving while distracted can result in
loss of vehicle control, crash and
injury. We strongly recommend that
you use extreme caution when using any
device that may take your focus off the
road. Your primary responsibility is the safe
operation of your vehicle. We recommend
against the use of any hand-held device
while driving and encourage the use of
voice-operated systems when possible.
Make sure you are aware of all applicable
local laws that may affect the use of
electronic devices while driving.
Note: Some features, such as SIRIUS
satellite radio, may not be available in your
location. Check with an authorized dealer.
Note: Depending on your vehicle option
package, your system may look different
from what you see here.
255
Police Interceptor (CPH), enUSA, Edition date: 10/2015, First Printing
Audio System
E210707
A B
O
N
M
L
K
J
E
I
H
C
F
G
D
RADIO: Press this multiple times to select a radio band. Press and hold to
select the autostore function. Press to return to the main screen of the active
radio band.
A
CD: Press to listen to a CD. Press the function buttons to scroll through the
menu choices.
B
Number block: In radio mode, store and recall your favorite radio stations. To
store a radio station, tune to the station, then press and hold a preset button
until sound returns. In CD mode, select a track. In phone mode, enter a phone
number.
C
Function buttons: Select different functions of the audio system depending
on which mode you are in (for example Radio mode or CD mode).
D
TUNE: Press to manually search through the radio frequency band.E
256
Police Interceptor (CPH), enUSA, Edition date: 10/2015, First Printing
Audio System
Seek, Fast Forward and Reverse: In radio mode, select a frequency band
and press this button. The system stops at the first station it finds in that
direction. In SIRIUS mode, press to select the next or previous satellite radio
station. If a specific category is selected (such as jazz, rock or news), press to
find the next or previous in the selected category. In CD mode, press to select
the previous or next track. Press and hold to move quickly forward through the
current track.
F
OK and Arrow buttons: Press OK to confirm menu selections. Press to scroll
through the menu choices.
G
Eject: Press to eject a CD.H
VOL and Power: Press to switch the system on and off. Turn to adjust the
volume.
I
CLOCK: If not in phone mode, press to display the clock.J
SOUND: Press to access settings for Treble, Midrange, Bass, Fade or Balance.
Use the up and down arrow buttons to select the various settings. When you
make your selection, press the left and right arrow buttons to change the
settings. Press OK to set or press MENU to exit. Sound settings can be set for
each audio source independently.
K
MENU: Press to access different audio system features.L
PHONE: Press to access the phone features of the SYNC system. See your
SYNC information.
M
AUX: Press to access or switch between devices you plug into your vehicle.N
SIRIUS: Press to listen to Sirius satellite radio.O
Menu Structure
Note: Depending on your system, some
options may appear slightly different.
Press MENU.
Press the up and down arrow buttons to
scroll through the options.
Press the right arrow to enter a menu.
Press the left arrow to exit a menu.
Press OK to confirm a selection.
Radio
Select for a brief sampling of all available channels.Scan
Select to store the six strongest local stations on the AM-
AST and FM-AST frequency bands.
AST
Select to display extra information such as artist name.
Radio Text
*
*
Extra information may not always be available.
257
Police Interceptor (CPH), enUSA, Edition date: 10/2015, First Printing
Audio System
Audio Settings
Automatically adjusts the volume to compensate for
speed and wind noise. You can set the system between
0 and +7.
Speed Compensated
Volume
Select to adjust settings for Treble, Midrange, Bass, Fade
or Balance.
Sound
Select to optimize sound quality for the chosen seating
position.
Occupancy Mode
Choose between the stereo modes. Only with the external
sound systems.
DSP
CD Settings
Select to scan all disc selections.Scan All
Select to scan all music in the current MP3 folder.Scan Folder
Clock Settings
Select to set the time.Set Time
Select to set the calendar date.Set Date
Select to view clock time in a 12-hour mode or 24-hour
mode.
24h Mode
Display Settings
Select to change display brightness.Dimming
Select to display the language in English, French or
Spanish.
Language
Select to display the outside temperature in Fahrenheit
or Celsius.
Temp. setting
258
Police Interceptor (CPH), enUSA, Edition date: 10/2015, First Printing
Audio System
AUDIO INPUT JACK
WARNINGS
Driving while distracted can result in
loss of vehicle control, crash and
injury. We strongly recommend that
you use extreme caution when using any
device that may take your focus off the
road. Your primary responsibility is the safe
operation of your vehicle. We recommend
against the use of any hand-held device
while driving and encourage the use of
voice-operated systems when possible.
Make sure you are aware of all applicable
local laws that may affect the use of
electronic devices while driving.
For safety reasons, do not connect
or adjust the settings on your
portable music player while your
vehicle is moving.
Store the portable music player in a
secure location, such as the center
console or the glove box, when your
vehicle is moving. Hard objects may
become projectiles in a collision or sudden
stop, which may increase the risk of serious
injury. The audio extension cable must be
long enough to allow the portable music
player to be safely stored while your
vehicle is moving.
E149149
The auxiliary input jack allows you to
connect and play music from your portable
music player through your vehicle speakers.
You can use any portable music player
designed for use with headphones. Your
audio extension cable must have male
1/8th-inch (3.5 millimeter) connectors at
each end.
1. Switch off the engine, radio and
portable music player. Set the parking
brake and put the transmission in
position P.
2. Plug the extension cable from the
portable music player into the auxiliary
input jack.
3. Switch the radio on. Select either a
tuned FM station or a CD.
4. Adjust the volume as desired.
5. Switch your portable music player on
and adjust its volume to half its
maximum level.
6. Press the media button until the audio
input option appears in the display. You
should hear music from your device
even if it is low.
7. Adjust the volume on your portable
music player until it reaches the volume
level of the FM station or CD. Do this
by switching back and forth between
the AUX and FM or CD controls.
259
Police Interceptor (CPH), enUSA, Edition date: 10/2015, First Printing
Audio System
USB PORT (If Equipped)
E176344
The USB port allows you to plug in media
playing devices, memory sticks and charge
devices (if supported). See your SYNC
information.
MEDIA HUB
The media hub may be located on the
instrument panel or center console.
E149148
See your SYNC information.
260
Police Interceptor (CPH), enUSA, Edition date: 10/2015, First Printing
Audio System
GENERAL INFORMATION
E198355
SYNC is an in-vehicle communications
system that works with your
Bluetooth-enabled cellular phone and
portable media player. This allows you to:
• Make and receive calls.
• Access and play music from your
portable music player.
• Use 911 Assist, Vehicle Health Report
and SYNC Services (Traffic, Directions
& Information).
*
• Use applications, such as Stitcher, via
SYNC AppLink.
**
• Access phonebook contacts and music
using voice commands.
• Stream music from your connected
phone.
• Text message.
• Use the advanced voice recognition
system.
• Charge your USB device (if your device
supports this).
*
These features are not available in all
markets and require activation.
**
Available AppLink enabled apps vary by
market.
Make sure that you review your device's
manual before using it with SYNC.
Support
The SYNC support team is available to
help you with any questions you cannot
answer on your own.
261
Police Interceptor (CPH), enUSA, Edition date: 10/2015, First Printing
SYNC™
Monday-Saturday, 8:30am-9:00pm EST.
Sunday, 10:30am-7:30pm EST.
In the United States, call 1-800-392-3673.
In Canada, call 1-800-565-3673.
Times are subject to change due to
holidays.
SYNC Owner Account
Why do I need a SYNC owner account?
• Required to activate Vehicle Health
Report and to view the reports online.
• Required to activate the
subscription-based SYNC Services and
to personalize your Saved Points and
Favorites.
• Essential for keeping up with the latest
software downloads available for
SYNC.
• Access to customer support for any
questions you may have.
Driving Restrictions
For your safety, certain features are
speed-dependent and restricted when your
vehicle is traveling over 3 mph (5 km/h).
Safety Information
WARNING
Driving while distracted can result in
loss of vehicle control, crash and
injury. We strongly recommend that
you use extreme caution when using any
device that may take your focus off the
road. Your primary responsibility is the safe
operation of your vehicle. We recommend
against the use of any hand-held device
while driving and encourage the use of
voice-operated systems when possible.
Make sure you are aware of all applicable
local laws that may affect the use of
electronic devices while driving.
When using SYNC:
• Do not operate playing devices if the
power cords or cables are broken, split
or damaged. Place cords and cables
out of the way, so they do not interfere
with the operation of pedals, seats,
compartments or safe driving abilities.
• Do not leave playing devices in your
vehicle during extreme conditions as it
could cause them damage. See your
device's manual for further information.
• Do not attempt to service or repair the
system. See an authorized dealer.
Privacy Information
When a cellular phone is connected to
SYNC, the system creates a profile within
your vehicle that is linked to that cellular
phone. This profile is created in order to
offer you more cellular features and to
operate more efficiently. Among other
things, this profile may contain data about
your cellular phone book, text messages
(read and unread), and call history,
including history of calls when your cellular
phone was not connected to the system.
In addition, if you connect a media device,
the system creates and retains an index of
supported media content. The system also
records a short development log of
approximately 10 minutes of all recent
system activity. The log profile and other
system data may be used to improve the
system and help diagnose any problems
that may occur.
The cellular profile, media device index,
and development log will remain in the
vehicle unless you delete them and are
generally accessible only in the vehicle
when the cellular phone or media player
is connected. If you no longer plan to use
the system or the vehicle, we recommend
you perform a Master Reset to erase all
stored information.
262
Police Interceptor (CPH), enUSA, Edition date: 10/2015, First Printing
SYNC™
System data cannot be accessed without
special equipment and access to the
vehicle's SYNC module. Ford Motor
Company and Ford of Canada will not
access the system data for any purpose
other than as described absent consent, a
court order, or where required by law
enforcement, other government
authorities, or other third parties acting
with lawful authority. Other parties may
seek to access the information
independently of Ford Motor Company and
Ford of Canada. For further privacy
information, see the sections on 911 Assist,
Vehicle Health Report, and Traffic,
Directions and Information.
USING VOICE RECOGNITION
This system helps you control many
features using voice commands. This
allows you to keep your hands on the
wheel and focus on what is in front of you.
Helpful Hints
• Make sure the interior of your vehicle is
as quiet as possible. Wind noise from
open windows and road vibrations may
prevent the system from correctly
recognizing spoken commands.
• After pressing the voice button, wait
until after the tone sounds and
Listening appears before saying a
command. Any command spoken
before this does not register with the
system.
• Speak naturally, without long pauses
between words.
• At any time, you can interrupt the
system while it is speaking by pressing
the voice button.
Initiating a Voice Session
E142599
Initiate a voice session by
pressing the voice button on the
steering wheel controls. See
Voice Control (page 53).
When prompted you can say any of the following:
If you want the system to carry out the followingVoice command
Stream audio from your phone.Bluetooth Audio
Cancel the requested action.Cancel
Access mobile applications.mobile (apps | applica-
tions)
Make calls.Phone
Access the device connected to your USB port.USB [1]
Run a vehicle health report.Vehicle Health (Report)
263
Police Interceptor (CPH), enUSA, Edition date: 10/2015, First Printing
SYNC™
If you want the system to carry out the followingVoice command
Adjust the level of voice interaction and feedback.Voice Settings | Voice
Preferences
Hear a list of voice commands available in the current mode.Help
You can say any of the voice commands that appear within open and close brackets that
are separated by |. For example, where (cancel | stop | exit) appears you say; cancel or
stop or exit.
You must say any of the voice commands that appear outside of open and close brackets.
For example, where mobile (apps | applications) appears, you must say mobile followed
by either apps or applications.
You do not need to say words that appear within square brackets. For example, for where
(USB [stick] | iPOD | MP3 [player]) appears, you can say USB or USB stick.
Note: SYNC Services and Vehicle health report are only available in the United States of
America.
System Interaction and Feedback
The system provides feedback through
audible tones, prompts, questions and
spoken confirmations depending on the
situation and the chosen level of
interaction (voice settings). You can
customize the voice recognition system to
provide more or less instruction and
feedback.
The default setting is to a higher level of
interaction in order to help you learn to use
the system. You can change these settings
at any time.
Adjusting the Interaction Level
E142599
Initiate a voice session by
pressing the voice button on the
steering wheel controls. See
Voice Control (page 53).
When prompted say the following:
If you want the system to carry out the followingVoice command
Voice Settings | Voice Preferences
Followed by either of the following:
Provide more detailed interaction and guidance.Interaction Mode
Standard
Provide less audible interaction and more tone prompts.Interaction Mode
Advanced
The system defaults to the standard interaction mode.
264
Police Interceptor (CPH), enUSA, Edition date: 10/2015, First Printing
SYNC™
Confirmation prompts are short questions
the system asks when it is not sure of your
request or when there are multiple possible
responses to your request. For example,
the system may ask "Phone, is that
correct?". If turned off, the system simply
makes a best guess as to what you
requested and may ask you to confirm
settings.
If you want the system to carry out the followingVoice command
Make a best guess from the command; you may still occa-
sionally be asked to confirm settings.
Confirmation Prompts
Off
Clarify your voice command with a short question.Confirmation Prompts
On
The system creates candidate lists when
it has the same confidence level of several
options based on your voice command.
When turned on, it may prompt you with
as many as four possibilities for
clarification.
For example, say "Say 1 after the tone to
call John Doe at home. Say 2 after the tone
to call Johnny Doe on mobile. Say 3 after
the tone to call Jane Doe at home." You
could also say "Say 1 after the tone to play
John Doe, Say 2 after the tone to play
Johnny Doe."
If you want the system to carry out the followingVoice command
Make a best guess from the media candidate list. You may
still occasionally be asked questions.
Media Candidate Lists
Off
Clarify your voice command for media candidates.Media Candidate Lists On
Make a best guess from the phone candidate list. You may
still occasionally be asked questions.
Phone Candidate Lists
Off
Clarify your voice command for phone candidates.Phone Candidate Lists
On
265
Police Interceptor (CPH), enUSA, Edition date: 10/2015, First Printing
SYNC™
USING SYNC™ WITH YOUR
PHONE
Hands-free calling is one of the main
features of SYNC. While the system
supports a variety of features, many are
dependent on your cell phone's
functionality. At a minimum, most cell
phones with Bluetooth wireless technology
support the following functions:
• Answering an incoming call.
• Ending a call.
• Using privacy mode.
• Dialing a number.
• Redialing.
• Call waiting notification.
• Caller ID.
Other features, such as text messaging
using Bluetooth and automatic phonebook
download, are cell phone-dependent
features. To check your cell phone's
compatibility, see your cell phone's manual
and visit www.SYNCMyRide.com,
www.SYNCMyRide.ca or
www.syncmaroute.ca.
Pairing a Cell Phone for the First
Time
Note: SYNC can support downloading up
to approximately 1000 entries per
Bluetooth-enabled cell phone.
Note: Make sure to switch on the ignition
and the radio. Put the transmission in
position park (P) (automatic transmission)
or neutral with the parking brake applied
(manual transmission).
Note: To scroll through the menus, press
the up and down arrows on your audio
system.
Wirelessly pairing your cell phone with
SYNC allows you to make and receive
hands-free calls.
Press the phone button. When the display indicates there is no cell phone paired,
do the following:
Action and DescriptionMessage
Press the OK button.NO PHONE
FIND SYNC 1. Press the OK button.
2. Put your cell phone into Bluetooth discovery mode. See
your device's manual if necessary.
3. When prompted on your cell phone's display, enter the
six-digit PIN provided by SYNC in the radio display. The
display indicates when the pairing is successful.
266
Police Interceptor (CPH), enUSA, Edition date: 10/2015, First Printing
SYNC™
Depending on your cell phone's capability
and your market, the system may prompt
you with questions, such as setting the
current cell phone as the primary cell
phone (the cell phone SYNC automatically
tries to connect with first upon vehicle
start-up) and downloading your
phonebook.
Pairing Subsequent Cell Phones
Note: To scroll through the menus, press
the up and down arrows on your audio
system.
Note: Make sure to switch on the ignition
and the radio. Put the transmission in
position park (P) (automatic transmission)
or neutral with the parking brake applied
(manual transmission).
Press the phone button, then scroll to:
ActionMessage
Press the OK button.PHONE SETNGS
Press the OK button.BT DEVICES
Press the OK button. When the following message appears
in the display.
ADD DEVICE
FIND SYNC 1. Press the OK button.
2. Put your cell phone into Bluetooth discovery mode. See
your device's manual if necessary.
3. When prompted on your cell phone's display, enter the
six-digit PIN provided by SYNC in the radio display. The
display indicates when the pairing is successful.
The system then prompts with questions, such as if you would like to set the current cell
phone as the primary cell phone (the cell phone SYNC automatically tries to connect
with first upon vehicle start-up) or download your phonebook.
Phone Voice Commands
Press the voice icon and say:
Voice Commands
Phone
You can then say any of the following
commands.
Call History Incoming
Call History Missed
Call History Outgoing
Voice Commands
Phonebook ___
Phonebook ___ at Home
Phonebook ___ at Work
Phonebook ___ in Office
Phonebook ___ on Cell
___ is a dynamic listing that should be the
name of a contact in your phonebook. For
example you could say "Call Mom".
267
Police Interceptor (CPH), enUSA, Edition date: 10/2015, First Printing
SYNC™
You can also say any of the following:
Voice Command
Call ___
Call ___ at Home
Call ___ at Work
Call ___ in Office
Call ___ on Mobile
Call ___ on Other
Dial
None of these commands are available
until your cell phone information is
completely downloaded using Bluetooth.
___ is a dynamic listing that should be the
name of a contact in your phonebook. For
example you could say "Call Mom".
The following commands are only
available during active calls:
Voice Commands
Go To Privacy
Hold
Join
Phone Menu Commands
To access the phone menu with voice
commands, press the voice button and
when prompted say:
Voice Command
[Phone] Menu
You can then say any of the following:
[Phone] Connections | [Media] Connec-
tions | [Bluetooth] Connections
Voice Command
[Phone] Settings [Message] Notification
On
[Phone] Settings [Message] Notification
Off
[Phone] Settings [Set] Phone Ringer
[Phone] Settings [Set] Ringer 1
[Phone] Settings [Set] Ringer 2
[Phone] Settings [Set] Ringer 3
[Phone] Settings [Set] Ringer Off
Battery
Phone Name
Signal
Text Message Inbox
Send [New] Text Message
You do not need to say word contained
within brackets for the system to
understand your command.
Note: To exit dial mode, press and hold the
phone button or press MENU to go to the
PHONE menu.
Phonebook Commands
When you ask SYNC to access content, for
example the phonebook name or number,
the requested information appears in the
display to view.
268
Police Interceptor (CPH), enUSA, Edition date: 10/2015, First Printing
SYNC™
Making a Call
Press the voice button and when prompted say:
Action and DescriptionVoice Command
This command is not available until your cell phone informa-
tion is completely downloaded using Bluetooth.
Call ___
Use to enter a phone number digit by digit.Dial
When the system confirms the number say one of the following commands:
To confirm the number and initiate the call.Dial
To erase the last spoken digit. You can also press the left
arrow button.
delete
To erase all spoken digits. You can also press and hold the
left arrow button.
clear
To end a call, press and hold the red phone button.
Receiving Calls
When receiving a call, you can:
• Answer the call by pressing the phone
button.
• Reject the call by pressing and holding
the red phone button.
• Ignore the call by doing nothing.
Phone Options during an Active
Call
During an active call, you have more menu
features that become available, for
example putting a call on hold or joining
calls. Use the arrow buttons to scroll
through the menu options.
Press the MENU button during an active call, then scroll to:
Action and DescriptionMessage
Press the OK button.CALL MENU
Select one of the following:
Press the OK button to switch a call from an active hands-free envir-
onment to your cell phone for a more private conversation.
PRIVACY
Press the OK button to put an active call on hold.CALL HOLD
Join two separate calls. SYNC supports a maximum of three callers
on a multiparty call or conference call.
JOIN CALLS
269
Police Interceptor (CPH), enUSA, Edition date: 10/2015, First Printing
SYNC™
Action and DescriptionMessage
1. Press the phone button.
2. Access the desired contact through SYNC or use voice commands
to place the second call. Once actively in the second call, press
MENU.
3. Scroll to Join Calls, and press the OK button. Wait until the following
message appears.
Press the OK button.JOIN CALLS
Enter tones such as numbers for passwords. Scroll until the desired
number appears in the display, then press OK; a tone sounds as
confirmation. Repeat as necessary.
ENTER TONES
To access your phonebook contacts.PHONEBOOK
1. Press the OK button to select, and then scroll through your
phonebook contacts.
2. Press the OK button again when the desired selection appears in
the display.
3. Press the phone button to call the contact.
To access your call history log.CALL HISTORY
1. Press the OK button to select, then scroll through your call history
options (incoming, outgoing or missed).
2. Press the OK button when the desired selection appears in the
display.
3. Press the phone button to call the selection.
Exit the current menu.RETURN
Accessing Features Through the
Phone Menu
The phone menu allows you to redial a
number, access your call history and
phonebook and sends text messages as
well as access cell phone and system
settings. You can also access advanced
features, for example 911 Assist, Vehicle
Health Report and SYNC Services.
270
Police Interceptor (CPH), enUSA, Edition date: 10/2015, First Printing
SYNC™
Press the phone button to enter the Phone Menu, then scroll to:
Action and DescriptionMessage
Press the OK button to redial the last number called.PHONE REDIAL
Press the OK button again to confirm.
Access any previously dialed, received or missed calls after you
connect your Bluetooth-enabled cell phone to SYNC.
1
PHONE REDIAL
Press the OK button then select one of the following and press the
OK button again to confirm.
INCOMING
OUTGOING
MISSED
The system attempts to automatically re-download your phonebook
and call history each time your cell phone connects to SYNC (if the
auto download feature is on and your Bluetooth-enabled cell phone
supports this feature).
To browse your phonebook select:PHONEBOOK
Press OK. Scroll down or up to the
desired name and press OK.
BROWSE
In addition to the Phonebook entry
name, the phone number label (Work,
Cell, Home or Other) shows on the
display. If there are multiple phone
number entries for a particular Phone-
book name, you can scroll through the
different phone labels at this time.
Once you have the desired phone label
on the screen press OK. The phone
number that is stored under the
selected label will be shown on the
display. Press OK to dial this number.
To search for a contact in your phone book select:
Press OK.SEARCH
Scroll down until you see the first letter
of your phonebook entry. Press OK.
Scroll down until you see the second
letter of your desired phonebook entry.
Press OK.
271
Police Interceptor (CPH), enUSA, Edition date: 10/2015, First Printing
SYNC™
Action and DescriptionMessage
Repeat entering letters to narrow your
search. When you are satisfied with
your entry press the right arrow key on
the bezel.
SYNC will jump to the phonebook
contact name that matches your entry.
Press OK.
In addition to the Phonebook entry
name, the phone number label (Work,
Cell, Home or Other) shows on the
display. If there are multiple phone
number entries for a particular Phone-
book name, you can scroll through the
different phone labels at this time.
Once you have the desired phone label
on the screen press OK.
The phone number that is stored under
the selected label will be shown on the
display. Press OK to dial this number.
Press the OK button to send, download, read and delete text
messages.
1
TEXT MESSAGE
View your cell phone's status, set ring tones, select your message
notification, change phonebook entries and automatically download
your cell phone content among other features.
1
PHONE SETNGS
Access the SYNC Services portal where you can request various
types of information, for example traffic reports and directions.
3
SYNC Services
Automatically place an emergency call to a 911 operator following
a crash.
4
911 Assist
Create and receive a diagnostic report card on your vehicle.
3
Vehicle Health
Interact with SYNC-capable mobile applications on your smart-
phone.
APPLICATIONS
272
Police Interceptor (CPH), enUSA, Edition date: 10/2015, First Printing
SYNC™
Action and DescriptionMessage
Access Bluetooth Devices menu listings and advanced menu listings.SYS SETTINGS
Press the OK button to exit the phone menu.EXIT MENU
1
This is a cell phone-dependent feature.
2
This is a cell phone-dependent and speed-dependent feature.
3
This is an optional feature and available in the United States only.
4
This is an optional feature and available in the United States and Canada only.
Text Messaging
Note: This is a cell phone-dependent
feature.
SYNC allows you to receive, send,
download and delete text messages. The
system can also read incoming text
messages to you so that you do not have
to take your eyes off the road.
Receiving a Text Message
Note: This is a cell phone-dependent
feature. Your cell phone must support
downloading text messages using Bluetooth
to receive incoming text messages.
Note: Forwarding a text message is a
speed-dependent feature. It is only available
when your vehicle is traveling at 3 mph (5
km/h) or less.
Note: Only one recipient is allowed per text
message.
When a new text message arrives, an
audible tone sounds and the information
display indicates you have a new message.
Following the notification you can do
any of the following:
Do nothing to have the message go into
your text message inbox.
To have SYNC read you the message using voice commands, press the voice
button and when prompted say:
Action and DescriptionVoice Command
SYNC will read the most recent text message to you.Read Message | Read
Text Message | Text
Message
To open the test message, press OK to
receive and open the text message. Press
OK again and SYNC reads your message
aloud as you are not able to view the
message. You can then also choose
whether you’d like to reply or forward the
message.
273
Police Interceptor (CPH), enUSA, Edition date: 10/2015, First Printing
SYNC™
Reply or forward the message, press OK and scroll to choose between:
Action and DescriptionMessage
Press the OK button to access and then scroll through the
list of pre-defined messages to send.
REPLY TO MSG
Press the OK button to forward the message to anyone in
your Phonebook or Call History. You can also choose enter a
number.
FORWARD MSG
Sending, Downloading and Deleting
Your Text Messages
Text messaging is a cell phone-dependent
feature. If your cell phone is compatible,
SYNC allows you to receive, send,
download and delete text messages.
Note: Sending a text message is a
speed-dependent feature. It is only available
when your vehicle is traveling at 3 mph (5
km/h) or less.
Note: You can only have one recipient per
text message.
Press the phone button, then scroll to:
Action and DescriptionMessage
Press the OK button.TEXT MESSAGE
Select one of the following:
Allows you to send a new text message based on a pre-
defined set of 15 messages.
SEND MSG?
1. Press the OK button.
2. Scroll to your desired message.
3. Press the OK button.
4. Scroll through your phonebook, call history entries or enter
a new number.
5. Press the OK button to enter the desired contact.
6. Press the OK button again when the system asks if you
would like to send the message. The system sends each
text message with the following signature: This message
was sent from my Ford.
274
Police Interceptor (CPH), enUSA, Edition date: 10/2015, First Printing
SYNC™
Action and DescriptionMessage
Allows you to download your unread messages to SYNC. To
download the messages, press the OK button to select. The
display indicates the system is downloading your messages.
When downloading is complete, SYNC returns you to the
inbox.
DOWNLOAD MSG
Allows you to delete current text messages from SYNC. To
delete the messages, press the OK button to select. The
display indicates when it is finished deleting all your text
messages. SYNC returns you to the text message menu.
DELETE ALL
Press the OK button to exit the current menu.RETURN
Accessing Your Phone Settings
These are cell phone-dependent features.
Your cell phone settings allow you to
access and adjust some features. For
example ring tones, text message
notification, modify your phonebook and
set up automatic download.
Press the phone button, then scroll to:
Action and DescriptionMessage
Press the OK button.PHONE
SETNGS
Select one of the following:
See the provider, name, signal power, battery power and roaming
status of your connected cell phone.
PHONE
STATUS
Press OK to select and scroll to view the information. When done,
press OK again to return to the phone status menu.
Select which ring tone sounds during an incoming call. You can choose
one of the system ring tones or your cell phone ring tones.
SET RINGER
Press the OK button and scroll to hear the available options. You can
also choose to use to use your phone's ring tone.
Press the OK button to select the desired ring tone. If your cell phone
supports in-band ringing, your cell phone ring plays when you choose
the phone ringer option.
You have the option of hearing an audible tone to notify you when a
text message arrives.
MSG NTFY
275
Police Interceptor (CPH), enUSA, Edition date: 10/2015, First Printing
SYNC™
Action and DescriptionMessage
Press the OK button then select one of the following and press the
OK button again to confirm.
MSG NTFY ON
MSG NTFY OFF
Modify the contents of your phone book (such as add, delete, down-
load). Press OK to select and scroll between:
MODIFY
PHONEBOOK
Press the OK button to add more contacts from your
phonebook. Push the desired contact(s) on your cell
phone. See your cell phone's manual on how to push
contacts.
ADD
CONTACTS
Press OK to delete the current phone book and call
history. When Delete Phonebook appears, press OK
to confirm. SYNC takes you back to the Phone
Settings menu.
DELETE
PHONEBOOK
Press OK to select and press OK again when Confirm
Download? appears.
DOWNLOAD
PHONEBOOK
Automatically download your phone book each time your phone
connects to SYNC. Press OK to select.
AUTODOWN-
LOAD
When this message appears, press OK to have your
phonebook automatically downloaded each time.
AUTO ON?
Select Off to NOT download your phonebook every
time your phone connects to SYNC. Your phonebook,
call history and text messages can only be accessed
when your specific phone is connected to SYNC. *
When enabled, SYNC speaks the contact name that is displayed on
the screen during phonebook browsing.
SPEAK NAMES
Exit the current menu.RETURN
* Downloading times are cell phone-dependent and quantity-dependent. When Auto
Download is on, it automatically deletes any changes, additions or deletions saved since
your last download.
System Settings
This menu provides access to your
Bluetooth Devices and Advanced menu
features. Use the arrow buttons to scroll
through the menu options.
Bluetooth Devices
The Bluetooth Devices menu allows you
to add, connect and delete devices, set a
cell phone as primary as well as turn your
Bluetooth feature on and off.
276
Police Interceptor (CPH), enUSA, Edition date: 10/2015, First Printing
SYNC™
Press the Phone button to enter the Phone Menu, then scroll to:
Action and DescriptionMessage
Press the OK button.SYS SETTINGS
Press the OK button.BT DEVICES
Select one of the following:
See Using SYNC™ With Your Phone (page 266).
1
ADD DEVICE
Connect a previously paired Bluetooth-enabled phone.
2
CONNECT BT
Press OK to select and view a list of previously paired phones.
Scroll until the desired device is chosen, then press OK to
connect the phone.
Set a previously paired phone as your primary phone.
3
SET PRIMARY?
Press OK to select and scroll to select the desired phone.
Press OK to confirm.
Turn the Bluetooth feature on and off.
4
BT ON/OFF
Press OK and scroll to toggle between On and Off. When the
desired selection is chosen, press OK.
Setting Bluetooth to off disconnects all Bluetooth devices
and turns off all Bluetooth features.
Delete a paired cell phone.DEL DEVICE
Press the OK button and scroll to select the device. Press OK
to confirm.
Delete all previously paired phones (and all information
originally saved with those phones).
DELETE ALL
Press OK to select.
Exit the current menu.RETURN
1
This is a speed-dependent feature. It is only available when your vehicle is traveling at
3 mph (5 km/h) or less.
2
You can only connect one device at a time. When another cell phone is connected, the
previous one is disconnected.
3
SYNC attempts to connect with the primary phone at every ignition cycle. When a phone
is selected as primary, it appears first in the list and is marked with an asterisk (*).
4
Turning Bluetooth off disconnects all Bluetooth devices and deactivates all Bluetooth
features.
277
Police Interceptor (CPH), enUSA, Edition date: 10/2015, First Printing
SYNC™
Advanced
The Advanced menu allows you to access
and set prompts, languages, defaults,
perform a master reset, install an
application and view system information.
To access the advanced menu, press the phone button to enter the Phone Menu,
the scroll to:
Action and DescriptionMessage
Press OK.SYS SETTINGS
Press OK.ADVANCED
Select one of the following:
Get help from SYNC by using questions, helpful hints or asking you for
a specific action. To turn these prompts on or off:
PROMPTS
1. Press the OK button to select and scroll to select between On and
Off.
2. Press the OK button when the desired selection appears in the
display. SYNC returns you to the Advanced menu.
1. Press OK to select and then scroll through the languages. Choose
between English, Français and Español. Once selected, all of the
radio displays and prompts are in the selected language.
2. Press OK when the desired selection appears in the display. If you
change the language setting, the display indicates that the system
is updating. When complete, SYNC returns you to the Advanced
menu.
LANGUAGES
Return to the factory default settings. This selection does not erase
your indexed information, for example phonebook, call history, text
messages or paired devices.
DEFAULTS
Press the OK button to select and then press OK again when the
following message appears in the display.
RESTORE?
Completely erase all information stored on SYNC, for example
phonebook, call history, text messages and paired devices, and return
the system to the factory default settings.
MASTER
RESET
Press OK to select. The display indicates when complete. SYNC returns
you to the Advanced menu.
Press OK to select.SYNC REBOOT
278
Police Interceptor (CPH), enUSA, Edition date: 10/2015, First Printing
SYNC™
Action and DescriptionMessage
Press OK to select. You only need to press
the OK button once. SYNC will be unre-
sponsive for 2-4 minutes while it is
rebooting. Wait 2-4 minutes before
attempting to execute a SYNC command
CONFIRM REBOOT?
Install applications you have downloaded.INSTALL APP
Press the OK button and scroll to select. Press the OK button to
confirm.
Access the Auto Version number as well as the FDN number.SYSTEM INFO
Press the OK button to select.
Exit the current menu.RETURN
SYNC™ APPLICATIONS AND
SERVICES (If Equipped)
In order for the following features to work,
your cell phone must be compatible with
SYNC. To check your phone's
compatibility, visit www.SYNCMyRide.com,
www.SYNCMyRide.ca or
www.syncmaroute.ca.
• SYNC Services
*
: Provides access to
traffic, directions and information such
as travel, horoscopes, stock prices and
more.
• 911 Assist: Can alert 911 in the event of
an emergency.
• Vehicle Health Report
*
: Provides a
diagnostic and maintenance report
card of your vehicle.
*
This is an optional feature and available
in the United States only.
911 Assist (If Equipped)
WARNINGS
Unless the 911 Assist setting is set on
before a crash, the system will not
dial for help which could delay
response time, potentially increasing the
risk of serious injury or death after a crash.
Do not wait for 911 Assist to make an
emergency call if you can do it
yourself. Dial emergency services
immediately to avoid delayed response
time which could increase the risk of
serious injury or death after a crash. If you
do not hear 911 Assist within five seconds
of the crash, the system or phone may be
damaged or non-functional.
Always place your phone in a secure
location in your vehicle so it does not
become a projectile or get damaged
in a crash. Failure to do so may cause
serious injury to someone or damage the
phone which could prevent 911 Assist from
working properly.
Note: The SYNC 911 Assist feature must be
set on before the incident.
279
Police Interceptor (CPH), enUSA, Edition date: 10/2015, First Printing
SYNC™
Note: Before setting this feature on, make
sure that you read the 911 Assist Privacy
Notice later in this section for important
information.
Note: If any user turns 911 Assist on or off,
that setting applies for all paired phones. If
911 Assist is turned off, either a voice
message plays or a display message (or
icon) comes on (or both) when your vehicle
is started after a previously paired phone
connects.
Note: Every phone operates differently.
While SYNC 911 Assist works with most
cellular phones, some may have trouble
using this feature.
If a crash deploys an airbag (excluding
knee airbags and rear inflatable safety
belts [if equipped]) or activates the fuel
pump shut-off, your SYNC-equipped
vehicle may be able to contact emergency
services by dialing 911 through a paired and
connected Bluetooth-enabled phone. You
can learn more about the 911 Assist
feature, visit www.SYNCMyRide.com,
www.SYNCMyRide.ca or
www.syncmaroute.ca.
See Supplementary Restraints System
(page 34). Important information about
airbag deployment is in this chapter.
See Roadside Emergencies (page 147).
Important information about the fuel pump
shut-off is in this chapter.
Switching 911 Assist On or Off
Press the phone button to enter the phone menu and scroll to:
Action and DescriptionMessage
Press the OK button to confirm and enter the 911 Assist menu.911 Assist
Press the OK button when the desired option appears in the
radio display.
On
Off
Off selections include:
Action and DescriptionMessage
Provides a display and voice reminder at phone connection
at vehicle start.
Off with reminder:
Provides a display reminder only without a voice reminder at
phone connection.
Off without reminder:
To make sure that 911 Assist works
correctly:
• SYNC must be powered and working
properly at the time of the incident and
throughout feature activation and use.
• The 911 Assist feature must be set on
before the incident.
• You must pair and connect a
Bluetooth-enabled and compatible
cell phone to SYNC.
• A connected Bluetooth-enabled phone
must have the ability to make and
maintain an outgoing call at the time
of the incident.
280
Police Interceptor (CPH), enUSA, Edition date: 10/2015, First Printing
SYNC™
• A connected Bluetooth-enabled phone
must have adequate network coverage,
battery power and signal strength.
• The vehicle must have battery power
and be located in the U.S., Canada or
in a territory in which 911 is the
emergency number.
In the Event of a Crash
Not all crashes will deploy an airbag or
activate the fuel pump shut-off (the
triggers for 911 Assist). If a connected cell
phone sustains damage or loses its
connection to SYNC during a crash, SYNC
will search for and try to connect to a
previously paired cell phone; SYNC will
then attempt to call the emergency
services.
Before making the call:
• SYNC provides a short window of time
(about 10 seconds) to cancel the call.
If you fail to cancel the call, SYNC
attempts to dial 911.
• SYNC says the following, or a similar
message: "SYNC will attempt to call
911, to cancel the call, press Cancel on
your screen or press and hold the
phone button on your steering wheel."
If you do not cancel the call, and SYNC
makes a successful call, a pre-recorded
message plays for the 911 operator, and
then the occupant(s) in your vehicle is able
to talk with the operator. Be prepared to
provide your name, phone number and
location immediately, because not all 911
systems are capable of receiving this
information electronically.
911 Assist May Not Work If
• Your cellular phone or 911 Assist
hardware sustains damage in a crash.
• The vehicle's battery or the SYNC
system has no power.
• The phone(s) thrown from your vehicle
are the ones paired and connected to
the system.
911 Assist Privacy Notice
When you turn on 911 Assist, it may
disclose to emergency services that your
vehicle has been in a crash involving the
deployment of an airbag or activation of
the fuel pump shut-off. Certain versions or
updates to 911 Assist may also be capable
of electronically or verbally disclosing to
911 operators your vehicle location or other
details about your vehicle or crash to assist
911 operators to provide the most
appropriate emergency services. If you do
not want to disclose this information, do
not turn the feature on.
Vehicle Health Report (If
Equipped, United States Only)
WARNING
Always follow scheduled
maintenance instructions, regularly
inspect your vehicle, and seek repair
for any damage or problem you suspect.
Vehicle Health Report supplements, but
cannot replace, normal maintenance and
vehicle inspection. Vehicle Health Report
only monitors certain systems
electronically monitored by your vehicle
and will not monitor or report the status
of any other system, (such as brake lining
wear). Failure to perform scheduled
maintenance and regularly inspect your
vehicle may result in vehicle damage and
serious injury.
Note: This feature is only available in the
United States.
281
Police Interceptor (CPH), enUSA, Edition date: 10/2015, First Printing
SYNC™
Note: Your Vehicle Health Report feature
requires activation before use. Visit
www.SYNCMyRide.com to register. There
is no fee or subscription associated with
Vehicle Health Report, but you must register
to use this feature.
Note: This feature may not function
properly if you have enabled caller ID
blocking on your cellular phone. Before
running a report, review the Vehicle Health
Report Privacy Notice.
Note: In order to allow a break-in period for
your vehicle, you may not be able to create
a Vehicle Health Report until your vehicle
odometer has reached 200 miles.
Note: Cellular phone and SMS charges may
apply when making a report.
Register for Vehicle Health Report and set
your report preferences at
www.SYNCMyRide.com. After registering,
you can request a Vehicle Health Report
(inside your vehicle). Return to your
account at www.SYNCMyRide.com to view
your report. You can also choose for SYNC
to remind you automatically to run reports
at specific mileage intervals.
The system allows you to check your
vehicle's overall health in the form of a
diagnostic report card. The Vehicle Health
Report contains valuable information, for
example:
• Vehicle diagnostic information
• Scheduled maintenance
• Open recalls and Field Service Actions
• Items noted during vehicle inspections
by an authorized dealer that still need
servicing.
You can run a vehicle health report after
your vehicle has been running a minimum
of 60 seconds. Choose one of the following
options.
To use voice commands, press the voice button and when prompted say:
Action and DescriptionVoice command
The system will run a vehicle health report of your vehicle's
diagnostic systems and send the results to Ford where it
combines with scheduled maintenance information, open
recalls, other field service actions and vehicle inspection items
that still need servicing by an authorized dealer.
Vehicle Health (Report)
To use the screen, press the phone button, then scroll to:
Action and DescriptionMessage
Press the OK button.Vehicle Health
Select one of the following:
Press the OK button and select on or off.Auto On?
282
Police Interceptor (CPH), enUSA, Edition date: 10/2015, First Printing
SYNC™
Action and DescriptionMessage
Select On to have SYNC automatically prompt you to run a
health report at certain mileage intervals.
*
Scroll to select between 5000, 7500 or 10000-mile intervals.
Select your desired option and press the OK button.
Report Interval
Press the OK button for SYNC to run a health report of your
vehicle's diagnostic systems and send the results to Ford
where it combines with scheduled maintenance information,
open recalls, other field service actions and vehicle inspection
items that still need servicing by an authorized dealer.
Run Report
Exit the current menu.Return
*
You must first turn this feature on before you can select the desired mileage interval.
Vehicle Health Report Privacy Notice
When you create a Vehicle Health Report,
Ford Motor Company may collect your
cellular phone number (to process your
report request) and diagnostic information
about your vehicle. Certain versions or
updates to Vehicle Health Report may also
collect more vehicle information. Ford may
use your vehicle information it collects for
any purpose. If you do not want to disclose
your cellular phone number or vehicle
information, do not run the feature or set
up your Vehicle Health Report profile at
www.SYNCMyRide.com. See
www.SYNCMyRide.com (Vehicle Health
Report Terms and Conditions, and Privacy
Statement) for more information.
SYNC Services: Traffic, Directions
& Information (TDI) (If Equipped,
United States Only)
Note: SYNC Services varies by trim level
and model year and may require a
subscription. Traffic alerts and turn-by-turn
directions available in select markets.
Message and data rates may apply. Ford
Motor Company reserves the right to change
or discontinue this product service at any
time without prior notification or incurring
any future obligation.
Note: SYNC Services requires activation
before use. Visit www.SYNCMyRide.com to
register and check your eligibility for
complimentary services. Standard phone
and message rates may apply. Subscription
may be required. You must also have the
active SYNC Services Bluetooth-enabled
cellular phone paired and connected to the
system in order to connect to, and use,
SYNC Services. See Using SYNC™ With
Your Phone (page 266).
Note: This feature does not function
properly if you have enabled caller ID
blocking on your cellular phone. Make sure
your cellular phone is not blocking caller ID
before using SYNC Services.
283
Police Interceptor (CPH), enUSA, Edition date: 10/2015, First Printing
SYNC™
Note: The driver is ultimately responsible
for the safe operation of the vehicle, and
therefore, must evaluate whether it is safe
to follow the suggested directions. Any
navigation features provided are only an aid.
Make your driving decisions based on your
observations of local conditions and existing
traffic regulations. Do not follow the route
suggestions if doing so would result in an
unsafe or illegal maneuver, place you in an
unsafe situation, or if you would be directed
into an area that you consider unsafe. Maps
used by this system may be inaccurate
because of errors, changes in roads, traffic
conditions or driving conditions.
Note: When you connect, the service uses
GPS technology and advanced vehicle
sensors to collect your vehicle's current
location, travel direction and speed to help
provide you with the directions, traffic
reports, or business searches you request.
Further, to provide the services you request,
for continuous improvement, the service
may collect and record call details and voice
communications. For more information, see
SYNC Services Terms and Conditions at
www.SYNCMyRide.com. If you do not want
Ford or its service providers to collect your
vehicle travel information or other
information identified in the Terms and
Conditions, do not subscribe or use the
service.
SYNC Services uses advanced vehicle
sensors, integrated GPS technology and
comprehensive map and traffic data, to
give you personalized traffic reports,
precise turn-by-turn directions, business
search, news, sports, weather and more.
For a complete list of services, or to learn
more, please visit www.SYNCMyRide.com.
Connecting to SYNC Services Using Voice Commands
Press the voice button and when prompted say:
Action and DescriptionVoice command
This initiates an outgoing call to SYNC Services using your
paired and connected Bluetooth-enabled cellular phone.
Services
Once you connect to the service, follow the voice prompts
to request the desired service, for example traffic or directions.
Once you are connected to SYNC Services, you can also say the following:
Receive a list of available services from which to choose.(what are my (options |
choices) | what can I say
| [available] commands)
284
Police Interceptor (CPH), enUSA, Edition date: 10/2015, First Printing
SYNC™
Action and DescriptionVoice command
To return to the Services main menu.Services
Receive system help.help
You can say any of the voice commands that appear within open and close brackets that
are separated by |. For example, where (options | choices) appears you say either; options
or choices.
You must say any of the voice commands that appear outside of open and close brackets.
For example, where; what are my (options | choices) appears, you must say; what are
my, followed by either, options or choices.
You do not need to say words that appear within square brackets. For example, for where
(what can I say [available] commands) appears, you can say, what can I say commands.
Connecting to SYNC Services Using the Phone Menu
Press the phone button, then scroll to:
Action and DescriptionMessage
Press the OK button.SYNC Apps
Services 1. Press the OK button. The display indicates the system is
connecting.
2. Press the OK button again. SYNC initiates the call to the
Services portal.
3. Once you connect to the service, follow the prompts to
request the desired service, for example traffic or direc-
tions.
285
Police Interceptor (CPH), enUSA, Edition date: 10/2015, First Printing
SYNC™
Receiving Turn-by-Turn Directions
When connected to SYNC Services, press the voice button and when prompted
say:
Action and DescriptionVoice command
To receive directions to a location. Once you select your
destination, the system uploads your current vehicle location,
calculates a route based on current traffic conditions and
sends it back to your vehicle. After the route download is
complete, the phone call automatically ends. You then receive
audible and visual driving instructions as you travel toward
your destination.
Directions
To find a business or type of business. Select your destination,
the system uploads your current vehicle location, calculates
a route based on current traffic conditions and sends it back
to your vehicle. After the route download is complete, the
phone call automatically ends. You then receive audible and
visual driving instructions as you travel toward your destina-
tion.
Business search
You can also say the following:
To find the closest business or type of business to your loca-
tion, within business search.
Search near me
If you need further assistance in finding a location at any time
within a Directions or Business search and need to speak with
a live operator.
Operator
The live operator can assist you by searching for businesses
by name or by category, residential addresses by street
address or by name or specific street intersections.
The system may prompt you to speak with an operator when
it has difficulty matching your voice request. Operator Assist
is a feature of your SYNC Services subscription. For more
information on Operator Assist, visit www.SYNCMyRide.com/
support.
If you miss a turn, SYNC automatically asks if you want the
route updated. Say yes when prompted and the system sends
a new route to your vehicle.
Yes
*
*
During an active route.
286
Police Interceptor (CPH), enUSA, Edition date: 10/2015, First Printing
SYNC™
Disconnecting from SYNC Services
To disconnect from SYNC services, say:
Action and DescriptionVoice command
From the SYNC Services main menu, or press and hold the
phone button on the steering wheel.
Goodbye
SYNC Services quick tips
SYNC Services quick tips
You can personalize your Services feature to provide quicker
access to your most used or favorite information. You can
save address points, for example work or home. You can also
save favorite information like sports teams or a news
category. You can learn more about personalization by logging
onto www.SYNCMyRide.com.
Personalizing
Press the voice button at any time while connected to SYNC
Services to interrupt a voice prompt or an audio clip and say
your voice command.
Push to interrupt
Your subscription is associated with your Bluetooth-enabled
cellular phone number, not your VIN (Vehicle Identification
Number). You can pair and connect your phone to any vehicle
equipped with SYNC Services and continue enjoying your
personalized services.
Portable
You can even access your account outside your vehicle. Just
use the number on your phone's call history. Traffic and
Directions features do not function properly but information
services and the 411 connect and text message features are
available.
SYNC™ APPLINK™
SYNC Mobile Apps
Note: You must pair and connect your
smartphone to SYNC to access AppLink.
Note: iPhone users need to connect the
phone to the USB port in order to start the
application.
Note: The AppLink feature is not available
if your vehicle is equipped with the MyFord
Touch system.
Note: Depending on your display type, you
can access AppLink from the media menu,
the phone menu, or by using voice
commands. Once an app is running through
AppLink, you can control main features of
the app through voice commands and
steering wheel controls.
287
Police Interceptor (CPH), enUSA, Edition date: 10/2015, First Printing
SYNC™
To Access Using the Phone Menu
Press the phone button to access the
SYNC phone menu on-screen. You can
then scroll to:
Menu item
Press OK to access a list
of available applications.
Mobile Apps
Scroll through the list of
available applications and
press OK to select a
particular app. Once an
app is running through
SYNC, you can access an
app’ s menu by pressing the
MENU button to first
access the SYNC menu.
Scroll until the app name followed by
"Menu", is displayed (such as, sticher
Menu), then press OK. From here, you can
access an application's features, such as
Thumbs up and Thumbs down.
For more information, please visit:
Website
www.SYNCMyRide.com
To Access Using the Media Menu
Press the AUX button on the center
console.
Press the Menu button to the SYNC menu and scroll to:
Action and descriptionMenu item
Press the OK button.SYNC-Media
Press the OK button and scroll through the list of available
applications and select your desired app.
Mobile Apps
Scroll until the app name followed by
"Menu", is displayed (such as, Stitcher
Menu), then press OK. From here, you can
access an application's features, such as
Thumbs up and Thumbs down.
For more information, please visit:
Website
www.SYNCMyRide.com
288
Police Interceptor (CPH), enUSA, Edition date: 10/2015, First Printing
SYNC™
To Access Using Voice Commands
Press the voice button and when prompted say:
Action and descriptionVoice command
Say the name of the application after the tone.
The app should start. While an app is running through SYNC,
you can press the voice button and speak commands specific
to the app, for example, "Playlist Road Trip".
Mobile Apps
You can also say the following:
To discover the available voice commands.The name of an app
(such as Stitcher)
followed by "help".
USING SYNC™ WITH YOUR
MEDIA PLAYER
You can access and play music from your
digital music player over your vehicle's
speaker system using the system's media
menu or voice commands. You can also
sort and play your music by specific
categories, for example artist and album.
Note: The system is capable of indexing up
to 6,000 songs.
SYNC is capable of hosting nearly any
digital media player including: iPod®,
Zune™, plays from device players, and
most USB drives. SYNC also supports the
following audio formats MP3, WMA, WAV
and ACC.
Connecting Your Digital Media
Player to the USB Port
Note: If your digital media player has a
power switch, make sure you switch it on
before plugging it in.
To Connect Using Voice Commands
Plug the device into the USB port. See
USB Port (page 260).
E142599
Press the voice button and when prompted say:
Action and DescriptionVoice command
You can now play music by saying any of the appropriate
voice commands. See Media voice commands.
USB [1]
You do not need to say words that appear within square brackets. For example, for where
USB[1]appears, you can say USB or USB one.
289
Police Interceptor (CPH), enUSA, Edition date: 10/2015, First Printing
SYNC™
To Connect Using the System Menu
Plug the device into the USB port. See
USB Port (page 260).
Press the AUX button, then the Menu
button to enter the Media Menu.
You can then scroll to:
Action and DescriptionMessage
Press the OK button.SELECT SRC
Press the OK button.SYNC USB
Depending on how many digital media files are on your
connected device, the following message may appear in the
radio display.
Indexing…
When indexing is complete, the screen returns to the Play menu. You can then
select one of the following:
PLAY ALL
ARTISTS
ALBUMS
GENRES
PLAYLISTS
TRACKS
EXPLORE USB
SIMILARMUSIC
Exit the current menu.RETURN
What's Playing?
When a track is playing, you can ask the
system to tell you what is currently playing.
290
Police Interceptor (CPH), enUSA, Edition date: 10/2015, First Printing
SYNC™
Press the voice button and when prompted say:
Action and DescriptionVoice command
The system reads the metadata tags of the playing track,
and if the metadata tags are populated, the system will tell
you what track is playing.
Whats This? | Whats
Playing?
You can say any of the voice commands that appear within open and close brackets that
are separated by |. For example, where; (what's | what is) appears you say; what's or
what is.
You must say any of the voice commands that appear outside of open and close brackets.
For example, where text shows: (what's | what is) playing, you must say; "what's playing"
or "what is playing".
Media Voice Commands
Press the voice button and when
prompted say any of the following:
Voice command
USB [1]
You can then say any of the following
[Phone] Connections | [Media] Connec-
tions | [Bluetooth] Connections
Pause
Play
Play All
1,2
Play Artist ___
1,2
Play Album ___
1,2
Play Genre ___
3
[Play] Next Folder
[Play] Next Track | [Play] Next Song
1,2
Play Playlist ___
3
[Play] Previous Folder
Voice command
[Play] Previous Track | [Play] Previous
Song
1,2
[Play] Next Track | [Play] Next Song
Repeat [On]
Repeat Off
Shuffle [On]
Shuffle Off
1,2
Search Album ___
1,2
Search Artist ___
1,2
The system searches all
the data from your
indexed music and, if
available, begins to play
the chosen type of music.
You can only play genres
of music which are present
in the GENRE metadata
tags that you have on your
digital media player.
Search
Genre ___
291
Police Interceptor (CPH), enUSA, Edition date: 10/2015, First Printing
SYNC™
Voice command
1,2
The system searches for a
specific artist/track/album
from the music indexed
through the USB port.
Search
Track ___
| Search
Song ___
1,2
This allows you to make
your previous command
more specific. By using this
command you can filter
though a previous selec-
tion, such as an artist to
play only specific album.
Refine
album ___
The system compiles a
playlist and then plays similar
music to what is currently
playing from the USB port
using indexed metadata
information.
Similar
Music
Autoplay Off
Turn autoplay on to listen to
music processed during
indexing. Turn autoplay off to
allow the indexing process to
finish before the system plays
any of your music.
Autoplay
[on]
1
___ is a dynamic listing, meaning that it
could be the name of anything, such as a
group, artist or song. For example you
could say "Play artist The Beatles".
2
This voice command is not available until
indexing is complete.
3
This voice command is only available in
folder mode.
Bluetooth Audio Command Guide
Press the voice button and say:
Voice command
Bluetooth Audio
You can then say any of the following:
[Phone] Connections | [Media] Connec-
tions | [Bluetooth] Connections
Pause
Play
[Play] Next Track | [Play] Next Song
[Play] Previous Track | [Play] Previous
Song
Media Menu Features
The media menu allows you to select your
media source, how to play your music, for
example by artist, genre, shuffle or repeat,
and to add, connect or delete devices.
Press the AUX button, then the Menu
button to enter the Media Menu.
292
Police Interceptor (CPH), enUSA, Edition date: 10/2015, First Printing
SYNC™
You can then scroll to:
Action and DescriptionMessage
Play your music by artist, album, genre,
playlists, tracks, similar music or to simply,
play all. You can also choose to Explore
USB to view the supported digital music
files on your playing device.
PLAY MENU
See Play Menu later in this section for more
information.
Select one of the following:
Press the OK button to access music
plugged into your USB port. You can also
plug in devices to charge them (if supported
by your device). Once connected, the
system indexes any readable media files.
1
SYNC USBSELECT SRC
Press the OK button. This is a phone-
dependent feature that allows you to
stream music playing on your Bluetooth-
enabled phone. If supported by your device,
you can press seek to play the previous or
next track.
SYNC BT
Press the OK button to select and play
music from your portable music player over
your vehicle's speakers.
2
SYNC LINE IN
(If Equipped)
Choose to shuffle or repeat your music and select your Auto-
play settings. Once you turn these selections on, they remain
on until you turn them off. Press SEEK to play the previous or
next track.
3
MEDIA SETTIN
Press the OK button to shuffle available
media files in the current playlist. To shuffle
all media tracks, you must select Play All
in the play menu and then select Shuffle.
SHUFFLE
Press the OK button to repeat any song.REPEAT
Press the OK button to turn autoplay on to
listen to music processed during indexing.
Turn autoplay off to allow the indexing
process to finish before the system plays
any of your music.
4
AUTOPLAY
293
Police Interceptor (CPH), enUSA, Edition date: 10/2015, First Printing
SYNC™
Action and DescriptionMessage
Interact with SYNC-capable mobile applications on your
smartphone.
APPLICATIONS
Access available Bluetooth Device menu listings as well as
Advanced menu listings.
SYS SETTINGS
Press OK to exit the media menu.EXIT MENU
1
The time required to complete this depends on the size of the media the system needs
to index. If autoplay is on, you can listen to media processed during indexing. If autoplay
is off, you cannot listen to music until the system finishes indexing media. SYNC is capable
of indexing thousands of average size media and notifies you if it reaches the maximum
indexing file size.
2
If you have already connected a device to the USB port, you cannot access the line in
feature. Some digital media players require both USB and line in ports to stream data
and music separately.
3
Some digital media players require both USB and line in ports to stream data and music
separately.
4
Indexing times can vary from device to device and with regard to the number of songs
the system needs to process.
Accessing Your Play Menu
This menu allows you to select and play
your media by artist, album, genre, playlist,
track, similar music or even to explore what
is on your USB device.
Make sure that your device is plugged into
the USB port and is turned on.
Press the AUX button, then the Menu
button to enter the Media Menu.
You can then scroll to select:
Action and DescriptionMessage
Press the OK button.PLAY MENU
If there are no media files to access, the display indicates there is no media. If there are
media files, you have the following options:
Press the OK button. The first track title appears in the
display.
PLAY ALL
Play all indexed media (tracks) from your playing device in
flat file mode, one at a time in numerical order.
294
Police Interceptor (CPH), enUSA, Edition date: 10/2015, First Printing
SYNC™
Action and DescriptionMessage
Sort all indexed media by artist. Once selected, the system
lists and then plays all artists and tracks alphabetically. If
there are fewer than 255 indexed artists, the system lists
them alphabetically in flat file mode. If there are more than
255, the system categorizes them alphabetically.
ARTISTS
1. Press the OK button. You can select to play all artists or
any indexed artist.
2. Scroll to choose the desired artist. Press the OK button.
Sort all indexed media by albums. If there are fewer than 255
indexed albums, the system lists them alphabetically in flat
file mode. If there are more than 255, the system categorizes
them alphabetically.
ALBUMS
1. Press the OK button. You can enter the album menu and
select from playing all albums or from any individual
indexed album.
2. Scroll to choose the desired album. Press the OK button.
Sort indexed music by genre (category) type. SYNC lists the
genres alphabetically in flat file mode. If there are more than
255, the system categorizes them alphabetically.
GENRES
1. Press the OK button.
2. Scroll to select the desired genre. Press the OK button.
Access your playlists from formats ASX, M3U, WPL or MTP.
The system lists your playlists alphabetically in flat file mode.
If there are more than 255, the system categorizes them
alphabetically.
PLAYLISTS
1. Press the OK button.
2. Scroll to select the desired playlist. Press the OK button.
Search for and play a specific indexed track. SYNC lists your
tracks alphabetically in flat file mode. If there are more than
255, the system categorizes them alphabetically.
TRACKS
1. Press the OK button.
2. Scroll to select the desired track. Press the OK button.
295
Police Interceptor (CPH), enUSA, Edition date: 10/2015, First Printing
SYNC™
Action and DescriptionMessage
Explore all supported digital media on your media device
connected to the USB port. You can only view media content
which is compatible with SYNC; other files saved are not
visible.
EXPLORE USB
1. Press the OK button.
2. Scroll to explore indexed media on your flash drive.
Play music similar to what is currently playing from the USB
port. The system uses the metadata information of each song
to compile a playlist for you.
*
SIMILARMUSIC
1. Press the OK button.
2. The system creates a new list of similar songs and begins
playing. This feature does not include tracks with incom-
plete metadata information. Press the OK button.
Exit the current menu.RETURN
*
With certain playing devices, if your metadata tags are not populated, the tracks are not
available in voice recognition, play menu or similar music. However, if you place these
tracks onto your playing device in "Mass Storage Device Mode", they are available in voice
recognition, play menu browsing and similar music. The system places Unknown items
into any unpopulated metadata tag.
System Settings
System settings provide access to your
Bluetooth Devices and Advanced menu
features.
Bluetooth Devices
The Bluetooth Devices menu allows you
to enable, disable, add, connect and delete
a Bluetooth device.
Press the AUX button, then the Menu
button to enter the Media Menu.
You can then scroll to:
Action and DescriptionMessage
Press the OK button.SYS SETTINGS
Press the OK button.BT DEVICES
You can then select one of the following:
Pair more devices to the system.
*
ADD DEVICE
296
Police Interceptor (CPH), enUSA, Edition date: 10/2015, First Printing
SYNC™
Action and DescriptionMessage
1. Press the OK button. When find SYNC appears in the
display, press the OK button again.
2. Follow the directions in your phone's manual to put your
phone into discovery mode. A six-digit PIN appears in the
display.
3. When prompted on your phone's six-digit display, enter
the PIN.
Connect a previously paired Bluetooth-enabled phone.Connect BT
1. Press OK to select and view a list of devices.
2. Scroll until the desired device is chosen and press OK to
connect the device.
Turn the Bluetooth feature on and off.
**
BT ON/OFF
1. Press the OK button and scroll to toggle between on and
off.
2. Make a selection and press the OK button.
Delete a paired media device.DEL DEVICE
1. Press the OK button and scroll to select the device.
2. Press the OK button to confirm.
Delete all previously paired devices.DELETE ALL
1. Press the OK button.
2. Press the OK button to confirm.
Exit the current menu.RETURN
*
This is a speed-dependent feature. It is only available when your vehicle is traveling at 3
mph (5 km/h) or less.
**
Setting Bluetooth to off disconnects all Bluetooth devices and turns off all Bluetooth
features.
Advanced
The Advanced menu allows you to access
and set prompts, languages, defaults and
perform a master reset.
Press the AUX button, then the Menu
button to enter the Media Menu.
297
Police Interceptor (CPH), enUSA, Edition date: 10/2015, First Printing
SYNC™
You can then scroll to:
Action and DescriptionMessage
Press the OK button.SYS SETTINGS
Press the OK button.ADVANCED
You can then select one of the following:
Have SYNC guide you by asking questions, helpful hints or
ask you for a specific action.
PROMPTS
1. Press the OK button and scroll to toggle between on and
off.
2. Make a selection and press the OK button. SYNC takes
you back to the Advanced menu.
Choose from the available languages. The displays and
prompts are in the selected language.
LANGUAGES
1. Press the OK button and scroll through the available
languages.
2. Press the OK button when the desired language appears
in the display.
3. If you change the language setting, the display indicates
that the system is updating. When complete, SYNC takes
you back to the Advanced menu.
Return to the factory default settings. This selection does
not erase your indexed information, for example phonebook,
call history, text messages and paired devices.
DEFAULTS
1. Press the OK button.
2. Press the OK button. When restore defaults appears in
the display, press the OK button again to confirm.
Completely erase all information stored on SYNC. All
phonebook, call history, text messages and all paired devices
will be deleted and the system will return to the factory
default settings.
MASTER RESET
Download available software applications through the USB
port.
INSTALL APP
Exit the current menu.RETURN
298
Police Interceptor (CPH), enUSA, Edition date: 10/2015, First Printing
SYNC™
SYNC™ TROUBLESHOOTING
Your SYNC system is easy to use. However,
should questions arise, see the tables
below.
Use the website at any time to check your
phone's compatibility, register your
account and set preferences as well as
access a customer representative via an
online chat (during certain hours). Visit
www.SYNCMyRide.com,
www.SYNCMyRide.ca or
www.syncmaroute.ca for more
information.
Phone issues
Possible solution(s)Possible cause(s)Issue
Review your phone's manual
about audio adjustments.
The audio control settings
on your phone may be
affecting SYNC perform-
ance.
There is excessive back-
ground noise during a phone
call.
Try turning off the device,
resetting the device,
removing the device's
battery, then trying again.
This may be a possible
phone malfunction.
During a call, I can hear the
other person but they
cannot hear me.
Go to the website to review
your phone's compatibility.
This is a phone-dependent
feature.
SYNC is not able to down-
load my phonebook.
Try turning off the device,
resetting the device or
removing the device's
battery, then trying again.
This may be a possible
phone malfunction.
Try pushing your phonebook
contacts to SYNC by using
the Add Contacts feature.
Use the SYNCmyphone
feature available on the
website.
Try pushing your phonebook
contacts to SYNC by using
the Add Contacts feature.
This may be a limitation on
your phone's capability.
The system says Phonebook
Downloaded but the
phonebook in SYNC is
empty or missing contacts. If the missing contacts are
stored on your SIM card, try
moving them to the device
memory.
Remove any pictures or
special ring tones associ-
ated with the missing
contact.
299
Police Interceptor (CPH), enUSA, Edition date: 10/2015, First Printing
SYNC™
Phone issues
Possible solution(s)Possible cause(s)Issue
Depending upon your phone,
you may have to grant SYNC
permission to access your
phonebook contacts. Make
sure to confirm when
prompted by your phone
during the phonebook
download.
Go to the website to review
your phone's compatibility.
This is a phone-dependent
feature.
I am having trouble
connecting my phone to
SYNC. Try turning off the device,
resetting the device or
removing the device's
battery, then trying again.
This may be a possible
phone malfunction.
Try deleting your device
from SYNC, deleting SYNC
from your device and trying
again.
Check the security and auto
accept and prompt always
settings relative to the SYNC
Bluetooth connection on
your phone.
Update your device's firm-
ware.
Turn off the Auto phone-
book download setting.
Go to the website to review
your phone's compatibility.
This is a phone-dependent
feature.
Text messaging is not
working on SYNC.
Try turning off the device,
resetting the device or
removing the device's
battery, then trying again.
This may be a possible
phone malfunction.
300
Police Interceptor (CPH), enUSA, Edition date: 10/2015, First Printing
SYNC™
USB and media issues
Possible solution(s)Possible cause(s)Issue
Try turning off the device,
resetting the device,
removing the device's
battery, then trying again.
This may be a possible
device malfunction.
I am having trouble
connecting my device.
Make sure you are using the
manufacturer's cable.
Make sure you insert the
USB cable correctly into the
device and the USB port.
Make sure that the device
does not have an auto-
install program or active
security settings.
Make sure you are not
leaving the device in your
vehicle during very hot or
cold temperatures.
This is a device limitation.SYNC does not recognize
my device when I turn on the
car.
Review the device compatib-
ility chart on the SYNC
website to confirm your
phone supports the
Bluetooth audio streaming
function.
This is a phone-dependent
feature.
The device is not connected.
Bluetooth audio does not
stream.
Make sure you correctly
connect the device to SYNC,
and that you have pressed
play on your device.
Make sure that all song
details are populated.
Your music files may not
contain the correct artist,
song title, album or genre
information.
SYNC does not recognize
music that is on my device.
Some devices require you to
change the USB settings
from mass storage to MTP
class.
The file may be corrupted.
The song may have copy-
right protection, which does
not allow it to play.
301
Police Interceptor (CPH), enUSA, Edition date: 10/2015, First Printing
SYNC™
Vehicle Health Report and Services (Traffic, Directions and Information) issues
Possible solution(s)Possible cause(s)Issue
This is a free feature, but you
must first register online to
use it.
You did not activate your
account on the website.
You may have the wrong
VIN (vehicle identification
number) listed.
I received a text that I did
not activate Vehicle Health
Report.
Make sure that your VIN is
correctly listed in your
account.
When you register your
account, you must choose a
preferred dealer. If it already
lists a dealer, try selecting
another dealer and logging
out. Log back in, change it
back to your preferred
dealer, and retrieve the
report.
The preferred dealer
information did not load
correctly.
I am unable to retrieve the
report on the website, or I
receive a system error.
Update your cellular number
in your account on the
website.
This could be due to your
phone's compatibility.
Bad signal strength.
I am unable to submit a
report.
Make sure you have full
signal strength and that your
Bluetooth volume level has
been turned up.
You did not register your
phone correctly on the
website.
Make sure the currently
connected phone is
registered on your
SYNCMyRide account.
Try deleting your phone and
performing a clean pairing.
This is a free feature, but you
must first register online to
use it.
You did not activate this
phone for this service.
Your phone has ID blocker
active.
I heard a commercial when
I tried to use Traffic, Direc-
tions and Information.
Turn off ID blocker on your
phone as the system recog-
nizes you by your phone
number.
Make sure the currently
connected phone is the
same one that is registered
on your SYNCMyRide
account.
302
Police Interceptor (CPH), enUSA, Edition date: 10/2015, First Printing
SYNC™
Voice command issues
Possible solution(s)Possible cause(s)Issue
Review the phone voice
commands and the media
voice commands at the
beginning of their respective
sections.
You may be using the wrong
voice commands.
You may be speaking too
soon or at the wrong time.
SYNC does not understand
what I am saying.
After pressing the voice icon,
wait until after the tone
sounds and Listening
appears before saying a
command. Any command
spoken before this does not
register with the system.
Review the media voice
commands at the beginning
of the media section.
You may be using the wrong
voice commands.
You may be saying the
name differently than the
way you saved it.
SYNC does not understand
the name of a song or artist.
Say the song or artist
exactly as listed. If you say
"Play Artist Prince", the
system does not play music
by Prince and the Revolution
or Prince and the New
Power Generation.
The system may not be
reading the name the same
way you are saying it.
Make sure you are saying the
complete title, such as
"California remix featuring
Jennifer Nettles".
If the song titles are in all
CAPS, you have to spell
them. LOLA requires you to
say "L-O-L-A".
Do not use special charac-
ters in the title. The system
does not recognize them.
Review the Phone voice
commands at the beginning
of the phone section.
You may be using the wrong
voice commands.
You may be saying the
name differently than the
way you saved it.
SYNC does not understand
or is calling the wrong
contact when I want to
make a call.
303
Police Interceptor (CPH), enUSA, Edition date: 10/2015, First Printing
SYNC™
Voice command issues
Possible solution(s)Possible cause(s)Issue
Make sure you are saying the
contacts exactly as they are
listed. For example, if you
save a contact as Joe
Wilson, say "Call Joe
Wilson".
The system may not be
reading the name the same
way you are saying it.
Contacts in your phonebook
may be very short and
similar, or they may contain
special characters. Using the SYNC phone
menu, open the phonebook
and scroll to the name
SYNC is having trouble
understanding. SYNC will
read the name to you, giving
you some idea of the
pronunciation SYNC is
expecting.
Your phonebook contacts
may be in CAPS.
The system works better if
you list full names, such as
"Joe Wilson" rather than
"Joe".
Do not use special charac-
ters, such as 123 or ICE, as
the system does not recog-
nize them.
If a contact is in CAPS, you
have to spell it. JAKE
requires you to say "Call J-
A-K-E".
AppLink issues
Possible solution(s)Possible cause(s)Issue
Ensure you have a compat-
ible smartphone; an Android
with OS 2.3 or higher or an
iPhone 3GS or newer with
iOS 5.0 or higher. Addition-
ally, ensure your phone is
An AppLink capable phone
is not connected to SYNC.
When I select "Find New
Apps," SYNC does not find
any applications.
paired and connected to
304
Police Interceptor (CPH), enUSA, Edition date: 10/2015, First Printing
SYNC™
AppLink issues
Possible solution(s)Possible cause(s)Issue
SYNC in order to find
AppLink-capable apps on
your device. iPhone users
must also connect to
SYNC's USB port with an
Apple USB cable.
Ensure you have down-
loaded and installed the
latest version of the app
from your phone's app store.
Ensure the app is running on
your phone. Some apps
AppLink-enabled apps are
not installed and running on
your mobile device.
My phone is connected, but
I still cannot find any apps.
require you to register or
login on the app on the
phone before using them
with AppLink. Also, some
may have a "Ford SYNC"
setting, so check the app's
settings menu on the phone.
Closing and restarting apps
may help SYNC find the
application if you cannot
discover it inside the vehicle.
On an Android device, if
apps have an "Exit" or "Quit"
Sometime apps do not
properly close and re-open
their connection to SYNC,
over ignition cycles, for
example.
My phone is connected, my
app(s) are running, but I still
cannot find any apps.
option, select that then
restart the app. If the app
does not have that option,
you can also manually
"Force Close" the app by
going to the phone's settings
menu, selecting "Apps."
then finding the particular
app and choosing "Force
stop." Don't forget to restart
the app afterwards, then
select "Find New Apps" on
SYNC.
305
Police Interceptor (CPH), enUSA, Edition date: 10/2015, First Printing
SYNC™
AppLink issues
Possible solution(s)Possible cause(s)Issue
On an iPhone with iOS7+, to
force close an app, double
tab the home button then
swipe up on the app to close
it. Tab the home button
again, then select the app
again to restart it. After a
few seconds, the app should
then appear in SYNC's
Mobile App's Menu.
Reset the Bluetooth on your
phone by turning it off and
then turning Bluetooth back
on. If you are in your vehicle,
SYNC should be able to
automatically re-connect to
your phone if you press the
"Phone" button.
There is a bluetooth bug on
some order versions of the
Android OS. This bug may
cause apps that were found
the last time your phone
connected to SYNC not to
be found again if you have
not turned off bluetooth.
My Android phone is
connected, my app(s) are
running, I restarted them,
but I still cannot find any
apps.
306
Police Interceptor (CPH), enUSA, Edition date: 10/2015, First Printing
SYNC™
AppLink issues
Possible solution(s)Possible cause(s)Issue
Unplug the USB cable from
the phone, wait a moment,
and plug the USB cable
back in to the phone. After a
few seconds, the app should
appear in SYNC's Mobile
Apps Menu. If not, "Force
Close" the application and
restart it.
The USB connection to
SYNC may need to be reset.
My iPhone phone is
connected, my app is
running, I restarted the app
but I still cannot find it on
SYNC.
Try increasing the Bluetooth
volume of the device by
using the device's volume
control buttons which are
most often found on the
side of the device.
The bluetooth volume on
the phone may be low.
I have an Android phone. I
found and started my media
app on SYNC, but there is no
sound or the sound is very
low.
Force close or uninstall the
apps you do not want SYNC
to find. If the app has a "Ford
SYNC" setting, disable that
setting in the app's settings
menu on the phone.
Some Android devices have
a limited number of
bluetooth ports apps can
use to connect. If you have
more AppLink apps on your
phone than the number of
availble Bluetooth ports, you
will not see all of your apps
listed in SYNC's mobile apps
menu.
I can only see some of the
AppLink apps running on my
phone listed in SYNC's
Mobile Apps Menu.
307
Police Interceptor (CPH), enUSA, Edition date: 10/2015, First Printing
SYNC™
PROTECT YOURSELF FROM THE RISING
COST OF VEHICLE REPAIRS WITH A FORD
EXTENDED SERVICE PLAN.
EXTENDED SERVICE PLAN (U.S.
Only)
More than 32 million Ford owners have
discovered the powerful protection of Ford
Extended Service Plan. It is the extended
service plan backed by Ford Motor
Company, and provides peace of mind
protection beyond the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty coverage.
Ford ESP Can Quickly Pay for Itself
One service bill – the cost of parts and
labor – can easily exceed the price of your
Ford Extended Service Plan. With Ford ESP
you minimize your risk for unexpected
repair bills and rising repair costs.
Up to 1,000+ Covered Vehicle
Components
There are four core Extended Service Plans
with different levels of coverage. Ask your
authorized dealer for details.
1. PremiumCARE - Our most
comprehensive coverage. With over
1,000 covered components, this plan
is so complete that we generally only
discuss what’s not covered.
2. ExtraCARE - Covers 113 components,
and includes many high-tech items.
3. BaseCARE - Covers 84 components.
4. PowertrainCARE - Covers 29 critical
components.
Ford Extended Service Plan is honored by
all authorized Ford dealers in the U.S.,
Canada and Mexico. It is the extended
service plan authorized and backed by Ford
Motor Company.
That means you get:
• Reliable, quality service at any Ford or
Lincoln dealership
• Repairs performed by factory trained
technicians, using genuine parts
Rental Car Reimbursement
1st day Rental Benefit
You take advantage of replacement
transportation if your vehicle is at your
authorized dealer for same day covered
repairs.
Extended Rental Benefits
If your vehicle is kept overnight for covered
repairs, you are eligible for rental car
coverage, including bumper to bumper
warranty repairs, and Field Service Actions.
Roadside Assistance
Exclusive 24/7 roadside assistance,
including:
• Towing, flat-tire change and battery
jump starts
• Out of fuel and lock-out assistance.
• Travel expense reimbursement for
lodging, meals and rental car.
• Destination assistance for taxi, shuttle,
rental car coverage and emergency
transportation.
Transferable Coverage
If you sell your vehicle before your Ford
Extended Service Plan coverage expires,
you can transfer any remaining coverage
to the new owner. Whenever you sell your
vehicle, prospective buyers may have a
higher degree of confidence that vehicle
was properly maintained with Ford ESP,
thereby improving resale value.
308
Police Interceptor (CPH), enUSA, Edition date: 10/2015, First Printing
Extended Service Plan (ESP)
Avoid the Rising Cost of Properly
Maintaining Your Vehicle!
Ford Extended Service Plan also offers a
Premium Maintenance Plan that covers all
scheduled maintenance, and selected
wear items. The coverage is prepaid, so
you never have to worry about affording
your vehicle’s maintenance. It covers
regular checkups, routine inspections,
preventive care and replacement of select
items that require periodic attention for
normal wear:
• Windshield wiper blades.
• Spark plugs.
• The clutch disc.
• Brake pads and linings.
• Shock absorbers.
• Struts.
• Engine Belts.
• Engine coolant hoses, clamps and
o-rings.
• Diesel exhaust fluid replenishment.
Interest Free Finance Options
Available
Take advantage of our interest free
installment payment plan. Just a 10%
down payment will provide you with an
affordable, no interest, no fee payment
program allowing you all the security and
benefits Ford ESP has to offer while paying
over time. You are pre-approved with no
credit checks, no hassles! To learn more,
call our Ford ESP specialists at
800-367-3377.
Ford ESP
P.O. Box 321067
Detroit, MI 48232
EXTENDED SERVICE PLAN
(CANADA ONLY)
You can get more protection for your
vehicle by purchasing a Ford Extended
Service Plan. Ford Extended Service Plan
is the only service contract backed by Ford
Motor Company of Canada, Limited.
Depending on the plan you purchase, Ford
Extended Service Plan provides benefits
such as:
• Rental reimbursement.
• Coverage for certain maintenance and
wear items.
• Protection against repair costs after
your New Vehicle Limited Warranty
Coverage expires.
• Roadside Assistance benefits.
There are several Ford Extended Service
Plans available in various time, distance
and deductible combinations. Each plan
is tailored to fit your own driving needs,
including reimbursement for towing and
rental. When you purchase Ford Extended
Service Plan, you receive added
peace-of-mind protection throughout
Canada, the United States and Mexico,
provided by a network of participating
authorized Ford Motor Company dealers.
Note: Repairs performed outside of
Canada, the United States and Mexico are
not eligible for Ford Extended Service Plan
coverage.
This information is subject to change. For
more information, visit your local Ford of
Canada dealer or www.ford.ca to find the
Ford Extended Service Plan that is right for
you.
309
Police Interceptor (CPH), enUSA, Edition date: 10/2015, First Printing
Extended Service Plan (ESP)
GENERAL MAINTENANCE
INFORMATION
Why Maintain Your Vehicle?
Carefully following the maintenance
schedule helps protect against major repair
expenses resulting from neglect or
inadequate maintenance and may help to
increase the value of your vehicle when
you sell or trade it. Keep all receipts for
completed maintenance with your vehicle.
We have established regular maintenance
intervals for your vehicle based upon
rigorous testing. It is important that you
have your vehicle serviced at the proper
times. These intervals serve two purposes;
one is to maintain the reliability of your
vehicle and the second is to keep your cost
of owning your vehicle down.
It is your responsibility to have all
scheduled maintenance performed and to
make sure that the materials used meet
the specifications identified in this owner's
manual. See Capacities and
Specifications (page 229).
Failure to perform scheduled maintenance
invalidates warranty coverage on parts
affected by the lack of maintenance.
Why Maintain Your Vehicle at Your
Dealership?
Factory-Trained Technicians
Service technicians participate in extensive
factory-sponsored certification training to
help them become experts on the
operation of your vehicle. Ask your
dealership about the training and
certification their technicians have
received.
Genuine Ford and Motorcraft®
Replacement Parts
Dealerships stock Ford, Motorcraft and
Ford-authorized branded re-manufactured
replacement parts. These parts meet or
exceed our specifications. Parts installed
at your dealership carry a nationwide
24-month or unlimited mile (kilometer)
parts and labor limited warranty.
If you do not use Ford authorized parts they
may not meet our specifications and
depending on the part, it could affect
emissions compliance.
Convenience
Many dealerships have extended evening
and Saturday hours to make your service
visit more convenient and they offer one
stop shopping. They can perform any
services that are required on your vehicle,
from general maintenance to collision
repairs.
Note: Not all dealers have extended hours
or body shops. Please contact your dealer
for details.
Protecting Your Investment
Maintenance is an investment that pays
dividends in the form of improved
reliability, durability and resale value. To
maintain the proper performance of your
vehicle and its emission control systems,
make sure you have scheduled
maintenance performed at the designated
intervals.
Your vehicle is equipped with the
Intelligent Oil-Life Monitor system, which
displays a message in the information
display at the proper oil change interval.
This interval may be up to one year or
10000 miles (16000 kilometers).
310
Police Interceptor (CPH), enUSA, Edition date: 10/2015, First Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
When the oil change message appears in
the information display, it is time for an oil
change. Make sure you perform the oil
change within two weeks or 500 miles
(800 kilometers) of the message
appearing. Make sure you reset the
Intelligent Oil-Life Monitor after each oil
change. See Oil Change Indicator Reset
(page 176).
If your information display resets
prematurely or becomes inoperative, you
should perform the oil change interval at
six months or 5000 miles (8000
kilometers) from your last oil change.
Never exceed one year or 10000 miles
(16000 kilometers) between oil change
intervals.
Your vehicle is very sophisticated and built
with multiple, complex, performance
systems. Every manufacturer develops
these systems using different
specifications and performance features.
That is why it is important to rely upon your
dealership to properly diagnose and repair
your vehicle.
Ford Motor Company has recommended
maintenance intervals for various parts
and component systems based upon
engineering testing. Ford Motor Company
relies upon this testing to determine the
most appropriate mileage for replacement
of oils and fluids to protect your vehicle at
the lowest overall cost to you and
recommends against maintenance
schedules that deviate from the scheduled
maintenance information.
We strongly recommend the use of only
genuine Ford, Motorcraft or
Ford-authorized re-manufactured
replacement parts engineered for your
vehicle.
Additives and Chemicals
This owner's manual and the Ford
Workshop Manual list the recommended
additives and chemicals for your vehicle.
We do not recommend using chemicals or
additives not approved by us as part of
your vehicle’ s normal maintenance. Please
consult your warranty information.
Oils, Fluids and Flushing
In many cases, fluid discoloration is a
normal operating characteristic and, by
itself, does not necessarily indicate a
concern or that the fluid needs to be
changed. However, a qualified expert, such
as the factory-trained technicians at your
dealership, should inspect discolored fluids
that also show signs of overheating or
foreign material contamination
immediately.
Make sure to change your vehicle’s oils and
fluids at the specified intervals or in
conjunction with a repair. Flushing is a
viable way to change fluid for many vehicle
sub-systems during scheduled
maintenance. It is critical that systems are
flushed only with new fluid that is the same
as that required to fill and operate the
system or using a Ford-approved flushing
chemical.
Owner Checks and Services
Make sure you perform the following basic
maintenance checks and inspections every
month or at six-month intervals.
311
Police Interceptor (CPH), enUSA, Edition date: 10/2015, First Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
Check every month
Engine oil level.
Function of all interior and exterior lights.
Tires (including spare) for wear and proper pressure.
Windshield washer fluid level.
Check every six months
Battery connections. Clean if necessary.
Body and door drain holes for obstructions. Clean if necessary.
Cooling system fluid level and coolant strength.
Door weatherstrips for wear. Lubricate if necessary.
Hinges, latches and outside locks for proper operation. Lubricate if necessary.
Parking brake for proper operation.
Safety belts and seat latches for wear and function.
Safety warning lamps (brake, ABS, airbag and safety belt) for operation.
Washer spray and wiper operation. Clean or replace blades as necessary.
Multi-Point Inspection
In order to keep your vehicle running right,
it is important to have the systems on your
vehicle checked regularly. This can help
identify potential issues and prevent major
problems. We recommend having the
following multi-point inspection performed
at every scheduled maintenance interval
to help make sure your vehicle keeps
running great.
312
Police Interceptor (CPH), enUSA, Edition date: 10/2015, First Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
Multi-Point inspection
Hazard warning system operationAccessory drive belt(s)
Horn operationBattery performance
Radiator, cooler, heater and air conditioning
hoses
Engine air filter
Suspension components for leaks or
damage
Exhaust system
Steering and linkageExterior lamps operation
Tires (including spare) for wear and proper
pressure
**
Fluid levels
*
; fill if necessary
Windshield for cracks, chips or pitsFor oil and fluid leaks
Washer spray and wiper operationHalf-shaft dust boots
*
Brake, coolant recovery reservoir, automatic transmission and window washer
**
If your vehicle is equipped with a temporary mobility kit, check the tire sealant expiration
Use By date on the canister. Replace as needed.
Be sure to ask your dealership service
advisor or technician about the multi-point
vehicle inspection. It is a comprehensive
way to perform a thorough inspection of
your vehicle. Your checklist gives you
immediate feedback on the overall
condition of your vehicle.
NORMAL SCHEDULED
MAINTENANCE
Intelligent Oil-Life Monitor™
Your vehicle is equipped with an Intelligent
Oil-Life Monitor that determines when you
should change the engine oil based on how
your vehicle is used. By using several
important factors in its calculations, the
monitor helps reduce the cost of owning
your vehicle and reduces environmental
waste at the same time.
This means you do not have to remember
to change the oil on a mileage-based
schedule. Your vehicle lets you know when
an oil change is due by displaying a
message in the information display.
The following table provides examples of
vehicle use and its impact on oil change
intervals. It is a guideline only. Actual oil
change intervals depend on several factors
and generally decrease with severity of
use.
313
Police Interceptor (CPH), enUSA, Edition date: 10/2015, First Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
When to expect the OIL CHANGE REQUIRED message
Vehicle use and exampleInterval
Normal
7500-10000 miles
(12000-16000 km)
Normal commuting with highway driving
No, or moderate, load or towing
Flat to moderately hilly roads
No extended idling
Severe
5000-7499 miles
(8000-11999 km)
Moderate to heavy load or towing
Mountainous or off-road conditions
Extended idling
Extended hot or cold operation
Extreme
3000-4999 miles
(4800-7999 km)
Maximum load or towing
Extreme hot or cold operation
Normal Maintenance Intervals
At every oil change interval as indicated by the information display
*
Change engine oil and filter.
**
Rotate the tires.
Perform a multi-point inspection (recommended).
Inspect the automatic transmission fluid level. Consult your dealer for requirements.
Inspect the brake pads, rotors, hoses and parking brake.
Inspect the engine cooling system strength and hoses.
Inspect the exhaust system and heat shields.
Inspect the rear axle and U-joints (AWD only).
Inspect the half-shaft boots.
Inspect the steering linkage, ball joints, suspension, tire-rod ends, driveshaft and U-
joints.
314
Police Interceptor (CPH), enUSA, Edition date: 10/2015, First Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
At every oil change interval as indicated by the information display
*
Inspect the tires, tire wear and measure the tread depth.
Inspect the wheels and related components for abnormal noise, wear, looseness or
drag.
*
Do not exceed one year or 10000 miles (16000 kilometers) between service intervals.
**
Reset the Intelligent Oil-Life Monitor after engine oil and filter changes. See Engine
Oil Check (page 175).
Other maintenance items
1
Replace cabin air filter.Every 20000 miles (32000
km)
Replace engine air filter.Every 30000 miles (48000
km)
Change engine coolant.
2
At 100000 miles (160000
km)
Replace spark plugs.
Every 100000 miles
(160000 km)
Inspect accessory drive belt(s).
3
Change automatic transmission fluid.
Every 150000 miles
(240000 km)
Replace accessory drive belt(s).
4
1
Perform these maintenance items within 3000 miles (4800 kilometers) of the last
engine oil and filter change. Do not exceed the designated distance for the interval.
2
Initial replacement at six years or 100000 miles (160000 kilometers), then every three
years or 50000 miles (80000 kilometers).
3
After initial inspection, inspect every other oil change until replaced.
4
If not replaced within the last 100000 miles (160000 kilometers).
315
Police Interceptor (CPH), enUSA, Edition date: 10/2015, First Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
SPECIAL OPERATING
CONDITIONS SCHEDULED
MAINTENANCE
If you operate your vehicle primarily in any
of the following conditions, you need to
perform extra maintenance as indicated.
If you operate your vehicle occasionally
under any of these conditions, it is not
necessary to perform the extra
maintenance. For specific
recommendations, see your dealership
service advisor or technician.
Perform the services shown in the
following tables when specified or within
3000 miles (4800 kilometers) of the
message appearing in your information
display prompting you to change your oil.
• Example 1: The message comes on at
28751 miles (46270 kilometers).
Perform the 30000-mile
(48000-kilometer) automatic
transmission fluid replacement.
• Example 2: The message has not
come on, but the odometer reads
30000 miles (48000 kilometers) (for
example, the Intelligent Oil-Life
Monitor was reset at 25000 miles
[40000 kilometers]). Perform the
engine air filter replacement.
Towing a trailer or using a car-top carrier
Change engine oil and filter as indicated by the information
display and perform services listed in the Normal Sched-
uled Maintenance chart.
As required
Inspect U-joints.Inspect frequently, service
as required
Change automatic transmission fluid.Every 30000 miles (48000
km)
Change PTU and rear axle fluid (AWD only). See axle and
PTU maintenance items under Exceptions.
Replace spark plugs.Every 60000 miles (96000
km)
Extensive idling or low-speed driving for long distances, as in heavy commercial use
Change engine oil and filter as indicated by the information
display and perform services listed in the Normal Sched-
uled Maintenance chart.
As required
Replace cabin air filter.Inspect frequently, service
as required
Replace engine air filter.
316
Police Interceptor (CPH), enUSA, Edition date: 10/2015, First Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
Extensive idling or low-speed driving for long distances, as in heavy commercial use
Change automatic transmission fluid.Every 30000 miles (48000
km)
Change PTU and rear axle fluid (AWD only). See axle and
PTU maintenance items under Exceptions.
Replace spark plugs.Every 60000 miles (96000
km)
Operating in dusty or sandy conditions (such as unpaved or dusty roads)
Replace cabin air filter.Inspect frequently, service
as required
Replace engine air filter.
Inspect the wheels and related components for abnormal
noise, wear, looseness or drag.
Every 5000 miles (8000
km)
Rotate tires, inspect tires for wear and measure tread
depth.
Change engine oil and filter.
*
Every 5000 miles (8000
km) or six months
Perform multi-point inspection.
Change automatic transmission fluid.Every 30000 miles (48000
km)
Change PTU and rear axle fluid (AWD only). See axle and
PTU maintenance items under Exceptions.
*
Reset your Intelligent Oil-Life Monitor after engine oil and filter changes. See Engine
Oil Check (page 175).
Exclusive use of E85 (flex fuel vehicles only)
If ran exclusively on E85, fill the fuel tank full with regular
unleaded fuel.
Every oil change
317
Police Interceptor (CPH), enUSA, Edition date: 10/2015, First Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
Police vehicles equipped with an engine idle hour meter
Replace cabin air filter.Inspect frequently, service
as required
Inspect the brake systemEvery 5000 miles (8000
km)
Lubricate control arm and steering ball joints (if equipped
with grease fittings).
Rotate tires, inspect tires for wear and measure tread
depth.
Change engine oil and filter.
*
Every 5000 miles (8000
km) or six months or as
indicated by time/milage
calculation (see description
below)
Perform multi-point inspection.
Change automatic transmission fluid.Every 30000 miles (48000
km)
Replace spark plugs.Every 60000 miles (96000
km)
*
Reset your Intelligent Oil-Life Monitor after engine oil and filter changes. See Engine
Oil Check (page 175).
Engine Idle Hour Meter
Your vehicle may been fitted with an idle
meter to indicate how much time the
vehicle has been sitting in park (P) or
neutral (N). The meter is incorporated with
the vehicle odometer. Depressing the
odometer-reset button once displays the
trip odometer (miles [kilometers]
following by a "T" for trip odometer);
depressing the odometer-reset button a
second time displays the idle meter (hours
following by an "H" for hours). The idle
meter only accumulates time when the
vehicle is in park (P) or neutral (N).
Displayed time is cumulative for the vehicle
and cannot be reset to zero. Police vehicles
often experience long periods of idling,
during which engine oil continues to break
down but distance is not accumulated on
the odometer.
Engine idle hour meter calculation:
Idle hours x 33 = miles (kilometers)
equivalency
Miles (kilometers) driven + miles
(kilometers) equivalency = oil change
interval
318
Police Interceptor (CPH), enUSA, Edition date: 10/2015, First Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
Example: When the odometer has
accumulated 3000 miles (4800
kilometers) and the idle meter shows 61
hours, a 5000 mile (8000 kilometer) oil
change interval has been reached: 3000
road miles (4800 road kilometers) + (61
idle hours x 33 miles [53 km]/idle hour) =
5013 miles (8067 kilometers).
Exceptions
There are several exceptions to the Normal
Schedule:
Axle and PTU maintenance: The Power
Transfer Unit (PTU) and rear axle (AWD
only) in your vehicle does not require any
normal scheduled maintenance. Vehicles
are electronically monitored and notify the
driver required service by displaying a
message in the information display. The
PTU lube will be more likely to require a
fluid change if the vehicle has experienced
extended periods of extreme/severe duty
cycle driving. Changing or checking the PTU
lubricant is not necessary unless the unit
has been submerged in water, shows signs
of leakage or a message indicating required
service is displayed. Contact your
authorized dealer for service.
California fuel filter replacement: If you
register your vehicle in California, the
California Air Resources Board has
determined that the failure to perform this
maintenance item does not nullify the
emission warranty or limit recall liability
before the completion of your vehicle's
useful life. Ford Motor Company, however,
urges you to have all recommended
maintenance services performed at the
specified intervals and to record all vehicle
service.
Hot climate oil change intervals:
Vehicles operating in the Middle East,
North Africa, Sub-Saharan Africa or
locations with similar climates using an
American Petroleum Institute (API)
Certified for Gasoline Engines (Certification
mark) oil of SM or SN quality, the normal
oil change interval is 5000 miles (8000
kilometers).
If the available API SM or SN oils are not
available, then the oil change interval is
3000 miles (4800 kilometers).
Engine air filter and cabin air filter
replacement: The life of the engine air
filter and cabin air filter is dependent on
exposure to dusty and dirty conditions.
Vehicles operated in these conditions
require frequent inspection and
replacement of the engine air filter and
cabin air filter.
319
Police Interceptor (CPH), enUSA, Edition date: 10/2015, First Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE RECORD
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
320
Police Interceptor (CPH), enUSA, Edition date: 10/2015, First Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
321
Police Interceptor (CPH), enUSA, Edition date: 10/2015, First Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
322
Police Interceptor (CPH), enUSA, Edition date: 10/2015, First Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
323
Police Interceptor (CPH), enUSA, Edition date: 10/2015, First Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
324
Police Interceptor (CPH), enUSA, Edition date: 10/2015, First Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
325
Police Interceptor (CPH), enUSA, Edition date: 10/2015, First Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
326
Police Interceptor (CPH), enUSA, Edition date: 10/2015, First Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
327
Police Interceptor (CPH), enUSA, Edition date: 10/2015, First Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
328
Police Interceptor (CPH), enUSA, Edition date: 10/2015, First Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
329
Police Interceptor (CPH), enUSA, Edition date: 10/2015, First Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
END USER LICENSE
AGREEMENT
VEHICLE SOFTWARE END USER
LICENSE AGREEMENT (EULA)
• You (“You” or “Your” as applicable)
have acquired a vehicle having several
devices, including SYNC ® and various
control modules, ("DEVICES") that
include software licensed or owned by
Ford Motor Company and its affiliates
("FORD MOTOR COMPANY"). Those
software products of FORD MOTOR
COMPANY origin, as well as associated
media, printed materials, and "online"
or electronic documentation
("SOFTWARE") are protected by
international intellectual property laws
and treaties. The SOFTWARE is
licensed, not sold. All rights reserved.
• The SOFTWARE may interface with
and/or communicate with, or may be
later upgraded to interface with and/or
communicate with additional software
and/or systems provided by FORD
MOTOR COMPANY.
IF YOU DO NOT AGREE TO THIS END
USER LICENSE AGREEMENT ("EULA")
DO NOT USE THE DEVICES OR COPY
THE SOFTWARE. ANY USE OF THE
SOFTWARE, INCLUDING BUT NOT
LIMITED TO USE ON THE DEVICES,
WILL CONSTITUTE YOUR AGREEMENT
TO THIS EULA (OR RATIFICATION OF
ANY PREVIOUS CONSENT).
GRANT OF SOFTWARE LICENSE: This
EULA grants you the following license:
• You may use the SOFTWARE as
installed on the DEVICES and as
otherwise interfacing with systems
and/or services provide by or through
FORD MOTOR COMPANY or its third
party software and service providers.
Description of Other Rights and
Limitations
• Speech Recognition: If the
SOFTWARE includes speech
recognition component(s), you should
understand that speech recognition is
an inherently statistical process and
that recognition errors are inherent in
the process. Neither FORD MOTOR
COMPANY nor its suppliers shall be
liable for any damages arising out of
errors in the speech recognition
process. It is your responsibility to
monitor any speech recognition
functions included in the system.
• Limitations on Reverse Engineering,
Decompilation and Disassembly:
You may not reverse engineer,
decompile, translate, disassemble or
attempt to discover any source code
or underlying ideas or algorithms of the
SOFTWARE nor permit others to
reverse engineer, decompile or
disassemble the SOFTWARE, except
and only to the extent that such activity
is expressly permitted by applicable
law notwithstanding this limitation or
to the extent as may be permitted by
the licensing terms governing use of
any open source components included
with the SOFTWARE.
• Limitations on Distributing,
Copying, Modifying and Creating
Derivative Works: You may not
distribute, copy, make modifications
to or create derivative works based on
the SOFTWARE, except and only to the
extent that such activity is expressly
permitted by applicable law
notwithstanding this limitation or to
the extent as may be permitted by the
licensing terms governing use of any
open source components included with
the SOFTWARE.
330
Police Interceptor (CPH), enUSA, Edition date: 10/2015, First Printing
Appendices
• Single EULA: The end user
documentation for the DEVICES and
related systems and services may
contain multiple EULAs, such as
multiple translations and/or multiple
media versions (e.g., in the user
documentation and in the software).
Even if you receive multiple EULAs, you
are licensed to use only one (1) copy of
the SOFTWARE.
• SOFTWARE Transfer: You may
permanently transfer your rights under
this EULA only as part of a sale or
transfer of the DEVICES, provided you
retain no copies, you transfer all of the
SOFTWARE (including all component
parts, the media and printed materials,
any upgrades, and, if applicable, the
Certificate(s) of Authenticity), and the
recipient agrees to the terms of this
EULA. If the SOFTWARE is an upgrade,
any transfer must include all prior
versions of the SOFTWARE.
• Termination: Without prejudice to any
other rights, FORD MOTOR COMPANY
may terminate this EULA if you fail to
comply with the terms and conditions
of this EULA.
• Internet-Based Services
Components: The SOFTWARE may
contain components that enable and
facilitate the use of certain
Internet-based services. You
acknowledge and agree that FORD
MOTOR COMPANY, third party
software and service suppliers, its
affiliates and/or its designated agent
may automatically check the version
of the SOFTWARE and/or its
components that you are utilizing and
may provide upgrades or supplements
to the SOFTWARE that may be
automatically downloaded to your
DEVICES.
• Additional Software/Services: The
SOFTWARE may permit FORD MOTOR
COMPANY, third party software and
service suppliers, its affiliates and/or
its designated agent to provide or make
available to you SOFTWARE updates,
supplements, add-on components, or
Internet-based services components
of the SOFTWARE after the date you
obtain your initial copy of the
SOFTWARE ("Supplemental
Components".) SOFTWARE updates
may cause you to incur additional
charges from your wireless service
provider. If FORD MOTOR COMPANY
or third party software and services
suppliers provide or make available to
you Supplemental Components and
no other EULA terms are provided
along with the Supplemental
Components, then the terms of this
EULA shall apply. FORD MOTOR
COMPANY, its affiliates and/or its
designated agent reserve the right to
discontinue without liability any
Internet-based services provided to
you or made available to you through
the use of the SOFTWARE.
331
Police Interceptor (CPH), enUSA, Edition date: 10/2015, First Printing
Appendices
• Links to Third Party Sites: The
SOFTWARE may provide you with the
ability to link to third party sites. The
third party sites are not under the
control of FORD MOTOR COMPANY,
its affiliates and/or its designated
agent. Neither FORD MOTOR
COMPANY nor its affiliates nor its
designated agent are responsible for
(i) the contents of any third party sites,
any links contained in third party sites,
or any changes or updates to third
party sites, or (ii) webcasting or any
other form of transmission received
from any third party sites. If the
SOFTWARE provides links to third
party sites, those links are provided to
you only as a convenience, and the
inclusion of any link does not imply an
endorsement of the third party site by
FORD MOTOR COMPANY, its affiliates
and/or its designated agent.
• Obligation to Drive Responsibly:
You recognize your obligation to drive
responsibly and keep attention on the
road. You will read and abide with the
DEVICES operating instructions
particularly as they pertain to safety
and you agree to assume any risk
associated with the use of the
DEVICES.
UPGRADES AND RECOVERY MEDIA:
If the SOFTWARE is provided by FORD
MOTOR COMPANY separate from the
DEVICES on media such as a ROM chip,
CD ROM disk(s) or via web download or
other means, and is labeled "For Upgrade
Purposes Only" or "For Recovery Purposes
Only" you may install one (1) copy of such
SOFTWARE onto the DEVICES as a
replacement copy for the existing
SOFTWARE, and use it in accordance with
this EULA, including any additional EULA
terms accompanying the upgrade
SOFTWARE.
INTELLECTUAL PROPERTY RIGHTS:
All title and intellectual property rights in
and to the SOFTWARE (including but not
limited to any images, photographs,
animations, video, audio, music, text and
"applets" incorporated into the
SOFTWARE), the accompanying printed
materials, and any copies of the
SOFTWARE, are owned by FORD MOTOR
COMPANY, or its affiliates or suppliers. The
SOFTWARE is licensed, not sold. You may
not copy the printed materials
accompanying the SOFTWARE. All title
and intellectual property rights in and to
the content which may be accessed
through use of the SOFTWARE is the
property of the respective content owner
and may be protected by applicable
copyright or other intellectual property
laws and treaties. This EULA grants you no
rights to use such content outside its
intended use. All rights not specifically
granted under this EULA are reserved by
FORD MOTOR COMPANY, its affiliates,
and third party software and service
providers and suppliers. Use of any on-line
services which may be accessed through
the SOFTWARE may be governed by the
respective terms of use relating to such
services. If this SOFTWARE contains
documentation that is provided only in
electronic form, you may print one copy of
such electronic documentation.
EXPORT RESTRICTIONS: You
acknowledge that the SOFTWARE is
subject to U.S. and European Union export
jurisdiction. You agree to comply with all
applicable international and national laws
that apply to the SOFTWARE, including
the U.S. Export Administration Regulations,
as well as end-user, end-use and
destination restrictions issued by U.S. and
other governments.
332
Police Interceptor (CPH), enUSA, Edition date: 10/2015, First Printing
Appendices
TRADEMARKS: This EULA does not grant
you any rights in connection with any
trademarks or service marks of FORD
MOTOR COMPANY, its affiliates, and third
party software and service providers.
PRODUCT SUPPORT: Please refer to
FORD MOTOR COMPANY instructions
provided in the documentation for the
DEVICES product support, such as the
vehicle owner guide.
Should you have any questions concerning
this EULA, or if you desire to contact FORD
MOTOR COMPANY for any other reason,
please refer to the address provided in the
documentation for the DEVICES.
No Liability for Certain Damages:
EXCEPT AS PROHIBITED BY LAW, FORD
MOTOR COMPANY, ANY THIRD PARTY
SOFTWARE OR SERVICES SUPPLIERS,
AND THEIR AFFILIATES SHALL HAVE NO
LIABILITY FOR ANY INDIRECT, SPECIAL,
CONSEQUENTIAL OR INCIDENTAL
DAMAGES ARISING FROM OR IN
CONNECTION WITH THE USE OR
PERFORMANCE OF THE SOFTWARE. THIS
LIMITATION SHALL APPLY EVEN IF ANY
REMEDY FAILS OF ITS ESSENTIAL
PURPOSE. THERE ARE NO WARRANTIES
OTHER THAN THOSE THAT MAY BE
EXPRESSLY PROVIDED FOR YOUR NEW
VEHICLE.
SYNC® Automotive Important Safety
Information Read and follow
instructions:
• Before using your SYNC® system, read
and follow all instructions and safety
information provided in this end user
manual ("Owner Guide".) Not
following precautions found in the
Owner Guide can lead to an accident
or other serious injuries.
General Operation
• Voice Command Control: Certain
functions within the SYNC® system
may be accomplished using voice
commands. Using voice commands
while driving helps you to operate the
system without removing your hands
from the wheel or eyes from the road.
• Prolonged Views of Screen: Do not
access any function requiring a
prolonged view of the screen while you
are driving. Pull over in a safe and legal
manner before attempting to access a
function of the system requiring
prolonged attention.
• Volume Setting: Do not raise the
volume excessively. Keep the volume
at a level where you can still hear
outside traffic and emergency signals
while driving. Driving while unable to
hear these sounds could cause an
accident.
• Navigation Features: Any navigation
features included in the system are
intended to provide turn by turn
instructions to get you to a desired
destination. Please make certain all
persons using this system carefully
read and follow instructions and safety
information fully.
• Distraction Hazard: Any navigation
features may require manual
(non-verbal) setup. Attempting to
perform such set-up or insert data
while driving can distract your attention
and could cause an accident or other
serious injury. Stop the vehicle in a safe
and legal manner before attempting
these operations.
• Let Your Judgment Prevail: Any
navigation features are provided only
as an aid. Make your driving decisions
based on your observations of local
conditions and existing traffic
regulations. Any such feature is not a
333
Police Interceptor (CPH), enUSA, Edition date: 10/2015, First Printing
Appendices
substitute for your personal judgment.
Any route suggestions made by this
system should never replace any local
traffic regulations or your personal
judgment or knowledge of safe driving
practices.
• Route Safety: Do not follow the route
suggestions if doing so would result in
an unsafe or illegal maneuver, if you
would be placed in an unsafe situation,
or if you would be directed into an area
that you consider unsafe. The driver is
ultimately responsible for the safe
operation of the vehicle and therefore,
must evaluate whether it is safe to
follow the suggested directions.
• Potential Map Inaccuracy: Maps
used by this system may be inaccurate
because of changes in roads, traffic
controls or driving conditions. Always
use good judgment and common sense
when following the suggested routes.
• Emergency Services: Do not rely on
any navigation features included in the
system to route you to emergency
services. Ask local authorities or an
emergency services operator for these
locations. Not all emergency services
such as police, fire stations, hospitals
and clinics are likely to be contained in
the map database for such navigation
features.
Your Responsibilities and Assumptions of
Risk
• You agree to each of the following:(a)
Any use of the SOFTWARE while
driving an automobile or other vehicle
in violation of applicable law or
otherwise driving in an unsafe manner
presents a significant risk of distracted
driving and should not be attempted
under any circumstances;(b) Use of
the SOFTWARE at excessive volume
poses a significant risk of hearing
damage and should not be attempted
under any circumstances;(c) The
SOFTWARE may not be compatible
with new or different versions of an
operating system, third party software,
or third party services, and the
SOFTWARE may potentially cause a
critical failure of an operating system,
third party software, or third party
service.(d) Any third party service
accessed by or third party software
used with the SOFTWARE (i) may
charge an additional fee for access, (ii)
may not work correctly, on an
uninterrupted basis, or error free, (iii)
may change streaming formats or
discontinue operation, (iv) may contain
adult, profane or offensive content; and
(v) may contain inaccurate, false or
misleading traffic, weather, financial
or safety information or other content;
and (e) Use of the SOFTWARE may
cause you to incur additional charges
from your wireless service provider
(WSP) and any data or minute
calculators that may be included in the
software program are for reference
only, are not warranted in any way and
should not be relied upon in anyway.
• When using the SOFTWARE, you agree
to be responsible for and assume the
entire risk to the items set forth in
Section (a) – (e) above.
334
Police Interceptor (CPH), enUSA, Edition date: 10/2015, First Printing
Appendices
Disclaimer of Warranty
YOU EXPRESSLY ACKNOWLEDGE AND
AGREE THAT USE OF THE DEVICES AND
SOFTWARE IS AT YOUR SOLE RISK AND
THAT THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO
SATISFACTORY QUALITY,
PERFORMANCE, COMPATIBILITY,
ACCURACY AND EFFORT IS WITH YOU.
TO THE MAXIMUM EXTENT PERMITTED
BY APPLICABLE LAW, THE SOFTWARE
AND ANY THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE OR
THIRD-PARTY SERVICES ARE PROVIDED
"AS IS" AND “AS AVAILABLE”, WITH ALL
FAULTS AND WITHOUT WARRANTY OF
ANY KIND, AND FORD MOTOR COMPANY
HEREBY DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES
AND CONDITIONS WITH RESPECT TO
THE SOFTWARE, THIRD PARTY
SOFTWARE, AND THIRD-PARTY
SERVICES, EITHER EXPRESS, IMPLIED OR
STATUTORY, INCLUDING, BUT NOT
LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES
AND/OR CONDITIONS OF
MERCHANTABILITY, OF SATISFACTORY
QUALITY, OF FITNESS FOR AN
ARTICULAR PURPOSE, OF ACCURACY,
OF QUIET ENJOYMENT, AND
NON-INFRINGEMENT OF THIRD-PARTY
RIGHTS. FORD MOTOR COMPANY DOES
NOT WARRANT (a) AGAINST
INTERFERENCE WITH YOUR ENJOYMENT
OF THE SOFTWARE, THIRD PARTY
SOFTWARE, OR THIRD-PARTY SERVICES,
(b) THAT THE SOFTWARE, THIRD PARTY
SOFTWARE, OR THIRD-PARTY SERVICES
WILL MEET YOUR REQUIREMENTS, (c)
THAT THE OPERATION OF THE
SOFTWARE, THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE,
OR THIRD-PARTY SERVICES WILL BE
UNINTERRUPTED OR ERROR-FREE, (d)
OR THAT DEFECTS IN THE SOFTWARE,
THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE, OR
THIRD-PARTY SERVICES WILL BE
CORRECTED. NO ORAL OR WRITTEN
INFORMATION OR ADVICE GIVEN BY
FORD MOTOR COMPANY OR ITS
AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE SHALL
CREATE A WARRANTY. SHOULD THE
SOFTWARE, THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE,
OR THIRD-PARTY SERVICES PROVE
DEFECTIVE, YOU ASSUME THE ENTIRE
COST OF ALL NECESSARY SERVICING,
REPAIR OR CORRECTION. SOME
JURISDICTIONS DO NOT ALLOW THE
DISCLAIMER OF IMPLIED WARRANTIES
OR LIMITATIONS ON APPLICABLE
STATUTORY RIGHTS OF A CONSUMER,
SO THE ABOVE DISCLAIMER MAY NOT
FULLY APPLY TO YOU. THE SOLE
WARRANTY PROVIDED BY FORD MOTOR
COMPANY SHALL BE FOUND IN THE
WARRANTY INFORMATION INCLUDING
WITH YOUR OWNER GUIDE. TO THE
EXTENT THAT THERE IS ANY CONFLICT
BETWEEN THE TERMS OF THIS SECTION
AND THE WARRANTY BOOKLET, THE
WARRANTY BOOKLET SHALL CONTROL.
Applicable Law, Venue, Jurisdiction
• The laws of the State of Michigan
govern this EULA and Your use of the
SOFTWARE. Your use of the
SOFTWARE may also be subject to
other local, state, national, or
international laws. Any litigation arising
out of or related to this EULA shall be
brought and maintained exclusively in
a court of the State of Michigan
located in Wayne County or in the
United States District Court for the
Eastern District of Michigan. You hereby
consent to submit to the personal
jurisdiction of a court in the State of
Michigan located in Wayne County and
the United States District Court for the
Eastern District of Michigan for any
dispute arising out of or relating to this
EULA.
335
Police Interceptor (CPH), enUSA, Edition date: 10/2015, First Printing
Appendices
Binding Arbitration and Class Action
Waiver
(a) Application. This Section applies to
any dispute EXCEPT IT DOES NOT
INCLUDE A DISPUTE RELATING TO
COPYRIGHT INFRINGEMENT, OR TO THE
ENFORCEMENT OR VALIDITY OF YOUR,
FORD MOTOR COMPANY, OR ANY OF
FORD MOTOR COMPANY’S LICENSORS’
INTELLECTUAL PROPERTY RIGHTS.
Dispute means any dispute, action, or other
controversy between You and FORD
MOTOR COMPANY, other than the
exceptions listed above, concerning the
SOFTWARE (including its price) or this
EULA, whether in contract, warranty, tort,
statute, regulation, ordinance, or any other
legal or equitable basis.
(b) Notice of Dispute. In the event of a
Dispute, You or FORD MOTOR COMPANY
must give the other a “Notice of Dispute”,
which is a written statement of the name,
address, and contact information of the
party giving it, the facts giving rise to the
dispute, and the relief requested. You and
FORD MOTOR COMPANY will attempt to
resolve any dispute through informal
negotiation within 60 days from the date
the Notice of Dispute is sent. After 60 days,
You or FORD MOTOR COMPANY may
commence arbitration.
(c) Small claims court. You may also
litigate any dispute in small claims court
in your county of residence or FORD
MOTOR COMPANY’S principal place of
business, if the dispute meets all
requirements to be heard in the small
claims court. You may litigate in small
claims court whether or not You
negotiated informally first.
(d) Binding arbitration. If You and FORD
MOTOR COMPANY, do not resolve any
dispute by informal negotiation or in small
claims court, any other effort to resolve
the dispute will be conducted exclusively
by binding arbitration. You are giving up
the right to litigate (or participate in as a
party or class member) all disputes in court
before a judge or jury. Instead, all disputes
will be resolved before a neutral arbitrator,
whose decision will be final except for a
limited right of appeal under the Federal
Arbitration Act. Any court with jurisdiction
over the parties may enforce the
arbitrator’s award.
(e) Class action waiver. Any proceedings
to resolve or litigate any dispute in any
forum will be conducted solely on an
individual basis. Neither you nor FORD
MOTOR COMPANY, will seek to have any
dispute heard as a class action, as a private
attorney general action, or in any other
proceeding in which any party acts or
proposes to act in a representative
capacity. No arbitration or proceeding will
be combined with another without the
prior written consent of all parties to all
affected arbitrations or proceedings.
(f) Arbitration procedure. Any
arbitration will be conducted by the
American Arbitration Association (the
“AAA”), under its Commercial Arbitration
Rules. If You are an individual and use the
SOFTWARE for personal or vehicle use, or
if the value of the dispute is $75,000 or
less whether or not You are an individual
or how You use the SOFTWARE, the AAA
Supplementary Procedures for
Consumer-Related Disputes will also
apply. To commence arbitration, submit a
Commercial Arbitration Rules Demand for
Arbitration form to the AAA. You may
request a telephonic or in-person hearing
by following the AAA rules. In a dispute
involving $10,000 or less, any hearing will
be telephonic unless the arbitrator finds
good cause to hold an in-person hearing
instead. For more information, see adr.org
or call 1-800-778-7879. You agree to
commence arbitration only in your county
of residence or FORD MOTOR COMPANY’S
principal place of business. The arbitrator
336
Police Interceptor (CPH), enUSA, Edition date: 10/2015, First Printing
Appendices
may award the same damages to You
individually as a court could. The arbitrator
may award declaratory or injunctive relief
only to You individually, and only to the
extent required to satisfy Your individual
claim. Arbitration fees and incentives.
• i. Disputes involving $75,000 or less.
FORD MOTOR COMPANY will
promptly reimburse your filing fees and
pay the AAA’s and arbitrator’s fees and
expenses. If you reject FORD MOTOR
COMPANY’S last written settlement
offer made before the arbitrator was
appointed (“last written offer”), your
dispute goes all the way to an
arbitrator’s decision (called an
“award”), and the arbitrator awards
you more than the last written offer,
FORD MOTOR COMPANY will give you
three incentives: (1) pay the greater of
the award or $1,000; (2) pay twice your
reasonable attorney’s fees, if any; and
(3) reimburse any expenses (including
expert witness fees and costs) that
your attorney reasonably accrues for
investigating, preparing, and pursuing
your claim in arbitration. The arbitrator
will determine the amounts.
• ii. Disputes involving more than
$75,000. The AAA rules will govern
payment of filing fees and the AAA’s
and arbitrator’s fees and expenses.
• iii. Disputes involving any amount. In
any arbitration you commence, FORD
MOTOR COMPANY will seek its AAA
or arbitrator’s fees and expenses, or
Your filing fees it reimbursed, only if the
arbitrator finds the arbitration frivolous
or brought for an improper purpose. In
any arbitration FORD MOTOR
COMPANY commences, it will pay all
filing, AAA, and arbitrator’s fees and
expenses. It will not seek its attorney’s
fees or expenses from you in any
arbitration. Fees and expenses are not
counted in determining how much a
dispute involves.
(h) Claims or disputes must be filed
within one year. To the extent permitted
by law, any claim or dispute under this
EULA to which this Section applies must
be filed within one year in small claims
court (Section c) or in arbitration (Section
d). The one-year period begins when the
claim or dispute first could be filed. If such
a claim or dispute is not filed within one
year, it is permanently barred.
(i) Severability. If the class action waiver
(Section e) is found to be illegal or
unenforceable as to all or some parts of a
dispute, then that portion of Section e will
not apply to those parts. Instead, those
parts will be severed and proceed in a court
of law, with the remaining parts proceeding
in arbitration. If any other provision of that
portion Section e is found to be illegal or
unenforceable, that provision will be
severed with the remainder of Section e
remaining in full force and effect.
Telenav Software End User License
Agreement
Please read these terms and conditions
carefully before you use the TeleNav
Software. Your use of the TeleNav
Software indicates that you accept these
terms and conditions. If you do not accept
these terms and conditions, do not break
the seal of the package, launch, or
otherwise use the TeleNav Software.
TeleNav may revise this Agreement and
the privacy policy at any time, with or
http://www.telenav.com from time to time
to review the then current version of this
Agreement and of the privacy policy.
1. Safe and Lawful Use
You acknowledge that devoting attention
to the TeleNav Software may pose a risk
of injury or death to you and others in
situations that otherwise require your
undivided attention, and you therefore
agree to comply with the following when
using the TeleNav Software:
337
Police Interceptor (CPH), enUSA, Edition date: 10/2015, First Printing
Appendices
(a) observe all traffic laws and otherwise
drive safely;
(b) use your own personal judgment while
driving. If you feel that a route suggested
by the TeleNav Software instructs you to
perform an unsafe or illegal maneuver,
places you in an unsafe situation, or directs
you into an area that you consider to be
unsafe, do not follow such instructions;
(c) do not input destinations, or otherwise
manipulate the TeleNav Software, unless
your vehicle is stationary and parked;
(d) do not use the TeleNav Software for
any illegal, unauthorized, unintended,
unsafe, hazardous, or unlawful purposes,
or in any manner inconsistent with this
Agreement;
(e) arrange all GPS and wireless devices
and cables necessary for use of the
TeleNav Software in a secure manner in
your vehicle so that they will not interfere
with your driving and will not prevent the
operation of any safety device (such as an
airbag).
You agree to indemnify and hold TeleNav
harmless against all claims resulting from
any dangerous or otherwise inappropriate
use of the TeleNav Software in any moving
vehicle, including as a result of your failure
to comply with the directions above.
2. Account Information
You agree: (a) when registering the
TeleNav Software, to provide TeleNav with
true, accurate, current, and complete
information about yourself, and (b) to
inform TeleNav promptly of any changes
to such information, and to keep it true,
accurate, current and complete.
3. Software License
• Subject to your compliance with the
terms of this Agreement, TeleNav
hereby grants to you a personal,
non-exclusive, non-transferable license
(except as expressly permitted below
in connection with your permanent
transfer of the TeleNav Software
license), without the right to
sublicense, to use the TeleNav
Software (in object code form only) in
order to access and use the TeleNav
Software. This license shall terminate
upon any termination or expiration of
this Agreement. You agree that you will
use the TeleNav Software only for your
personal business or leisure purposes,
and not to provide commercial
navigation services to other parties.
3.1 License Limitations
• (a) reverse engineer, decompile,
disassemble, translate, modify, alter
or otherwise change the TeleNav
Software or any part thereof; (b)
attempt to derive the source code,
audio library or structure of the
TeleNav Software without the prior
express written consent of TeleNav;
(c) remove from the TeleNav
Software, or alter, any of TeleNav's or
its suppliers' trademarks, trade names,
logos, patent or copyright notices, or
other notices or markings; (d)
distribute, sublicense or otherwise
transfer the TeleNav Software to
others, except as part of your
permanent transfer of the TeleNav
Software; or (e) use the TeleNav
Software in any manner that
i. infringes the intellectual property or
proprietary rights, rights of publicity or
privacy or other rights of any party,
338
Police Interceptor (CPH), enUSA, Edition date: 10/2015, First Printing
Appendices
ii. violates any law, statute, ordinance or
regulation, including but not limited to laws
and regulations related to spamming,
privacy, consumer and child protection,
obscenity or defamation, or
iii. is harmful, threatening, abusive,
harassing, tortuous, defamatory, vulgar,
obscene, libelous, or otherwise
objectionable; and (f) lease, rent out, or
otherwise permit unauthorized access by
third parties to the TeleNav Software
without advanced written permission of
TeleNav.
4. Disclaimers
• To the fullest extent permissible
pursuant to applicable law, in no event
will TeleNav, its licensors and suppliers,
or agents or employees of any of the
foregoing, be liable for any decision
made or action taken by you or anyone
else in reliance on the information
provided by the TeleNav Software.
TeleNav also does not warrant the
accuracy of the map or other data used
for the TeleNav Software. Such data
may not always reflect reality due to,
among other things, road closures,
construction, weather, new roads and
other changing conditions. You are
responsible for the entire risk arising
out of your use of the TeleNav
Software. For example but without
limitation, you agree not to rely on the
TeleNav Software for critical
navigation in areas where the
well-being or survival of you or others
is dependent on the accuracy of
navigation, as the maps or functionality
of the TeleNav Software are not
intended to support such high risk
applications, especially in more remote
geographical areas.
• TELENAV EXPRESSLY DISCLAIMS
AND EXCLUDES ALL WARRANTIES IN
CONNECTION WITH THE TELENAV
SOFTWARE, WHETHER STATUTORY,
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING ALL
WARRANTIES WHICH MAY ARISE
FROM COURSE OF DEALING, CUSTOM
OR TRADE AND INCLUDING, BUT NOT
LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED
WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY,
FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
PURPOSE AND NON-INFRINGEMENT
OF THIRD PARTY RIGHTS WITH
RESPECT TO THE TELENAV
SOFTWARE.
• Certain jurisdictions do not permit the
disclaimer of certain warranties, so this
limitation may not apply to you.
5. Limitation of Liability
• TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED UNDER
APPLICABLE LAW, UNDER NO
CIRCUMSTANCES SHALL TELENAV
OR ITS LICENSORS AND SUPPLIERS
BE LIABLE TO YOU OR TO ANY THIRD
PARTY FOR ANY INDIRECT,
INCIDENTAL, CONSEQUENTIAL,
SPECIAL OR EXEMPLARY DAMAGES
(INCLUDING IN EACH CASE, BUT NOT
LIMITED TO, DAMAGES FOR THE
INABILITY TO USE THE EQUIPMENT
OR ACCESS DATA, LOSS OF DATA,
LOSS OF BUSINESS, LOSS OF
PROFITS, BUSINESS INTERRUPTION
OR THE LIKE) ARISING OUT OF THE
USE OF OR INABILITY TO USE THE
TELENAV SOFTWARE, EVEN IF
TELENAV HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE
POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES.
NOTWITHSTANDING ANY DAMAGES
THAT YOU MIGHT INCUR FOR ANY
339
Police Interceptor (CPH), enUSA, Edition date: 10/2015, First Printing
Appendices
REASON WHATSOEVER (INCLUDING,
WITHOUT LIMITATION, ALL DAMAGES
REFERENCED HEREIN AND ALL
DIRECT OR GENERAL DAMAGES IN
CONTRACT, TORT (INCLUDING
NEGLIGENCE) OR OTHERWISE), THE
ENTIRE LIABILITY OF TELENAV AND
OF ALL OF TELENAV'S SUPPLIERS
SHALL BE LIMITED TO THE AMOUNT
ACTUALLY PAID BY YOU FOR THE
TELENAV SOFTWARE. SOME STATES
AND/OR JURISDICTIONS DO NOT
ALLOW THE EXCLUSION OR
LIMITATION OF INCIDENTAL OR
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, SO THE
ABOVE LIMITATIONS OR EXCLUSIONS
MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU.
6. Arbitration and Governing Law
• You agree that any dispute, claim or
controversy arising out of or relating to
this Agreement or the TeleNav
Software shall be settled by
independent arbitration involving a
neutral arbitrator and administered by
the American Arbitration Association
in the County of Santa Clara, California.
The arbitrator shall apply the
Commercial Arbitration Rules of the
American Arbitration Association, and
the judgment upon the award rendered
by the arbitrator may be entered by any
court having jurisdiction. Note that
there is no judge or jury in an arbitration
proceeding and the decision of the
arbitrator shall be binding upon both
parties. You expressly agree to waive
your right to a jury trial. This Agreement
and performance hereunder will be
governed by and construed in
accordance with the laws of the State
of California, without giving effect to
its conflict of law provisions. To the
extent judicial action is necessary in
connection with the binding arbitration,
both TeleNav and you agree to submit
to the exclusive jurisdiction of the
courts of the County of Santa Clara,
California. The United Nations
Convention on Contracts for the
International Sale of Goods shall not
apply.
7. Assignment
• You may not resell, assign, or transfer
this Agreement or any of your rights or
obligations, except in totality, in
connection with your permanent
transfer of the TeleNav Software, and
expressly conditioned upon the new
user of the TeleNav Software agreeing
to be bound by the terms and
conditions of this Agreement. Any such
sale, assignment or transfer that is not
expressly permitted under this
paragraph will result in immediate
termination of this Agreement, without
liability to TeleNav, in which case you
and all other parties shall immediately
cease all use of the TeleNav Software.
Notwithstanding the foregoing,
TeleNav may assign this Agreement to
any other party at any time without
notice, provided the assignee remains
bound by this Agreement.
8. Miscellaneous
8.1
This Agreement constitutes the entire
agreement between TeleNav and you with
respect to the subject matter hereof.
8.2
Except for the limited licenses expressly
granted in this Agreement, TeleNav retains
all right, title and interest in and to the
TeleNav Software, including without
limitation all related intellectual property
rights. No licenses or other rights which are
not expressly granted in this Agreement
are intended to, or shall be, granted or
340
Police Interceptor (CPH), enUSA, Edition date: 10/2015, First Printing
Appendices
conferred by implication, statute,
inducement, estoppel or otherwise, and
TeleNav and its suppliers and licensors
hereby reserve all of their respective rights
other than the licenses explicitly granted
in this Agreement.
8.3
By using the TeleNav Software, you
consent to receive from TeleNav all
communications, including notices,
agreements, legally required disclosures
or other information in connection with the
TeleNav Software (collectively, "Notices")
electronically. TeleNav may provide such
Notices by posting them on TeleNav's
Website or by downloading such Notices
to your wireless device. If you desire to
withdraw your consent to receive Notices
electronically, you must discontinue your
use of the TeleNav Software.
8.4
TeleNav's or your failure to require
performance of any provision shall not
affect that party's right to require
performance at any time thereafter, nor
shall a waiver of any breach or default of
this Agreement constitute a waiver of any
subsequent breach or default or a waiver
of the provision itself.
8.5
If any provision herein is held
unenforceable, then such provision will be
modified to reflect the intention of the
parties, and the remaining provisions of
this Agreement will remain in full force and
effect.
8.6
The headings in this Agreement are for
convenience of reference only, will not be
deemed to be a part of this Agreement,
and will not be referred to in connection
with the construction or interpretation of
this Agreement. As used in this Agreement,
the words "include" and "including" and
variations thereof, will not be deemed to
be terms of limitation, but rather will be
deemed to be followed by the words
"without limitation".
9. Other Vendors Terms and Conditions
• The Telenav Software utilizes map and
other data licensed to Telenav by third
party vendors for the benefit of you and
other end users. This Agreement
includes end-user terms applicable to
these companies (included at the end
of this Agreement), and thus your use
of the Telenav Software is also subject
to such terms. You agree to comply
with the following additional terms and
conditions, which are applicable to
Telenav’s third party vendor licensors::
9.1 End User Terms Required by HERE
North America, LLC
The data (“Data”) is provided for your
personal, internal use only and not for
resale. It is protected by copyright, and is
subject to the following terms and
conditions which are agreed to by you, on
the one hand, and Telenav (“Telenav”) and
its licensors (including their licensors and
suppliers) on the other hand.
© 2013 HERE. All rights reserved.
The Data for areas of Canada includes
information taken with permission from
Canadian authorities, including: © Her
Majesty the Queen in Right of Canada, ©
Queen's Printer for Ontario, © Canada Post
Corporation, GeoBase®, © Department of
Natural Resources Canada.
341
Police Interceptor (CPH), enUSA, Edition date: 10/2015, First Printing
Appendices
HERE holds a non-exclusive license from
the United States Postal Service® to
publish and sell ZIP+4® information.
©United States Postal Service® 2014.
Prices are not established, controlled or
approved by the United States Postal
Service®. The following trademarks and
registrations are owned by the USPS:
United States Postal Service, USPS, and
ZIP+4
The Data for Mexico includes certain data
from Instituto Nacional de Estadística y
Geografía.
Terms and Conditions
Permitted Use. You agree to use this Data
together with the Telenav Software solely
for the internal business and personal
purposes for which you were licensed, and
not for service bureau, time-sharing or
other similar purposes. Accordingly, but
subject to the restrictions set forth in the
following paragraphs, you agree not to
otherwise reproduce, copy, modify,
decompile, disassemble, create any
derivative works of, or reverse engineer any
portion of this Data, and may not transfer
or distribute it in any form, for any purpose,
except to the extent permitted by
mandatory laws.
Restrictions. Except where you have been
specifically licensed to do so by Telenav,
and without limiting the preceding
paragraph, you may not use this Data (a)
with any products, systems, or applications
installed or otherwise connected to or in
communication with vehicles, capable of
vehicle navigation, positioning, dispatch,
real time route guidance, fleet
management or similar applications; or (b)
with or in communication with any
positioning devices or any mobile or
wireless-connected electronic or computer
devices, including without limitation
cellular phones, palmtop and handheld
computers, pagers, and personal digital
assistants or PDAs.
Warning. The Data may contain
inaccurate or incomplete information due
to the passage of time, changing
circumstances, sources used and the
nature of collecting comprehensive
geographic data, any of which may lead to
incorrect results.
No Warranty. This Data is provided to you
“as is,” and you agree to use it at your own
risk. Telenav and its licensors (and their
licensors and suppliers) make no
guarantees, representations or warranties
of any kind, express or implied, arising by
law or otherwise, including but not limited
to, content, quality, accuracy,
completeness, effectiveness, reliability,
fitness for a particular purpose, usefulness,
use or results to be obtained from this
Data, or that the Data or server will be
uninterrupted or error-free.
Disclaimer of Warranty: TELENAV AND
ITS LICENSORS (INCLUDING THEIR
LICENSORS AND SUPPLIERS) DISCLAIM
ANY WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED,
OF QUALITY, PERFORMANCE,
MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE OR
NON-INFRINGEMENT. Some States,
Territories and Countries do not allow
certain warranty exclusions, so to that
extent the above exclusion may not apply
to you.
Disclaimer of Liability: TELENAV AND
ITS LICENSORS (INCLUDING THEIR
LICENSORS AND SUPPLIERS) SHALL NOT
BE LIABLE TO YOU: IN RESPECT OF ANY
CLAIM, DEMAND OR ACTION,
IRRESPECTIVE OF THE NATURE OF THE
CAUSE OF THE CLAIM, DEMAND OR
ACTION ALLEGING ANY LOSS, INJURY OR
342
Police Interceptor (CPH), enUSA, Edition date: 10/2015, First Printing
Appendices
DAMAGES, DIRECT OR INDIRECT, WHICH
MAY RESULT FROM THE USE OR
POSSESSION OF THE INFORMATION; OR
FOR ANY LOSS OF PROFIT, REVENUE,
CONTRACTS OR SAVINGS, OR ANY
OTHER DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL,
SPECIAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES
ARISING OUT OF YOUR USE OF OR
INABILITY TO USE THIS INFORMATION,
ANY DEFECT IN THE INFORMATION, OR
THE BREACH OF THESE TERMS OR
CONDITIONS, WHETHER IN AN ACTION
IN CONTRACT OR TORT OR BASED ON A
WARRANTY, EVEN IF TELENAV OR ITS
LICENSORS HAVE BEEN ADVISED OF THE
POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. Some
States, Territories and Countries do not
allow certain liability exclusions or
damages limitations, so to that extent the
above may not apply to you.
Export Control. You shall not export from
anywhere any part of the Data or any direct
product thereof except in compliance with,
and with all licenses and approvals
required under, applicable export laws,
rules and regulations, including but not
limited to the laws, rules and regulations
administered by the Office of Foreign
Assets Control of the U.S. Department of
Commerce and the Bureau of Industry and
Security of the U.S. Department of
Commerce. To the extent that any such
export laws, rules or regulations prohibit
HERE from complying with any of its
obligations hereunder to deliver or
distribute Data, such failure shall be
excused and shall not constitute a breach
of this Agreement.
Entire Agreement. These terms and
conditions constitute the entire agreement
between Telenav (and its licensors,
including their licensors and suppliers) and
you pertaining to the subject matter hereof,
and supersedes in their entirety any and
all written or oral agreements previously
existing between us with respect to such
subject matter.
Governing Law. The above terms and
conditions shall be governed by the laws
of the State of Illinois [insert “Netherlands”
where European HERE Data is used],
without giving effect to (i) its conflict of
laws provisions, or (ii) the United Nations
Convention for Contracts for the
International Sale of Goods, which is
explicitly excluded. You agree to submit to
the jurisdiction of the State of Illinois
[insert “The Netherlands” where European
HERE Data is used] for any and all
disputes, claims and actions arising from
or in connection with the Data provided to
you hereunder.
Government End Users. If the Data is
being acquired by or on behalf of the
United States government or any other
entity seeking or applying rights similar to
those customarily claimed by the United
States government, this Data is a
“commercial item” as that term is defined
at 48 C.F.R. (“FAR”) 2.101, is licensed in
accordance with these End-User Terms,
and each copy of Data delivered or
otherwise furnished shall be marked and
embedded as appropriate with the
following “Notice of Use,” and shall be
treated in accordance with such Notice:
NOTICE OF USE
CONTRACTOR (MANUFACTURER/
SUPPLIER) NAME: HERE
CONTRACTOR (MANUFACTURER/
SUPPLIER) ADDRESS: c/o Nokia, 425
West Randolph Street, Chicago, Illinois
60606
This Data is a commercial item as
defined in FAR 2.101 and is subject to
these End-User Terms under which this
Data was provided.
© 1987 – 2014 HERE – All rights reserved.
343
Police Interceptor (CPH), enUSA, Edition date: 10/2015, First Printing
Appendices
If the Contracting Officer, federal
government agency, or any federal official
refuses to use the legend provided herein,
the Contracting Officer, federal
government agency, or any federal official
must notify HERE prior to seeking
additional or alternative rights in the Data.
Gracenote® Copyright
CD and music-related data from
Gracenote, Inc., copyright©
2000-2007 Gracenote. Gracenote
Software, copyright © 2000-2007
Gracenote. This product and service may
practice one or more of the following U.S.
Patents 5,987,525; 6,061,680; 6,154,773;
6,161,132; 6,230,192; 6,230,207; 6.240,459;
6,330,593 and other patents issued or
pending. Some services supplied under
license from Open Globe, Inc. for U.S.
Patent 6,304,523.
Gracenote and CDDB are registered
trademarks of Gracenote. The Gracenote
logo and logotype, and the "Powered by
Gracenote™" logo are trademarks of
Gracenote.
Gracenote® End User License Agreement
(EULA)
This device contains software from
Gracenote, Inc. of 2000 Powell Street
Emeryville, California 94608
("Gracenote").
The software from Gracenote (the
"Gracenote Software") enables this device
to do disc and music file identification and
obtain music-related information, including
name, artist, track, and title information
("Gracenote Data") from online servers
("Gracenote Servers"), and to perform
other functions. You may use Gracenote
Data only by means of the intended End
User functions of this device. This device
may contain content belonging to
Gracenote's providers. If so, all of the
restrictions set forth herein with respect to
Gracenote Data shall also apply to such
content and such content providers shall
be entitled to all of the benefits and
protections set forth herein that are
available to Gracenote. You agree that you
will use the content from Gracenote
("Gracenote Content") , Gracenote Data,
the Gracenote Software, and Gracenote
Servers for your own personal,
non-commercial use only. You agree not
to assign, copy, transfer or transmit the
Gracenote Content, Gracenote Software
or any Gracenote Data (except in a Tag
associated with a music file) to any third
party. YOU AGREE NOT TO USE OR
EXPLOIT GRACENOTE CONTENT,
GRACENOTE DATA, THE GRACENOTE
SOFTWARE, OR GRACENOTE SERVERS,
EXCEPT AS EXPRESSLY PERMITTED
HEREIN.
You agree that your non-exclusive licenses
to use the Gracenote Content, Gracenote
Data, the Gracenote Software, and
Gracenote Servers will terminate if you
violate these restrictions. If your licenses
terminate, you agree to cease any and all
use of the Gracenote Content, Gracenote
Data, the Gracenote Software, and
Gracenote Servers.
Gracenote, respectively, reserve all rights
in Gracenote Data, the Gracenote
Software, and the Gracenote Servers and
Gracenote Content, including all ownership
rights. Under no circumstances will either
Gracenote become liable for any payment
to you for any information that you provide,
including any copyrighted material or
music file information. You agree that
Gracenote may enforce its respective
rights, collectively or separately, under this
agreement against you, directly in each
company's own name.
344
Police Interceptor (CPH), enUSA, Edition date: 10/2015, First Printing
Appendices
Gracenote uses a unique identifier to track
queries for statistical purposes. The
purpose of a randomly assigned numeric
identifier is to allow Gracenote to count
queries without knowing anything about
who you are. For more information, see the
web page at www.gracenote.com for the
Gracenote Privacy Policy.
THE GRACENOTE SOFTWARE, EACH ITEM
OF GRACENOTE DATA AND THE
GRACENOTE CONTENT ARE LICENSED
TO YOU "AS IS". NEITHER GRACENOTE
MAKES ANY REPRESENTATIONS OR
WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED,
REGARDING THE ACCURACY OF ANY
GRACENOTE DATA FROM THE
GRACENOTE SERVERS OR GRACENOTE
CONTENT. GRACENOTE COLLECTIVELY
AND SEPARATELY RESERVE THE RIGHT
TO DELETE DATA AND/OR CONTENT
FROM THE COMPANIES' RESPECTIVE
SERVERS OR, IN THE CASE OF
GRACENOTE, CHANGE DATA
CATEGORIES FOR ANY CAUSE THAT
GRACENOTE DEEMS SUFFICIENT. NO
WARRANTY IS MADE THAT EITHER
GRACENOTE CONTENT OR THE
GRACENOTE SOFTWARE OR
GRACENOTE SERVERS ARE ERROR-FREE
OR THAT THE FUNCTIONING OF THE
GRACENOTE SOFTWARE OR
GRACENOTE SERVERS WILL BE
UNINTERRUPTED. GRACENOTE IS NOT
OBLIGATED TO PROVIDE YOU WITH ANY
ENHANCED OR ADDITIONAL DATA TYPES
THAT GRACENOTE MAY CHOOSE TO
PROVIDE IN THE FUTURE AND IS FREE
TO DISCONTINUE ITS ONLINE SERVICES
AT ANY TIME. GRACENOTE DISCLAIM ALL
WARRANTIES EXPRESS OR IMPLIED,
INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE, TITLE, AND
NON-INFRINGEMENT. NEITHER
GRACENOTE WARRANTS THE RESULTS
THAT WILL BE OBTAINED BY YOUR USE
OF THE GRACENOTE SOFTWARE OR ANY
GRACENOTE SERVER. IN NO CASE WILL
GRACENOTE BE LIABLE FOR ANY
CONSEQUENTIAL OR INCIDENTAL
DAMAGES OR FOR ANY LOST PROFITS
OR LOST REVENUES FOR ANY REASON
WHATSOEVER. © Gracenote 2007.
FCC ID: ACJ-SYNCG3-L
IC: 216B-SYNCG3-L
This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC Rules and with RSS-210 of Industry
Canada. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions:
(1) This device may not cause harmful
interference, and
(2) this device must accept any
interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired
operation.
WARNING
Changes or modifications not
expressively approved by the party
responsible for compliance could
void the user's authority to operate the
equipment. The term "IC" before the radio
certification number only signifies that
Industry Canada technical specifications
were met.
The antenna used for this transmitter must
not be co-located or operating in
conjunction with any other antenna or
transmitter.
345
Police Interceptor (CPH), enUSA, Edition date: 10/2015, First Printing
Appendices
346
Police Interceptor (CPH), enUSA, Edition date: 10/2015, First Printing
A
A/C
See: Climate Control...........................................79
About This Manual...........................................7
ABS
See: Brakes.............................................................112
ABS driving hints
See: Hints on Driving With Anti-Lock
Brakes..................................................................112
Accessories
See: Replacement Parts
Recommendation.............................................11
Adjusting the Headlamps..........................187
Horizontal Aim Adjustment...........................188
Vertical Aim Adjustment..................................187
Adjusting the Pedals.....................................55
Adjusting the Steering Wheel....................53
Airbag Disposal...............................................45
Air Conditioning
See: Climate Control...........................................79
Air Filter
See: Changing the Engine Air Filter..............192
Alarm
See: Anti-Theft Alarm........................................52
All-Wheel Drive.............................................105
Anti-Theft Alarm............................................52
Alarm System........................................................52
Arming the Alarm.................................................52
Disarming the Alarm...........................................52
Triggering the Alarm............................................52
Appendices....................................................330
Audible Warnings and Indicators.............69
Headlamps On Warning Chime.....................69
Key in Ignition Warning Chime........................69
Parking Brake On Warning Chime.................69
Audio Control...................................................53
Audio Input Jack...........................................259
Audio System................................................254
General Information.........................................254
Audio Unit - Vehicles With: AM/FM/CD/
SYNC/Satellite Radio.............................255
Menu Structure...................................................257
Automatic Transmission...........................102
Automatic Transmission Adaptive
Learning............................................................104
Brake-Shift Interlock.........................................102
If Your Vehicle Gets Stuck In Mud or
Snow..................................................................104
Understanding the Positions of Your
Automatic Transmission.............................102
Automatic Transmission Fluid Check -
2.0L EcoBoost™.......................................180
6F35 Transmission............................................180
Automatic Transmission Fluid Check -
3.5L Duratec/3.5L Ecoboost™/
3.7L.................................................................180
6F50/6F55 Transmission...............................180
Auxiliary Power Points..................................87
12 Volt DC Power Point.......................................87
Locations.................................................................87
AWD
See: All-Wheel Drive.........................................105
B
Battery
See: Changing the 12V Battery......................185
Blind Spot Information System...............123
Switching the System Off and On................125
System Errors.......................................................124
Using the System................................................123
Bonnet Lock
See: Opening and Closing the Hood...........170
Booster Seats..................................................22
Types of Booster Seats......................................23
Brake Fluid Check.........................................184
Brakes.................................................................112
General Information............................................112
Breaking-In......................................................144
Bulb Specification Chart...........................190
C
Cabin Air Filter.................................................82
California Proposition 65..............................11
Capacities and Specifications - 2.0L
EcoBoost™.................................................238
Specifications.....................................................238
347
Police Interceptor (CPH), enUSA, Edition date: 10/2015, First Printing
Index
Capacities and Specifications - 3.5L
Duratec..........................................................241
Specifications......................................................242
Capacities and Specifications - 3.5L
Ecoboost™.................................................245
Specifications.....................................................246
Capacities and Specifications -
3.7L.................................................................249
Specifications.....................................................250
Capacities and Specifications................229
Car Wash
See: Cleaning the Exterior...............................193
Center Console...............................................88
Console Mounting Plates..................................88
Universal Top Tray...............................................88
Changing a Bulb...........................................189
Front Fog Lamp..................................................189
High-Intensity Discharge Headlamps........189
LED Lamps...........................................................189
License Plate Lamp...........................................189
Changing a Fuse...........................................168
Fuses.......................................................................168
Changing a Road Wheel...........................224
Dissimilar Spare Wheel and Tire Assembly
Information......................................................224
Tire Change Procedure....................................225
Changing the 12V Battery..........................185
Battery Management System.......................186
Changing the Engine Air Filter.................192
Changing the Wiper Blades......................187
Checking the Wiper Blades.......................187
Child Restraint and Seatbelt
Maintenance.................................................32
Child Restraint Positioning.........................24
Child Safety.......................................................15
General Information.............................................15
Cleaning Leather Seats..............................197
Cleaning Products........................................193
Cleaning the Alloy Wheels........................197
Cleaning the Engine.....................................195
Cleaning the Exterior...................................193
Exterior Chrome Parts......................................194
Exterior Plastic Parts.........................................194
Stripes or Graphics............................................194
Underbody............................................................194
Cleaning the Instrument Panel and
Instrument Cluster Lens.........................196
Cleaning the Interior....................................196
Cleaning the Windows and Wiper
Blades............................................................195
Climate Control...............................................79
Coolant Check
See: Engine Coolant Check.............................176
Crash Sensors and Airbag Indicator.........41
Airbags and Police Equipment........................42
Cross Traffic Alert.........................................125
False Alerts...........................................................128
Switching the System Off and On...............128
System Errors.......................................................128
System Lights, Messages and Audible
Alerts...................................................................127
System Limitations.............................................127
Using the System................................................125
Cruise Control..................................................54
Principle of Operation........................................121
Cruise control
See: Using Cruise Control.................................121
Customer Assistance..................................152
D
Data Recording..................................................9
Event Data Recording...........................................9
Service Data Recording........................................9
Daytime Running Lamps............................58
Direction Indicators.......................................59
Driver and Passenger Airbags....................35
Children and Airbags...........................................35
Proper Driver and Front Passenger Seating
Adjustment........................................................35
Driving Aids......................................................123
Driving Hints...................................................144
Driving Through Water................................145
DRL
See: Daytime Running Lamps.........................58
E
Economical Driving......................................144
Emission Control System...........................99
On-Board Diagnostics (OBD-II)...................100
Readiness for Inspection and Maintenance
(I/M) Testing...................................................100
End User License Agreement.................330
VEHICLE SOFTWARE END USER LICENSE
AGREEMENT (EULA) .................................330
348
Police Interceptor (CPH), enUSA, Edition date: 10/2015, First Printing
Index
Engine Block Heater.......................................91
Using the Engine Block Heater........................92
Engine Coolant Check.................................176
Adding Engine Coolant......................................177
Checking the Engine Coolant..........................177
Recycled Engine Coolant.................................178
Severe Climates..................................................178
What You Should Know About Fail-Safe
Cooling...............................................................178
Engine Oil Check...........................................175
Adding Engine Oil................................................175
Engine Oil Dipstick - 2.0L
EcoBoost™..................................................175
Engine Oil Dipstick - 3.5L Duratec/3.5L
Ecoboost™/3.7L.........................................175
Engine Specifications - 2.0L
EcoBoost™.................................................229
Drivebelt Routing...............................................229
Engine Specifications - 3.5L
Duratec.........................................................229
Drivebelt Routing...............................................230
Engine Specifications - 3.5L
Ecoboost™.................................................230
Drivebelt Routing...............................................230
Engine Specifications - 3.7L......................231
Drivebelt Routing................................................231
Environment......................................................14
Essential Towing Checks...........................140
Before Towing a Trailer......................................141
Hitches...................................................................140
Launching or Retrieving a Boat or Personal
Watercraft (PWC)..........................................141
Safety Chains.......................................................140
Trailer Brakes.......................................................140
Trailer Lamps.......................................................140
When Towing a Trailer.......................................141
Event Data Recording
See: Data Recording..............................................9
Export Unique Options..................................13
Extended Service Plan (ESP).................308
EXTENDED SERVICE PLAN (CANADA
ONLY)...............................................................309
EXTENDED SERVICE PLAN (U.S.
Only).................................................................308
Exterior Mirrors................................................62
Blind Spot Information System......................63
Fold-Away Exterior Mirrors...............................62
Heated Exterior Mirrors .....................................62
Integrated Blind Spot Mirror.............................62
Power Exterior Mirrors........................................62
F
Fastening the Seatbelts...............................27
Safety Belt Extension Assembly....................29
Safety Belt Locking Modes...............................28
Using Safety Belts During Pregnancy...........27
Flat Tire Inflation
See: Tire Sealant and Inflator Kit................200
Floor Mats........................................................145
Foot Pedals
See: Adjusting the Pedals.................................55
Ford Credit..........................................................11
(U.S. Only).................................................................11
Front Passenger Sensing System............36
Fuel and Refueling.........................................93
Fuel Consumption.........................................98
Calculating Fuel Economy...............................98
Filling the Tank......................................................98
Fuel Filler Funnel Location.........................95
Fuel Filter.........................................................185
Fuel Quality - E85..........................................94
Choosing the Right Fuel - Flex Fuel
Vehicles...............................................................94
Fuel Quality - Gasoline................................94
Choosing the Right Fuel....................................94
Fuel Shutoff...................................................148
Fuses.................................................................159
Fuse Specification Chart...........................159
Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel........164
Power Distribution Box.....................................159
G
Gauges...............................................................65
Fuel Gauge..............................................................65
Information Display.............................................65
Speedometer.........................................................65
General Information on Radio
Frequencies...................................................46
349
Police Interceptor (CPH), enUSA, Edition date: 10/2015, First Printing
Index
General Maintenance Information........310
Multi-Point Inspection......................................312
Owner Checks and Services............................311
Protecting Your Investment............................310
Why Maintain Your Vehicle?..........................310
Why Maintain Your Vehicle at Your
Dealership?......................................................310
Getting Assistance Outside the U.S. and
Canada..........................................................155
Getting the Services You Need................152
Away From Home...............................................152
H
Handbrake
See: Parking Brake...............................................113
Hazard Warning Flashers..........................148
Headlamp Adjusting
See: Adjusting the Headlamps......................187
Head Restraints..............................................83
Adjusting the Head Restraint..........................84
Tilting Head Restraints .....................................84
Heated Windows and Mirrors.....................81
Heated Exterior Mirror.........................................81
Heated Rear Window..........................................81
Heating
See: Climate Control...........................................79
Hints on Controlling the Interior
Climate...........................................................80
Cooling the Interior Quickly.............................80
General Hints........................................................80
Heating the Interior Quickly.............................80
Maximum Cooling Performance in
Instrument Panel or Instrument Panel
and Footwell Positions..................................81
Recommended Settings for Cooling ............81
Recommended Settings for Heating...........80
Side Window Defogging in Cold
Weather...............................................................81
Vehicle Stationary for Extended Periods
During Extreme High Ambient
Temperatures....................................................81
Hints on Driving With Anti-Lock
Brakes..............................................................112
Hood Lock
See: Opening and Closing the Hood...........170
I
Ignition Switch................................................89
In California (U.S. Only)..............................153
Information Display Control.......................54
Information Displays.....................................70
General Information............................................70
Information Messages..................................73
AdvanceTrac™......................................................73
Alarm.........................................................................73
AWD...........................................................................74
Battery and Charging System..........................74
Blind Spot Information and Cross Traffic
Alert System......................................................75
Brake System.........................................................75
Doors and Locks....................................................75
Fuel............................................................................76
Maintenance..........................................................76
Park Aid....................................................................76
Power Steering.......................................................77
Reminder Messages.............................................77
Seats..........................................................................77
Tire Pressure Monitoring System...................78
Traction Control....................................................78
Installing Child Restraints............................16
Child Seats...............................................................16
Using Lap and Shoulder Belts..........................17
Using Lower Anchors and Tethers for
CHildren (LATCH)............................................19
Using Tether Straps..............................................21
Instrument Cluster........................................65
Instrument Lighting Dimmer.....................58
Interior Lamps.................................................59
Dome Task Lamp.................................................60
Front Map Lamps.................................................59
Interior Luggage Compartment
Release...........................................................50
Interior Mirror...................................................63
Auto-Dimming Mirror..........................................63
Introduction.........................................................7
J
Jump Starting the Vehicle.........................149
Connecting the Jumper Cables.....................149
Jump Starting......................................................150
Preparing Your Vehicle.....................................149
Removing the Jumper Cables........................150
350
Police Interceptor (CPH), enUSA, Edition date: 10/2015, First Printing
Index
K
Keys and Remote Controls........................46
L
Lighting Control...............................................57
Headlamp Flasher...............................................58
High Beams.............................................................57
Spot Lamp Control..............................................58
Lighting...............................................................57
General Information............................................57
Load Carrying.................................................130
Load Limit.......................................................130
Special Loading Instructions for Owners of
Pick-up Trucks and Utility-type
Vehicles..............................................................137
Vehicle Loading - with and without a
Trailer.................................................................130
Locking and Unlocking................................48
Battery Saver.........................................................49
Hidden Rear Door Locks....................................48
Illuminated Entry..................................................49
Illuminated Exit.....................................................49
Locking and Unlocking the Doors with the
Key Blade...........................................................49
Opening a Rear Door From the Inside..........49
Opening the Luggage Compartment...........50
Power Door Locks................................................48
Remote Control....................................................48
Locks...................................................................48
Lug Nuts
See: Changing a Road Wheel........................224
M
Maintenance...................................................170
General Information..........................................170
Manual Climate Control..............................79
Manual Seats..................................................85
Lumbar Adjustment...........................................86
Moving the Seat Backward and
Forward...............................................................85
Recline Adjustment.............................................85
Media Hub......................................................260
Message Center
See: Information Displays.................................70
Mirrors
See: Heated Windows and Mirrors.................81
See: Windows and Mirrors.................................61
Mobile Communications Equipment.......13
Motorcraft Parts - 2.0L
EcoBoost™..................................................231
Motorcraft Parts - 3.5L Duratec.............233
Motorcraft Parts - 3.5L
Ecoboost™.................................................234
Motorcraft Parts - 3.7L...............................235
N
Normal Scheduled Maintenance............313
Intelligent Oil-Life Monitor™..........................313
Normal Maintenance Intervals......................314
O
Oil Change Indicator Reset........................176
Oil Check
See: Engine Oil Check........................................175
Opening and Closing the Hood...............170
Closing the Hood..................................................171
Opening the Hood..............................................170
Ordering Additional Owner's
Literature......................................................156
Obtaining a French Owner’s Manual...........157
Overhead Console.........................................88
P
Parking Aids......................................................117
Principle of Operation........................................117
Parking Brake..................................................113
Pedals.................................................................55
Perchlorate.........................................................11
Personal Safety System™..........................33
How Does the Personal Safety System
Work?...................................................................33
Power Door Locks
See: Locking and Unlocking.............................48
Power Seats.....................................................86
Power Steering Fluid Check.....................184
351
Police Interceptor (CPH), enUSA, Edition date: 10/2015, First Printing
Index
Power Windows...............................................61
Accessory Delay.....................................................61
Bounce-Back..........................................................61
One-Touch Down..................................................61
One-Touch Up........................................................61
Window Lock..........................................................61
Protecting the Environment........................14
R
Rear Loadspace Hatches..........................130
Cargo Vault...........................................................130
Electronic Utility Tray........................................130
Rear Parking Aid.............................................117
Rear Under Floor Storage..........................130
Load Floor.............................................................130
Load Safe Label..................................................130
Rear View Camera........................................118
Using the Rear View Camera System..........119
Rear View Camera
See: Rear View Camera.....................................118
Recommended Towing Weights............139
Refueling...........................................................96
Remote Control..............................................46
Car Finder................................................................47
Changing the Remote Control Battery........46
Sounding the Panic Alarm................................47
Repairing Minor Paint Damage................197
Replacement Parts
Recommendation.........................................11
Collision Repairs.....................................................11
Scheduled Maintenance and Mechanical
Repairs...................................................................11
Warranty on Replacement Parts.....................12
Replacing a Lost Key or Remote
Control.............................................................47
Reporting Safety Defects (Canada
Only)...............................................................157
Reporting Safety Defects (U.S.
Only)...............................................................157
Roadside Assistance...................................147
Vehicles Sold in Canada: Getting Roadside
Assistance.........................................................147
Vehicles Sold in Canada: Roadside
Assistance Program Coverage.................148
Vehicles Sold in Canada: Using Roadside
Assistance........................................................148
Vehicles Sold in the United States: Getting
Roadside Assistance.....................................147
Vehicles Sold in the United States: Using
Roadside Assistance.....................................147
Roadside Emergencies...............................147
Running-In
See: Breaking-In..................................................144
Running Out of Fuel......................................95
Adding Fuel From a Portable Fuel
Container............................................................95
Filling a Portable Fuel Container....................95
S
Safety Canopy™............................................39
Safety Precautions........................................93
Scheduled Maintenance Record...........320
Scheduled Maintenance...........................310
Seatbelt Reminder........................................30
Belt-Minder™........................................................30
Seatbelts...........................................................26
Principle of Operation........................................26
Seatbelt Warning Lamp and Indicator
Chime..............................................................29
Conditions of operation.....................................30
Seats...................................................................83
Security..............................................................52
Side Airbags.....................................................38
Sitting in the Correct Position...................83
Snow Chains
See: Using Snow Chains.................................220
Special Notices................................................12
My Fleet Management........................................12
New Vehicle Limited Warranty.........................12
On-board Diagnostics (OBD-II).......................12
Special Instructions..............................................12
Special Operating Conditions Scheduled
Maintenance...............................................316
Engine Idle Hour Meter.....................................318
Exceptions.............................................................319
352
Police Interceptor (CPH), enUSA, Edition date: 10/2015, First Printing
Index
Speed Control
See: Cruise Control..............................................121
Stability Control.............................................115
Principle of Operation........................................115
Starter Switch
See: Ignition Switch............................................89
Starting a Gasoline Engine.........................89
Cold Weather Starting - Flex Fuel
Vehicles..............................................................90
Failure to Start......................................................90
Guarding Against Exhaust Fumes..................91
Important Ventilating Information.................91
Stopping the Engine When Your Vehicle is
Moving..................................................................91
Stopping the Engine When Your Vehicle is
Stationary...........................................................91
Starting and Stopping the Engine...........89
General Information...........................................89
Steering............................................................128
Electric Power Steering....................................128
Steering Wheel................................................53
Storage Compartments..............................88
Sun Visors.........................................................64
Slide-on-rod..........................................................64
Supplementary Restraints System.........34
Principle of Operation........................................34
Symbols Glossary.............................................7
SYNC™ Applications and Services.......279
911 Assist...............................................................279
SYNC Services: Traffic, Directions &
Information (TDI) (If Equipped, United
States Only)....................................................283
Vehicle Health Report (If Equipped, United
States Only).....................................................281
SYNC™ AppLink™......................................287
SYNC Mobile Apps............................................287
SYNC™.............................................................261
General Information..........................................261
SYNC™ Troubleshooting.........................299
T
Technical Specifications
See: Capacities and Specifications............229
The Better Business Bureau (BBB) Auto
Line Program (U.S. Only)........................154
Tire Care.........................................................206
Glossary of Tire Terminology.........................207
Information About Uniform Tire Quality
Grading.............................................................206
Information Contained on the Tire
Sidewall...........................................................208
Police Wheels and Tires...................................219
Temperature A B C............................................207
Traction AA A B C...............................................207
Treadwear............................................................206
Tire Inflation When Punctured
See: Tire Sealant and Inflator Kit................200
Tire Pressure Monitoring System...........220
Changing Tires With a Tire Pressure
Monitoring System........................................221
Understanding Your Tire Pressure
Monitoring System .......................................222
Tire Repair Kit
See: Tire Sealant and Inflator Kit................200
Tire Sealant and Inflator Kit....................200
First Stage: Reinflating the Tire with Sealing
Compound and Air.......................................202
General Information..........................................201
Second Stage: Checking Tire
Pressure...........................................................203
Tips for Use of the Kit.......................................201
What to do after the Tire has been
Sealed...............................................................204
What to do when a Tire Is Punctured........202
Tires
See: Wheels and Tires.....................................200
Towing a Trailer.............................................138
Load Placement..................................................138
Towing the Vehicle on Four
Wheels...........................................................142
Emergency Towing.............................................142
Recreational Towing..........................................143
Towing..............................................................138
Traction Control.............................................114
Principle of Operation........................................114
Transmission Code Designation.............237
Transmission..................................................102
Transmission
See: Transmission..............................................102
Transporting the Vehicle............................142
353
Police Interceptor (CPH), enUSA, Edition date: 10/2015, First Printing
Index
U
Under Hood Overview - 2.0L
EcoBoost™...................................................172
Under Hood Overview - 3.5L Duratec/
3.7L...................................................................174
Engine Shield........................................................175
Under Hood Overview - 3.5L
Ecoboost™...................................................173
USB Port.........................................................260
Using All-Wheel Drive................................105
Driving In Special Conditions With
All-Wheel Drive (AWD)...............................107
Operating AWD Vehicles With Mismatched
Tires.....................................................................107
Operating AWD Vehicles With Spare
Tires....................................................................106
Using Cruise Control.....................................121
Switching Cruise Control Off..........................122
Switching Cruise Control On............................121
Using Snow Chains.....................................220
Using Stability Control................................116
Using Summer Tires...................................220
Using SYNC™ With Your Media
Player............................................................289
Accessing Your Play Menu.............................294
Connecting Your Digital Media Player to the
USB Port..........................................................289
Media Menu Features.......................................292
Media Voice Commands..................................291
System Settings.................................................296
What's Playing?................................................290
Using SYNC™ With Your Phone............266
Accessing Features Through the Phone
Menu..................................................................270
Accessing Your Phone Settings....................275
Making a Call.......................................................269
Pairing a Cell Phone for the First
Time..................................................................266
Pairing Subsequent Cell Phones..................267
Phone Options during an Active Call.........269
Phone Voice Commands................................267
Receiving Calls...................................................269
System Settings.................................................276
Text Messaging...................................................273
Using Traction Control.................................114
Switching the System Off................................114
System Indicator Lights and
Messages...........................................................114
Using a Switch......................................................114
Using the Information Display
Controls..............................................................114
Using Voice Recognition...........................263
Initiating a Voice Session................................263
System Interaction and Feedback..............264
Utilizing the Mediation/Arbitration
Program (Canada Only).........................155
V
Vehicle Care....................................................193
General Information..........................................193
Vehicle Certification Label........................237
Vehicle Identification Number................236
Vehicle Storage.............................................198
Battery....................................................................199
Body........................................................................198
Brakes.....................................................................199
Cooling system....................................................199
Engine.....................................................................198
Fuel system..........................................................199
General...................................................................198
Miscellaneous......................................................199
Removing Vehicle From Storage..................199
Tires.........................................................................199
Ventilation
See: Climate Control...........................................79
VIN
See: Vehicle Identification Number............236
Voice Control....................................................53
354
Police Interceptor (CPH), enUSA, Edition date: 10/2015, First Printing
Index
W
Warning Lamps and Indicators................66
Airbag readiness...................................................66
Anti-Lock Braking System................................66
Brake System........................................................66
Charging System...................................................67
Cruise Control........................................................67
Direction Indicator................................................67
Door Ajar..................................................................67
Engine Coolant Temperature...........................67
Engine Oil.................................................................67
Fasten Seatbelt.....................................................67
High Beam...............................................................67
Low Fuel Level.......................................................67
Low Tire Pressure Warning..............................68
Low Washer Fluid................................................68
Parking Lamps......................................................68
Powertrain Fault...................................................68
Service Engine Soon...........................................68
Stability Control...................................................68
Stability Control Off............................................69
Washer Fluid Check.....................................184
Washers
See: Cleaning the Exterior...............................193
See: Wipers and Washers.................................56
Waxing..............................................................194
Wheel Nuts
See: Changing a Road Wheel........................224
Wheels and Tires........................................200
General Information.........................................200
Technical Specifications.................................228
Windows and Mirrors.....................................61
Windshield Washers.....................................56
Windshield Wipers........................................56
Speed Dependent Wipers................................56
Wiper Blades
See: Checking the Wiper Blades...................187
Wipers and Washers.....................................56
Wrecker Towing
See: Transporting the Vehicle........................142
355
Police Interceptor (CPH), enUSA, Edition date: 10/2015, First Printing
Index
